Home

SIGNAL2000 Tutorial/Reference Manual

1. SIGNAL2000 A 67 Reference Table A 3 continued All Commands Listed Alphabetically Command STARTUPI STOP ORAGE UBSYSTEM UMMARISE TIMINGS RUCKCOUNTS RUCKPERCEN PSTREAMVC TILIZATIONS HICLECOUNTS LADDITIONALS LFACTORS ES HS LLOWT IME Parameter Values 12 lt Startup Lost Time sec gt lt Program Name gt 12 lt Storage Distance feet gt 500 lt Node of Subsystem gt lt Seq Code gt lt Output NONE TIMINGS DIAGRAM gt lt Movement gt lt Time gt lt List of Counts gt 12 lt Truck Thru Bus Percentage gt 4 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt 12 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt lt Movement gt lt Time gt lt List of Counts gt lt Factor gt 12 lt Additional Volume gt lt Years gt 12 lt Count Adjustment Factor gt 12 lt Design Hour Volume veh hr gt 12 lt Lane Group Width ft gt Defaults 1242 0 12 0 500 0 1 TIMINGS 0 T2 2 0 4 0 0 12 0 0 0 140 12 0 1 12 1 00 12 0 12 0 0 lt Meth gt 8 lt Phase Yellow Time sec or sec sec gt P 8 0 0 SIGNAL2000 A 68 Reference APPENDIX B Detailed Description of Actions and Entries Appendix B Topics Appendix B provides detailed information on each SIGNAL2000 command and any associated parameter values The commands are listed in alphabetical order This
2. HHHHETTANAQQAQA SIGNAL2000 A 66 Reference Table A 3 continued All Commands Listed Alphabetically Command Parameter Values Defaults MAP MASTERNODE lt Master Node gt 0 ESSAGES lt Level 0 1 2 3 gt 3 TROAREA lt Location CBD NON CBD gt NON CBD UMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time sec gt 12 5 0 iS 12 lt 2 character Movement Label gt RT TH LT N E S W lt Dst gt lt Spd gt lt Node gt 4 lt Mov gt lt Asgn gt lt Crv gt 0 0 0 4 0 DN lt Page Advance NO YES gt YES 5 lt Next Line of File gt 5 0 500 lt Node in Optimization Order gt 500 0 lt X Coordinate gt lt Y Coordinate gt 0 0 lt Third Title Line gt blanks 12 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt 121100 lt Phase Offset sec or sec sec gt lt Phase gt 0 0 1 NONE OFFSTS SPLTS OFFS CYCLE LIST 15 lt Steps gt NONE 15 0 lt Prog gt lt Worksheets gt lt Msgs gt lt Design Eval gt S2K NO YES NO i 4 lt Rt Turn Overlap NO YES gt 4 YES INGSIDES 4 lt Location NONE RIGHT LEFT BOTH gt 4 NON KVOLUMES 4 lt Parking Volume manuv hr gt 4 20 HASSIGNMENT lt Path 1 5 gt lt Asg gt lt Node List 16 max gt HDISTRIBUTION lt Typ gt lt Distr gt lt Node gt lt Dir N E S W gt lt Desc gt 0 0 KHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt 12 0 90 DLEVELS 4 lt Pedestrian In
3. SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Capacity and LOS Worksheet Capacity N E S W Analysis RT TH L RT TH L RT TH LT RT H L Lane group LG RT CH LT RI TH LT RI TH LT RT TH LT Adj Flow v 194 611 139 539 72 483 164 239 500 244 Satflow s 1574 3539 1768 3473 1770 3454 1768 1583 3539 1770 ost time tL 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 Effect green g 30 5 14 2 5 5 12 s 0 L238 PACD Seo Wado A2 Or 123 Grn ratio g C 508 237 092 200 204 237 092 359 200 204 LG capacity c 799 837 163 694 362 817 164 568 707 362 v c ratio X 243 730 853 SETE 199 591 1 00 421 707 674 Flow ratio v s 123 173 079 155 041 140 093 151 141 138 Crit lane group z a y x Permitted Phases of Compound Left Turns Adj Flow v 0 58 Satflow s 519 409 ost time tL 0 0 Effect green g 18 2 18 2 Grn ratio g C 303 303 LG capacity c 157 124 v c ratio X 000 468 Flow ratio v s 000 142 Crit lane group Sum crit v s Yc 0 558 Total lost L 16 0 Crit v c Xc 762 Delay N E S W and LOS R H L RT CH L RT CH L R H L Lane group LG RT H LT RT TH LT RI TH LT RT CH LT Adj Flow v 194 611 139 539 72 483 222 239 500 244 LG capacity c 799 837 320 694 362 817 288 568 707 362 v c ratio xX 243 730 434 STAT og VID O91 we TTd 421 707 674 Grn ratio g C 508 z237 396 200 204 237 396 359 200 204 Unif delay dl 8 3 21 1 1255 22T 19 8 20 3 13 6 14 5 22 4 22 0 Incr calib k 50 50 50 450
4. O m K K K K K MS OxXxG lt ZHONA eie e e e KM KS EVOLUME RAMS H K KKK KKM KK KK e Se ELIST xx KK KKM KM e 24 NE H R G R D S T A Q G S D M N S R M Q S O O I N iOZGUHGPOG z K O K KM MK KKK KKK KX KK KK KK KK XK KK KK KX KK KK KK XX XX xx KK KKM KK KKK KX e xx KKM MS SIGNAL2000 A 62 Reference Table A 2 continued Cross Reference of Commands and Groups Groups ALL DAT CON Command INF TET RI PPLABEL RADES EDLEVEL BIKEVOL i PARKINGSI PARKVOLUMI BUSVOL RIGHTTU UPSTREA ABEL VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS WIDTHS ANES ROUPTYPES LIZATIONS KPERCENTS HOURFACTORS VALTYPES ATIONS s EARANCES MUMS TUPLOST AIN B IALQUEUE ALSATFLOWS ORS AYFACTORS OPFACTORS RATIONF LOWS ENCES ISSIVES ERLAPS DLAGS ES ENTIMES LLOWTIMES TICALS IME ET EMOVE H Q KO K K e H EI Z D Q R x KKK KK MK KK KKK KX MX XK KK KX e Pune U U x KKK KM MK KKK KK KX MX XK KKK KK KM XX KK KK KX XK KK KK S K KK KKM MK KKK KK KX MX KKK KK KX
5. gt ES 44 N Y 220 12 0 1 65 12 0 1 North 450 24 0 2 215 12 0 1 200 370 65 Phasing SEQUENCE l 12 0 24 0 0 0 PERMSV YNY 1 Zl 0 OVERLP Y Y Y LEADLAG LD LD SIGNAL2000 D 268 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Diagram of Signal Phasing The diagram generated by the DIAGRAMS command provides a graphical representation of a specified phase sequence code number This diagram is also an integral part of the output for the ANALYZE and EVALUATE commands and is an optional output of the TIMINGS command The sequence code which is represented in the diagram is listed at the top of the diagram followed by the lead lag conditions for the north south and east west phasings respectively separated by a slash Each phase is designated by a square box with arrows inside indicating the movements which are allowed during that phase Although a specific set of movements may be implied by a given sequence code only those movements which have non zero volumes will be included in the diagram Movements which have been designated as critical in each phase are so indicated by asterisks in the body of the arrow rather than a plus sign Critical movement identification is done automatically by the TIMINGS command or manually by the CRITICAL command A North arrow clarifies that North is up in the diagram The following is an example of
6. lt Type gt may not exceed the limit previously set with the SITESIZE command and lt Intersection gt must represent a node included in the NODELIST command Movement numbers begin with the north leg right turn as movement number 1 and proceed clockwise around the intersection to movement number 12 SIGNAL2000 B 79 Reference ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT Multiple pairs of movement numbers and their associated assignment factors may be entered on one ASSIGNMENT command They should be entered one after the other at the end of the ASSIGNMENT command SIGNAL2000 B 80 Reference BASE BASE BASE lt Generation Base gt lt X Y Coord LL gt lt X Y Coord UR gt Defaults 0 00 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the base development size for generating trips as it relates to the generation rates used for the development lt Generation Base gt is the base development size to which the traffic generation rates are applied and can be any integer from 9999 to 32767 Its default value is 0 lt X Y Coord LL gt are the X and Y coordinates of the lower left southwest corner of the site for display in the schematic diagram and can be any common coordinate system value as an integer from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 Its default value is 0 0 lt X Y Coord UR gt are the X and Y coordinates of the upper right northeast corner of the site for display in the schematic diagram and can b
7. SIGNAL2000 D 248 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Back of Queue Worksheet The HCM Back of Queue Worksheet is the ninth HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the factors and queue calculations made for all lane groups in the capacity analysis as described below This worksheet is produced only when the selected queue model is one of the HCM queue models as defined by the first QUEUEMODELS entry Queues in worst average lanes The HCM queue model can be evaluated for either the average lane in a lane group or the worst lane in a lane group This is selected by the queue model number of the QUEUEMODELS input Models 1 amp 4 are for the worst lane models 2 amp 5 are for the average lanes See Appendix C for more on this subject Lane group The movements included in each lane group Initial queue The initial queue in each lane group at the start of the analysis period due to unmet demand from the previous analysis period Lane flow The total adjusted flow rate per lane in vehicles per hour per lane for all lane groups on each approach This value includes the contribution of initial queue If a worst lane analysis has been requested this value also includes the effect of lane utilization Lane satflow The adjusted saturation flow per lane in vehicle per hour of green per lane for each lane group Lane capacity The capacity of ea
8. Sequence 8 Lead Lag eel Le 4 lt gt lt Rotate diagrams clockwise 90 degrees for phase types of East West movements Use PERMISSIVES to allow left turns shown with symbols Use OVERLAPS to allow right turns shown with symbols where exclusive right turn lanes exist Use LEADLAGS to reverse the order of a phase type Phase types are combined for both directions to create a sequence code E g SEQUENCE 53 is a Dual Lead North Overlap 5 for the North South movements followed by a West Lead 3 for the East West movements Figure 1 2 Phasing Codes for TEAPAC SIGNAL2000 8 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Version Number The version number x yz and date describe what revision of the program is being used Minor revisions of the program increment the z part of the version number with more significant changes affecting the y part of the version number The version number itself x changes when major program changes are made The date reflects when the given version of the program was introduced The version number and date of the program is displayed using the Help About menu It is also displayed in each printed report title This information should match the title page of any printed program documentation or the Help Version menu of the on screen documentation If this is not the case check by using the Help RecentChanges menu for addenda which explain changes
9. v c Volume Capacity ratio capacity vehicles per hour number of lanes in lane group Zo KHan A As with Model 10 ANALYZE when the subject movement is a protected permitted left turn the q r portion of the formula is obtained from the Supplemental Delay Worksheet using the largest such value from the worksheet Model 7 is the same queue model as Model 9 above with the exception that it calculates the percentile queue for the percentile input by the user based on actual cumulative Poisson arrival probabilities not a 2 0 factor and the queue distances are estimated using the queued vehicle length inputs made by the user not 25 and 40 feet and thus it is called the Enhanced SIGNAL97 EVALUATE model S97E Important Differences Between SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL2000 Several differences between SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL2000 as well as between SIGNAL85 and both SIGNAL94 and SIGNAL97 are important to note for prior users of SIGNAL85 Further because of the inherent compatibility between SIGNAL85 SIGNAL94 SIGNAL97 and SIGNAL2000 and the evolution of the 1985 Highway Capacity Manual HCM to the 2000 HCM a common effort will be to re execute analyses that were previously done with SIGNAL2000 C 207 Reference SIGNAL85 SIGNAL94 or SIGNAL97 with the SIGNAL2000 program This is easily accomplished due to the upwards compatibility of data files between the programs using the File OpenMerge Shared menu or the LOAD SHARE command
10. ANALYZE related to capacity analysis actions DESIGN related to design optimization actions Appendix A Topics Appendix A Introduction SIGNAL2000 Command Structure All Commands SIGNAL2000 Command Structure Each SIGNAL2000 command has been classified into one or more groups each of which consist of a subset of all SIGNAL2000 commands Each group contains commands which share functional similarities The Group Name associated with each group describes the function SIGNAL2000 A 60 Reference shared by the commands The Group Names form a heirarchical command structure as outlined in Table A 1 Group names are either common names used in all TEAPAC programs or special names used by the SIGNAL2000 program as described in the following sections Table A 2 provides a cross reference between each of the commands and the group names Abbreviated group names appear across the top of the table and commands along the left side An X in the table indicates that the command to the left is included in the group name above This table allows a quick view of the relationship between group names and commands Common TEAPAC Group Names Special SIGNAL2000 Group Names SIGNAL2000 A 61 Reference Table A 2 Cross Reference of Commands and Groups Groups ALL DAT CON PAR SYS APR PHA SIT ANA INF TIT RES BAS INT MOV TUR 94D DI X X K K K MK KK e ECT RIPTION
11. Defaults NORTHSOUTH 1 1 NO NO NO NO 0 0 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter intersection conditions which affect the conduct of a Warrant Analysis at the current intersection lt Major Direction gt is a keyword which describes whether the major street is counted on the North South approaches or East West approaches It can be any of the following NORTHSOUTH major street counted on North amp South approaches default EASTWEST major street counted on East amp West approaches lt N S Lanes gt is the number of lanes for moving traffic on each of the North and South approaches It can be any integer from 1 to 4 Its default value is 1 lt E W Lanes gt is the number of lanes for moving traffic on each of the East and West approaches It can be any integer from 1 to 4 Its default value is 1 lt High Speed gt is a keyword which describes whether the 85th percentile speed of major street traffic exceeds 40 mph It can be any of the following NO major st speeds don t exceed 40 default YES major street speeds exceed 40 mph lt Low Population gt is a keyword which describes whether the intersection is in an isolated community with a population less than 10 000 It can be any of the following NO population is not less than 10 000 default YES population is less than 10 000 lt Progression Impact gt is a keyword which describes whether a signal instal
12. SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Display of Intersection Parameters The Display of Intersection Parameters generated by the MAP command provides a worksheet document which shows the relative positions of the 12 demand volumes on a schematic diagram of the intersection In addition to the 12 turning movement volumes the diagram displays the widths of the lane groups and the number of lanes If movements are part of a dual optional lane group the turning lanes show a plus sign and the shared lanes show a minus sign The lower right corner of the display indicates the phase sequence number whether permissive left turns are allowed after exclusive left turn phases whether right turns are allowed to overlap into adjacent phases and if lead or lag phasing is employed for exclusive left turn phases The following is an example of the Display of Intersection Parameters text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Display of Intersection Parameters Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Key VOLUMES 1 5 550 25 WIDTHS v LAN 1 2 1 12 0 24 0 12 0 60 0 0 0 3 425 24 0 2
13. so that computations may continue without a crash Specifically Models 7 amp 8 can produce conditions which exceed the computational limits of typical PCs for the Poisson distribution for high percentiles and or high v c ratios Under very high oversaturation all of the models may produce queue lengths in feet which exceed the display space available All of these cases now produce to avoid the program crash gt New Direct EXPORT for HCS2000 Now that the HCS2000 program has been released SIGNAL2000 supports a direct EXPORT to HCS2000 including all of the new input variables which were not previously included in the HCS 3 EXPORT previously supported by SIGNAL2000 These new variables include bicycle volumes queue storage space and lengths of queued vehicles Previous EXPORTs from SIGNAL2000 would not have included these variables SIGNAL2000 and WinTEAPAC also support running the executable Signals module of HCS2000 The default installation location of HCS2000 is now the default for the new WinTEAPAC and SIGNAL2000 EXPORT configuration The new EXPORT feature will make it easy to run comparable analyses with both SIGNAL2000 and HCS2000 Check the HCS Watch page at www StrongConcepts com for a record of problem reports in HCS2000 that this capability uncovers gt Enhanced Shared Exclusive Lane Modeling Dual Optional Lanes A number of important enhancements in the way shared exclusive lanes are modelled in SIGNAL2000 have bee
14. 360 Index HCM Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet D 238 HCM Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet D 240 HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet D 236 HCM Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet D 246 HCM Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet D 232 Optimized Phase Sequences D 221 Optimized Phasings Ranked by Crit Delay D 224 Optimum Phase Timings D 227 Queuemodel Calculations D 262 Required g Cs and LT Clearance Cycles D 265 Satflow Rates and LT Clearance Cycles D 267 Summary of Parameter Values D 216 overlapping time periods B 153 OVERLAPS 43 A 63 B 144 B 171 E 279 over saturated queueing C 207 Oversaturation Considerations C 201 P Parameter Symbols 10 PARAMETERS Dialogs 36 parking maneuvers 37 40 B 146 PARKINGSIDES 37 40 A 63 B 145 B 146 PARKVOLUMES 37 40 A 63 B 145 B 146 PASSER 54 PASSER 2 ii PATHASSIGNMENT A 64 B 79 B 148 F 294 PATHDISTRIBUTION A 64 B 147 F 294 F 295 Peak hour factors 55 PEAKHOURFACTORS 37 41 A 63 B 150 B 174 B 192 peak period analyses 53 pedestrian crossing times B 129 PEDLEVELS 40 A 63 B 151 B 152 C 208 PEDTIME 43 50 A 63 B 151 B 152 percentile queue B 159 percentile queue value C 203 performance evaluation 35 B 99 performance index B 140 PERIODS 45 A 64 B 153 F 291 F 292 PERMISSIVES 43 A 63 B 155 B 171 E 279 permitted left turns B 135 permitted protected left turn 43 B 155 phase movement diagram 36 B 96 PHASEMO
15. 60 46 C 35 07953 60 5 36 60 60 64 C 35 0 955 60 2 36 60 60 53 C 33 0 955 60 5 36 60 60 48 C 35 02935 60 5 36 60 60 67 C 35 0 955 60 3 36 60 60 55 C 35 02955 60 6 36 60 60 65 C 33 0495 5 60 6 36 60 60 58 C 35 0955 60 6 36 60 60 56 C 35 02955 60 6 36 60 60 33 C 35 0 973 60 4 36 60 60 34 C 35 0 973 60 4 36 60 60 37 C 35 0 973 60 4 36 60 60 36 C 35 0 973 60 5 36 60 60 35 C 35 0 973 60 2 36 60 60 38 C 33 0 973 60 5 36 60 60 83 C 35 0 974 60 5 36 60 60 86 C 35 0 974 60 6 36 60 60 88 C 35 0 974 60 6 36 60 60 87 C 35 0 991 60 5 36 60 60 84 C 35 0 995 60 3 36 60 60 85 C 35 0 995 60 6 36 60 60 1 3 C 35 0 999 60 3 27 60 60 16 C 35 0 999 60 4 27 60 60 18 35 0 999 60 4 27 60 60 17 D 40 0 976 60 3 27 60 120 14 D 40 0 978 60 3 27 60 120 15 D 40 0 978 60 4 27 60 120 71 D 40 0 986 60 3 27 60 120 42 D 40 0 996 60 4 36 60 120 52 D 40 0 996 60 5 36 60 120 62 D 40 0 996 60 5 36 60 120 21 D 40 1 000 90 3 27 60 120 82 D 45 0 976 60 5 36 60 120 32 D 45 0 977 90 4 36 60 120 SIGNAL2000 D 225 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Optimized Phasings Ranked by Crit Delay 73 D 45 0 983 60 4 36 60 120 78 D 45 0 983 60 5 36 60 120 76 D 45 0 983 60 5 36 60 120 23 D 45 0 983 90 4 36 60 120 28 D 45 0 983 90 5 36 60 120 26 D 45 0 983 90 5 36 60 120 74 D 45 0 998 60 4 36 60 120 75 D 45 0 998 60 5 36 60 120 77 D 45 0 999 60 4 36 60 120 27 D 45 0 999 90 4 36 60 120 2
16. Gtrn G C required for turning lane at target level of service determined from GOVERCS command Gth G C required for through lane group at target level of service determined from GOVERCS command Vtrn demand volume for turning lane group Vth demand volume for through lane group If Fern is calculated as less than 1 00 no use of the through lanes will be made by the turning vehicles and the analysis should not be modified any further Consideration of removing the dual optional lane usage of an existing condition should be considered if this is the case If Firn is calculated as more than about 1 80 the analysis should be re specified as an exclusive dual turning lane and one less lane in the through lane group since the added capacity effect of the shared turn through lane clearly cannot exceed 2 00 this would be roughly the same as having exclusive dual turning lanes Note that when a dual optional lane group is operated it must be limited to a phasing that only allows both the turning traffic and the through traffic to operate together during a single phase indication This is usually a split phase operation sequence type 7 SIGNAL2000 51 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES After the FACTORS are applied the analysis should be checked to observe roughly the same amount of delay to both the single turn lane group and the adjacent through lane group Furthermore to be precise about the analysis if the level of ser
17. INITIALQUEUE 12 lt Initial Queue Size gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the number of vehicles queued at the intersection at the start of the analysis period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt Initial Queue Size gt is the number of vehicles queued at the start of the analysis period due to unsatisfied demand in the previous analysis period and can be any integer from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 Notes If the initial queue is observed in the field it should be the queue observed at the end of a green phase at the start of the analysis period This observation will reflect unsatisfied demand The queue should not be observed at the end of a red phase since this would be a queue which also included the significant effects of cyclical queueing not just unsatisfied demand The observer should also take care that the observed queue is typical of other cycles at the end of green and near the start of the analysis period and not unduly influenced by random fluctuations in demand e If a non zero initial queue value is entered SIGNAL2000 will compute the additional d3 delay term and adjust the d term as appropriate according to the methods of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The analyst should be aware that an analysis period with an initial queue value may generate more delay per vehicle than another analysis period which has higher volum
18. lt List of Commands gt PARAM YFACTORS 12 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt 12 1 00 RIPTION lt Second Title Line gt blanks lt of Sequences to Analyze after DESIGN gt 1 lt Sequence Code gt 1 lt Input Output Echo Condition NO YES gt NO 12 lt End Gain Time sec gt 12420 K Q es C D DI DI DI D lt List of Priority Movement s gt 0 AUTO lt File Name gt AUTO 12 lt Capacity Adjustment Factor gt 12 T00 5 lt File Name gt 5 blanks lt IN OUT BOTH gt lt Gen Rate gt 10 lt Node Dir gt 0 0 10 0 lt Line gt lt Repeat Variable gt next 4 lt Grade of Approach gt 4 0 0 lt Meth gt 8 lt Phase Green Time sec or sec sec gt P 8 0 0 12 lt Lane Group NORM FREEFL DUALOPT STP YLD gt 12 NORMAL lt Number of Lines gt 3 lt List of Commands gt PARAM OWS 12 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate pcphgpl 12 1900 QUEUE 12 lt Initial Queue veh gt 12 0 ECTION lt Node gt lt Intersection Description gt 0 BLANKS ES lt View NORM TABL gt lt Page gt lt Lin Pag gt lt Lst Lin gt Norm 0 66 63 12 lt Number of Lanes gt 12 0 AGS 2 lt Lead Lag Phasing NONE LEAD LAG gt 2 NON LOFS lt Delayl gt lt Delay2 gt lt Delay3 gt lt vcl gt lt vc2 gt lt vc3 gt C 90 100 5 lt Line gt lt File gt lt PROCESS SHARE IGNORE gt lt gt next next P 1 mj mj e el H
19. 2 the actual disk file name 3 the file name extension and 4 a switch option When these elements are combined they constitute a file name specification which usually appears in the form of lt File Name gt in the documentation and help files lt File Name gt d path nnnnn eee s It is important to note that a colon must separate the name of the disk drive and the rest of the file specification back slashes must be used to define a specific path on the drive or the network the file path a dot must separate the actual file name and the file name extension and a slash must separate the switch option from the other elements The name of the disk drive path actual file name and file extension elements are identical to the file specification conventions of Windows The fourth element the switch option is a unique element of the TEAPAC program package used to control an aspect of data file creation Each of the four elements are discussed in detail below Drive Path Designation d path File Name nnnnn File Extension eee Switch s TEAPAC G 298 Reference Drive Path Designation d path The drive path designation indicates which disk drive and or system path should be used to find an existing lt File Name gt or to place a new lt File Name gt Typically drive path designations are letters such as C for the local hard drive folder or sub folder names enclosed in back slashes netwo
20. ENDGAIN 20 22 30 230 2 0 230 2 0 ZO 220 24 0 Z 0 220 2 0 STORAGE 100 1000 250 O 1000 250 O 1000 250 100 1000 250 INITIALQUEUE 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 IDEALSATFLOWS 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 FACTORS 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 DELAYFACTORS 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 NSTOPFACTORS 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 SATURATIONFLOWS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Phasing Parameters SEQUENCES EL PERMISSIVES Yes No Yes No LEADLAGS None None SIGNAL2000 D 219 Reference OVERLAPS CYCLES G YE C REENTIMES sLOWT IME RITICALS Yes Yes Yes Yes 60 120 30 56 00 56 00 4 00 4 00 0 0 SIGNAL2000 D 220 Reference OFFSET PEDTIME SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Optimized Phase Sequences As the program proceeds with the operational design of each of the specified phasings the Optimized Phase Sequences report is produced by the DESIGN command to inform the user of the progress of the design Each phasing is tested at all specified cycle lengths in an attempt to make the critical movements of the phasing work at the best possible balanced level of service In the short report a table of the critical movement levels of service is produced where each row represents all of the critical levels of service achieved for each phasing at the listed cycle length The column hea
21. Effective ped green time The effective green time in seconds used by the pedestrians Conflicting ped volume The volume of pedestrians across the intersection leg that conflicts with the right turns in peds per hour Conflicting bike volume The volume of bicycles across the intersection leg that conflicts with the right turns in bikes per hour Ped flow rate The rate of flow of pedestrians during the effective green period in peds per hour Avg ped occupancy The average pedestrian occupancy based on the ped flow rate Effective bike green time The effective green time in seconds used by the bicycles Bike flow rate The rate of flow of bicycles during the effective green period in bikes per hour Avg bike occupancy The average bicycle occupancy based on the bike flow rate Relevant occupancy The relevant occupancy based on pedestrian occupancy and bicycle conflict zone occupancy receiving lanes The number of receiving lanes for the right turn movement turning lanes The number of turning lanes for the right turn movement Adjustment factor The permitted phase pedestrian bicycle adjustment factor Proportion right turns The proportion of right turns in the lane group Prop RT in prot phase The proportion of right turns using the protected phase Ped bike adjust factor The resultant pedestrian bicycle satflow adjustment factor The following is an example of the HCM Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet text only rep
22. NETSIM ii NETSIM CORSIM 54 B 92 B 138 NETWORK 39 54 A 62 B 117 B 131 B 135 B 136 B 173 B 181 network creation and editing on screen 11 B 117 B 131 B 135 B 136 B 181 network simulation model 42 B 92 B 138 NEWPAGE 47 A 62 B 133 B 163 Next button 19 next file B 169 next line B 104 B 169 G 301 NEXTLINES 47 A 62 B 134 B 169 node number 36 39 B 117 NODELIST 18 36 38 39 A 62 B 79 B 105 B 117 B 131 B 135 B 136 B 147 B 148 B 181 C 210 F 293 NODELOCATION 39 A 62 B 81 B 117 B 131 B 135 B 136 B 181 non site volumes B 175 NOSTOP 54 NOTE 46 A 62 B 102 B 137 B 169 NSTOPFACTORS 42 A 63 B 138 O OFFSET 43 A 63 B 139 OK button 9 operating system G 297 operational design 35 B 94 optimization scheme B 100 B 121 C 200 OPTIMIZE 39 A 62 B 140 optimize timings 35 B 94 optimum timings 35 B 184 order of the analysis 36 38 B 135 order of the phases 43 B 120 OUTPUT 21 29 39 A 62 B 95 B 142 D 228 D 232 D 236 D 238 D 240 D 242 D 246 D 247 D 249 Output Control G 302 output report D 213 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Worksheets D 228 Capacity Analysis Summary D 252 Diagram of Signal Phasing D 269 Display of Intersection Parameters D 268 Evaluation of Intersection Performance D 256 HCM Back of Queue Worksheet D 249 HCM Capacity and LOS Worksheet D 242 HCM Initial Queue Delay Worksheet D 247 HCM Input Worksheet D 228
23. The SIGNAL2000 method is to survey the adjusted satflow in the field and then use the normal HCM procedures in SIGNAL2000 to estimate the same adjusted satflow The ratio of the two values will create a FACTORS entry which can be used for all similar lane groups which are not surveyed and which will succinctly represent the adjustment which has been made to calibrate the HCM procedures to local conditions SIGNAL2000 55 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Proper Use of RIGHTTURNONREDS The prescribed technique in the 2000 HCM for treating right turns on red RTOR is to subtract these vehicles from the demand volume before continuing the analysis with a limitation that except when shadowed by a protected left turn phase RTOR should not be used unless an actual RTOR volume has been counted The assertion that RTOR should be removed from the analysis suggests that these vehicles have no delay of their own nor do they cause any delay for other vehicles neither of which is true Although RTOR has a beneficial effect on traffic flow this model of these benefits is wholly inadequate and inappropriate In light of this limitation we suggest RTOR volumes be used only with great caution in an HCM analysis SIGNAL2000 56 Tutorial APPENDICES Reference Manual The following appendices form the SIGNAL2000 Reference Manual This manual is designed to provide detailed information regarding various aspects of the SIGNAL2000 program The inf
24. allowed by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual thus the warning indicates that the calculations will continue by extrapolating the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual table and the user is aware of this occurrence The user is also warned to make sure that the lane group width does not include any parking lane width as was the case required in earlier versions of SIGNAL and SIGNAL85 See also error S2K19 Action Verify that the lane group width has been input according to the proper convention of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual and that extrapolation is truly desired for inputs outside of the accepted 2000 Highway Capacity Manual range S2K02 WARNING Right turns in xx through lanes are xxx x which may indicate an input error This warning indicates that the percentage of right turns in a through lane group has been calculated as exceeding 50 The program warns the user because it may be more appropriate to analyze the shared lane as an exclusive turn lane group but the computations continue as specified Action Verify that the lane usage has been input properly and that the high turn percentage is appropriate for continued analysis SIGNAL2000 E 272 Reference S2K03 WARNING Left turns in xx through lanes are xxx x which may indicate an input error This warning indicates that the percentage of left turns in a through lane group has been calculated as exceeding 50 The program warns the user because it may be more appropriate to analyze the
25. specific to the C16 10 single lane worksheet with the notation 1lane The input variables include Cycle Length Actual Green Time Effective Permitted Green Time Opposing Effective Green Time Number of Lanes Number of Opposing Lanes for Exhibit C16 9 only Adjusted LT Flow Rate Proportion of LT in Lane Group Proportion of Opposing LT for Exhibit C16 10 only Adjusted Opposing Flow Rate and Normal Movement Lost Time The calculations include Left Turns per Cycle Opposing Lane Utilization Opposing Flow per Lane per Cycle Opposing Platoon Ratio First LT Effective Green Opposing Queue Ratio Opposing Queue Effective Green Unsaturated Effective Green Maximum Opposing Vehicles Proportion TH in Opposing TH Equivalent for LT Proportion of LT Opposing TH Equivalent Minimum Value for fLT LT Factor for LT Unusable gq and LT Factor for Lane Group The following is an example of the HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 236 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 81 HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet Input Calculation N E S Cycle length C 60 60 Actual green time for LT G 23 7
26. will always display all data values e The SUMMARISE command is spelled with an S at the end in order that it does not conflict with the typical command SIZE If SUMMARISE were spelled with a Z then typing the full command SIZE would still be an ambiguous abbreviation for both the SIZE and SUMMARIZE commands and the SIZE command could never be executed SIGNAL2000 B 183 Reference TIMINGS TIMINGS TIMINGS lt Sequence Code gt lt Output gt Defaults 1 TIMINGS Menus Groups RESULTS DESIGN The purpose of this command is to retrieve the optimum timings for the sequence code specified from previously DESIGNed results for the current intersection lt Sequence Code gt is a two digit sequence code and can be either a sequence code or position code as follows Sequence Code 11 12 13 thru 88 Position Code 1 2 3 etc default 1 the first entry of the SEQUENCES list lt Output gt is a keyword describing what type of output display is desired and can be any of the following NONE no output is displayed TIMINGS only timings output displayed default DIAGRAM display timings amp phasing Notes The TIMINGS command is the link between the DESIGN and ANALYZE commands Not only does it display the optimum timings which have been generated by DESIGN but it also moves the selected phasing to the top of the SEQUENCES list and inputs these timings in seconds into the GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CRITIC
27. with this error message being a common result of such an attempt TPC58 ERROR The time periods entered cannot overlap Re enter without overlap Each of the time periods defined on the PERIODS command are not allowed to overlap in any way If the start time is the same as or precedes any other stop time or if a stop time is the same as or follows any other start time this error will be displayed Action Check that the time periods entered do not overlap in any way If they do they must be entered as two separate problems to TURNS and cannot be combined TPC59 ERROR The extra inputs for this movement entry have been ignored Check for error This error is generated by either the VEHICLECOUNTS or TRUCKCOUNTS command when too many entries have been entered in the Manual Mode If entries are being made for a given movement number there cannot be more count entries following the movement number than there are number of count intervals defined by the PERIODS command If entries are being made for a given time interval no more than twelve count entries may follow the time being entered one for each movement Action Check the entries made following the movement number of time making sure the number of entries match the limits discussed above This can be particularly tricky when entering counts for a given movement especially when more than one time period is defined by the PERIODS command Use the Tabular View of the Visual Mode or the AS
28. you are no longer limited to the old archaic hard to read character graphics which was used when TEAPAC was originally created what did your computer look like 30 years ago All output reports use shades of color from the desktop theme style setting to highlight the results including report titles report sub sections column headings and alternating output lines The proportionally spaced sans serif Tahoma font is used for easier readability including right justified numeric results in columns Viewing options include zoom in zoom out zoom all to see an entire page rubber band selection to zoom in drag the page to scroll and click to re center Text strings can be searched for within one or many pages of results and multi page results can be quickly scanned with controls to advance to the next or previous page the next or previous report or the beginning or end of all results Visit www StrongConcepts com for examples of the new graphical output back end now found in Visual TEAPAC gt Other Generic Enhancements Found in All Visual TEAPAC Programs Many other generic enhancements have been made to the Visual TEAPAC user interface which is now included in every TEAPAC program These include Windows XP style buttons drop down lists scroll windows etc all Edit and Results menus can be accessed by right click all demos allow at least 4 intersections to be entered and analyzed license keys are valid for any olde
29. 0 0 0 0 List of Intersection s in Network Master Node is 1 li SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Summary of Parameter Values Intersection Parameters for Int 1 Lincoln amp Main METROAREA NonCBD NETWORK North 388 30 999 2 6 10 0 Def NN LOS Targets 35 80 5 NETWORK East 287 30 998 5 9 1 0 Def NN 90 100 5 NETWORK South 273 30 997 812 4 0 Def NN Priorities Ox OY O 2202 Os TO NETWORK West 241 30 996 11 3 7 0 Def NN NODELOCATION 0 0 Approach Parameters APPLABELS N E S W GRADES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PEDLEVELS 10 0 10 0 BIKEVOLUMES 0 0 0 0 PARKINGSIDES None None None None PARKVOLUMES 20 20 20 20 BUSVOLUMES 0 0 0 0 RIGHTTURNONREDS 0 0 0 0 UPSTREAMVC 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Movement Parameters MOVLABELS RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT VOLUME 175 550 125 60 425 65 65 370 200 215 450 220 WIDTHS 12 0 24 0 12 0 0 0 24 0 12 0 0 0 24 0 12 0 12 0 24 0 12 0 LANES A 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 L 2 L GROUPTYPES Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm UTILIZATIONS 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 TRUCKPERCENTS 25 0 2 0 220 25 0 20 20 25 0 20 220 25 0 20 2 20 PEAKHOURFACTORS 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 ARRIVALTYPES 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ACTUATIONS No No No No No No No No No No No No REQCLEARANCES 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 MINIMUMS 5 0 5 0 5 0 DO S20 eQ 530 52 0 5 0 DO 2520 lt S10 STARTUPLOST 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0
30. 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter satflow adjustment factors for each movement of the current intersection to adjust 2000 Highway Capacity Manual satflow computations lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt is an adjustment factor which when multiplied by satflows obtained from the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual produce satflows that more accurately reflect conditions known to exist in the study area It can be any number from 0 01 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes e FACTORS are useful in adjusting 2000 Highway Capacity Manual computations to match surveyed satflows i e calibration e FACTORS may also be useful in estimation of special use lane satflows i e dual optional turn lanes see Chapter 5 SIGNAL2000 B 103 Reference FILES FILES FILES 5 lt File Name gt Defaults 5 nul Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to enter the names of the permanent storage file areas where information is to be LOADed and SAVEd lt File Name gt is the name of the file to be used and can be any valid file name see Appendix G Its default value is no defined file Notes FILES can be used so that the program remembers the name of the file to be used by subsequent LOAD and SAVE commands thus avoiding the file name entry for each LOAD and SAVE e The file numbers referenced by the file access commands are determined by the order of the file n
31. 1 Introduction Structure and Organization Conventions Review of TEAPAC Procedures SIGNAL2000 1 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Structure and Organization This document the SJGNAL2000 Tutorial Reference Manual explains the data entries and procedures necessary to use the SIGNAL2000 program The organization of the SIGNAL2000 Tutorial Reference Manual is similar to all of the TEAPAC manuals Chapters 1 through 5 serve as the program Tutorial Manual The tutorial steps through a simple example problem and then discusses the specific analysis techniques and procedures of the SIGNAL2000 program The attached appendices form the program Reference Manual which provides easy look up of detail on the program s inputs operation and output The following paragraphs briefly describe each section of this manual This chapter Chapter 1 discusses the overall structure of the tutorial reference manual and the conventions used throughout see the outline in Table 1 1 It also contains a brief explanation of the basic procedures of TEAPAC which are described in detail in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual If you are unfamiliar with the TEAPAC package you could review the tutorial section of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual in order to better understand the basic TEAPAC inputs and procedures SIGNAL2000 2 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 1 Organization of the SIGNAL2000 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Str
32. 15 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Table 2 1 Peak Hour Turning Movements amp Lane Group Widths For Example Problem Approach Movement Volumes Width Approach ovement Volumes From Right Turn 175 12 From Right Turn 65 60 North Through 650 24 South Through 370 Left Turn 1254 12 Left Turn 200 Right Turn 604 0 Right Turn 215 Through 5254 24 Through 450 120 Left Turn 654 T2 Left Turn 220 SIGNAL2000 16 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE FIRST STREE BROADWAY Figure 2 1 Schematic Diagram of Example Problem Data Entry If you are not currently running the SIGNAL2000 program do so according to the way it was installed on your computer see Appendix G The program will display the program name along with important licensing information As described in Chapter 1 two input modes can be used to manipulate the program In the examples below the Edit menu line to select in the Visual Mode is shown in square brackets XXX and the command line to move to is shown following the arrow gt To enter the desired parameter values move the cursor to the appropriate display SIGNAL2000 17 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE area and type the value in followed by the TAB key Use the OK button when done entering data to return to the Main Menu To display more entries on a single dialog box first select the Tabular View in the View menu before entering data us
33. 243 Lane Group Level of Service D 244 Lane Group types D 217 Lane Group Width D 265 D 267 Lane Groups D 232 D 253 Lane of concern D 263 Lane satflow D 249 Lane Utilization D 217 Lane Utilization Factor D 233 Lane Width amp Number D 217 Lane Width Factor D 233 Lanes in Lane Group D 228 Last departure D 247 Lead or Lag Phasing D 229 D 268 Lead Lag Phasing D 217 Left Turn Factor D 233 Left Turns per Cycle D 236 Level of Service D 252 D 254 D 265 Level of Service Targets D 216 Local Adjustment Factor D 234 355 Index Location D 216 Lost Time D 242 LT Factor for Lane Group D 236 LT Factor for LT D 236 Master Node D 216 Maximum Cycle Length D 265 D 267 Maximum Opposing Vehicles D 236 Minimum Controls D 227 D 230 D 253 D 256 D 262 Minimum Cycle D 224 Minimum Value for fLT D 236 Minimums D 217 Model form D 263 Model name D 263 Model number D 263 Movement Labels D 217 Network Location D 216 Normal Movement Lost Time D 236 Number of Lanes D 233 D 236 D 265 D 267 D 268 Number of Opposing Lanes D 236 Number of Phases D 224 Number Stopped D 258 Offset D 217 Opposing D 246 Opposing Effective Green Time D 236 Opposing Flow per Lane per Cycle D 236 Opposing flow rate D 238 Opposing Lane Utilization D 236 Opposing Platoon Ratio D 236 Opposing queue clear time D 238 Opposing Queue Effective Gre
34. 45 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS MESSAGES lt Level of Messages gt Display messages concerning changes made to the program since the last printing of the tutorial reference manual p m ge EL lt List of Commands gt Display the command names parameter descriptions and default values for each command listed ASK lt List of Commands gt Produce a dialog box display for each of the listed commands RESET lt List of Commands gt Reset the parameters of the specified commands to their default values DATA lt List of Commands gt Display the current parameter values for the specified commands SUMMARISE Display a formatted summary of all PARAMETERS values It has no parameters Commands to Label Output The four commands described below control the report headings of the program Report headings are used to identify the conditions of an analysis Report headings are critical when multiple analyses are performed and documentation of various conditions analyzed is required PROJECT lt First Title Line gt Enter the first line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed DESCRIPTION lt Second Title Line gt Enter the second line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed NOTE lt Third Title Line gt Enter the third line of information contained in the title of each report HEADING lt Number of Lines gt Display the current title heading
35. AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Reference Manual Summary of Appendices Appendix A ABBREVIATED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix B DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix C ANALYSIS METHODS AND FORMULATIONS Appendix D REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND EXAMPLES Appendix E ERROR MESSAGES AND TROUBLE SPOTS Appendix F TEAPAC SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES Appendix G OPERATING SYSTEM MESSAGES AND INSTALLATION NOTES Appendix H ADDENDA Index SIGNAL2000 v Manual LIST OF TABLES 1 1 Organization of the SIGNAL2000 Tutorial 1 2 Definition of Terms 2 1 Peak Hour Turning Movements and Lane Group Widths for Example Problem 4 1 Organization of Command Discussions A 1 Group Name Structure A 2 Cross Reference of Commands and Groups A 3 All Commands Listed Alphabetically D 1 Report Descriptions and Examples F 1 Summary of TEAPAC System Error Messages G 1 Summary of Operating System Messages and Installation Notes LIST OF FIGURES 1 1 Intersection Approach and Turning Movement Conventions 1 2 Phasing Codes for TEAPAC 2 1 Schematic Diagram of Example Problem SIGNAL2000 vi Manual CHAPTER 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Topics Strong Concepts develops and maintains a package of programs which provides quick accurate and consistent analysis and design of traffic and transportation related engineering
36. F 291 IODEVICES 47 A 62 B 118 B 133 K keyword F 287 L labels for each approach 37 40 B 76 labels for each movement 37 40 B 130 Lane Group WIDTH Designation E 278 lane utliization C 203 LANES 37 41 A 63 B 119 B 193 E 274 last line B 104 B 124 B 169 G 301 LEADLAGS 43 A 63 B 110 B 120 B 171 B 194 E 279 left turn trap B 155 LEVELOFSERVICE 39 A 62 B 94 B 95 B 100 B 107 B 121 C 201 C 211 D 265 License to use software iv licensed usage level F 295 Line Number G 301 LinkTo menu 52 54 LOAD 11 24 47 48 A 62 B 97 B 104 B 106 B 123 B 134 B 164 B 169 F 284 F 285 F 286 G 300 G 302 location in the system network 39 B 131 location of the intersection 36 39 B 128 loop variable B 161 lost time B 98 B 178 B 195 LOSTTIME E 276 M Managing Multiple Intersections C 210 Manual Mode 9 18 MAP 36 A 62 B 125 D 268 master controller B 126 MASTERNODE 38 A 62 B 126 maximum back of queue C 203 maximum queue length C 203 MBQ queue model C 203 Merging Multiple Files C 211 MESSAGES 46 A 62 B 127 H 305 METROAREA 36 39 A 62 B 128 Minimum Input Requirements 25 MINIMUMS 37 41 55 A 63 B 95 B 129 MOVLABELS 37 40 A 63 B 130 SIGNAL2000 MQL queue model C 203 Multi Leg Intersections 49 multiple intersections C 210 multiple scenarios 23 multiplier 41 B 191 multi scenario 11 N NEMA B 173 nested F 285
37. GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and OFFSETS must be entered in seconds not sec sec which sum to 1 2 the system cycle SIGNAL2000 B 195 Reference APPENDIX C Analysis Methods and Formulations Appendix C Topics SIGNAL2000 adheres strictly to the methods formulations and computational procedures of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual HCM This includes the calculation of saturation flow capacity v c queues delay and level of service with all of their associated factors The following sections describe additional calculations above and beyond those described in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual which are implemented in SIGNAL2000 as well as computational procedures which the user might perform in using SIGNAL2000 to its fullest potential Appendix C Topics Appendix C Introduction Calculation of Volumes Optimization Scheme Calculation of Queues Important Differences Between SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL2000 Important Differences Between SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 and Ver 2 HCM Sample Problems Calculation of Volumes In the simplest form a user enters volumes V for each intersection movement with the VOLUMES dialog and these volumes are used in any subsequent analyses which requires a measure of traffic demand These volumes are provided in vehicles per hour and frequently they represent the average hourly flow rate or equivalently the hourly count for the hour to be analyzed Since the Highway Capacity Ma
38. Manual may be produced optionally by specifying OUTPUT FULL and are discussed previously Intersection Averages Intersection Name If provided by the user the node number and name of the intersection appears at the top of the report V C A measure of the overall performance of the intersection is given by the V C degree of saturation It is computed as the weighted average V C of all lane groups weighted by the volume of traffic using each lane group Degree of saturation for an individual lane group is defined as the volume of traffic using the approach divided by the capacity for that approach in vehicles per hour v c Thus a degree of saturation of 1 00 on any individual approach indicates that an approach is working exactly at saturation capacity Critical V C A measure of the potential performance of the intersection is given by the critical V C It is the V C ratio which can be achieved for the critical movements if the timings are set such that all of the critical movements have the same V C as defined by the HCM It is not however necessarily related to the performance of the actual timings and thus is a measure of the intersection s potential performance not necessarily its actual performance Control Delay A measure of the average control delay per vehicle in seconds is given for the intersection as a whole This value is usually much lower than the critical movements of the intersection who by definition have the wo
39. Movement Number gt is the movement number designating the movement which controls the design of the signal phase and can be 0 12 Its default value is 0 no critical movement Notes Designation of a critical movement in any phase will result in that movement appearing with asterisks in the phase movement diagram This is normally used to represent movements which were used to control a DESIGN This diagram appears as part of the DIAGRAMS ANALYZE EVALUATE and QUEUECALCS reports If a movement is designated as critical in any phase the line for that movement in the ANALYZE report is flagged with an asterisk in the LOS column The TIMINGS command automatically implements a CRITICAL command for the phases of the specified sequence which have been DESIGNed SIGNAL2000 B 89 Reference CYCLES CYCLES CYCLES lt Minimum Cycle gt lt Maximum Cycle gt lt Cycle Increment gt Defaults 60 120 30 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC PHASING ANALYZE DESIGN The purpose of this command is to enter the range and precision of cycle length scanning for the current intersection for DESIGN as well as the default cycle length for the ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLUMES GOVERCS and EXPORT commands if timings for these commands are not provided in seconds lt Minimum Cycle gt is the smallest cycle length in seconds which should be tested by the DESIGN procedure for operational feasibility This is also the default cycle for ANALYZ
40. Notes The first lt Lead Lag Phasing gt is used for the north south movements the second for east west movements In split phase or lead lag operation SEQUENCE codes 7 and 8 NONE or LEAD indicates the north east movement precedes the south west movement LAG indicates the south west precedes the north east SIGNAL2000 B 120 Reference LEVELOFSERVICE LEVELOFSERVICE LEVELOFSERVICE lt Target Delay LOS gt lt Max Delay LOS gt lt Delay Incr gt lt Target v c gt lt Max v c gt lt v c Incr gt Defaults 35 C 80 E 5 90 100 5 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION DESIGN The purpose of this command is to enter the range of delay or level of service and v c which should be tested by a DESIGN optimization and GOVERCS for the current intersection lt Target Delay LOS gt is the desired or target delay or level of service of operation of the critical movements and can be any integer delay from 0 to 300 seconds or a level of service grade A B C D or E Its default value is 35 seconds of delay LOS C lt Max Delay LOSs is the worst amount of delay or level of service to be considered before a v c optimization is attempted and can be any integer delay from 0 to 300 seconds or a level of service grade A B C D or E Its default value is 80 seconds of delay LOS E lt Delay Incr gt is the increment of delay which should be used to reach the lt Max Delay LOS gt if the lt Target Delay LOS gt cannot
41. PRETRANSYT only Notes SIGNAL2000 B 173 Reference SIMULATION SIMULATION e If the analysis period is anything other than the default of 15 minutes VOLUMES should be entered as the flow rates in vehicles per hour during this period and PEAKHOURFACTORS should be entered as 1 0 SIGNAL2000 B 174 Reference SITESIZE SITESIZE SITESIZE lt of Distribution Types gt lt of Inbound Types gt Defaults 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the number of distribution types to be used to describe the inbound and outbound traffic generation lt of Distribution Types gt is the total number of inbound and outbound distribution types which will be used to define the distribution of trips generated into and out of the site and can be any integer from 0 150 see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered before any distribution information can be entered lt of Inbound Types gt is how many of the total distribution types are to be used to define those trips which are destined for the site These will be the first of the total distribution types the remainder of which will be declared outbound types It can be any integer from 0 150 and less than or equal to the lt of Distribution Types gt Its default value is 0 Notes The SITESIZE command must be virtually the first command entered when defining a study network and generator since no GENERATOR or ASSIGNMENT command
42. RIGHTTURNONREDS RIGHTTURNONREDS RIGHTTURNONREDS 4 lt Right Turn on Red Volume gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter the right turn on red volume for the right turns on each approach of the current intersection lt Right Turn on Red Volume is the volume in vehicles per hour of right turns being made on red and can be any integer from 0 to 300 Its default value is 0 Notes The volume entered will be used to reduce the right turn volume before any other adjustments are made with the limitation that the right turn volume will never be reduced below 1 vph SIGNAL2000 B 165 Reference ROUND ROUND ROUND lt Precision of Totals gt Defaults 1 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the precision to be used in computing the results lt Precision of Totals gt defines the precision of rounding of assignment totals for each intersection movement and can be any integer from 1 to 1000 Its default value is 1 Notes All computations are calculated to the nearest vehicle until the last computation is completed At this point the results for each intersection are rounded to the nearest whole multiple of the rounding precision entered on the ROUND command If multiple computations are being CUMULATED by the COMPUTE command successive rounding errors can be eliminated by making all the initial calculations and cumulations to the
43. SAVE at a point in the designated file n lines before the default next line of the file i e SAVE 5 will start the SAVE five lines prior to the current next line of the file Thus SAVE 1 will SAVE lt List of Commands gt on top of the previously saved RETURN command effectively appending the newly SAVEd information to the end of the previously SAVEd information SIGNAL2000 B 170 Reference SEQUENCES SEQUENCES SEQUENCES lt Sequence Code gt lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt Defaults 11 ALL Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC PHASING ANALYZE DESIGN The purpose of this command is to enter the desired and allowed phasings of the traffic signal of the current intersection according to the codes defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 lt Sequence Code gt is a sequence code which represents the desired phasing and can be any valid two digit code or 1 through 9 Its default value is 11 two phase operation lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt is a list of two character sequence codes which represent the possible phasings which are allowed each of which can be any valid two digit code a two character abbreviation for a list of codes or ALL Its default value is ALL all possible sequence codes Notes A LEADLAGS entry can be used in addition to the SEQUENCES entry for phasings which are not in the same order as shown on the code sheet Use PERMISSIVES to add permitted left turns before or after protected left
44. Sequence Code gt is the phasing code number specifying the phase sequence which is to be diagrammed and can be a standard special or positional code as follows Standard phasing code 11 12 13 etc Special phasing code 0 Positional codes 1 2 3 etc default 1 first sequence in SEQUENCES list Notes e If a negative number is given as a sequence code this represents the sequence code position in the SEQUENCES list i e minus three will produce a phase diagram for the third sequence code in the SEQUENCES list If an asterisk is given as the sequence code all codes in the SEQUENCES list will be diagrammed For example if SEQUENCE ALL has been specified DIAGRAM will produce a list of all possible phasings considered by SIGNAL2000 Arrows are shown in the DIAGRAM only for movements with non zero VOLUMES SIGNAL2000 B 96 Reference ECHO ECHO ECHO lt Input Output Echo Condition gt Defaults NO Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to enter the echo condition flag indicating whether or not command information should be displayed after being input from or output to a file lt Input Output Echo Condition gt is a keyword describing whether or not file input and output should be echoed and can be either of the keywords described below NO File I O will not be echoed default YES File I O will be echoed Notes When data is LOADed from or SAVEd to data files listings of the ac
45. Shortcut keys have been added to the File RecentFiles and File Save dialogs for more expediant keyboard manipulation Certain warning and error messages shouldn t be closed automatically by the new AutoClose option if these messages expect or require user response The AutoClose option is now ignored for these cases The Help Messages menu item has been changed to Help RecentChanges to better reflect its purpose The Help About menu item now shows the specific program name The default size of the Help window has been increased in size vertically to better display the contents of the complete on screen manual and context sensitive help topics Build 00 02FEB02 gt HCM Queue Model Changes Implemented The HCM Capacity Committee approved several changes to the HCM queue model that have been implemented in SIGNAL2000 Most notably the method for handling unbalanced lane utilization has been improved from an approximation to a more precise calculation Further the original method allowed the calculation of an average lane queue even when the saturation flow rate and delay calculations were based on unbalanced lane utilization this inconsistency has been removed Lastly the formula for the second term queue Q2 was updated to include the effect that an initial queue has on this term The effect of these changes on SIGNAL2000 is felt in several areas First slightly different HCM queue calculations will be obtained by the ANALYZE EV
46. The purpose of this command is to display the command names parameter descriptions and default values for each command listed lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes HELP provides a brief 1 line summary for each of the listed commands including the parameters and values expected and their default values e The Help Commands menu produces the same result as using HELP ALL an alphabetical list of all commands as found in Appendix A The Manual Mode must be used for any of the other HELP command options If HELP is requested for one command the detailed help of the Help button or the F1 key found in any Visual Mode dialog is displayed as found in Appendix B SIGNAL2000 B 114 Reference IDEALSATFLOWS IDEALSATFLOWS IDEALSATFLOWS 12 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt Defaults 12 1900 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT 94DEFAULTS The purpose of this command is to enter the base ideal saturation flow rate for each movement of the current intersection lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt is the base saturation flow rate of a single lane under ideal conditions in pcphgpl and can be any integer value from 0 to 3000 Its default value is 1900 Notes SIGNAL2000 B 115 Reference INITIALQUEUE INITIALQUEUE
47. Topics This appendix describes each of the major output reports which can be produced by the SIGNAL2000 program The reports are discussed followed by an example output in the order indicated in Table D 1 The table includes the report title and the primary command associated with the contents of the report The report title and primary command for each report appear at the top of each page of the appendix for easy reference Each of the outputs presented in this appendix was created using the example data included in the sample file named SIGNAL20 FOR These results can be re created by opening this file found in the installed program folder and executing a LOAD command with default parameters from the File Datafiles menu The reports shown here are the text only versions of the output in order to reduce the size of the downloadable programs demos updates help files and pdf manuals Using the LOAD command above will by default produce the far superior looking graphical output reports whose inclusion herein would vastly increase the size of the downloads mentioned Opening the file reads in the basic data for the examples of this appendix The LOAD command will produce the output reports contained in this appendix by reading a control file script stacked in the file after the input data This procedure is a good way to verify the operation of the program as well as to create a starting point for further experimentation with the SIGNAL2000 p
48. Tutorial and Reference sections of the manual Tutorial Manual references are indicated by page numbers alone while Reference Manual locations are indicated by the Appendix letter preceding the page number of that appendix Entries in the index which are in all capital letters usually refer to specific commands of the program They may also refer to keyword options or a program name Entries in all capital letters enclosed in square brackets XXX refer to group menu names representing specific menus or groups of commands Entries enclosed in angle brackets lt XXX gt refer to specific data inputs associated with commands of the program Entries preceded by an equal sign XXX indicate a discussion of an output of the program either a result of the computations or an input tabulation The primary discussions for commands are indicated by page locations in bold print located in Appendix B of the Reference Manual lt button B 117 B 148 lt Blocks gt 47 B 123 lt of Distribution Types gt 44 B 175 e lt of Inbound Types gt 44 B 175 lt Years gt 41 lt Actuated Movement gt 37 41 B 73 button B 117 B 148 ere Sie buttons C 210 lt Adjustment Factor gt 41 lt Algebraic Expression gt 48 B 84 lt Analysis Period gt 38 B 173 o lt Approach Label gt 37 40 B 76 lt Assignment Factor gt 44 B 79 lt Assignment Method gt 38 39 B 131 B 173 N 23 B 104 G 300 lt Auto gt 38 B 159 O G 300 l
49. Type Factor The adjustment factors for area location type determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Lane Utilization Factor The adjustment factors for how balanced each of the individual lanes in a lane group are utilized determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Left_Turn Factor The adjustment factors for left turns determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual See the Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet section for a discussion of how left turn factors are calculated when a permitted left turn phase is present When a protected permitted left turn is present this line of the table lists the satflow adjustment factor for the permitted phase while additional lines below show the left turn factor and resultant satflow calculated for the protected phase Right Turn Factor The adjustment factors for right turns determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Ped Bike Left Turn Factor The adjustment factors for the effect of pedestrians on left turns determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual See the Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet section for a discussion of how ped bike left turn factors are calculated when pedestrian interference is present for left turns Ped Bike Right Turn Factor The adjustment factors for the effect of pedestrians and bicycles on right turns determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual See the
50. VOLUMES and VOLFACTORS entries The user is directed to the specific formulas for analysis volume determination described in detail in Appendix C The following discussion provides further program specific notes about data file sharing for this program Input Data from TURNS WARRANTS and SITE Using SIGNAL2000 Data for PREPASSR PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM PRES YNCHRO PRETSPPD and PRENOSTOP Input Data from TURNS WARRANTS and SITE SIGNAL2000 can provide capacity analyses and timing phasing optimizations for traffic volumes which are either tabulated from traffic counts by TURNS or WARRANTS or estimated from a traffic planning effort such as a traffic impact study by SITE For existing conditions TURNS and WARRANTS can provide useful results for SIGNAL2000 After the turning movement count summaries and peak period analyses of TURNS are completed the peak period VOLUMES entries which are created are normally used as existing traffic volumes for the initial capacity analyses with SIGNAL2000 The VOLUMES results of the TURNS peak period analyses can be saved directly to the data file which can then SIGNAL2000 53 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES be read by SIGNAL2000 for these purposes Note also that these VOLUMES can be easily factored by using the individual VOLFACTORS entries as well as the global entry of VOLFACTORS when intersection 0 all intersections is selected For planning analyses of projected vo
51. XX KK KKK KK MK KK KK KK S G U T P A A R M S S I I F D N S S PI O LE C G Y C P O P xx KK KM MM KK XK e SIGNAL2000 A 63 Reference Table A 2 continued Cross Reference of Commands and Groups Groups ALL DAT CON INF TIT RE ENERATION THDISTRIBUTION THASS IGNMENT ASSIGNMENT x KKK KKM KK KK OX x KKK KKM KM KM KD OK OX Common TEAPAC Group Names The group name ALL contains every possible SIGNAL2000 command This group is organized in alphabetical order The ALL group is divided into six sub groups all of which have standard group names used in every TEAPAC program These are INFO DATAFILES TITLES CONTROL RESULTS and PARAMETERS The first four encompass the 22 standard TEAPAC commands found in every TEAPAC program These are used primarily for the basic housekeeping chores needed for program manipulation such as on screen help data manipulation file handling output labeling printer control and control file actions The last two sub groups contain commands specific to the SIGNAL2000 program The first RESULTS consists of active commands which produce specific SIGNAL2000 results The other PARAMETERS consists of all of the commands which can be used to enter the data values which describe the scenarios to be analyzed by the RESULTS commands The PARAMETERS group has another standard TEAPAC
52. adequate The following is a method which allows more complete analysis of this condition if desired SIGNAL2000 50 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES The basic method is to determine what turning volume is likely to turn from the shared lane and to adjust the saturation flow rate computations to reflect this number The analysis proceeds specifying to SIGNAL2000 a single exclusive turn lane and the through lane not being shared with this turn lane A phasing and G C estimates are also entered The GOVERCS command is then used to determine how much G C is required by the two adjacent lane groups the exclusive turn lane and the through lane group By comparing these G C requirements at the level of service expected to be experienced the number of turning vehicles operating from the through lane group can be deduced This is then accounted for by using the FACTORS command for the two lane groups to increase the capacity of the single exclusive turn lane to effectively account for the additional capacity gained from turners in the through lane group and to decrease the capacity of the through lane group The following formulas can be used to determine these factors Ftrn K Gth Fth K Gtrn Vth Gtrn Ytrn Sth Vth Vern where Firn factor to apply to calculation of turning lane saturation flow rate Fth factor to apply to calculation of through lane group saturation flow rate K constant for calculations
53. appendix includes the 22 basic TEAPAC commands as well as the unique SIGNAL2000 commands Five specific categories of information are provided for each command as described below COMMAND lt Parameter Name gt 5 lt Another Parameter gt Defaults default for lt Parameter Name gt 5 default for lt Another Parameter gt Menus Groups lt menu group name gt This section shows the proper usage format of the command including the parameter values and their order of input The command is in capital letters and parameter names are in angle brackets lt and gt An integer followed by an asterisk indicates that the parameter can be repeated the specified number of times five times in the example Below the command line each of the default values for each parameter is shown followed by a list of any menu group names to which the command belongs other than ALL This is followed by a description of the purpose of the command For each parameter listed a separate paragraph provides a complete description of the parameter its allowed values and its default value All of the parameters descriptions are followed by a section of Notes which describe any special information warnings and other hints to insure the proper use of the command Appendix B Topics Appendix B Introduction Alphabetical List of Commands SIGNAL2000 B 69 Reference Alphabetical List of Commands Commands ACTUATIONS ADTFACTOR ANALY
54. as such the HCM Model 1 is the default model of SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL2000 C 202 Reference SIGNAL2000 calculates queues using four basic model structures the 2000 HCM model the ARRB model the MBQ model and the SIGNAL97 model Several variations of these models are computed as described below bringing the number of models calculated to eight The basis of the variatiions revolve around whether the average or percentile queue value is calculated and whether constant or user input vehicle spacings are used The following tabulates the characteristics of each of the eight models used followed by a detailed description of each model 1 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane XXth Percentile Queue 3 ARRB ARRB MBQ Worst Lane 95th Percentile Queue 4 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane Average Queue 6 MBQ Historical MBQ Average Lane Average Queue 7 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 8 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 9 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue 10 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue In the following discussions the term maximum back of queue MBQ queue model is used to indicate the maximum extent of queued vehicles back from the stop bar and the term maximum queue length MQL is used to indicate the maximum number of vehicles in queue It must be understood that the MBQ value refers to a point
55. assumed sequence of operation SEQ and assumed cycle length CYC are listed The adjusted volumes vehicles per hour and lane group width assignments feet used to calculate the g C requirements are then listed for each movement The number of lanes in each lane group follows the width separated with a slash The required g C value is displayed in percent for each lane group This value represents the g C requirement for the protected phase for left turns in protected permitted operation In addition the maximum cycle length which will allow all left turns to clear the intersection using only the terminating clearance interval is calculated in seconds LT Cmax If the operating cycle length is less than or equal to this cycle length all of the left turn demand will be able to clear the intersection on clearance intervals with no time specifically allocated to the left turn sneakers The range of level of service included in this report is controlled by the LEVELOFSERVICE command This report is also an optional output of the DESIGN command when extra DESIGN output is requested The following is an example of the Required g Cs and LT Clearance Cycles text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files t
56. be achieved by a DESIGN and can be any integer delay from 1 to 100 seconds Its default value is 5 seconds lt Target v c gt is the desired or target v c of operation of the critical movements and can be any integer v c from 0 to 300 percent Its default value is 90 percent v c 0 90 lt Max v c gt is the worst amount of v c to be considered before an optimization is abandoned and a solution is forced and can be any integer v c from 0 to 300 percent Its default value is 100 percent v c 1 00 lt v c Incr gt is the increment of v c which should be used to reach the lt Max v c gt if the lt Target v c gt cannot be achieved by a DESIGN Its default value is 5 percent Notes For DESIGN the lt Target Delay LOS gt entry of the LEVELOFSERVICE command sets the target delay or level of service which is to be achieved for all critical movements of the intersection If this target level is achieved with excess time still available at the intersection then the excess time is assigned to the phases according to the entries on the EXCESS command If no EXCESS entries have been made time is allocated proportionally to all phases However if EXCESS is used this provides a means to designate a worst case delay LOS performance level for all critical movements and to assign all additional time to the priority movements of the EXCESS command This is the preferred optimization scheme for the DESIGN function of SIGNAL2000 see Appendix
57. been fixed gt V7 00 14 Improved Support for PDF Creation Difficulties producing PDF files for formatted output reports with certain PDF writers have been resolved gt V7 00 14 Improved Constraint In Use of SUBSYSTEM Function SIGNAL2000 H 314 Reference The use of the drag function in the main window network display to create or edit a SUBSYSTEM has been constrained for better consistency with the allowed use of the SUBSYSTEM feature based on the program s licensed Usage Level This prevents inadvertent setting of the SUBSYSTEM which then causes an error when opening a file which has this feature saved gt V7 00 14 Maximum Link Length Increased from 9999 to 32000 The maximum link length allowed by all TEAPAC programs has been increased from 9 999 feet lt 2 miles to 32 000 feet gt 6 miles and a warning message is now issued if a link is created in the main window network display that exceeds this limit gt V7 00 14 File OpenMerge Function Enhanced The File OpenMerge function has been enhanced in several ways as follows First if a file being merged contains information about a bitmap file and its scaling this information is ignored in deference to the bitmap scaling information currently in effect in the program The help strings for this function have also been updated and the function is initialized more completely each time it is used to avoid overlap with responses to previous error situations gt V7 00 14
58. c for all critical movements lt max v c gt the max amount of v c for critical movements before giving up lt v c increment gt the increment of v c used to move from target to maximum SIGNAL2000 H 334 Reference The optimization will first attempt to balance the delay of the critical movements at the target delay value If this is possible any excess time will be allocated proportionally to phases which support the priority movements defined on the EXCESS entry or all phases if no EXCESS is defined If the target cannot be reached repeated attempts will be made to balance delay at subsequent delay values using the delay increment provided If the maximum delay is reached without a solution the optimization moves to the v c targets provided with the same incremental process If the maximum v c cannot be satisfied then a Saturated solution LOS S is forced using the last v c target attempt as a starting point LOS letters are still accepted for the first two delay entries This new strategy accomplishes several important benefits 1 Any delay target can be specified not just a delay value that defines a LOS boundary eg 35 55 and 80 for LOS C D and E 2 A delay target greater than 80 LOS E boundary can be specified if this is a desired objective 3 When a given target is not attained the smaller allowed increment of delay between LOS boundaries permits much better balancing of delay levels when these critical delays
59. command discussed the first line of a command header provides the basic usage format of the command dialog as shown in the sample format below COMMAND lt Parameter Value gt 5 lt Another Parameter gt Parameter values which are enclosed by angle brackets lt and gt indicate that the bracketed description is to be replaced by a parameter value as described If a command requires more than one parameter value of the same type this is represented by an asterisk preceded by the number of entries expected or allowed In the example above as many as five of lt Another Parameter gt can be entered This command header is then followed by a summary which describes the main purpose of the command Details of the command s usage are found in Appendix B Remember that each SIGNAL2000 command has been classified into one or more groups which share functional similarities Appendix A provides a tabular summary of all commands assigned to each command group Appendix B provides a detailed table of information for each command listed in alphabetical order Appendices A and B can be used as reference documents when questions arise regarding any given group or command Refer to Chapter 4 TEAPAC Command Structure in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for a detailed discussion of group names and their uses Chapter 4 Topics Chapter 4 Introduction RESULTS Dialogs SIGNAL2000 34 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PA
60. dialog and select Yes In this case the INTERSECTION command will be issued for you for that intersection If you do not know the intersection number you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the INTERSECTION command to select an intersection from the NODELIST and re enter the input value for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the INTERSECTION command TPC62 WARNING An INTERSECTION must be given before this DATA can be listed Enter here This message indicates that an INTERSECTION number has not been selected prior to the request to list a DATA value When a data value is to be listed with DATA for a specific intersection that intersection number must first be selected with the INTERSECTION entry before the value can be listed If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which intersection s data to list Action If you know the intersection number you intend to be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the INTERSECTION command will be issued for you for that intersection If you do not know the intersection number you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the INTERSECTION command to select an intersection from the NODELIST and re enter the DATA request for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the INTERSECTION command TPC63 ERROR This INTERSECTION number is not in the NODELIS
61. entries are saved in such a way that they will be restored previously blank entries were ignored leaving the prior entry The option to use F in a title line entry is noted in the input dialog gt TED Edit Window Available in Advanced Edit Option of File Menu Option to edit current open file 1 contents directly particularly for control files also option to open a different file into the editor converts to TEAPAC format when Saved CONVERT exe no longer needed for small files available only when licensed copy of TED is installed Upon saving the edits option to open the edited file into the program e g to Launch an edited control file SIGNAL2000 H 343 Reference gt Printer Setup Supported Directly in File Menu Option to Setup printer only or Setup and Print ability to select printer and printer options while in the program prior method only allowed printing to current selected printer and option Toolbar button and Ctrl P accelerator print immediately with current setup Same print options are provided in the File menu of the Output window gt Improved Context Sensitive Help Features Tooltip popup help has been added for any dialog box input field or button display after delay when mouse cursor hovers over input field or button Status line help also appears for the input field with the input cursor HELP in manual mode for a single command displays the relevant part of HLP As before Help button or F1 key to display the rel
62. exceeded the input field width thus preventing them from executing properly These included drop down lists in the OUTPUT CONDITIONS GENERATION and PATHDISTRIBUTION dialogs The field widths of all of these entries have been modified to accept the full drop down list pre programmed entries gt Extra Warning Message Eliminated When Opening New Files If a user is warned about unsaved data or results values when a new file is about to be opened with an option to first save the values certain circumstances could cause the same message to be re displayed a second time regardless of the user response to the first message This duplicate warning message has been eliminated gt Debug Value Removed from Display for Text Search Function A spurious debug value was inadvertently left in the production version of the program displaying each time a text string is searched for in any output window or edit window The debug display has been removed gt Key Files Are Now Valid for All Prior Versions of Program The key file processing logic has been enhanced to allow a given key file to be used not only for various builds and minor updates for the licensed version but also for any version of the program prior to the licensed version This minimizes the hassle of multiple key file management when multiple versions of a program are being used for example to maintain consistency in results throughout the course of a project which was begun with an ol
63. following the line of the file which was last accessed This is usually the line number which follows the last information LOADed or SAVEd When a FILES command is given the next line for the specified file is automatically set equal to one The next line can be changed by use of the NEXTLINES command The next file default is defined as the file whose number is one greater than the file number currently in use The keyboard should be considered file 0 for this purpose Thus the default file number for a SAVE from the keyboard is file 1 If a SAVE command is encountered in file 1 its next file default is file 2 etc If lt Line Number gt is entered as 0 the SAVE will start at the last line The last line is defined as the last point in the file where file access was previously initiated For example LOAD 10 followed later by SAVE 0 will re SAVE the information LOADed at line 10 see Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual SAVE will always put a RETURN command into the file after the last command of the list for subsequent LOADs If the first parameter in lt List of Commands gt is PARAMETERS then PROJECT DESCRIPTION NOTE and RESET will be saved in the file at the SIGNAL2000 B 169 Reference SAVE SAVE specified line number before the lt List of Commands gt and RETURN is saved This is the case when the default condition is used A negative lt Line Number gt of n will start the
64. giving the lt File Number gt of the file to be used This error will occur if the lt File Number gt parameter value used is not between and 5 inclusive Other file access commands such as OUTPUT use the lt File Number gt parameter in a similar fashion Action Re specify the command which is referencing an improper lt File Number gt with the correct lt File Number gt TPC13 ERROR File number xxxxx is not defined by the FILES command File access aborted TEAPAC programs can access from one to five data files at a given time These five files are specified by the use of the FILES command Each file is numbered from one to five in the order they are entered with the FILES command Commands such as LOAD and SAVE direct the program to these files by giving the lt File Number gt of the file to be used This error will occur if the lt File Number gt parameter of a command references a position of the FILES command which is not currently defined This error typically occurs when the FILES command is not used to define a lt File Number gt before referencing its use in a LOAD or SAVE command It may also occur if an incorrect lt File Number gt was specified Action First define the lt File Name gt for the lt File Number gt being referenced with the FILES command then re issue the file access command or re issue the file access command with the correct lt File Number gt TEAPAC F 284 Reference TPC14 ERROR Requested file nu
65. handled one intersection in each data file it will be desirable to merge all of these files into a single file in SIGNAL2000 Version 2 This can be done quite easily by opening each prior file using the File OpenShared menu as long as each of the intersections loaded used a different intersection number or no number at all in which case you will be prompted to enter a number The list of intersection numbers to be used can be entered in the NODELIST in advance of the OpenShared or the user will be prompted to automatically add each intersection number to the end of the NODELIST as new numbers are encountered When all intersections have been loaded use File SaveAs to save the single combined file into a new file name If OpenShared is not used the possibility of losing all data previously entered into Version 2 exists due to the way the older versions initialized the older programs if Version 1 files are being Opened this condition is detectable and a warning is issued to that effect gt Explicit Ability to Represent Nema style Controllers When entering or viewing controller timings a new Convert button appears on the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES dialogs which allows the user to select the style of entry or view either By Phase which is the traditional HCM method or By Movement which is more similar to the way timings are used on NEMA and other dual ring controllers If any timings are present they will be converted to the other fo
66. has indicated that the terminology was confusing and likely to be interpreted in the reverse of its intent so the use of the terms Ilane and multi in this report has been swapped accordingly gt Better formatting for Detailed cycle output for DESIGN 0 The Detailed output report for the DESIGN 0 optimization for additional cycle optimization results has been improved so it shows all of the results for each cycle which was optimized gt Dialogs identify need for consistency between Yellowtimes amp ReqClearances The dialogs for GreenTimes and YellowTimes have been updated with additional text to clarify the importance of maintaining a consistency between the YellowTimes and ReqClearances entries This consistency is especially important when the entry format is Converted from By Phase to By Movement and when Exporting to ring based software gt Generic changes made to all Ver 7 81 TEAPAC programs Allow negative percentage on ASSIGNMENT for Passbys and Diverted trips Use Shift while dragging mouse to define development area on network display Dialogs identify need for consistency between Yellowtimes amp ReqClearances Display dummy node dot and node number if it is current node or in Subsystem Note in CrdSysMgmt dialog that NewLinkDist button assumes coords are in feet Able to save from OpenIntoEdit if it was first file opened into program NOTE shows Issue X Not Selected when case selection does not select an Issu
67. intersection ENDGAIN 12 lt End Gain Time gt Enter the length of time that vehicles effectively extend the green period into the yellow and all red period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection STORAGE 12 lt Storage Distance gt Enter the amount of storage distance for queued vehicles for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection INITIALQUEUE 12 lt Initial Queue Size gt Enter the number of vehicles queued at the intersection at the start of the analysis period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection IDEALSATFLOWS 12 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt Enter the base ideal saturation flow rate for each movement of the current intersection FACTORS 12 lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt Enter satflow adjustment factors for each movement of the current intersection to adjust 2000 Highway Capacity Manual satflow computations DELAYFACTORS 12 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt Enter factors for each movement of the current intersection used to adjust the delay calculations for example to match delays obtained from a network simulation model NSTOPFACTORS 12 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt Enter twelve factors used to adjust the number of stops calculations of the EVALUATE report of the current intersection for example to match the number of stops obtained from a network simulation model SATURATIONFLOWS 12 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt Store the results of
68. is generated during analysis functions like ANALYZE and DESIGN if the calculated average lane width is less than 8 0 feet No extrapolation is allowed below this limiting value SIGNAL2000 B 193 Reference YELLOWTIMES YELLOWTIMES YELLOWTIMES 6 lt Phase Yellow Time gt Defaults 6 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC PHASING ANALYZE The purpose of this command is to enter the clearance interval at the end of each phase of a phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection lt Phase Yellow Time gt is the duration of the clearance interval after each phase or movement in seconds or seconds second and can be any number from 0 to 900 Its default value is 0 0 seconds If the list of YELLOWTIMES is preceded by the keyword Movmt then each of the entered values will be interpreted as timings for individual through and left turn movements clockwise around the intersection If not or the optional keyword Phase is used each value is for the phases defined by the SEQUENCE code When entering or viewing controller timings a Convert button appears on the YELLOWTIMES dialog which allows the user to select the style of entry or view either By Phase which is the traditional HCM method or By Movement which is more similar to the way timings are used on NEMA and other dual ring controllers If any timings are present they will be converted to the other format at the same time including Y
69. is the grade of the approach in percent either positive or negative and can be any number from 10 to 10 Its default value is 0 Notes Approaches that run uphill into the intersection have a positive grade for this input Downhill approaches have a negative grade SIGNAL2000 B 108 Reference GREENTIMES GREENTIMES GREENTIMES 6 lt Phase Green Time gt Defaults 6 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC PHASING ANALYZE The purpose of this command is to enter the duration of green for each of the phases of a specified phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection lt Phase Green Time gt is the duration of green for the phase or movement given in either seconds or seconds second and can be any number from 0 to 900 Its default value is 0 0 seconds Notes If the list of GREENTIMES is preceded by the keyword Movmt then each of the entered values will be interpreted as timings for individual through and left turn movements clockwise around the intersection If not or the optional keyword Phase is used each value is for the phases defined by the SEQUENCE code When entering or viewing controller timings a Convert button appears on the GREENTIMES dialog which allows the user to select the style of entry or view either By Phase which is the traditional HCM method or By Movement which is more similar to the way timings are used on NEMA and other dual ring controlle
70. led to the new queue model in the HCM2000 the HCM2000 contractor omitted a number of critical constraints which must be applied when making the computations of that model Not using these constraints has led to irrational results in some cases including extremely large queue values negatvie queues and even program crashes Although these problems could have been observed under many different circumstances they occurred predominantly when arrival types other than 3 were used and or when conditions were oversaturated An addenda in the form of an official interpretaion from the Capacity Committee will formally amend these missing constraints to the HCM SIGNAL2000 now uses these new constraints and produces much more sensible results under these conditions The underlying theory which leads to these constraints for the HCM queue model also apply to the calculation of delay so the same constraints will be imposed by the Committee on the HCM SIGNAL2000 H 345 Reference delay equations In this case however they are much less likely to cause any change in results due to other limits which are already present in the delay methodology of the HCM2000 Also several of the other queue models supported by SIGNAL2000 via the QueueCalcs function had the ability to generate very large results which might overflow the computation and or display limits of the program resulting in a crash These results have been trapped and are displayed with asterisks
71. link is added to this calculation and flagged with an L to the right of the displayed results CO Emissions If the approach speed of lane groups is input with the NETWORK command an estimate of the total carbon monoxide CO emissions in kilograms during the analysis period is calculated for the idling time and accel decel to and from the approach speed If link distance is also input the freeflow emissions on this link is added to this calculation and flagged with an L to the right of the displayed results Queue Calculations Queue calculations are reported separately first by movement and intersection total then by approach and intersection total SIGNAL2000 D 258 Reference Queue X The queue value for each lane group is reported for the user selected queue model The model used is listed in the row heading as a number from 1 to 10 according to the model number which has been selected by the corresponding QUEUEMODELS entry Each of the 10 possible queue models is documented in detail in Appendix C The first row of queue displayed is the number of queued vehicles in a single lane of the lane group The second row is the queue distance in feet for that lane The queue model selected will define what queue formulation is used MBQ or MQL whether the queue is for the worst or the average lane and whether the queue is an average or percentile queue The default queue model is 1 representing the recommended 2000 Highway Capacity Manu
72. lt Number of Lanes gt is the number of lanes which are allocated for use by each movement and can be any integer from 0 to 10 Its default value is 0 Notes Values for this command are automatically generated each time a new lane width is given on a WIDTHS command The number of lanes generated is defined by the tens digit of the approach width in feet Approach widths of less than ten feet and greater than zero are assumed to have one lane Thus usage of the LANES command is necessary only for those lanes where this assumption of number of lanes is not appropriate Turning movements which turn from both exclusive turn lanes and shared through lanes should make use of the GROUPTYPES entry to define this condition which SIGNAL2000 calls dual optional lane usage SIGNAL2000 B 119 Reference LEADLAGS LEADLAGS LEADLAGS 2 lt Lead Lag Phasing gt Defaults 2 NONE Menus Groups PARAMETERS PHASING The purpose of this command is to enter the order of the phases particularly in multiphase operation of the current intersection lt Lead Lag Phasing gt is a keyword which in multi phase operation specifies whether the exclusive phase s usually turning phase precede s or follow s the through phase and can be any of the following NONE no exclusive turn phase s exist or if they do they will LEAD default LEAD exclusive turn phase s precede s the through phase LAG exclusive turn phase s follow s the through phase
73. may be unknowns and that SIGNAL2000 is to optimize these parameter values within the stated constraints of the inputs When the DESIGN command is used any input GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are completely ignored and the optimum greens and yellows are determined by SIGNAL2000 These optimum timings are constrained by the MINIMUMS and REQCLEARANCES command values which place these timing requirement constraints on the determination of the optimum timings If the cycle length is a known value the CYCLES command should show this as both the minimum and maximum cycle length to be DESIGNed in which case the DESIGN command will determine the best possible timings for that cycle length If a range of cycle lengths is acceptable this range should be denoted on the CYCLES command prior to the DESIGN using an appropriate cycle increment in which case DESIGN will attempt optimizations for all of the cycles allowed If the phasing is a known sequence the SEQUENCES command should show this as the only sequence to be DESIGNed in which case the DESIGN command will determine the best possible timings for that sequence of operation as well as the allowed range of cycles If a number of sequences are allowed as in the case of an actuated controller or the design of a new controller the allowed sequences should be listed in the SEQUENCES command and DESIGN will optimize all of the sequences for the allowed range of cycles If the single keyword ALL is used on t
74. models have been modified to provide an estimate of the desired queue value in order to avoid a possible crash when these conditions are encountered Build 00 07DEC00 gt SIGNAL2000 Hits the Street SIGNAL2000 is the first piece of software available which implements the procedures of Chapter 16 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual HCM released concurrently with the publication of the 2000 HCM by the Transportation Research Board Over two years in the making and based on its popular predecessors SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 SIGNAL85 SIGNAL2000 goes one major step further than the procedures of Chapter 16 SIGNAL2000 also optimizes the phasings and timings of an intersection to produce the best possible capacity analysis like SIGNAL97 has done previously gt New Features Offered by SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL2000 offers many new features above and beyond those available in SIGNAL97 These features are discussed in the following paragraphs gt New 2000 HCM Methods Implemented The basic methodology of the 2000 HCM for signalized intersections has been implemented in the SIGNAL2000 program The changes over the 1997 HCM method consist primarily of the addition of the new queue model offered by the HCM the new detailed modeling of pedestrian and bicycle interference on vehicular traffic a new model for shared lane protected permitted left turns and completely revised and detailed worksheet formats Of particular interest the new HCM queue model in A
75. most significant and obvious change made to each TEAPAC program in Version 6 is that all programs now share a single common data file structure that contains all of the data entries used by all TEAPAC programs This means that any TEAPAC program except NOSTOP and TUTOR can open any file from any other TEAPAC program make changes to any of the data values it contains and re Save the file with complete retention of all data values for future use by any other TEAPAC program The first implication of this major fundamental change is that the concept of File OpenShare of earlier TEAPAC programs is no longer needed since the sharing of TEAPAC files among TEAPAC programs is now fundamental and automatic File OpenShare has been re named to File OpenMerge Share to better reflect its current function to merge the content of multiple files and can still be used to read and merge the content of files from older versions of SIGNAL97 SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 SITE TURNS and WARRANTS OpenMerge is automatic when reading these files Also the warning message when saving to a file created by one of these other programs has been removed again because this function is now standard procedure and has no risk of loss of data The second implication of this change is that any values computed by one program and to be used by another such as peak period volumes from TURNS HCM satflows from SIGNAL2000 optimized signal timings and phasings from SIGNAL2000 projected tra
76. nearest 1 vehicle except the last which should be ROUNDed to the desired precision SIGNAL2000 B 166 Reference ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE lt Route gt _ lt List of Artery Nodes gt Defaults Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter a list of node numbers which represent the intersections on the artery for the given route number lt Route gt is the number of the route which is defined by the following list of artery nodes and can be any integer from 1 to 8 It has no default value and must be entered lt List of Artery Nodes gt is a list of up to 25 node numbers in the current NODELIST SUBSYSTEM whose order defines the artery route It can be any node number in the NODELIST SUBS YSTEM from 0 to 999 It has no default value and must be entered Notes For TRANSYT card types 42 43 and 6X will be generated for all routes defined by the ROUTE command only if the version of TRANSYT 7F being used is Release 7 or higher If the route turns a corner exclusive turning links are used where applicable The card type 43 produces weightings for each direction on each route based on the average movement volume not link volume in each direction on the routes The left to right direction of the first route always gets a 100 percent weight while the other direction and other routes get weightings in proportion to this base volume The card types 60 and 61 which are produced request all possible post ana
77. new Coordinate System section of the Setup button dialog in the main window the problem would manifest itself with upstream connections to the wrong node and or incorrect distances Creation of most T intersections were not affected by this problem If an old TEAPAC data file saved from a program prior to Visual TEAPAC was opened using a LinkTo drag to or from a command line a crash could result when an attempt was made by the program to update the Nodelist format to the new save format This problem has been resolved Build 21 27JUL06 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS5 Build 07 1LNOVO5 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt Improved Modeling of Unopposed Left Turns For unopposed left turns the right turn model is no longer used as in previous HCM versions since this condition is handled properly by the Ped Bike model for left turns This change will only produce noticeably different results when a left turn is both unopposed by vehicular traffic this is not the same as a protected movement and opposed by a significant volume of peds or bikes SIGNAL2000 H 310 Reference gt V7 00 21 Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 releases of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 00 Build 21 These are documented below and use heading lines that begin with V7 00
78. number and description added at the top of the report if not already included Errors warnings and progress messages have also had the intersection number added gt Preview of Pending TEAPAC Interface Version 6 Changes Interface Version 5 10 A number of generic enhancements which will appear in all TEAPAC programs as TEAPAC Interface Version 6 are being previewed in SIGNAL2000 Version 2 Licensees of this version will be entitled to receive free updates to the Version 6 release when it is made official These enhancements are described below gt Output and Edit Window Management Changes The output window has been vastly enhanced with a number of important new features which the user will find helpful These are 1 The output window can be left open to accept additional subsequent output in situations where having all the output together in one place will make its assessment easier such as multiple capacity analyses or optimizations listed in the same window for easier comparison and or printing 2 The maximum size of output held in the output window has been increased from a nominal amount to a virtually unlimited amount limited only by available memory and to some extent processor speed 3 Toolbar buttons and status bar tool tip help has been added for all output window menu items 4 The output generated by long calculations such as DESIGN or multi intersection computations can be viewed progressively in the output window as they are g
79. of unsaved calculated and or imported values is indicated in the window caption with an asterisk in the same fashion as changed user entry values In the case of SIGNAL2000 the protected values are the calculated SATURATIONFLOWS and or optimized CYCLES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES CRITICALS and or SEQUENCES A similar message is now issued when File Open or Reset Parameters is used when edited calculated and or imported values have not been saved gt Edit Window Contents Can Be Printed Including Line Numbers The contents of the TED Edit window either within TED or the built in edit window in any TEAPAC program can now be printed using the normal print menu or toolbar buttons including line numbers gt Global Entry of Additional Sequence Codes Now Includes All Extra Codes The entry of additional sequence codes for intersection 0 to be assigned to all intersections has been expanded so that all extra sequence codes will be assigned to all intersections not just the first extra sequence code This allows added flexibility when using this global entry feature for SEQUENCES gt VOLADDITIONALS Values Now Allowed to be Negative The entry or computed values for VOLADDITIONALS is now allowed to have negative values with a complete input range permitted from 9999 to 9999 This is primarily to afford the possibility of re assignments of traffic to result in a net reduction of volume for individual movements either by manual entry or c
80. on the pavement where the last queued vehicle is located and when it is described in vehicles per lane it is meant to describe that position on the pavement as if that number of vehicles were actually standing in line from the stop bar back to that point when in reality it is the only queued vehicle since all other previously queued vehicles have already re started The MBQ inherently occurs at a point in time somewhat after the end of red since time must pass in order for all prior queued vehicles to depart In contrast the MQL inherently occurs exactly at the end of the red period since this is when the greatest number of queued vehicles will exist It can also be said that for a given percentile the MBQ value will always exceed the MQL value A variable of general concern in all of the queue models is whether the queue value is determined for the worst lane or the average lane of a multi lane lane group The worst lane is the lane of the lane group with the highest volume as defined by the lane utliization factor Each model is specifically for one or the other of these conditions Another variable of general concern is whether the queue model calculates an average queue value or a percentile queue value The average queue means that if the queue of concern was observed in the field N times the calculated value would be an estimate of the average of those N observations the sum of all observations divided by N A percentile queue valu
81. otherwise unsafe condition will be handled safely on the street SIGNAL2000 B 155 Reference PHASEMOVEMENTS PHASEMOVEMENTS PHASEMOVEMENTS lt Phase Number gt lt List of Movements gt Defaults 000000 Menus Groups PARAMETERS PHASING The purpose of this command is to enter the movements permitted during each phase for a non standard phasing for the current intersection lt Phase Number gt is the number of the phase within the sequence of phases for the following list of movements and can be 0 6 There is no default for lt Phase Number gt it must be entered lt List of Movements gt is the movement number occurring during the specified phase and can be 0 12 3 6 9 or 12 Its default value is 0 Notes This is used for phasings that are not included in the standard sequence codes SEQUENCES 1 through 9 must be used in order for PHASEMOVEMENTS entries to be recognized Operational DESIGNS and EXPORTs cannot be performed for a sequence defined by the PHASEMOVEMENTS Capacity Analysis and Evaluation can be performed with ANALYZE and EVALUATE however when data is presented in a proper manner Movements must receive only one constant green indication during each cycle All movements in a common direction e g North South must appear in adjacent phases which do not overlap the beginning and end phases Negative movement numbers should be used only to indicate permitted lefts following or pre
82. overwriting an existing file the loss of valuable data may result In order to eliminate these potential file management problems TEAPAC programs use two switches N and O to indicate the intention of creating a new disk data file If a data file is expected to already exist a switch is not required The N switch is used to automatically create a New data file that doesn t already exist without any error or user query If the N option is used and a data file already exists for lt File Name gt a warning message will be displayed stating that the lt File Name gt already exists This protects the user from accidentally over writing an existing file when a new file was expected If no switch is used the TEAPAC program will expect to find an existing data file on the designated disk drive If there is no existing data file for lt File Name gt a warning message will be displayed indicating the file can not be located This protects the user from accidentally creating a new file when an existing file was expected to exist probably identifying a spelling error in the file name If a requested file does not exist and the N Switch is not used the user will be prompted as to whether to allow the program to create the data file anyway This effectively eliminates the need to use the N Switch the program will create a new file if prompted to do so even when N is not used Conversely if a requested file exists and the N Switch is use
83. phasing has been augmented by preventing the inadvertant use of negative numbers for through and right turn movements gt Modeling for Special Case of Permitted Left Turn Corrected An obscure special case of the Single Lane Approach permitted left turn model has been implemented whereby if the opposing single lane approach has a left turn volume of zero the calculated value of gdiff is set to zero Although occurence of this case is rare when it does occur this new model will produce a different and more reasonble result according to the methods of the HCM gt Improved Modeling of MOE s in EVALUATE for Protected Permitted Left Turns The HCM2000 queue model specifies a special averaging method to determine a single value of satflow for protected permitted left turns for use in various traffic calculations such a v s For consistency this technique has been extended into the other MOE calculations in the EVALUATE report along with the total g C for the combined phases This technique is arguably a superior way to estimate the effect of combined protected permitted phasing on MOE calculations such as fuel consumption CO emissions vehicles stops etc SIGNAL2000 H 347 Reference SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 00 120CT00 Build 02 26DECO00 gt Queue Model Adjustment for Grossly Oversaturated Conditions Queue models 7 and 8 cannot be evaluated for grossly oversaturated conditions without exceeding the computational limits of most PC s These queue
84. plus all red time are typically in the range of 4 6 seconds this default condition may result in lost times considerably higher than the default lost time value of 3 0 seconds which was used in the 1985 and 1994 Highway Capacity Manuals When this is the case users should expect less effective green time for these movements versus those used in comparable 1985 and 1994 analyses which will result in higher v c and delay values and thus likely worse levels of service SIGNAL2000 B 98 Reference EVALUATE EVALUATE EVALUATE Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE DESIGN The purpose of this command is to display a performance evaluation for a specified phasing and timings for the current intersection or all intersections It has no parameters Notes e Before this command can be properly executed the phasing and timings must have been previously set This can be accomplished through use of the SEQUENCES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CYCLE commands or the TIMINGS command SIGNAL2000 B 99 Reference EXCESS EXCESS EXCESS lt List of Priority Movement Numbers gt Defaults 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION DESIGN The purpose of this command is to enter the movements to which the TIMINGS command will assign available excess portions of the cycle length for the current intersection lt List of Priority Movement Numberss gt is the movement numbers for the movements which should receive available excess time a
85. problem during optimization Another example is when a significantly over saturated analysis is performed the aproach and intersection total delay values might overflow causing similar crash potential for the Evaluate function Lastly if certain inadequate signal timings have been entered for a capacity analysis division by zero can result in the attempt to verify the inputs All of these conditions are now detected before they occur so that a less catastrophic message can be issued as necessary and the analysis can proceed without interruption gt Further Enhancements to Ver 5 12 Interface The Ver 5 12 TEAPAC interface found in most TEAPAC programs has been further refined with additional features to aid in the analysis process These include 1 saving the current intersection in the data file so that when the file is re opened the same current intersection is re established rather than always being pointed to the last intersection in the Nodelist 2 providing the ability to scale a bitmap background for a single intersection analysis by right clicking on a point 100 feet from the intersection and 3 providing a Clear button on the Subsytem and Route dialogs so that the lists displayed can be removed with a single click SIGNAL2000 H 329 Reference Build 10 31DEC03 gt Further Enhancements to Ver 5 1x Interface If a NODELIST entry is read from a Shared file the new NODELIST is appended to the current NODELIST instead of repla
86. ratio average distance available storage for each lane group XX distance The percentile distance occupied by queued vehicles in each lane group in feet for the percentile level shown XX ratio The percentile queue storage ratio percentile distance available storage for each lane group for the percentile level shown The following is an example of the HCM Back of Queue Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 250 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Back of Queue Worksheet Queues in N E S W Worst Lanes RT TH L RT CH L RT H L RT TH L Lane group LG RT TH LT RT TH LT RI TH LT RT CH LT Init queue QbL 0 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 Ln flow vL 194 343 139 284 72 275 222 239 263 244 Ln satflow sL 1574 1863 809 1828 1770 1818 728 1583 1863 1770 Ln capacity cL 799 441 320 365 362 430 288 568 372 362 Flow ratio yL 123 184 172 155 041 152 305 151 bad 138 v c ratio XL 243 778 434 777 199 640 771 421 707 674 Effect green g 30 5 14 2 23 7 1230 7123 1422 232 21S 1250 1253 Grn ratio g C 508 237 396 200 204 237 396 359 200 204 Upstr fi
87. representing these typical permitted lists of SEQUENCE codes as follows A represents codes 1 8 This is all possible phasings SIGNAL2000 H 333 Reference B represents codes 1 6 Left turn protection with option for no LT phase C represents codes 4 6 Left turn protection requiring a LT phase for all lefts D represents codes 7 8 Left turn protection using Lead Lag Split phase phasing Thus the example list above 14 15 16 can be entered simply as 1C a list like 11 12 13 14 15 16 can be entered as 1B and all codes can be entered as AA ALL is still allowed gt Definition of Up to 9 Special Phasings Allowed Prior versions of SIGNAL allowed special phasings to be defined for ANALYZE etc but not DESIGN by referencing SEQUENCE code 0 and then using PHASEMOVEMENTS For compatibility with PRETRANSYT etc SEQUENCE codes 1 to 5 were also allowed Now that multiple intersections in the system may require special phasing descriptions the negative notation is a requirement in SIGNAL2000 The number of special phasings has been increased to nine through use of the SEQUENCE codes 1 to 9 gt Seamless Integration with PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM A new LinkTo menu has been created that allows immediate transfer of control to the TEAPAC preprocessors PRENETSIM PRETRANSYT and PREPASSR This transfer of control includes closing the current data file with a prompt to save unsaved data and passing that file to the new program Th
88. saturation flow rate computations of the current intersection When computational commands of the Analysis Mode like ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS GOVERCS and SERVICEVOLUMES are executed the calculated saturation flows are dumped into this command Commands to Enter Phasing Data The following are commands which can be used to describe the phasing at the current intersection Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above SEQUENCES lt Sequence Code gt lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt SIGNAL2000 42 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter the desired and allowed phasings of the traffic signal of the current intersection according to the codes defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 PERMISSIVES 4 lt Permissive Left gt Enter an option for each approach of the current intersection identifying the permissability of left turning traffic to turn on a through phase following or preceding an exclusive left turn phase e g a protected permitted left turn or a permitted protected left turn more recently referred to as compound left turn phasing OVERLAPS 4 lt Right Turn Overlap gt Enter how right turn overlaps are to be handled for each approach of the current intersection LEADLAGS 2 lt Lead Lag Phasing gt Enter the order of the phases particularly in multiphase operation of the current intersection CYCLES lt Minimum Cycle gt lt Maximum Cycle gt lt Cycle Increment g
89. shared lane as an exclusive turn lane group but the computations continue as specified Action Verify that the lane usage has been input properly and that the high turn percentage is appropriate for continued analysis S2K04 WARNING The thru equivalent of the xx left turn suggests a Defacto LT Lane analysis This warning indicates that the Defacto Left Turn Lane check calculations indicate that the shared through turn lane probably behaves like an exclusive turn lane and should be analyzed as such The program does not make the defacto left turn adjustment automatically however allowing the computations to proceed so that the user can compare this analysis with one where the defacto lane adjustment is made manually by the user according to his professional judgment Action Verify that the lane usage used is appropriate and alternatively conduct another analysis assigning the left hand through lane to exclusive use by left turning vehicles S2K06 WARNING No sequence codes have been successfully DESIGNed so none can be ANALYZEd This warning indicates that an attempt was made via the DESIGN command to ANALYZE sequences following their design where no successful sequences were DESIGNed This is requested with the parameter of the DESIGN command It usually suggests that the list of SEQUENCES allowed for the DESIGN did not include any phasing codes that were determined to be safe by DESIGN This may be particularly prevalent if only one seque
90. single intersection Usage Level 1 of SIGNAL2000 will only perform a capacity analysis for a single intersection Usage Level 2 of SIGNAL2000 includes the optimization feature Usage Level 2 handles up to 12 intersections Usage Level 3 is up to 100 and Usage Level 4 is up to 500 Several additional entries assist in managing the activities which surround multi intersection analyses In Usage Level 3 and above the SUBSYSTEM entry can be used to select a group of intersections which is a subset of the NODELIST for subsequent analysis when INTERSECTION 0 is selected A ROUTE entry can also be used to define up to 8 predefined subsets usually but not limited to arterial routes which can then be used as shortcuts in the SUBSYSTEM entry by entering the negative route number Merging Multiple Version 1 Files Into a Single Version 2 File Since prior versions of SIGNAL2000 and SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 etc handled a single intersection in each data file in many cases it will be desirable to merge all of these files into a single file in SIGNAL2000 Version 2 This can be done quite easily by opening each prior file using the File OpenMerge Shared menu as long as each of the intersections loaded uses a different intersection number or no number at all in which case you will be prompted to enter a number The list of intersection numbers to be used can be entered in the NODELIST in advance of the OpenMerge Shared or the user will be prompted to automati
91. the Diagram of Signal Phasing text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Diagram of Signal Phasing Sq 44 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 a metal 5 wk a gt lt gt lt t lt x v 444 KKKK v North lt lt gt gt y X a i m 2 V SIGNAL2000 D 269 Reference APPENDIX E Error Messages and Trouble Spots Appendix E Topics This appendix contains a description of each error message which the SIGNAL2000 program is capable of issuing that is specific to the SIGNAL2000 program Each SIGNAL2000 program error message is discussed as to the potential cause as well as actions which might be taken to correct the errors Note also that additional error messages can be generated by the TEAPAC package itself or by the operating system environment These error messages are listed separately in Appendices F and G In addition to the SIGNAL2000 error messages discussion of typical problem areas and potential trouble spots is given to further assist in debugging problems with SIGNAL2000 and to help avoid problems in the future Appendix E Topics Appendix E Introdu
92. the computed analysis volume for subsequent analyses will result in 250 vph In summary analysis volumes are computed for performance assessments and design functions as the combination of entered volumes VOLUMES growth factors VOLFACTORS and additive volumes VOLADDITIONALS and adjusted by peak _ hour factors PEAKHOURFACTORS VOLUMES and PEAKHOURFACTORS and SIGNAL2000 C 199 Reference TRUCKPERCENTS can be determined directly by TURNS and WARRANTS from traffic count data including the effect of growth or seasonal factors VOLFACTORS and ignoring any entered VOLUMES PEAKHOURFACTORS or VOLADDITIONALS or TRUCKPERCENTS VOLADDITIONALS can be determined directly by SITE for development scenarios including the effect of growth factors WOLFACTORS on any entered VOLUMES and ignoring any entered VOLADDITIONALS This process makes for a completely seamless integration of all of the TEAPAC programs with respect to consistent traffic volumes used by each program Optimization Scheme The default optimization strategy of SIGNAL2000 is to produce an optimized capacity analysis by setting the phase timings such that each of the critical movements of each phase have approximately the same delay values and thus the same level of service whenever possible By accomplishing this no time can be taken from one phase and given to another without disrupting this balance of delay One condition which may prevent this objective f
93. the cycle length to be used is known a guess at the pedtime for each intersection part must be made and subsequently revised until the desired balance between the performance of each part is obtained If the cycle length is not known in advance this guesswork is a bit more complex since the PEDTIME entry is made in seconds and must be related to a percentage of the cycle length which is not yet know In this case simply guess also at the cycle length which might result before guessing at the pedtime and iterate If the phasing cannot be represented by a standard sequence code then use a similar sequence code so the GOVERCS command can be used to determine the G C requirements for each movement at each level of service Then the GREENTIMES used can be assigned manually to phases of SEQUENCE 0 using these results as a guide Dual Optional Turn Lane Analysis When a shared lane allows turns which also move in an adjacent exclusive turn lane computation of saturation flow and delay is not explicitly covered by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual in that the number of turns in the shared lane must be determined Use of the DUALOPTIONAL option of the GROUPTYPES command provides an automated solution to this problem in an approximate manner by computing the turns in the shared lane in a manner that approximately balances the v c ratios in the affected lane groups without also exceeding the designated lane utilization inputs Frequently this solution is
94. their associated default values For example the VOLUMES command requires volumes for the twelve 12 possible movements at the intersection Since a lot of commands exist getting HELP for a smaller group might be appropriate The BASIC group consists of only those commands which are essential to solving problems with SIGNAL2000 These commands can be viewed by issuing the following command from the Manual Mode HELP BASIC If help for only one command is needed the HELP command will display the same detailed HLP file information for that command which is produced by the Help buttons in Visual Mode dialogs For example use the following Manual Mode entry to obtain complete help for the VOLUMES entry to be made in the next paragraph HELP VOLUMES Now let s enter the information needed to describe the problem The first entry should be the list of valid node numbers for any intersections we will be working with NODELIST This may be a system of connected signals in a network or multiple conditions we want saved in a single file SIGNAL2000 18 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE In any case each intersection we study with TEAPAC must have a unique number in the NODELIST For this example we ll just set up one intersection in the list and call it 1 Basic gt NODELIST 1 The entries below describe the conditions at each individual intersection in the NODELIST Note that the INTERSECTION command selects which int
95. thus are discussed below in separate sections In either mode if an intersection has been selected with the INTERSECTION entry as we did previously the actions requested will be performed for that intersection only If all intersections have been selected by selecting INTERSECTION 0 then the actions requested will be performed for all intersections in the NODELIST one by one in the order listed in the NODELIST Ifa SUBSYSTEM entry has been made Usage Level 3 then when INTERSECTION 0 is selected the actions will be performed only for the SUBSYSTEM intersections and in the order these intersections are found in the NODELIST ANALYZE Inputs The ANALYZE mode means that a complete set of conditions are given in order for the program to produce a capacity analysis This means that in addition to the basic intersection conditions mentioned above including the VOLUMES and WIDTHS the signal phasing and timings must be specified This requires that the SEQUENCES command be used to specify the phasing according to the sequence code method discussed in Chapter 1 and that GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES be given for each phase If the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are given in proportions of the cycle time numbers less than 1 00 then the cycle length must be explicitly stated on the CYCLES command as the first parameter When timings are all given in seconds no cycle time entry is required since the cycle time will be computed as the sum of all phases green
96. time 50 B 194 Analysis 21 ANALYSIS METHODS C 197 analysis period 39 B 173 Analysis Period and the Use of PEAKHOURFACTORS 55 Analysis Procedures 29 Basic 29 Special 31 ANALYZE 21 29 35 38 39 42 43 54 A 62 B 74 B 75 B 89 B 90 B 94 B 101 B 139 B 142 B 156 B 159 B 162 B 168 B 184 C 202 C 209 D 228 D 232 D 236 D 238 D 240 D 242 D 246 D 247 D 249 D 252 D 269 E 273 E 279 Analyze Mode C 209 Inputs 26 Procedures 29 annual growth factor B 191 APPLABELS 37 40 A 63 B 76 ARRIVALTYPE B 73 ARRIVALTYPES 37 41 A 63 B 77 C 208 ASK 11 13 20 46 A 59 A 62 B 78 B 91 B 179 F 289 ASSIGNMENT A 64 asterisk 10 Australian Road Research Board C 204 Authors iii average lane queue C 203 average lane width E 272 B back of queue C 203 balance the v c C 201 357 Index balance the v c values B 94 BASE A 64 B 105 BIKEVOLUMES 40 A 63 B 82 bitmap scale 12 buffer space F 295 BUSVOLUMES 40 A 63 B 83 C CALCULATE 48 A 62 B 84 Calculation of Volumes C 197 calibrate bitmap 12 calibration B 103 capacity analysis 35 B 75 capacity analysis worksheets B 142 CFG file B 104 G 299 changes made to the program 46 B 127 clearance interval 38 B 194 clearance times required 37 41 B 162 clipboard G 303 Close button 9 CO emissions B 132 COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS ABBREVIATED A 59 Detailed B 69 Command Structure A 60 Commands to A
97. time in seconds used by the pedestrians Conflicting ped volume The volume of pedestrians across the intersection leg that conflicts with the left turns in peds per hour Ped flow rate The rate of flow of pedestrians during the effective green period in peds per hour Avg ped occupancy The average pedestrian occupancy based on the ped flow rate Opposing queue clear time The time in seconds it takes the opposing queue to clear from its queued state in seconds Opposing queue g ratio The proportion of the effective ped green time consumed by the opposing queue clear time Ped occupancy after queue Pedestrian occupancy after the opposing queue clears Opposing flow rate Flow rat eof opposing traffic in vehicles per hour Relevant occupancy The relevant occupancy based on pedestrian occupancy and gap availability receiving lanes The number of receiving lanes for the left turn movement turning lanes The number of turning lanes for the left turn movement Adjustment factor The permitted phase pedestrian bicycle adjustment factor Proportion left turns The proportion of left turns in the lane group Prop LT in prot phase The proportion of left turns using the protected phase Ped bike adjust factor The resultant pedestrian bicycle satflow adjustment factor The following is an example of the HCM Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics
98. time given gt New Entries Allowed for Compatibility with PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM and PREPASSR SIGNAL2000 H 339 Reference A number of new entries have been added which match those recently added to the PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM and PREPASSR programs These entries have no impact on the SIGNAL2000 calculations or results but permit their entry with all other input data with SIGNAL2000 so the SIGNAL2000 files can be used directly by these other programs without modification The input summary report has been updated to include the new entries GROUPTYPE can now be used to define lane groups which are sign controlled Permitted values now include Stop and Yield which are control conditions which can be modelled by TRANSYT and CORSIM If an intersection includes lane groups controlled by signs as defined by GROUPTYPES SIGNAL2000 will process the information but will skip any analysis of the intersection with an advisory warning to this effect NETWORK has two new options added at the end of the entry one to define the upstream downstream assignment method to be used on links of a TRANSYT network and the other to define the link curvature for CORSIM SIMULATION has four new options which define various parameters used by TRANSYT CORSIM and PASSER Coordinate values entered via the NODELOCATION entry can now have a range of plus or minus 2 147 483 647 instead of the prior limited range of 9999 to 32 768 This greatly increases the flexibilit
99. txt The Edit CopyAll menu option will copy the entire contents of the Results window to the Windows clipboard which can then be used by any other Windows program such as a text editor or word processor The Edit Copy menu option will copy to the clipboard only that part of the Results window which has been selected by dragging the mouse cursor over a small portion of visible text In the event that too much output has been generated to be displayed by the Results window as in the case of output from a control file the SaveAsText file will contain all of the output even though it cannot all be displayed Some printer drivers and or Windows printing systems may also offer other alternative ways to direct printed output to a file although this will normally not result in a strict ASCII text file like the options above Installing TEAPAC Programs Installation of TEAPAC programs follow the normal Windows practice of running the Setup exe program from the selected program folder of the distribution CD ROM Demos and updates downloaded from the internet install the same way using the downloaded exe file such as S2Kw32 exe for SIGNAL2000 The installation process prompts the user for information about the installation folder etc and performs all the necessary configuration of the Windows environment including icon creation and un install options in the Control Panel The TEAPAC Menu is automatically installed as a part of the process and the default CF
100. use the double quote character or the ampersand character amp anywhere in character entries such as TITLES or INTERSECTION as this will cause data values in the exported file which cannot be read properly by HCS The exception to this rule is the user should specifically use ampersand amp to separate the street names in the INTERSECTION entry e The pedestrians are assumed to walk during the phase with the adjacent through movement if the ped volume is not zero The minimum phase time for those peds is taken as the minimum for that through movement Ped buttons are always set to N since this is not a SIGNAL2000 input In versions of HCS prior to HCS the HCS parking flag is set on only if parking exists on the right side of an approach since these earlier versions of HCS do not treat left side parking e HCS SIG files for Releases 1 x do not save utilization factors used in the analysis Thus it may be necessary to re enter utilizations in the HCS analysis to match those used in the SIGNAL2000 analysis For conversion to HCS SIG input for Releases 1 x the arrival type of the through movement in SIGNAL2000 is used for the approach arrival type in HCS e The heavy vehicle percentage used for each HCS SIG approach is the weighted average percentage of heavy vehicles given for the individual movements in SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL2000 B 102 Reference FACTORS FACTORS FACTORS 12 lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 12
101. used in the field where the overlap phase is not adjacent to the normal right turn indication through phase but that the fundamental assumptions of the delay formulation in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual do not permit the calculations of delays for movements with two distinct green indications each cycle with the single exception of compound left turn phasing see PERMISSIVES so this is not allowed in SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL2000 B 144 Reference PARKINGSIDES PARKINGSIDES PARKINGSIDES 4 lt Parking Location gt Defaults 4 NONE Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter parking conditions on each approach of the current intersection lt Parking Location gt is a keyword which describes from the driver s point of view the parking conditions on the approach and can be any of the following NONE no parking default LEFT parking on the left side RIGHT parking on the right side BOTH parking on both sides Notes PARKVOLUMES must be used in conjunction with PARKINGSIDES to define the number of parking maneuvers each hour The default PARKVOLUMES is 20 but if PARKINGSIDES is NONE PARKVOLUMES is ignored e Parking conditions only apply to the lane group to which they are adjacent SIGNAL2000 B 145 Reference PARKVOLUMES PARKVOLUMES PARKVOLUMES _4 lt Parking Volume gt Defaults 4 20 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC APPROACH The purpose of this command is to
102. utilization factor used The complete documentation for this model can be found in Appendix G of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual and the calculations can be observed in the HCM Back of Queue Worksheet which is produced when the worksheet output is selected The percentile values used are the percentile values allowed by the HCM which are closest to those which are requested by the user The allowed percentiles are 70 85 90 95 and 98 meaning that when a given percentile is calculated it is expected that that percentage of all of the observed queues will be the calculated value or less The distance back from the stop bar is determined using the queued vehicle length inputs made by the user Note that the first publication of the 2000 HCM allowed the computation of an average lane queue even if an unequal lane utilization factor was used to calculate saturation flow rates A published amendment to the 2000 HCM now restricts the computation of a queue to match the lane utlization factor used for saturation flow rates Previous versions of SIGNAL2000 calculated these queues as Models 2 and 5 which have since been eliminated ARRB Queue Model Model 3 uses the maximum back of queue MBQ model defined by the Australian Road Research Board as implemented in the SIDRAS model The complete documentation for this model can be found in the SIDRA5 manual It is the 95th percentile queue for the worst lane in a lane group meaning that it is expected
103. volumes as well as widths and lanes for the current intersection or all intersections It has no parameters Notes e The schematic display also includes the phasing and related parameters defined for the intersection SIGNAL2000 B 125 Reference MASTERNODE MASTERNODE MASTERNODE lt Master Node gt Defaults 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter the node number of the intersection which is the master node location for the system or subsystem lt Master Node gt is the node number of the intersection which acts as the master location for the system and can be any valid node number from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 no master node defined Notes The system cycle length for coordinated systems will be equal to lt Minimum Cycle gt for the intersection referenced by MASTERNODE If MASTERNODE is 0 lt Minimum Cycle gt for the first node in the NODELIST will be used as the system cycle The node number entered need not be the actual location of the master controller This entry simply indicates that the offset which is entered for the master intersection will not be changed by TRANSYT or PASSER during the optimization process If the node number given is not included in the current NODELIST SUBSYSTEM the master node input for TRANSYT or PASSER will be omitted to prevent an error in the TRANSYT and PASSER runs SIGNAL2000 B 126 Reference MESSAGES MESSAGES MESSAG
104. 0 Notes Free flow lane groups are not controlled by the signal having 100 greentime indications By using the FREEFLOW option the volume of free flow traffic can be counted and recorded in SIGNAL2000 but the volume will not affect the capacity analysis or design Dual optional is a lane configuration where an exclusive turn lane exists and the adjacent lane group can be optionally used for turns as well a shared lane group This input condition is defined by flagging the exclusive turn lane group as a DUALOPTIONAL lane group This triggers a process which approximates the number of turning vehicles in the optional lane re calculates the turn percentages and truck percentages in the shared lane and removes these vehicles from the exclusive turn lane group adding them to the adjacent shared lanes The number of turns in the optional lane is calculated by determining the number of turns in the shared lane which would approximately balance the v c of the two adjacent lane groups without exceeding the designated lane utilization factor for the shared lane group e Dual optional lane groups defined by GROUPTYPES are identified in the output reports by placing a plus sign next to the number of lanes in the turn lane group and a minus sign next to the number of lanes for the shared lane group since in effect the dual optional status increases the amount of turning lane group capacity and reduces the shared lane group capacity
105. 000 B 192 Reference WIDTHS WIDTHS WIDTHS 12 lt Lane Group Width gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the width of the lane group for each movement of the current intersection lt Lane Group Width gt is the width in feet of the lane group for each movement and can be in the range of 0 0 60 0 feet Its default value is 0 0 feet Notes The lt Lane Group Width gt entry for a lane group should include the width of pavement that is used by moving traffic and should not include the width of any pavement which is used exclusively by parked vehicles e Widths for turning movements should be entered only if the approach has exclusive turning lanes If no exclusive turning lanes exist the turns will be made from the adjacent through lane group Turning movements which turn from both exclusive turn lanes and shared through lanes should make use of the GROUPTYPES entry to define this condition which SIGNAL2000 calls dual optional lane usage Values for LANES are automatically generated each time a new lane width is given on a WIDTHS command The number of lanes generated is defined by the tens digit of the approach width in feet Approach widths of less than ten feet and greater than zero are assumed to have one lane Thus usage of the LANES command is necessary only for those lanes where this assumption of number of lanes is not appropriate An error
106. 000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 221 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Optimized Phase Sequences Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Seq 11111111 22222222 33333333 44444444 55555555 66666666 77777777 88888888 Cyc 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 60 CDCDDCDC DSDDDDDD CDCCCCCC CDCCCCCC CDCCCCCC CDCCCCCC DEDDDDDD CDCCCCCC 90 CDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD 120 DEDDDDDD DEDDDDDD DDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD CDDDDDDD DEDDDDDD DDDDDDDD Design Criteria 35 80 5 90 100 J SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Optimized Phase Sequences Detail Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main seq Cycle RGR 60 90 120 11 35 C 35 C 40 D 12 55 D 50 D 60 E 13 35 C 45 D 50 D 14 40 D 45 D 50 D T5 40 D 45 D 50 D 16 35 C 45 D 50 D 17 40 D 45 D 50 D 18 35 C 45 D 50 D 21 50 D 40 D 45 D 22 1 01 S 55 D 60 E 23 55 D 45 D 50 D 24 55 D 50 D 55 D 25 55 D 50 D 55 D 26 55 D 45 D 50 D 27 55 D 45 D 55 D 28 55 D 45 D 50 D 31 35 C 35 C 40 D 32 45 D 45 D 50 D 33 35 C 40 D 45 D 34 35 C 40 D 45 D 35 35 C 40 D 45 D 36 35 C 40 D 45 D 37 35 C 40 D 45 D 38 35 C 40 D 45 D 4 35 C 35 C 35 C 4 40 D 45 D 50 D 4
107. 1 50 50 50 200 200 50 Incr delay d2 7 5 6 4 2 83 12 Zal ITI 253 Sas 96 Queue Delay d3 0 3 8 0 0 0 2 6 0 0 0 0 Unif delay d1 0 21 4 s0 0 lt 0 20 6 lt 0 0 0 lt 0 Prog factor PF 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Contrl delay d 9 0 30 8 16 7 34 12 21 0 26 4 31 5 16 8 28 3 31 7 Lane group LOS A C B C CF C C B C C Final Queue Qbi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Appr delay dA 24 3 29 9 28 0 2633 Approach LOS C 1c C C Appr flow vA 944 611 705 983 Intersection Delay 26 8 LOS C SIGNAL2000 D 245 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet The HCM Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet is the seventh HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the factors and delay calculations made for the protected permitted left turns in the capacity analysis as described below This worksheet is produced only when at least one approach contains a compound left turn phasing protected permitted or permitted protected The one or two character approach name designations for each of the left turns at the intersection appear at the top of the worksheet The worksheet is divided into two sections the first section listing the input variables used and the second section listing the calculations The input variables include Adjusted LT Volume v c Ratio Primary Movement Effective Green Opposing Queue Effective Gr
108. 1 provides access to the site The Node part of the entry can be 0 999 see note below and its default value is O at least one access node is required The Dir part of the entry is a character which describes the leg of the intersection which provides access to the site can be either N E S or W and has no default value it must be entered for every non zero Node entry Notes The Node part of lt Node Dir gt must be included in the list of intersections previously established with the NODELIST command If a previously entered list of access nodes must be shortened the entry of Node number 0 anywhere in the list will erase all nodes and directions from that point to the end of the list SIGNAL2000 B 105 Reference GOTO GOTO GOTO lt Destination gt Defaults next Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to divert the input stream within a file by providing the next location to be LOADed from that file lt Destination gt is a number which defines the next line number which will be LOADed from the current file or a variable name associated with a REPEAT loop and can be any valid line number of the current file less than or equal to 32767 positive negative or zero or any REPEAT loop variable name that is currently in use Its default value is the line number which follows the line which contains the GOTO command Notes e A REPEAT loop variable name can be used with GOTO if the same variable name is i
109. 16 V C D 252 v c Case Number D 246 v c Ratio D 246 D 247 D 249 Vehicle lengths D 263 Volume D 228 D 232 Volume of Demand D 217 Volume Capacity Ratio D 242 D 243 D 253 Warning Messages D 216 Width of Lane Group D 228 Widths of Lane Groups D 268 Widths Lanes D 253 Worksheet Output D 216 XX distance D 250 XX factor D 250 XX queue D 250 XX ratio D 250 Yellow Times D 217 94DEFAULTS A 60 A 64 ALL A 60 A 64 ANALYZE A 60 A 65 APPROACH A 60 A 64 ASSIGNMENT B 175 BASIC 18 A 60 A 64 CONTROL A 60 A 64 DATAFILES 23 A 60 A 64 DESIGN A 60 A 65 GENERATOR B 175 INFO A 60 A 64 INTERSECTION A 60 A 64 MOVEMENT A 60 A 64 PARAMETERS 18 A 60 A 64 PHASING A 60 A 64 RESULTS A 60 A 64 SITE A 60 A 64 SYSTEM A 60 A 64 TITLES A 60 A 64 B 102 TURNS WARRANTS A 60 A 64 Page Down key B 117 B 148 Page Up key B 117 B 148 1 100 greentime B 111 SIGNAL2000 2 24 hour volumes 45 B 74 A abbreviation F 283 F 284 access points 44 B 105 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS iii action command 9 active command 35 actuated signals 55 ACTUATIONS 37 41 A 63 B 73 B 77 addenda H 305 adjusted volume 55 B 150 Adjustment Factors Delay 42 B 92 Satflow 42 B 103 Stops 42 B 138 ADTFACTOR 45 A 64 B 74 advanced procedures 49 allowed phasings 38 43 B 171 all red clearance B 162 all red
110. 2000 Ver 2 for the DESIGN optimization aspect of the program These new methods have performed well under the challenging conditions of constantly changing timings during optimization and thus have now been implemented in the capacity analysis based ANALYZE aspect of the program so that consistent results will be obtained under all conditions from both aspects of the program The primary potential impact that this change might have on a user is that the HCM definition of phase adjacency for protected permitted compound left turns may be applied differently now for capacity analysis only functions than in previous capacity analysis only analyses This could result in different lost times for compound left turn movements and thus different delay values under these limited conditions Capacity analyses of optimized conditions which immediately follow use of the DESIGN function will not change gt Prevent Division by Zero and Overflow Errors for Unusual Cases Certain unusual cases which can produce overflow and or division by zero results which crash the program have been added to the data contingency checks of the program to prevent future crashes under these conditions For example optimization under certain conditions can create very small g C values which cause problems when calculating the Fmin value of the permitted left turn Flt calculations Now the Fmin calculation has the same limit applied as the Fm calculation to prevent this from being a
111. 2004 has been resolved by having a common OUTPUT dialog for all programs which contains the OUTPUT parameters for all TEAPAC programs In the manual mode and control files this involves the addition of a new parameter 1 which is the name of the program for which the following values apply and thus all OUTPUT parameters for all programs are stored in the file and displayed in the dialog gt T2004v6 Wording on Dialogs Used by Multiple Programs Improved The wording on dialogs which are used by multiple programs in TEAPAC2004 have been clarified so that it is more apparent what the relevance is to the current program in which the dialog is found gt T2004v6 NODELIST Entry Protected from Change in Tabular View The only safe place to change the NODELIST after it has been entered is in the Normal View NODELIST dialog so the NODELIST entry in the Tabular View has been greyed and protected from change to avoid unintended changes and possible disastrous results gt T2004v6 Options Setup Uses Browse for Folder not Browse for File The Browse button in the Options Setup dialog now produces a Browse for Folder dialog instead of the File Open dialog so it is more clear what the function will return gt T2004v6 Dialog Actions Re ROUTEs with 9 Nodes Fixed Including Save Certain problems with ROUTES which contained more than 8 nodes have been fixed including saving these route definitions gt T2004v6 Recent File Menu Option Works Unde
112. 21 In addition minor program specific changes have been made as summarized here and detailed in the program s own specific list of updates and changes Ver 7 00 Build 21 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses gt V7 00 21 New Coordinate System Management Features A new set of options to help manage the network coordinate system for any given data file has been added to all programs that use the Visual TEAPAC drag and drop network editing and display all TEAPAC programs except NOSTOP TED and TUTOR The options appear in a new dialog which is displayed when the Coord Sys button is pressed in the network Setup dialog The Coordinate System Management dialog offers three main function 1 to Analyze the current network for possible coding errors such as improperly connected nodes and scaling issues 2 to create a New Coordinate System by shifting and or scaling the current coordinate system and 3 to compute New Link Distances based on the current coordinate system For the Analyze function a percentage error can be input to define the threshold which identifies potential scaling problems between the coordinate system scale and each link s entered distance and an option can be selected to check the approach angle of each intersection leg One of the motivations for this new option is to be able to identify and adjust network coordinate systems from older TEAPAC programs which exercised the option to specify the units of the coordina
113. 23ie7 Effective perm green time g 18 2 18 2 Opp effective green time go 14 2 14 2 Number of Lanes N T I Number opp lanes No multi 2 2 Adjusted LT flow rate vLT 139 222 Proportion of LT in LG PLT 1 000 1 000 Prop of opp LT llane PLTo 000 000 Adjusted opp flow rate vo 483 611 Normal movement lost time tL 4 0 4 0 Left turns per cycle LTC 26317 3 700 Opp Lane Utilization fLUo 950 950 Opp flow lane cycle Volc 4 237 5 360 Opposing platoon ratio Rpo 1 000 1 000 First LT effect green gf 000 000 Opposing queue ratio qro 763 763 Opp queue effect green gq 7 534 9 964 Unsaturated effect green gu 10 657 8 226 Max opp vehicles n llane Shel 4 982 Prop TH in opp PTHo llane 1 000 1 000 TH equivalent for LT EL1 2 099 2 378 Proportion of LT PL multi 1 000 1 000 Opp TH equiv EL2 llane 1 000 1 000 Minimum value for fLT fmin 220 220 LT factor for LT fm multi 279 220 Unusable gq gdiff llane 7 534 9 964 LT factor for lane group fLT 279 220 SIGNAL2000 D 237 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet The HCM Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet is the fourth HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the factors and calculations made for the effect of pedestrians and bicycles on saturation flows involving left turns as described below Effective ped green time The effective green
114. 3 35 C 40 D 45 D 44 35 C 40 D 45 D 45 35 C 40 D 45 D 46 35 C 40 D 45 D 47 35 C 40 D 45 D 48 35 C 40 D 45 D 51 35 C 35 C 35 C 52 40 D 45 D 50 D 53 35 C 40 D 45 D 54 35 C 40 D 45 D 55 35 C 40 D 45 D 56 35 C 40 D 45 D 57 35 C 40 D 45 D SIGNAL2000 D 222 Reference 58 35 C 61 35 C 62 40 D 63 35 C 64 35 C 65 35 C 66 35 C 67 35 C 68 35 C SIGNAL2000 T 71 40 D 72 70 E 73 45 D 74 45 D 75 45 D 76 45 D 77 45 D 78 45 D 81 35 C 82 45 D 83 35 C 84 35 C 85 35 C 86 35 C 87 35 C 88 35 C 4 KR BB BB BWW Design Criteria 5 Jos 5 50 TE E EE EA A AA AE RA NE AA NENA NA NA NA N U U U UUU EAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Optimized Phase Sequences 50 60 1 o 55 Jo Sa 5D 55 45 Jo 50 50 50 50 50 50 KEN KA KE AA KEA AAKA KA KEA KA NA KA A RA AAA 35 00 Oo ol 90 100 5 SIGNAL2000 D 223 Reference Detail SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Optimized Phasings Ranked by Crit Delay The Optimized Phasings report generated by the SORT command provides a valuable tool which can be used in making phasing selections and cycle selection This report is also an optional default output of the DESIGN command The sorted order reflects a powerful way of identifying which phasings have the highest probability of being successful those with the lowest overall percentage of cycle time required at the best critical movement level of service and target delay achieved Th
115. 4 D 50 0 962 90 4 36 60 120 29 D 50 0 962 90 5 36 60 120 12 D 50 0 984 90 3 27 60 90 72 D 55 0 973 90 4 36 90 90 22 D 55 0 982 90 4 36 90 90 Design Criteria 35 80 5 90 100 5 SIGNAL2000 D 226 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Optimum Phase Timings The Optimum Phase Timings report generated by the TIMINGS command provides a list of the optimum phase times which have been generated by the DESIGN command These phase times are shown in both seconds G and Y R and seconds per second G C for the cycle length shown The optimum phase times have been adjusted so that the total G C Y C equals 1 0 by allocating excess time if any exists to the defined priority movements The critical movement in each phase is indicated in the phase diagram with asterisks in the movement arrows The sequence code for the phasing is listed in the upper left corner of the results with the Lead Lag conditions below if any If a phase s green time is controlled by a minimum this is indicated by the letter M in the lower left corner of the phase The following is an example of the Optimum Phase Timings text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Optimum Phase Timin
116. 4 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet Volume N E S W Adjustment RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT Volume V LS SSO 2125 60 425 65 65 370 200 215 450 220 Pk hr fact PHF 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Adj mv flow vp 194 611 139 64 272 72 F25 ALE 222 239 500 244 Lane group LG RT TH LT REE GT REED LI RT TH LT Adj LG flow v 194 611 139 539 72 483 222 239 500 244 Prop LT PL 000 000 1 00 000 1 00 000 1 00 000 000 1 00 Prop RT PR 1 000 000 000 124 000 149 000 1 000 000 000 Saturation N E S W Flow Rate RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT Base satflo so 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 Number lanes N 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 Lane width fW 1 000 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Heavy veh fHV 980 980 980 980 980 980 980 980 980 980 Grade fg 1 000 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Parking fp 1 000 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Bus block fbb 1 000 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Area type fa 1 000 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Lane util fLU 1 000 950 1 00 950 1 00 950 1 00 1 000 950 1 00 Left turn fLT 1 000 1 00 279 1 000 950 1 000 220 1 000 1 00 950 Right turn fRT 850 1 00 1 00 981 1 00 978 1 00 850 1 00 1 00 PedBike LT fLpb 1 000 1 00 9
117. 50 Its default value is 0 no stopping bus volume Notes SIGNAL2000 B 83 Reference CALCULATE CALCULATE CALCULATE lt Algebraic Expression gt Defaults none Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to perform a calculation for the given expression and optionally assign the integer result to a user variable lt Algebraic Expressions is an expression in the form of an algebraic formula or equation and can be any valid expression containing numeric constants user variables and valid operators as described below It has no default value it must be entered Notes The expression entered must be of the form of a normal algebraic expression using any of the four operators and addition subtraction multiplication and division This means that each operator must have two operands one on either side of the operator An operand may be either a numeric constant or one of the 26 1 character user variables A Z User variables must have had values assigned to them by a previous CALCULATE command or with a REPEAT command A minus sign may also be used as a single operand operator to reverse the sign of the following constant or variable Expressions are evaluated from left to right except that multiplication and division operations always precede addition and subtraction This order of precedence can be altered by surrounding parts of the expression which should be evaluated first with parentheses I
118. 60 minutes Its default value is 15 minutes lt Start Time gt is the time for each count period when the count was started on a 24 hour clock and can be any valid time between 0 2400 hours It has no default value and at least one lt Start Time gt must be entered lt Stop Time gt is the time for each count period when the count was stopped on a 24 hour clock and can be any valid time between 0 2400 hours It has no default value and at least one lt Stop Time gt must be entered Notes As many as five pairs of start and stop times can be given after the lt Count Interval gt for various periods which were counted during the same day If counts are already reduced e g not cumulative from interval to interval one count will exist for each interval counted For example one hour of 15 minute counts will have four intervals say with a start time of 1600 hours and an end time of 1645 hours If counts are cumulative an additional interval will exist for each period counted e g 1600 to 1700 hours for the above example All times are for the interval starting at the time stated If reduced counts are being entered these time entries are the start time of each interval counted If cumulative counts are being entered the times entered are the actual times each count number is recorded For example a cumulative count from 4 00 P M to 5 00 P M would record the first count at 1600 then again at 1615 1630 1645 a
119. 62 B 75 B 89 B 99 B 100 B 101 B 107 B 110 B 158 B 172 B 184 D 227 D 269 E 273 T intersection E 279 title heading lines 46 B 113 Title Line First 46 B 157 Second 46 B 93 Third 46 B 137 TPCO1 ERROR F 283 TPC02 ERROR F 284 TPC11 ERROR F 284 TPC12 ERROR F 284 TPC13 ERROR F 284 TPC14 ERROR F 285 TPC15 ERROR F 285 TPC16 WARNING F 285 TPC17 ERROR F 285 TPC18 WARNING F 286 TPC19 ERROR F 286 TPC20 ERROR F 286 TPC21 WARNING F 286 TPC22 WARNING F 287 TPC31 WARNING F 287 TPC32 WARNING F 287 I I I I TPC33 WARNING F 288 TPC34 WARNING F 288 TPC35 WARNING F 288 TPC36 WARNING F 289 362 Index TPC41 WARNING F 289 TPC42 WARNING F 289 TPC43 WARNING F 289 TPC44 ERROR F 289 TPC45 ERROR F 290 TPC46 ERROR F 290 TPC47 ERROR F 290 TPC48 ERROR F 290 TPC49 ERROR F 290 TPCS51 ERROR F 290 TPCS52 ERROR F 290 TPCS53 ERROR F 291 TPC54 ERROR F 291 TPCS55 ERROR F 291 TPC56 ERROR F 291 TPC57 ERROR F 291 TPC58 ERROR F 292 TPC59 ERROR F 292 TPC60 ERROR F 292 TPC61 WARNING F 293 TPC62 WARNING F 293 TPC63 ERROR F 293 TPC64 WARNING F 293 TPC65 WARNING F 294 TPC66 ERROR F 294 TPC67 ERROR F 294 TPC68 WARNING F 294 TPC69 WARNING F 295 TPC71 ERROR F 295 TPC72 ERROR F 295 TPC81 ERROR F 295 TPC91 ERROR F 295 TPC92 ERROR F 296 traffic counts 53 55 B 150 traff
120. 99 1 000 1 00 1 000 999 1 000 1 00 1 00 PedBike RT fRpb 994 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 998 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Local adjustmnt 1 000 1 00 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 000 1 00 1 00 Adj satflow s 1574 3539 519 3473 1770 3454 409 1583 3539 1770 Prot LT fLT 000 000 950 000 950 Prot LT Satflo 0 0 1768 0 1768 SIGNAL2000 D 235 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet The HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet is the third HCM worksheet produced the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the factors and calculations made for the permissive left turns in the capacity analysis as described below This worksheet is produced only when at least one approach contains a permitted left turn phase The one or two character approach and movement name designations for each of the left turns at the intersection appear at the top of the worksheet The worksheet is divided into two sections the first section listing the input variables used and the second section listing the calculations The format of the worksheet is a combination of the worksheets of Exhibits C16 9 and C16 10 in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual so that all four left turns can be included on a single page regardless of which worksheet is used This combined worksheet indicates those entries which are specific to the C16 9 multilane worksheet with the notation multi and those which are
121. AL commands This means that TIMINGS xx followed by ANALYZE is a simple way to generate a capacity analysis of optimum timings for sequence xx If a negative sequence code is given the absolute value of the number is taken to represent the position of the desired sequence code in the SEQUENCES list Thus a 3 entry will produce optimum timings for the third sequence code in the SEQUENCES list SIGNAL2000 B 184 Reference TRUCKCOUNTS TRUCKCOUNTS TRUCKCOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Defaults none zeros Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the count of trucks for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection lt Movement or Time gt is the movement number or the beginning time of the time interval for the counts to be entered and can be any of the following 1 12 Movement number or 0 2400 Beginning time This parameter has no default value and must be entered each time the TRUCKCOUNTS command is used lt List of Counts gt is the list of counted trucks for the specified movement number or time interval and can be any number from 999 to 9999 Its default value is 0 e g it must be entered Notes Movement numbers begin with the north leg right turn and proceed clockwise around the intersection If a movement number is given for the first parameter the counts should be for that movement only one for each interval in each of t
122. AL2000 B 178 Reference STOP STOP STOP lt Next Program gt Defaults Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to stop running the current program and optionally run a new program lt Next Programs is the name of another program which is to be run following the end of the current program and can be any valid program name Its default value is blanks no program will be run following the end of the current program Notes lt Next Program gt may also include a file name to be used by the named program e The command QUIT may be used in the Manual Mode as an alias command to represent the STOP command It cannot be used in any lt List of Commands gt entries such as with ASK or HELP SIGNAL2000 B 179 Reference STORAGE STORAGE STORAGE 12 lt Storage Distance gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the amount of storage distance for queued vehicles for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt Storage Distance gt is the distance in feet which can be used to store a queue of vehicles without obstructing vehicles in other lane groups or at other intersections and can be any integer from 0 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes The storage distance is used to calculate the queue ratios in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual back of queue analysis as well as in the QUEUECALCS calculation of various queue model results If no sto
123. ALUATE and QUEUECALCS functions when lane utilization factors less than 1 00 are used and or when an initial queue is specified Second Models 2 and 5 average lane queues have been eliminated and Models 1 and 4 use whatever lane utilization factor was specified creating the necessary consistency between the satflow delay and queue calculations Note that if the lane utilization factor used in the calculations is 1 00 the average lane delays and queues will be calculated and if the lane utilization factor used is less than 1 00 the delays and queues will account for the unbalanced lane utilization a worst lane analysis If Model 2 is selected with QUEUEMODELS Model 1 is used if Model 5 is selected Model 4 is used and Models 2 and 5 no longer appear in the QUEUECALCS results gt Queue Model 6 MBQ Improvement Queue Model 6 the historic maximum back of queue model MBQ has been modified to prevent the denominator from going zero or negative under grossly over saturated conditions SIGNAL2000 H 341 Reference This enhancement prevents the model from delivering negative results or crashing under these conditions and displays as the queue result gt RESET OUTPUT fixed The RESET function was inadvertantly disabled for the OUTPUT Worksheets entry with the initial release of SIGNAL2000 This function has been enabled This has no effect on the computation of results but simply enables the ability to turn the Worksheet output
124. B 163 B 169 lt List of Movements gt 43 B 156 lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt 38 42 B 171 lt List of Priority Movement Numbers gt 39 B 100 lt LOAD Type gt 47 B 123 lt Location gt 36 39 B 128 Manual Distance gt 39 B 131 Master Node gt 38 B 126 Max Delay LOS gt 39 B 121 Max v c gt 39 B 121 Maximum Cycle gt 38 43 B 90 Messages gt 39 B 142 Minimum Cycle gt 38 43 B 90 Minimum Green Time gt 37 41 B 129 Model gt 38 B 159 Model Actuated gt 38 B 173 Movement gt 39 B 131 Movement Label gt 37 40 B 130 Next Line of File gt 47 B 134 Next Program gt 47 B 179 Node gt 36 39 B 131 Node Number gt 36 38 B 117 B 135 B 181 Node Dir gt 44 B 105 Number of Lanes gt 37 41 B 119 Number of Lines gt 46 B 113 NAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA SIGNAL2000 lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt 35 B 94 lt Offset gt 43 B 139 lt Optimization Type gt 39 B 140 lt Output Dev gt 47 B 118 lt Output gt 35 B 177 B 184 lt Page gt 47 B 118 lt Page Advance Option gt 47 B 133 lt Parking Location gt 37 40 B 145 lt Parking Volume gt 37 40 B 146 lt Path List gt 44 B 147 lt Peak Hour Factor gt 37 41 B 150 lt Pedestrian Interference gt 40 B 151 lt Percentile gt 38 B 159 lt Permissive Left gt 43 B 155 lt Phase Green Time gt 38 43 B 109 lt Phase Number gt 43 B 139 B 152 B 156 l
125. C for more details SIGNAL2000 B 121 Reference LEVELOFSERVICE LEVELOFSERVICE e The lt Max Delay LOS gt must be a worse level or the same level as the lt Target Delay LOS gt If lt Target Delay LOS gt is set to zero any attempt to balance delays among the critical movements is skipped and the optimization starts with an attempt to meet the lt Target v c gt value for all critical movements SIGNAL2000 B 122 Reference LOAD LOAD LOAD lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt lt LOAD Type gt lt Blocks gt Defaults next next PROCESS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to input commands and parameters from permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command lt Line Numbers is the first line number in the specified file from which commands will be obtained and can be any valid line number of the file less than or equal to 32767 positive negative or zero Its default value is the next line of the file lt File Numbers is the order number of the desired file on the FILES command and can be any integer from 1 to 5 Its default value is the next file in the file list lt LOAD Type gt is a keyword describing whether all commands from the file should be processed or if some or all commands should be ignored and can be any keyword described below PROCESS process all commands default SHARE ignore unrecognized commands e g share a data file from another program IGNO
126. D ENTRY PARAMETERS first from the North then from the East then from the South then from the West Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above APPLABELS 4 lt Approach Label gt Enter labels for each approach of the current intersection GRADES 4 lt Grade of Approach gt Enter the grade of each approach of the current intersection PEDLEVELS 4 lt Pedestrian Interference gt Enter the level of pedestrian interference for right turns on each approach of the current intersection BIKEVOLUMES 4 lt Conflicting Bicycles gt Enter the volume of conflicting bicycles for right turns on each approach of the current intersection PARKINGSIDES 4 lt Parking Location gt Enter parking conditions on each approach of the current intersection PARKVOLUMES 4 lt Parking Volume gt Enter the number of parking maneuvers per hour on each side of each approach of the current intersection BUSVOLUMES 4 lt Stopping Bus Volume gt Enter the volumes of stopping buses which stop on each approach of the current intersection RIGHTTURNONREDS 4 lt Right Turn on Red Volume gt Enter the right turn on red volume for the right turns on each approach of the current intersection UPSTREAMVC 4 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt Enter the v c ratio of the upstream intersection for each approach of the current intersection Commands to Enter Movement Data The following are commands which can be used to desc
127. Disk File Output Printer Control Any of the results generated by a TEAPAC program will appear in a Results window from which they can be printed The Results window has a File menu from which the Print command can be selected This will direct the program output in the Results window to the default printer The Ctrl P key may also be used as a shortcut key to print the Results window From the main menu TEAPAC G 302 Reference the File Print Ctrl P selection will print a copy of the last output seen in the Results window This last output can be viewed with the View LastOutput menu command The PrintSetup options of these File menus can be used to select specific printers as well as printer options like number of copies print to file print both sides etc prior to issuing the File Print command The SetupAndPrint option performs both functions with a single menu selection The default printer can be set outside of the TEAPAC program by selecting the Printers folder of My Computer selecting the desired printer and clicking the Set_As_Default option in the File menu Disk File Output TEAPAC programs have several options for directing program output to disk files In the Results window the File SaveAsText menu option can be used to copy the contents of the Results window to a file named and located by the subsequent dialog entry This file is an ASCII text file which can be opened by any text editor Its default extension is
128. E EVALUATE QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLUMES GOVERCS and EXPORT It can be any positive integer from 1 to 900 seconds Its default value is 60 seconds lt Maximum Cycle gt is the largest cycle length in seconds which should be tested by the DESIGN procedure for operational feasibility and can be any positive integer equal to or larger than lt Minimum Cycle gt from 1 to 900 seconds Its default value is 120 seconds lt Cycle Increment gt is the precision to which the specified cycle length range will be investigated as to operational feasibility i e the increment of cycle length which will be added to lt Minimum Cycle gt until lt Maximum Cycle gt is exceeded It can be any positive integer from 1 to 900 seconds Its default value is 30 seconds Notes In ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLUMES GOVERCS and EXPORT if all of the GREENTIMES or all of the YELLOWTIMES are entered in seconds per second sec sec the lt Minimum Cycle gt will be used to convert these entries to seconds before proceeding with the analysis If signals at minor intersections in the system will be run at cycle lengths which are half that of the major intersections commonly called double cycling the system cycle length entered by the CYCLES entry for the MASTERNODE should be the longer cycle length used at the major intersections The GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES for the double cycled minor intersections should be entered in seconds not sec sec an
129. E QUEUECALCS and SIGNAL2000 30 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES EXPORT EXPORT sends the optimized information to a data file to perform a comparable HCS capacity analysis of the SIGNAL2000 optimized phasings and timings These entries and actions are done with the Edit and Results menus respectively INTERSECTION 0 may not be used under this method except when only the initial DESIGN 0 is performed In the Manual Mode all the same steps can be performed by simply entering the commands desired with their appropriate parameter values The end of Chapter 3 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual describes how the ASK command can be used in the Manual Mode to further enhance the process of performing iterative tabulations and analyses especially when using the special group names described in Appendix A of this document Special Analysis Procedures SIGNAL2000 also has several special computations which can be performed These computations can augment the basic ANALYZE and DESIGN procedures described above Each is discussed below Remember that means of using SIGNAL2000 for computations relevant to solving unusual problems and situations are described in Chapter 5 This section merely describes additional computations which can be performed directly by SIGNAL2000 Saturation Flow Calculations When only estimates of the saturation flows are needed these computations can be performed without the need to produce a complete capacity an
130. E 278 Reference Another way of looking at this is how VOLUMES are assigned to lane group WIDTHS Through lane VOLUMES can only be assigned to through lane group WIDTHS Turning VOLUMES will be assigned entirely to exclusive turn lane group WIDTHS if they exist otherwise they will be assigned only the adjacent through lane group WIDTH If a dual optional turn lane is defined turning volumes are assigned to both the turn lane and the adjacent lane group A common occurrence of this dilemma is on the stem of a T intersection where no throughs exist but all turns are made out of a single lane approach In this case the only option is to declare the single lane as a through lane from which all turns will be made If more than one lane exists each can be assigned to the appropriate turns as they are used Phasing SEQUENCE Designations Any time a sequence code is required by the program as is the case for the SEQUENCES ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS EXPORT and DIAGRAMS commands among others a two digit number must be entered The first digit represents the phasing type for the north south movements as defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 while the second digit represents the phasing type for the east west movements This is a standard convention used by all TEAPAC programs which require the specification of a signal phasing It only requires remembering the eight distinct phasing types shown in Figure 1 2 all of which follow a logical progr
131. ELLOWTIMES if the GREENTIMES dialog is displayed and vice versa When timings are Converted the conversion will also include reviewing the allowed SEQUENCES list and moving the appropriate sequence code to the top of the list according to the timings present It is important to make sure that YELLOWTIMES and REQCLEARANCES entries are always kept consistent with each other especially when converting Timings by Phase to Timings by Movement and when exporting to third party ring based software e By Movement timings are not allowed when special phasings represented by negative SEQUENCE codes are used e If entering YELLOWTIMES by phase they must be entered in the order of the phases as specified in the SEQUENCES and LEADLAGS commands All red time should be included in the YELLOWTIMES command e If all YELLOWTIMES are entered in seconds second the first cycle length of the CYCLES command will be used to convert the phase clearance times to seconds Normally YELLOWTIMES should be entered in seconds SIGNAL2000 B 194 Reference YELLOWTIMES YELLOWTIMES e If all entries are greater than or equal to 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds if all entries are less than 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds second In order to calculate lost times for each movement YELLOWTIMES must be available for each phase or movement If they are not entered a default lost time of 4 seconds will be used If a signal is to be double cycled
132. ES lt Level of Messages gt Defaults 3 Menus Groups INFO The purpose of this command is to display messages concerning changes made to the program since the last printing of the tutorial reference manual lt Level of Messagess gt is the level of detail desired for the update messages and can be any integer from 0 to 3 as described below 0 display only the current version level of the program 1 display a summary of changes made in the last revision of the program 2 display detailed discussions of each change made in the last revision of the program 3 display detailed discussions of all recent revisions to the program default Notes The Help RecentChanges menu uses message level 3 by default The Manual Mode must be used for any of the other options Messages concerning changes bugs fixes etc in the program will be displayed For option 3 the version level number and date of each revision of the program will be displayed at the start of each message listing For this option different version levels of the program are listed in reverse chronological order with the most current version first All messages for versions of the program after the version shown on the title page of the tutorial reference manual should be printed and inserted in Appendix H of the manual as addenda to the manual These changes will not be referenced anywhere in that release of the manual SIGNAL2000 B 127 Reference METROAREA METROA
133. ESIGN N Capacity Analysis Lost times are now re calculated before each capacity analysis which is performed as part of a DESIGN N analysis This accounts for those occasions where various phasing being considered by DESIGN cause different lost time calculations the last of which might not be correct for subsequent capacity analyses which are performed as part of a DESIGN N analysis This guarantees the same correct lost times are used for capacity analyses produced by either the ANALYZE or DESIGN N functions SIGNAL2000 H 330 Reference Build 52 04JUNO3 gt Convert ByPhase to ByMov Uses Reqclearances to Maintain Individual Y AR The Convert button on the GRTEENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES dialogs has been modified so that when ByPhase timings are converted to ByMovement the REQCLEARANCES values for each movement are used to define the ByMovement clearances rather than using the ByPhase phase clearances This permits individual movements to maintain distinctly different clearance times regardless of how many timnes the Convert button is used To this end entries of ByMovement clearance times in the YELLOWTIMES dialog are always transferred directly to the REQCLEARANCES dialog and REQCLEARANCES entries are transferred directly to the YELLOWTIMES dialog if timings are ByMovement Build 50 08MAY03 gt Expanded Seamless LinkTo Menu Includes New PRES YNCHRO and PRETSPPD With the addition of the PRESYNCHRO and PRETSPPD programs to the TEAPAC f
134. ESIGN with a time consuming precision that is not necessary or appropriate and need to be revised to start the DESIGN over and 3 where DESIGN 1 for the entire network has been initiated and will take some time to complete but a need for a change is observed in the progress output before it is completed gt Miscellaneous Error Detection Improvements Several places where incomplete or grossly oversaturated conditions could cause division by zero crashes have been modified to detect the conditions before the crash and respond accordingly SIGNAL2000 H 337 Reference gt Reorganization of Groups to Accommodate Multiple Intersections A new group of entries called SYSTEM has been added in the Edit menu to contain those command dialogs which are needed to manage multiple intersection data inputs These include the NODELIST SUBSYSTEM ROUTE MASTERNODE and OPTIMIZE commands QUEUEMODELS and SIMULATION have been moved to SYSTEM from the INTERSECTION group and OUTPUT has been moved there from TARGETS LEVELOFSERVICE and EXCESS have been moved from TARGETS to INTERSECTION and the TARGETS group has been deleted The INTERSECTION command has been added to the APPROACH MOVEMENTS and PHASING groups particularly for the Tabular View The SUMMARISE output has also been updated to reflect similar organizational changes brought about by the new multi intersection nature of the program and most output reports have had the intersection
135. G files are also created The default CFG files whose contents can be reviewed and changed from the Options Setup menu contain the default installation path name for the most recent supported version of any host program which works in conjunction with the TEAPAC program e g HCS for SIGNAL2000 PASSER II for PREPASSR TRANSYT 7F for PRETRANSYT CORSIM for PRENETSIM etc These paths should be modified as necessary to reflect the actual installed location of the host program The same is true of the TEAPAC CFG file which directs the TEAPAC Menu where to find non TEAPAC programs if edited externally TEAPAC CFG must be edited with a text editor The program will look for the host program before an TEAPAC G 303 Reference EXPORT AUTO is performed and will issue a message if it cannot be located as specified In the event that a host program uses a name for the required executable file which is different than that expected by the TEAPAC program the desired executable name can be added at the end of the path in the Options Setup dialog or the CFG file directly All TEAPAC programs are designed to co exist in the same installed folder and work best together when installed this way If a TEAPAC program is to be re located to a different folder on a system it is highly advised that it first be un installed using the Add Remove Programs dialog in the Control Panel then re installed to the desired location Network installations must take
136. GNAL2000 H 311 Reference all data summaries which include NETWORK data and new distances which are required due to any network editing are now always based on the coordinate distance unless a link is previously marked for Manual Distance gt V7 00 21 Automatic Network Relationship Checks Made The new Analyze function of the Coordinate System Management dialog mentioned above is invoked automatically any time a data file is Opened or Saved or any time NETWORK or NODELOCATION information is changed either via drag and drop actions or direct keyboard entry thereby giving immediate feedback when a network definition problem could be corrupting an analysis The Analyze function is also invoked prior to other program functions which make significant use of the spatial arrangement of the network such as Exporting in PRENETSIM PRESYNCHRO and PRETSPPD and FindPaths in SITE gt V7 00 21 Frequency of Automatic Update Check Can Be Set By User A new user entry can now be made which controls the number of days between automatic checks for program updates The entry can be found in the Help Check_For_Newer_Updates menu dialog With this new feature the maximum frequency of automatic checks is once per day not every time the program is run Automatic checks can be disabled by entering a frequency of 0 days but this is not recommended checking for updates every 10 30 days is recommended gt V7 00 21 Improved Initial Zoom All View for Large Co
137. GNAL2000 H 342 Reference easily viewable information at the beginning of the file Message advising of successful save remains visible until closed by user option to close the message automatically for subsequent Saves Warning if Save is attempted into a file that may over write other info warning condition is if file was written by another program or unknown certain earlier versions of the same prog may provide warning if relevant option to cancel save or to permit save anyway gt New Feature for Opening Files If data from another prog or earlier ver of same program read from a file that file is protected from Saves that may over write other information In particular for file from another program Share is automatic makes File Open same as File OpenShared amp LOAD same as LOAD Share eliminates the need to use the OpenShared or LOAD Share explicitly gt New Results Log Option Ability to create text file with results of primary functions of program Log Results item in Options menu Log On Off toggles whether computed results are currently being logged Start New Log clears all prior logged results and toggles Log On Log file is always the program name with log extension located in folder where program was installed gt Improvements Regarding Output Titling Information Any time a title line is read from a file displayed in the title bar provides feedback when loading multiple stacked files or control file Blank title
138. Help File Formatting Restored to Previous Style The numbering of the indented paragraphs in the Notes section of Appendix B of the Help file has been restored as appeared previously gt V7 00 14 Minor Cleanups and Fixes Implemented A number of mostly internal cleanups and fixes have been implemented for more reliable operation of Visual TEAPAC programs Most of these will not be noticeable to users but a couple will resolve certain problems a few users have experienced For example opening an old TEAPAC data file which does not contain valid NODELOCATION entries for each intersection will not crash and moving a bend node under certain conditions will not cause the program to close prematurely Build 07 1INOV05 gt Visual TEAPAC A Whole New Way of Seeing TEAPAC All 13 modules of the TEAPAC suite of programs have been upgraded to the Visual TEAPAC Version 7 interface Primarily this means each program sports a much more visual input and output system to make entering and viewing data for the analysis network much easier and to make the resulting output reports clearer and easier to read The general aspects of the two major enhancement areas visual input and visual output are described below followed by the many other supporting enhancements that go along with the Visual TEAPAC upgrade SIGNAL2000 H 315 Reference When combined with the unparalleled 1 file 1 click 500 intersection completely seamless data sharing introd
139. K VEHICLECOUNTS command to see on the full screen display what entries are expected when entering rows or columns of the count tables TPC60 ERROR xxxxx is not a valid movement number or time value entry Re enter properly The first parameter of the VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands must define whether the following entries are for a given movement or a given time interval To do this the first entry must be a valid movement number 1 12 or a valid time interval as defined by the PERIODS command Action If entering data for a given time interval use the DATA or ASK command to display the valid times which have been generated by the current PERIODS command Re issue the VEHICLECOUNTS or TRUCKCOUNTS command with a proper movement number or time or re issue the PERIODS command so the proper times are defined for your count information TEAPAC F 292 Reference TPC61 WARNING An INTERSECTION must be given before this input can be made Enter here This message indicates that an INTERSECTION number has not been selected prior to the entry of a data value When an input value is entered that is intended to pertain to a specific intersection that intersection number must first be selected with the INTERSECTION entry before the input value is entered If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which intersection to assign the entry value to Action If you know the intersection number you intend to be using enter it in the error
140. LCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected The worksheet is also produced when BASIC worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet first lists the adjustment to input volumes made for the capacity analysis then lists the factors and calculations made for the estimated saturation flows as described below Volume Adjustment Approach and Movement Labels The one or two character approach and movement name designations Volume The actual demand volume of vehicles in vehicles per hour for each movement Peak Hour Factor The peak hour factor for each movement Adjusted Movement Flow Rate The rate of vehicular flow in vehicles per hour during the peak 15 minute period Flow rates are calculated by dividing the movement Volumes by the movement Peak Hour Factors above Lane Groups The movements included in each lane group Lane groups that include a through movement will always be displayed in the through movement column in the table for an approach Vacant columns indicate that a movement is not itself a lane group but is part of another lane group if it exists at all Adjusted Lane Group Flow The rate of vehicular flow in vehicles per hour that is included in the lane group This combines all the flow rates for the movements included in the designated lane group Proportion of Left Turns The decimal percentage of left turns in the lane group If the lane group consists of an exclusive left turn lane the Proportion of Left
141. LOST STARTUPLOST STARTUPLOST 12 lt Startup Lost Time gt Defaults 12 2 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the length of the lost time at the beginning of a movement s green period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt Startup Lost Time gt is the number of seconds which is not used at the beginning of a movement s green period and can be any number from 0 0 to 30 0 Its default value is 2 0 Notes STARTUPLOST time is used in conjunction with ENDGAIN time to calculate the lost time that an individual movement experiences during its green phase s The formula used from the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual is ti l l2 where is the startup lost time l2 is the ending lost time and l2 Y e where e is the endgain time If the default values of STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN both are 2 seconds are used for a particular movement the lost time formula simplifies to tt Y Since Y values yellow plus all red time are typically in the range of 4 6 seconds this default condition may result in lost times considerably higher than the default lost time value of 3 0 seconds which was used in the 1985 and 1994 Highway Capacity Manuals When this is the case users should expect less effective green time for these movements versus those used in comparable 1985 and 1994 analyses which will result in higher v c and delay values and thus likely worse levels of service SIGN
142. LinkTo menu which automatically closes the SIGNAL2000 program and opens the selected preprocessor with the same data file SIGNAL2000 54 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Analysis Period and the Use of PEAKHOURFACTORS Peak hour factors PHF are applied to the input demand volume to determine the adjusted volume for use in the saturation flow v c and delay calculations This adjusted volume is in fact an estimate of the flow rate of each movement during the peak 15 minute period for the intersection since this is the base analysis period which the 2000 HCM expects the user to analyze A much better procedure is to determine the peak 15 minute period for the intersection from the count data and simply use the 15 minute flow rates during this period in combination with a PHF of 1 0 for each movement The 15 minute flow rates are simply the peak 15 minute counts multiplied by 4 If the actual peak 15 minute flow rates are not used caution should be exercised in calculating peak hour factors from traffic counts particularly on a movement by movement basis since this calculation may not be statistically stable especially for low volume movements Furthermore if the PHF is determined for each movement it is most likely that all of these peaks for each movement do not occur at the same time thus their application in computing adjusted volumes for each movement will result in a volume condition which never exists but instead represe
143. NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa This input has no effect on SIGNAL2000 calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as SITE which display schematic network diagrams on screen and PRENETSIM for NETSIM CORSIM animation SIGNAL2000 B 136 Reference NOTE NOTE NOTE lt Third Title Line gt Defaults 80 blanks Menus Groups TITLES The purpose of this command is to enter the third line of information contained in the title of each report lt Third Title Line gt is the third of three lines of information generally used to note further conditions identifying the situation being analyzed displayed at the top of every output report and can be up to 80 characters of information Its default value is 80 blanks Notes If the first character of the NOTE parameter is a plus sign the characters entered on this command will be overlaid over those of the previously entered NOTE command This overlay will begin at the character position identified by the digits of the first two characters which follow the and will end after the last non blank character which is entered See Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for further explanation and examples o
144. Notes e The computed saturation flow rates are in vehicles per hour of green time with 100 greentime assumed When the SERVICEVOLUMES command is executed the calculated saturation flows are entered into the SATURATIONFLOWS command automatically Subsequent to this action the SATURATIONFLOWS can be SAVEd in a data file for use by other programs such as PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM Before this command can be properly executed the phasing and timings must have been previously set This can be accomplished through use of the SEQUENCES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CYCLE commands or the TIMINGS command SIGNAL2000 B 172 Reference SIMULATION SIMULATION SIMULATION lt Steps Cycle gt lt Analysis Period gt lt Stop Penalty gt lt Link Numbering Method gt lt Model Actuated gt lt Assignment Method gt Defaults 300 15 1 TEAPAC NO Full Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter simulation control parameters including the length of the analysis period for all intersections under study lt Steps Cycle gt is the number of increments each cycle will be divided into in the TRANSYT simulation and can be any value from 300 to 300 The absolute value of the input is the number of steps per cycle If the value is negative a step wise simulation is performed otherwise a standard link wise simulation is performed Its default value is 300 It is used by PRETRANSYT only lt Analysis Pe
145. Path Names Implemented Plus New File Format All aspects of TEAPAC data file storage including SCENARIO condition files have been extended so that file names can have as many as 70 characters in their names and file path names can have as many as 180 characters both including upper or lower case characters and spaces Since SCENARIO condition files and certain file switch options can add as many as 6 characters to file names it is best if user entered names are no more than 64 characters A new higher capacity data file format with a new file extension tpc has been introduced which will be used by default for all new files created by all TEAPAC programs This format is text based like the old for format so it is still easy to see what is in a file as well as write such files from other programs but with a look to the future this format has line length maximums of 256 characters per line 254 useable instead of the more limiting maximums of the for format which had maximums of 128 characters per line 80 useable The old format can still be read and written simply by continuing to use the for extension but users are encouraged to convert files to the new format simply by saving for file with the new tpc extension then archive the for files so they are not used by mistake The long file names and paths mentioned above are valid for either extension gt New User Discussion Forum Is Accessible Directly from the Help Menu The new U
146. RAMETERS PARAMETERS Dialogs Common TEAPAC Dialogs RESULTS Dialogs RESULTS commands are the active command dialogs which perform the various analyses specific to the purpose of the SIGNAL2000 program These commands are summarized in this section All the details about each command dialog can be found alphabetically in Appendix B The data entry values which must be made prior to using the active commands are listed in the following section DESIGN lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt Perform an operational design to optimize timings for each sequence of the SEQUENCES command and each cycle of the CYCLES command for the current intersection or all intersections This is a Usage Level 2 command SORT lt Priority gt lt Output gt Display the DESIGNed sequence codes and performance levels in order from best to worst performance as previously DESIGNed for the current intersection TIMINGS lt Sequence Code gt lt Output gt Retrieve the optimum timings for the sequence code specified from previously DESIGNed results for the current intersection ANALYZE Perform a capacity analysis of a specified phasing and timings for the current intersection or all intersections EVALUATE Display a performance evaluation for a specified phasing and timings for the current intersection or all intersections QUEUECALCS Display a wide variety of various published queue calculations for a specified phasing and timings fo
147. RE ignore all commands in the file up to the next RETURN e g skip a data block lt Blocks gt is the number of data blocks in the file which should be SHAREd or IGNOREd and can be any positive integer from 1 to 999 Its default value is 1 Notes Upon initiation of a LOAD command commands will be obtained from the specified file starting at the specified line number and continuing with successive line numbers until a RETURN command is encountered SAVE automatically places a RETURN command at the end of SAVEd information for future LOADs The next line default is defined as the line number following the line of the file which was last accessed This is usually the line number which follows the last information LOADed When a FILES command is given the next line for the specified file is automatically set equal to one The next line can be changed by use of the NEXTLINES command The next file default is defined as the file whose number is one greater than the file number currently in use The keyboard should be considered file O for this purpose Thus the default file number for a LOAD from the keyboard is file 1 If a LOAD command is encountered in file 1 its next file default is file 2 etc SIGNAL2000 B 123 Reference LOAD LOAD If lt Line Number gt is entered as 0 the LOAD will start at the last line The last line is defined as the last point in the file where file access was previously initiat
148. REA METROAREA lt Location gt Defaults NON CBD Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the location of the intersection within the metropolitan area of the current intersection lt Location gt is a keyword describing the location of the intersection within the metropolitan area and can be any of the following CBD central business district NON CBD any area other than CBD default Notes Entry of any keyword other than CBD will generate a NON CBD entry since this is the only area location distinction made by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual computations The other keywords are allowed for compatibility with previous versions of SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL Only the CBD and NON CBD keywords are SAVEd in a data file SIGNAL2000 B 128 Reference MINIMUMS MINIMUMS MINIMUMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time gt Defaults 12 5 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT DESIGN The purpose of this command is to enter the minimum green time requirements for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt Minimum Green Time gt is the number of seconds which as a minimum must be received by the movement in order to satisfy requirements of safety and driver reaction and can be any number from 0 to 99 9 Its default value is 5 0 Notes This command is useful in establishing minimum pedestrian crossing times as well as operational
149. REPORTS B 74 REQCLEARANCES 37 41 A 63 B 95 B 162 C 208 Required G C Calculations 31 RESET 46 A 59 A 62 B 117 B 124 B 133 B 163 B 169 F 289 RESULTS Dialogs 35 Results window G 302 RETURN 47 A 62 B 123 B 124 B 134 B 164 B 170 F 286 right turn overlaps 43 B 144 right turns on red 56 RIGHTTURNONREDS 40 A 63 B 165 ROUND A 64 ROUTE 38 A 62 B 167 B 181 C 211 Run Time Error Codes G 298 361 Index S S2K01 WARNING E 272 S2K02 WARNING E 272 S2K03 WARNING E 273 S2K04 WARNING E 273 S2K06 WARNING E 273 S2K07 ERROR E 273 S2K08 ERROR E 273 S2K09 ERROR E 274 S2K10 ERROR E 274 S2K K11 ERROR E 274 S2K K13 ERROR E 274 S2K14 ERROR E 274 S2K15 ERROR E 275 S2K16 ERROR E 275 S2K17 ERROR E 275 S2K18 ERROR E 275 S2K19 ERROR E 276 S2K20 WARNING E 276 S2K21 WARNING E 276 S2K22 ERROR E 276 S2K23 WARNING E 277 S2K24 ERROR E 277 S2K25 ERROR E 277 S2K26 WARNING E 277 S2K27 WARNING E 278 sample calculations C 212 Saturation Flow Calculations 31 saturation flow rate 36 B 172 Saturation Flow Rates C 209 SATURATIONFLOWS 42 54 A 63 B 168 B 172 C 209 SAVE 11 23 47 A 59 A 62 B 97 B 104 B 123 B 169 F 284 F 285 F 289 G 300 G 302 SCENARIO 11 schematic map 36 B 125 scramble phase 43 50 B 152 scratch file space F 295 seasonal variations B 191 semiactuated sign
150. Reference be analyzed by SIGNAL2000 and the analysis is aborted with this message This is the desired response if the data is being included in SIGNAL2000 only for later use by PRETRANSYT or PRENETSIM either of which will handle the sign control correctly for TRANSYT and CORSIM respectively Action Make sure that the sign controlled or Dummy node designation is correct If this is the case this and other messages can be closed automatically the next time they occur by selecting this option in the Warning box If not use GROUPTYPES to correct the lane group control to something other than sign controlled or INTERSECTION to correct the Dummy node designation S2K27 WARNING This function is not valid when all intersections have been selected This warning indicates that all intersections have been selected by selecting INTERSECTION 0 and an action which is not valid for all intersections has been requested For example SORT and TIMINGS are commands which follow DESIGN but can only be issued when a single intersection is selected EXPORT is another such command for a single intersection because HCS can only handle a single intersection DIAGRAMS is another such command Action Select the single intersection of concern with INTERSECTION and re issue the desired action command If DESIGN is desired for all intersections use a non zero parameter with the DESIGN command since the manually selective functions of SORT and TIMINGS are
151. S 12 lt Movement Label gt Enter abbreviated labels for each movement of the current intersection VOLUMES 12 lt Design Hour Volume gt Enter the turning and through movement volumes for each of the movements of the current intersection WIDTHS 12 lt Lane Group Width gt Enter the width of the lane group for each movement of the current intersection LANES 12 lt Number of Lanes gt Enter the number of lanes which are assigned for use by each of the twelve movements of the current intersection TRUCKPERCENTS 12 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt Enter the truck and through bus heavy vehicle traffic percentage for each movement of the current intersection PEAKHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt Enter the peak hour factor for each movement of the current intersection ARRIVALTYPES 12 lt Quality of Progression gt Enter the quality of progression for each movement of the current intersection ACTUATIONS 12 lt Actuated Movement gt Enter the type of phase module present actuated or non actuated for each movement of the current intersection for use in the determination of the Delay Calibration Term k MINIMUMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time gt Enter the minimum green time requirements for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection REQCLEARANCES 12 lt Required Clearance gt Enter the clearance times required for each movement of the current intersection SIGNAL2000 37 Tutorial Cha
152. S PEAKHOURFACTORS PEAKHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt Defaults 12 0 90 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the peak hour factor for each movement of the current intersection lt Peak Hour Factor gt is the peak hour factor for the movement and can be in the range of 0 50 1 00 Its default value is 0 90 Notes Peak hour factors are applied to the input demand volume to determine the adjusted volume for use in the saturation flow v c and delay calculations As such caution should be used in arbitrarily applying peak hour factors much less than 0 90 since adjusted volumes substantially higher than the hourly volumes will be generated e Caution should be exercised in calculating peak hour factors from traffic counts particularly on a movement by movement basis since this calculation may not be statistically stable especially for low volume movements Further use of movement by movement peak hour factors in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual method suggests that all of the computed adjusted volumes occur at the same time which is not likely the case Entered demand VOLUMES will be adjusted by the entered PEAKHOURFACTORS as a means of estimating the peak flow rate during the analysis period When the analysis period is the default of 15 minutes 0 25 hours this means that an entered volume divided by the peak hour factor will estimate the flow rate during the
153. SIGN The purpose of this command is to create an HCS compatible input data file from the current data values for the current intersection with an optional automatic link to HCS lt File Name AUTO gt is the name of the HCS data file to export to and can be any valid file name or the keyword AUTO Its default value is AUTO Notes The SEQUENCES CYCLES GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES commands must first be input to SIGNAL2000 before the EXPORT command Normally EXPORT will be executed following the DESIGN SORT TIMINGS sequence of commands or the DESIGN 1 command for optimization of timings and phasings by SIGNAL2000 To perform computations with HCS comparable to the ANALYZE command of SIGNAL2000 using an EXPORTed file simply select the HCS File Open menu and select the name of the file EXPORTed The default file name extension is XHS or XHU for HCS The export will be created for HCS if any file name extension other than HCS HC9 or SIG is used Use of HCS will cause an HCS2000 export also useable by HCS Release 3 HC9 will cause a Release 2 4 export and SIG will cause a Release 1 x export If lt File AUTO gt is the name of a file that does not or should not already exist the automatic creation queries can be avoided by using the normal TEAPAC file name switch N as described in Appendix G If it doesn t matter if the file exists or not the O switch can be used A direct linkage to HCS Signals o
154. SIGNAL2000 Tutorial Reference Manual SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 81 27MAY08 May 2008 This work is protected under the Copyright Act of 1976 Created by Strong Concepts All rights reserved Contains its trade secrets reverse engineering prohibited SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Signalized Intersection Analysis and Design SIGNAL2000 is a program for performing true HCM capacity analysis signal timing and phasing optimization and design of intersection geometry and control for as many as 500 intersections at a time This comprehensive program considers such broad inputs as lane group geometry lane usage pedestrian and clearance constraints and multi phase signal control The methodology uses the capacity analysis procedures documented in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual from TRB with a user specified calibration option The user of the program can analyze existing conditions and timings as well as generate optimum signal timings and phasings The optimizer in the program seeks to establish the best attainable level of service delay or v c for critical movements within a specified range of cycle lengths using the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual method This interactive analysis tool is particularly useful in developing individual intersection control strategies controller requirements and required timings since an entire day s variation in volumes can be analyzed quickly and accurately Two phase three phase multi phase and split phase control strat
155. SIGNAL2000 D 233 Reference Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet section for a discussion of how ped bike right turn factors are calculated when pedestrian and or bicycle interference is present for right turns Local Adjustment Factor A user defined adjustment factor used like the other saturation flow rate factors to adjust the base saturation flow rate by multiplication normally used to calibrate the HCM satflow estimate to measured local conditions Adjusted Saturation Flow The resultant saturation flow adjusted for all of the factors described above in vehicle per hour of green Protected Left Turn Factor When a protected permitted left turn is present this line of the table lists the left turn adjustment factors for the protected phase determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Protected Left Turn Saturation Flow When a protected permitted left turn is present this line of the table lists the resultant saturation flow for the protected left turn phase adjusted for all of the factors described above in vehicle per hour of green The following is an example of the HCM Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 23
156. Selected Automatically for Subsequent Capacity Analysis When the TIMINGS command is used to review the timings optimized by DESIGN for a specific SEQUENCE code this SEQUENCE code is automatically placed at the top of the list of allowed SEQUENCES so it will be the SEQUENCE used by a subsequent ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS EXPORT etc The dialogs related to these actions no longer accept the entry of a sequence code due to this change making it much easier to move from DESIGN to ANALYZE for various sequence codes and without the possibility of performing inappropriate and incompatible actions by each gt Phasing Diagrams in Dialogs use Better Arrow Representations of Movements Arrows shown in dialog boxes depicting turning movements have been improved in design so they are easier on the eye and more clearly depict the movement intended In addition permitted movements in phasing diagrams in dialogs are depicted with dashed lines for added clarity Also arrows have been added to some dialogs for improved clarity gt DESIGN Optimization Function can be Aborted Before it is Completed The Cancel button has been fixed in the DESIGN progress window allowing the DESIGN to be aborted before it is completed Cases where this might be helpful include 1 when it is apparent that the results being generated are not adequate and changes need to be made and there is no need to complete the DESIGN 2 where the LEVELOFSERVICE controls have created a D
157. T Add to NODELIST No Yes This message is issued if an intersection number is entered that is not currently in the NODELIST Since the purpose of INTERSECTION is to select a node number from the list in NODELIST most often this condition indicates an invalid selection that the user will want to correct Action The normal response will be to select No indicating that the intersection number entered is incorrect and must be corrected However there a several cases where this message can be used as a shortcut method for adding intersections to the NODELIST In the case where it is known that the entered number is not in the NODELIST and it is desired to add it to the end of the NODELIST select Yes and the intersection will be added to the NODELIST and selected in a single click This can be a very effective way of building a NODELIST on the fly as new intersections or scenarios are needed or as multiple data files are loaded into a single multi intersection database to be saved as a single file TPC64 WARNING UTILIZATION entries gt 1 0 from old data file have been inverted for HCM 2000 This warning indicates that a UTILIZATION entry has been encountered with a value greater than 1 0 normally when a SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 data file has been loaded Due to the new TEAPAC F 293 Reference technique used to define unbalanced lane utilization in the 1997 amp 2000 HCMs these values have been automatically inverted 1 x to reflect the new d
158. This is only used to define special assignment situations and is not normally used for typical site traffic assignment situations Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data The following are commands which can be used to describe traffic count data for each intersection being analyzed but whose data values are not used by SIGNAL2000 Their inclusion in the program is to provide seamless data file compatibility with the TURNS and WARRANTS programs in particular and all TEAPAC programs in general COUNTTYPE lt Type of Data gt lt Type of Truck Counts gt SIGNAL2000 44 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter the type of count data which is to be supplied to the program at the current intersection and to provide a description of the count PERIODS lt Count Interval gt 5 lt lt Start Time gt lt Stop Time gt gt Enter the count interval and the beginning and ending times for each count period for which subsequent data will be entered at the current intersection CONDITIONS lt Major Direction gt lt N S Lanes gt lt E W Lanes gt lt High Speed gt lt Low Population gt lt Progression Impact gt lt Remedial Actions Failed gt lt Accidents for Signal gt lt Stop Sign Delay gt lt Accidents for Stop gt lt Minor Street Delay gt Enter intersection conditions which affect the conduct of a Warrant Analysis at the current intersection ADTFACTOR lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumes g
159. Turns will be 1 00 100 If the lane group consists of an exclusive right turn lane the Proportion of Left Turns will be 0 00 Proportion of Right Turns The decimal percentage of right turns in the lane group If the lane group consists of an exclusive right turn lane the Proportion of Right Turns will be 1 00 100 If the lane group consists of an exclusive left turn lane the Proportion of Right Turns will be 0 00 Saturation Flow Rate Approach and Movement Labels The one or two character approach and movement name designations SIGNAL2000 D 232 Reference Base Saturation Flow The base ideal saturation flow rate per lane for each lane group in passenger cars per hour of green per lane pcphgpl Number of Lanes The number of lanes in each lane group Lane Width Factor The adjustment factor for lane width determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Extrapolation is allowed with warning messages to the user Heavy Vehicle Factor The adjustment factors for heavy vehicles determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Grade Factor The adjustment factors for grades determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Parking Factor The adjustment factors for parking determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Bus Blockage Factor The adjustment factors for bus blockage determined from Exhibit 16 7 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Area
160. UENCES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CYCLE commands or the TIMINGS command SIGNAL2000 B 158 Reference QUEUEMODELS QUEUEMODELS QUEUEMODELS lt Model gt lt Percentile gt lt Auto gt lt Truck gt Defaults 1 90 25 40 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter parameters which control the queue model calculations used for all intersections under study lt Model gt is the number of the preferred queue model as computed by the QUEUECALCS command and can be any integer from 1 to 10 but not 2 or 5 Its default value is 1 1 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane XXth Percentile Queue 3 ARRB ARRB MBQ Worst Lane 95th Percentile Queue 4 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane Average Queue 6 MBQ Historical MBQ Average Lane Average Queue 7 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 8 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 9 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue 10 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue lt Percentile gt is the percentile value desired to be estimated by the queue models and can be any integer from 50 to 99 Its default value is 90 lt Auto gt is the average queue spacing between front bumpers of queued automobiles in feet and can be any integer from 5 to 100 Its default value is 25 lt Truck gt is the average queue spacing between front bumpers of queued trucks in fe
161. UENCES list the phasing cannot be DESIGNed In this case either choose a phasing code that is as similar as possible to the actual phasing then DESIGN and manually adjust the resultant timings for SEQUENCE 0 or use the GOVERCS command to generate the required greentimes for each of the movements manually generate optimum timings and perform a capacity analysis for the resultant timings for SEQUENCE 0 S2K16 ERROR GREENTIME for phase X is too low Enter proper value or use 0 01 seconds This error indicates that a phase GREENTIME that has been input is too low For most phases this means a value of 0 0 seconds has been encountered usually because a phase greentime has not been entered Primary phases may not have zero phase times when performing analyses with ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS GOVERCS or SERVICEVOLUMES otherwise division by zero will occur in the analysis For the special case of overlap phases the middle phase of a SEQUENCE 5 6 or 8 phase green times may actually be negative numbers which are as negative as the clearance for the phase is positive This is because the time of the overlap phase is not a real display time for any specific movement but simply the amount of time two phases overlap If the overlap is small then the green time will appear to be negative Action If GREENTIMES have not been entered for one or more phases enter the GREENTIMES and re issue the analysis command If a phase timing must be analyzed fo
162. VE command to save the parameter values Datafiles FILES SAMPLENN Datafiles SAVE 11 Note that the file name SAMPLE has a N switch added to its name the first time it is used to indicate to SIGNAL2000 that you expect to create a new file This is not required but saves the SIGNAL2000 23 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE steps of responding to the new file creation query When used an error will be produced only if this file name already exists Other such switches and file name conventions are discussed in Appendix G as they relate to your operating system Also note that as many as five files can be named at any given time and that the SAVE command describes which of these five files are to be used The SAVE command can also tell the program where in the file to save information allowing different scenarios to be stacked one after the other in the same file The LOAD command is used to retrieve the information at a later date All of these options relate to advanced file manipulation capabilities such as batch control file scripts and multiple scenarios described in detail in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual Exiting the Program Additional experiments may be conducted at this point When finished the Exit option of the File menu can be used In the Manual Mode the STOP or QUIT command can also be used Control gt STOP Control of the computer is returned to the operating system This step
163. VEMENTS 43 A 63 B 156 B 171 E 275 E 279 F 294 phasing 38 B 171 Phasing Sequence Codes 7 Phasing SEQUENCE Designations E 279 planning method 54 platoon ratio B 77 Poisson arrival probabilities C 205 precision 44 B 166 PRENETSIM ii B 136 B 168 B 171 B 172 C 209 PREPASSR ii B 168 B 171 B 172 C 209 pretimed signal B 73 PRETRANSYT ii B 168 B 171 B 172 C 209 Printer Control G 302 priority movements B 100 SIGNAL2000 priority treatment C 201 PROCESS B 123 Processing Time for DESIGN C 209 C 211 PROJECT 46 A 62 B 102 B 157 B 169 projected volumes 54 Proper Use of RIGHTTURNONREDS 56 Proportion of LT D 236 PROPRIETARY NOTICE iv PROS B 140 protected permitted left turn 43 B 155 Q queue analysis B 180 queue calculations 35 B 158 C 202 D 262 queue length C 202 queue spacing B 159 Queue Storage Ratio D 263 QUEUECALCS 35 38 39 42 43 A 62 B 89 B 90 B 142 B 158 B 159 B 168 B 180 C 209 D 228 D 232 D 236 D 238 D 240 D 242 D 246 D 247 D 249 D 262 E 279 queueing models C 202 QUEUEMODELS 38 A 62 B 158 B 159 C 202 D 249 D 254 D 259 quick reference A 59 QUIT 24 B 179 R range of values F 288 ranking of sequence performance 35 B 177 recent changes H 305 red time formula C 205 Reference Manual 2 release notes H 305 REPEAT 47 A 62 B 106 B 161 F 290 F 291 REPORT DESCRIPTIONS D 213
164. ZE APPLABELS ARRIVALTYPES ASK ASSIGNMENT BASE BIKEVOLUMES BUSVOLUMES CALCULATE CONDITIONS COUNTTYPE CRITICALS CYCLES DATA DELAYFACTORS DESCRIPTION DESIGN DIAGRAMS ECHO ENDGAIN EVALUATE EXCESS EXPORT FACTORS FILES GENERATION GOTO GOVERCS GRADES GREENTIMES GROUPTYPES HEADING HELP IDEALSATFLOWS INITIALQUEUE INTERSECTION IODEVICES LANES LEADLAGS LEVELOFSER VICE SIGNAL2000 B 70 Reference LOAD MAP MASTERNODE MESSAGES METROAREA MINIMUMS MOVLABELS NETWORK NEWPAGE NEXTLINES NODELIST NODELOCATION NOTE NSTOPFACTORS OFFSET OPTIMIZE OUTPUT OVERLAPS PARKINGSIDES PARKVOLUMES PATHASSIGNMENT PATHDISTRIBUTION PEAKHOURFACTORS PEDLEVELS PEDTIME PERIODS PERMISSIVES PHASEMOVEMENTS PROJECT QUEUECALCS QUEUEMODELS REPEAT REQCLEARANCES RESET RETURN RIGHTTURNONREDS ROUND ROUTE SATURATIONFLOWS SAVE SEQUENCES SERVICEVOLUMES SIMULATION SITESIZE SORT SIGNAL2000 B 71 Reference STARTUPLOST STOP STORAGE SUBSYSTEM SUMMARISE TIMINGS TRUCKCOUNTS TRUCKPERCENTS UPSTREAMVC UTILIZATIONS VEHICLECOUNTS VOLADDITIONALS VOLFACTORS VOLUMES WIDTHS YELLOWTIMES SIGNAL2000 B 72 Reference ACTUATIONS ACTUATIONS ACTUATIONS 12 lt A
165. ach of these parameters are discussed below The File Open Save SaveAs dialogs always work with line number 1 of file number 1 the following discussion only applies to the Advanced Files LOAD and SAVE options Line Numbers TEAPAC G 300 Reference File Numbers Line Numbers The line number of the file describes where in the file the access should begin If a new file has been opened to SAVE information the line number should be line to start at the beginning of the file When this information is to be retrieved line 1 should be used for the LOAD command If only one set of information is to be stored in the file line 1 should always be used for every SAVE and LOAD performed This is equivalent to the standard Windows functions of File Open Save SaveAs Information may be stacked in files sequentially For example if the data for an analysis is SAVEd starting at line 1 of a file and takes up 50 lines of the file another scenario can be SAVEd starting at line 51 of the file If it also takes 50 lines as reported by the SAVE command this information will be stored in lines 51 100 In order to retrieve this information line 51 should be used as the starting line number of the LOAD command If the first scenario is desired again simply LOAD starting at line again Any number of scenarios or conditions may be SAVEd and LOADed to and from a file simply by knowing at which line number the information starts When SAVing information it
166. action to be performed by the program These actions are either to enter data or to perform analyses Parameter Values Parameter Values are data entries found in a dialog box or which follow a Command on an Input Line These values define the data being entered or control the analysis to be performed Most dialog boxes have at least one Parameter Value associated with it Default Value When the program is run initially all parameter values take on pre assigned default values These are reasonably typical values Default Values can be restored using the File New menu or the RESET command Command Level Prompt The Command Level Prompt gt is displayed in the Manual Mode when ready to accept a Command Input Line from the keyboard Input Line An Input Line consists of a Command keyword and its Parameter Values An Input Line may be entered in either the Tabular View or Manual Mode or LOADed from a data file Group Name Groups Names are used to identify sets of commands which share a common function These commands can be referenced together as a group by using the Group Name enclosed in square brackets e g BASIC File A file is a place on a permanent storage disk where program entry information is stored This information can be either input data information a data file commands to direct computations a control file or a combination of both Intersection Approach and Movement Data Entry SIGNAL2000 5 Tutorial Chapt
167. added to all TEAPAC programs that allows the value of a single data entry to be made to all intersections in the NODELIST or the SUBSYSTEM if one is defined This is done when Intersection 0 is selected and the user is first warned of the pending global entry action and followed by an audible beep when the global entry is made The warning message can be omitted for future such actions if desired Examples of uses for this new feature include the following Enter a common cycle length or cycle range for SIGNAL2000 optimization of all signals designate a full SIGNAL2000 phasing optimization for all signals set the new volume adjustment factor or number of years for compounding a growth factor for all intersections for sensitivity analysis enable or disable the new additional volumes entry for all intersections designate a common peak hour factor for specific movements or all movements of all intersections set the minimum or required clearance values for optimization at all signals set the satflow adjustment factor for all signals to perform sensitivity analysis etc The possibilities of this new feature are virtually endless gt T2004v6 View Network Function Improved with Easier Pan amp New Zoom The View Network function has been added to all programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR and has been greatly improved in functionality regarding the ability to pan up down and left right as well as new functions for zoom in out and selecting a view a
168. aged by the typical use of File SaveAs The SCENARIO program also functions as an automatic plugin for all other Visual TEAPAC programs so that each program automatically understands the SCENARIO file structure which has been created and at no additional cost see below SCENARIO can easily define both single issue and multi issue conditions and any data dialog can be assigned or re assigned to any defined issue for as many as five independent mutually exclusive Issues 25 Conditions can be defined for each Issue For example a very common and simple single issue scenario would be having multiple volume conditions for one or more intersections for which capacity analysis intersection design and or signal timing optimization would be needed Other examples of a single issue analysis could be multiple years of traffic count data for TURNS or WARRANTS or multiple years or zones of land use for SITE s projected traffic estimation Multi issue scenarios could be combinations of any of these where the variation of one variable is independent of the others Another example of a multi issue scenario could be where one Issue is changing volumes based on the time of day and or day of week while the other Issue is independently changing intersection geometrics which depend on differing funding possibilities gt SCENARIO Support in All Visual TEAPAC Programs All Visual TEAPAC programs have been updated so that support for multi issue data files creat
169. al B 73 SEQUENCE B 95 E 276 sequence code E 279 SEQUENCES 19 22 30 35 38 42 A 63 B 75 B 94 B 96 B 99 B 101 B 107 B 110 B 156 B 158 B 171 B 172 B 177 B 184 B 194 C 209 E 273 E 275 E 279 F 294 SERVICEVOLUMES 31 36 38 42 43 54 A 62 B 90 B 168 B 172 C 209 D 267 Setup exe G 303 SHARE B 123 Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs 52 SIDRA queue model C 204 SIGNAL20 CFG B 101 SIGNAL2000 ii 1 15 SIGNAL85 ii C 207 SIGNAL94 ii C 207 SIGNAL97 ii C 207 sign controlled lanes 41 B 111 SIMULATION 38 A 62 B 173 SIGNAL2000 simulation control parameters 39 B 173 SITE ii B 136 SITE compatibility 44 SITESIZE 44 A 64 B 79 B 148 B 175 size of the output 47 B 118 sneakers D 265 D 267 SORT 30 35 A 62 B 94 B 101 B 177 D 224 E 273 Special SIGNAL2000 Group Names A 64 STARTUPLOST 42 A 63 B 98 B 178 E 276 STOP 24 47 A 62 B 179 F 290 stop sign controlled lane group B 111 STORAGE 42 A 63 B 180 storage distance D 263 subset of the NODELIST 38 B 181 SUBST command G 299 SUBSYSTEM 26 38 A 62 B 117 B 131 B 135 B 136 B 167 B 181 C 211 SUMMARISE 13 20 46 A 62 B 91 B 183 D 216 Switch G 299 SYNCHRO SIMTRAFFIC 54 system cycle length B 126 T target delay C 201 TEAPAC 1 TEAPAC Group Names A 64 TEAPAC Interface 9 TEAPAC Menu G 303 TEAPAC Procedures 11 TIMINGS 22 30 35 39 A
170. al MBQ model for a specified percentile queue in the worst lane using specified vehicle lengths The queue values displayed for each approach and for the intersection are the largest per lane values for each approach and for the entire intersection Intermediate Calculations An additional report is produced when the EVALUATE command is executed and OUTPUT YES is selected It shows several of the intermediate calculations making up the values presented in the Evaluation of Intersection Performance report described in this section Saturation Flow The saturation flow rate in vehicles per hour Idling Delay The amount of the total Average Delay which is due to idling time at the intersection in seconds per vehicle Fuel Consumption Components The three fuel consumption components which make up the Fuel Consumption all in gallons per hour The Fuel Consumption is the sum of the F fuel freeflow I fuel idling and A fuel accel decel CO Emissions Components The five CO emissions components which make up the CO Emissions all in grams per hour The CO Emissions is the sum of the F emissions freeflow I emissions idling A emissions acceleration and D emissions deceleration minus the C emissions cruise The following is an example of the Evaluation of Intersection Performance text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted w
171. al to the TEAPAC program TPC72 ERROR SCRATCH FILE LIMITS EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED Programs which perform substantial built in sorting functions may encounter files whose contents require too much scratch file space to be sorted Within a TEAPAC program it is difficult to correct this situation Action Attempt to reduce the amount of information you are trying to sort or use a system program to sort the file external to the TEAPAC program TPC81 ERROR A higher Usage Level License is needed to use this command Upgrade license A command or action request has been made for a function which is not supported by the Usage Level which has been licensed For example a design optimization function of Usage Level 2 may have been requested while using a program licensed only for Usage Level 1 which does not optimize Also the limits of program may have been exceeded for the Usage Level licensed as in trying to use 25 intersections when the licensed usage level only allows 12 Action Limit the function and or size of the problem being analyzed to those licensed or upgrade your licensed Usage Level to include the function and or size needed TPC91 ERROR HELP FILE MUST HAVE STRING COUNT IN LINE 1 This error indicates there is a problem with the information in the XXXXX CMD file which supports the running of the TEAPAC program where XXXXX is the name of the program This TEAPAC F 295 Reference information is not user serviceable Actio
172. also listed left turn satflows assume protected phasing if the left turn is a protected permitted operation Phasing Parameters The last section of the report lists parameters which relate to the phasing of the intersection First the basic phasing sequence code is listed either as a specific phasing a list of possible phasings or the keyword ALL representing all possible phasings being allowed When ALL is shown the primary phasing code is also shown The next entries indicate if left turns are permitted on a green ball following or preceding an exclusive phase permitted left condition and whether right turns are allowed to overlap into adjacent protected left turn phases when exclusive right turn lanes exist Following this is the cycle length and range to be used for cycle optimization If phase timings are provided in seconds second then the first cycle value is used to convert these timings to seconds before analysis otherwise it is ignored in an analysis In a cycle optimization the first cycle is the lowest cycle to be tested the second is the highest cycle to be tested and the third entry is the increment of cycle time to be used to move from the lowest to the highest cycle Individual phases greentimes and yellowtimes are then listed in seconds or seconds second for each phase in the order of the phasing specified Yellowtimes include all red clearance times as well The critical movements used for designing timings for each phas
173. alysis This can be particularly convenient in that a capacity analysis requires that every worksheet be produced in order to get the saturation flow worksheet which is all that is desired Using the SERVICEVOLUMES command will produce a single table of computed saturation flows for every defined lane group This command can be executed at any time that the intersection conditions have been input in much the same way that ANALYZE can be used Input phasings and timings are required Required G C Calculations The GOVERCS pronounced gee over seez as in g C command can be issued at any time intersection conditions have been input to estimate the amount of greentime which is required to meet the desired levels of service These computations are performed for every LEVELOFSERVICE specified These computations can be quite useful when trying to solve capacity problems at an intersection or for generating optimum timings for a non standard phasing for which DESIGN will not function This command can be used anytime use of the ANALYZE command would be valid SIGNAL2000 31 Tutorial CHAPTER 4 Actions and Entry Parameters Chapter 4 Topics This chapter provides a summary description of all of the actions and entry parameters of the SIGNAL2000 program The usage format of each command dialog and associated parameter values are provided along with a functional description of the command dialog The dialogs are grouped and presented in the following t
174. ames in the FILES command For example the third file name specified on the FILES command is designated as file 3 for LOAD and SAVE Each time a new file name is specified by a FILES command the associated next line and last line values of the file are both reset to point to line 1 e Appendix G describes details about specifying file names etc for your specific operating system For example new files that don t presently exist may use the N suffix to the file name in order to allow the program to create a new file automatically preventing accidental use of pre existing files thought not to exist If the N suffix switch described above is not used to indicate the desire to create a New file but the file named is not found a message to this effect will be issued At this point the user will be given the opportunity to say that the file should be created anyway This action is presented in the form of a warning message but is a valid way of creating new files without using the N switch If the N switch is used but the file named already exists a message to this effect is issued and the user is given an option to use the existing file anyway if desired The default location for user data files is defined in the dialog opened by the Options Setup menu The Options Setup dialog changes dynamically as the user navigates through the File Open and File SaveAs dialogs and the current contents of the dialog can be saved a
175. amily of seamlessly integrated programs these two programs have been added to the LinkTo menu which allows one click transfer of data and control to these programs as well as to the original PRETRANSYT PREPASSR and PRENETSIM programs gt Pedestrian Phase Displays Divider Line In Output Reports When displaying a phasing which includes an exclusive pedestrian phasse in various output reports such as the Capacity Analysis Summary the position of the ped phase is noted by showing the word PEDPHASE in the vertical divider line which separates the two vehicle phases which surround the exclusive ped phase In addition the existence of the ped phase is accounted for when calculating offsets for every phase displayed gt Old Format System Cycles Read from PRETRANSYT PREPASSR and PRENETSIM Files If a system cycle length is read from an old style data file from PRETRANSYT PREPASSR or PRENETSIM this old styled definition is accommodated by assigning this system cycle to each intersection defined in the NODELIST read from the file gt Faster Output Window Update The display speed for large amounts of information in the Output Window has been substantially increased so that an inordinate amount of time is not spent when many capacity analyses optimizations or data summaries are produced in a single output window gt Sample Bitmap Background Provided with Sample Data File SIGNAL2000 H 331 Reference An example bitmap background is supp
176. an be made TPC69 WARNING PATHDISTRIBUTION type required before data can be listed Miscellaneous Errors TPC71 ERROR BUFFER SIZE EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED TPC72 ERROR SCRATCH FILE LIMITS EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED TPC81 ERROR higher Usage Level License is needed TPC91 ERROR HELP FILE MUST HAVE STRING COUNT IN LINE 1 TPC92 ERROR TOO MANY CHARS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND STRINGS Appendix F Topics Appendix F Introduction TPC01 ERROR This command is not recognizable Re enter or type HELP ALL for full list This error message will be displayed if a command entry cannot be identified as a valid command This error is generally generated by the misspelling of a command or an invalid command abbreviation in the Manual Mode TEAPAC programs will accept a wide variety of abbreviations for any one command as long as the characters are unique to one and only one command see TPC02 below and the characters appear in the correct order as in the command For example VLMS is a valid abbreviation for the VOLUMES command while VMLS would generate a TPCO1 error message Since the command could not be identified the program does not process any of the parameters entered and requests another entry Action Re enter the TEAPAC F 283 Reference command or a valid command abbreviation along with it
177. and File Errors TPC11 ERROR file name cannot be located as specified TPC12 ERROR file number is not in the range of 0 to 5 TPC13 ERROR file number is not defined by FILES command TPC14 ERROR requested file number is currently in use TPC15 ERROR file access exceeds 6 levels of nesting TPC16 WARNING file name does not exist create TPC17 ERROR read write error at line xxxxx in file x TPC18 WARNING file name already exists overwrite TPC19 ERROR failed attempt to read past end of file x TPC20 ERROR path file name exceeds size limits TPC21 WARNING data written by XXXXX Vv vv bb may be lost overwrite TPC22 WARNING possible inconsistent usage of advanced data file Parameter Errors TPC31 WARNING keyword is not recognizable TPC32 WARNING more parameters found than were expected TPC33 WARNING parameter is not a valid numeric entry TPC34 WARNING integer number not in the accepted range TPC35 WARNING decimal number not in the accepted range TPC36 WARNING node number not in NODELIST Command as Parameter Errors TPC41 WARNING INVALID COMMAND IGNORED TPC42 WARNING too many commands listed on this command TPC43 WARNING AMBIGUOUS ENTRY IGNORED Demonstration Errors TPC44 ERROR AUTO Export not allowed for demo TPC45 ERROR only one file can be opened at a time for demo TPC46 ERROR use of printer not allowed for demo TPC47 ERROR writing to disk not allowed for demo TPC48 ERROR allowed i
178. and the file cannot be located as specified see Appendix G File Specification For example if no Switch is designated and the file does not currently exist then the warning message will be displayed to indicate that the file will need to be created if it has been specified properly This condition normally occurs if the name of an existing file is misspelled on the FILES command or a request has been made to use a non existent file In either case this message prevents a new file from inadvertently being created if this was not the intention Action The program is prompting the user whether the non existent file should be created as if the N switch had been used By responding Y to this prompt the file name used will be created and the error condition is erased If any other character is pressed then the file name will not be created and the user should re specify the correctly spelled file name TPC17 ERROR Read write error at line xxxxx in file x ESCape to abort continued attempts This error indicates that the lt Record Number gt in the file currently being accessed is not readable This typically occurs when the record of the file has never been defined by a SAVE command or other file creation techniques It will also occur if an attempt is made to access data past the physical end of the file especially if the file does not have an end of file terminator Action Re specify the location within the file to be accessed or first crea
179. anes Reqd Used C vph E Volume v c Delay S Model 1 N Approach 24 3 C l RT 12 1 0 182 0 508 756 799 194 0 243 9 0 A 95 ft TH 24 2 0 222 0 237 671 816 611 10 730 30 8 C 297 fE LT 12 1 0 027 0 092 263 320 139 0 434 16 7 B 92 ft S Approach 28 0 C RT TH 24 2 0 195 0 237 650 795 483 10 591 26 4 C 218 ft l LT 12 1 0 087 0 092 234 288 222 0 771 31 5 C 186 fti E Approach 29 9 C RT TH 24 2 0 188 0 200 585 694 539 0 777 31 1 C 243 ft l LT 12 1 0 090 0 204 268 362 72 10 199 21 0 Ctl 53 Et W Approach 26 3 CF RT 12 1 0 209 0 359 498 568 239 0 421 16 8 B 152 ft TH 24 2 0 174 0 200 598 707 500 0 707 28 3 C 215 ft LT 12 1 0 192 0 204 268 362 244 0 674 Sig Pee LOT EE SIGNAL2000 D 255 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Evaluation of Intersection Performance The Evaluation of Intersection Performance generated by the EVALUATE command is a report designed to summarize a number of performance measures for each lane group as well as the roadway conditions and capacities of each group The emphasis is primarily on the estimated level of each stream s performance rather than on the parameters which were used to calculate the level as in the case of the Capacity Analysis Summary The capacity analysis methodology used for each traffic stream follows the procedures presented in the 2000 Highway Ca
180. are displayed for each lane group For left turns saturation flow rates are given for either the Protected Phase the Permitted Phase or both depending on the type of phasing dictated by the SEQUENCES entry The maximum cycle length which will allow all left turns to clear the intersection using only the terminating clearance interval is also calculated in seconds If the operating cycle length is less than or equal to this cycle length all of the left turn demand will be able to clear the intersection on clearance intervals with no time specifically allocated to the left turn sneakers The following is an example of the Satflow Rates and LT Clearance Cycles text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Satflow Rates and LT Clearanc Cycles Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main SEQ 44 N Approach E Approach S Approach W Approach CYC 60 RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT Volumes 194 611 139 67 472 72 72 411 222 239 500 244 Wid Lan 12 1 24 2 12 1 0 0 24 2 12 1 0 0 24 2 12 1 12 1 24 2 12 1 Protctd 1574 3539 1768 0 3473 1770 0 3454 1768 1583 3539 1770 Permitd 519 0 409 0 LT Cmax 52 100 32 30 SIGNAL2000 D 267 Reference
181. are also discussed Appendix G of each TEAPAC Manual is identical for quick reference purposes Appendix H ADDENDA Appendix H provides a location for recent release notes and addenda which may be published after the official release of this documentation This appendix can also be used to store printed copies of new release notes for updated versions of SIGNAL2000 as produced by the Help RecentChanges menu or the MESSAGES command for off line reference SIGNAL2000 58 Reference APPENDIX A Abbreviated Description of Actions and Entries Appendix A Topics Appendix A is designed as a quick reference to the SIGNAL2000 commands and their associated parameter values This appendix is also useful for identifying what specific Group Names exist in the SIGNAL2000 program Table A 1 which commands can be found in each group Table A 2 and an alphabetical list of commands Table A 3 The command information contained in this appendix can be accessed interactively using the HELP command In Table A 1 the column labeled Std Name has an X entered for every group name that is a standard name found in each TEAPAC program The name and meaning of these groups in each TEAPAC program is identical allowing a quick understanding of how commands are organized in each TEAPAC program The column labeled Std Group has an X entered for every group which is comprised of standard TEAPAC commands In these cases not only is the name of the group
182. are collectively included as Ver 7 00 Build 14 These are documented below and use heading lines that begin with V7 00 14 Ver 7 00 Build 14 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses gt V7 00 14 Color Selection Added to Options Menu The Options menu now provides a Colors option for selecting colors which are used when generating formatted output reports and the main window network display Any selections made are retained and used during future program sessions Most of the default colors for formatted output reports are taken from the user s desktop color scheme DisplayProperties Appearance so changing the color scheme will automatically change the output colors used when the defaults are SIGNAL2000 H 313 Reference selected All colors selected including actual selections and defaults are displayed in the Color management dialog produced by the Options colors menu selection gt V7 00 14 Browse Button Added to Select a Bitmap File A browse button has been added to the Network Display and Edit Management dialog which is displayed when the Setup button of the main window is pressed This can be used to select a bitmap background file in the data file folder as an alternative to simply typing the file name in the entry field gt V7 00 14 INTERSECTION Dialog Options Added The INTERSECTION dialog which is used to select the current node has been significantly enhanced with several new features as follows A check box enabl
183. are not close to an LOS boundary 4 A specific v c target can be selected rather than just 100 The SORT results have been modified to reflect these changes a new column has been added to show the actual delay or v c target which was used when a solution was reached not just the LOS achieved The LOS is still listed but the list is further sorted by the target achieved which does a beter job of ranking the optimized phasings and reflecting the quality of performance each phasing solution will produce If it is desired to skip the delay target process completely and perform only v c balancing this can be accomplished by setting the delay target to zero Likewise if it is desired to skip the v c balancing after the delay targets are not met thus forcing a solution based on the last delay target this can be accomplished by setting the v c target to zero gt Calculation and Reporting of Minimum Cycle Length which is Never Violated A new column has been placed in the SORT results which displays the minimum cycle length for the phasing and movement minimums specified If the cycles tested do not reach this cycle the LOS displayed in the DESIGN and SORT reports is M and no solution is produced now guaranteeing that minimums are never violated by any solution produced by the optimization This is in contrast to the previous method which did not distinguish between a Forced solution due to oversaturation and one due to minimum cycle constrai
184. as shown in the documentation The information described below will help in understanding the conventions and terms used in this example as well as the entire document Definition of Terms Intersection Approach and Movement Data Entry Phasing Sequence Codes Version Number Input Modes Example Data Entries Parameter Symbols Definition of Terms Important terms which are used throughout the documentation are defined in Table 1 2 It is helpful to be familiar with these terms prior to using the tutorial reference manual SIGNAL2000 4 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 Definition of Terms Program Control Menu SIGNAL2000 starts up in the Normal View of the Visual Mode by first displaying the Main Menu From this menu all program options can be selected and executed including the Tabular View and the Manual Mode Menu Line Item A Menu Line Item is one of the options displayed in any drop down menu or in a lower level menu It can be selected and executed to display a dialog box to enter data or execute a function Dialog Box When a Menu Line Item is selected or the ASK command is used a dialog box is displayed In this display data entries can be easily entered and changed and calculations can be initiated by simple cursor and or mouse movements Command A Command is the keyword used to identify a dialog box and is the first word of an Input Line which identifies the kind of
185. ata values are not used by SIGNAL2000 Their inclusion in the program is to provide seamless data file compatibility with the SITE program in particular and all TEAPAC programs in general SITESIZE lt of Distribution Types gt lt of Inbound Types gt Enter the number of distribution types to be used to describe the inbound and outbound traffic generation ROUND lt Precision of Totals gt Enter the precision to be used in computing the results BASE lt Generation Base gt lt X Y Coord LL gt lt X Y Coord UR gt Enter the base development size for generating trips as it relates to the generation rates used for the development GENERATION lt Direction gt lt Generation Rate gt 10 lt Node Dir gt Enter the traffic generation rates and access points and access directions for the development PATHDISTRIBUTION lt Distr Type gt lt Distr gt lt Node gt lt Node Dir gt lt Descr gt Enter and set the current distribution type number and enter its related distribution percentage external node and description PATHASSIGNMENT lt Path gt lt Path gt lt Path List gt Enter a path list of intersections which vehicles of the current distribution type follow when traveling to and from the development ASSIGNMENT lt Type gt lt Intersection gt 12 lt lt Movement gt lt Assignment Factor gt gt Enter the percentage of a distribution type to be assigned to the movements at an intersection
186. ath length considerably by using a drive letter instead If the file name is too long re name the file so that it meets the file name limit Since SCENARIO Condition files and certain file switch options can add as many as 6 characters to file names designated by users it is recommended that user file names not exceed a limit of 64 characters to avoid potential problems when these tools are used TPC21 WARNING Data written by XXXXX Vv vv bb may be lost Overwrite No Yes This message indicates that a save operation has been requested for a file which contains data which was written by a different TEAPAC program and thus is subject to possible data loss if the save operation is permitted The authoring program of a file is determined when a file is opened and used only if it was created by any TEAPAC program with the Version 5 or later TEAPAC F 286 Reference TEAPAC interface This message may also be issued if an earlier version of the same TEAPAC program being used created the file and that earlier version saved information in a different manner such that data loss may occur The authoring program s name version and build numbers are listed in the warning message Action The program is prompting the user whether the existing data in the file should be overwritten anyway By responding Y to this prompt the file will be used as specified with the possible loss of prior data values If any other character is pressed then the file name
187. average lane of a lane group or for the worst lane of a lane group whether the average or percentile queue value is calculated and whether constant or user input vehicle spacings are used The following summarizes the characteristics of each of the ten models used 1 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane XXth Percentile Queue 2 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 3 ARRB ARRB MBQ Worst Lane 95th Percentile Queue 4 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane Average Queue 5 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Average Lane Average Queue 6 MBQ Historical MBQ Average Lane Average Queue 7 S9TE SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 8 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 9 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue 10 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue Appendix C of the manual both printed and online as the Help file provides complete detail of each of the models The QUEUEMODELS inputs have been enabled in order to define the characteristics of each of these models and the STORAGE input has also been enabled in support of the queue ratio calculations gt Initial Queue Delays Calculated Delay which results from standing queues at the beginning of the analysis period are now calculated according to the procedures defined in Appendix F of the 2000 HCM These queues can have an important impact on the delay calculated for a peak period and even
188. better performing half receiving an additional plus notation next to the base level of service For example Level of Service D as defined in the Capacity Manual can take on two possible levels in this analysis D and D The D represents the better half of performance of the defined Level D making it a performance closer to Level of Service C than Level D without the The Level of Service listed for each movement approach and the intersection is determined from the following table consistent with but more detailed than the manual suggests Control Delay Level of Per Vehicle Sec Service 0 0 lt d lt 10 0 A 10 0 lt d lt 15 0 Bt 15 0 lt d lt 20 0 B 20 0 lt d lt 27 5 C 27 5 lt d lt 35 0 35 0 lt d lt 45 0 D 45 0 lt d lt 55 0 D 55 0 lt d lt 67 5 E 67 5 lt d lt 80 0 E 80 0 lt d F Queue Model X The queue value for each lane group is provided according to the selected queue model The model used is listed in the column heading as a number from 1 to 10 according to the model number which has been selected by the corresponding QUEUEMODELS entry Each of the 10 possible queue models is documented in detail in Appendix C The value listed is always the queue distance in feet for a single lane in the lane group The queue model selected will define what queue formulation is used MBQ or MQL whether the queue is for the worst or the average lane and whether the queue is an average or percenti
189. but several points are worth making to help guide this process The following discusses these issues New Default Values Use of SERVICEVOLUMES and GOVERCS Commands Calculating and Saving Saturation Flow Rates Processing Time for DESIGN New Default Values Several input variables have new default values in SIGNAL94 SIGNAL97 and SIGNAL2000 in comparison to SIGNAL85 These new defaults are consistent with the default values suggested by the 1994 1997 and 2000 HCMs For a new analysis these variables take on their new default values automatically when the analysis starts but this is not true when a SIGNAL85 data file is Opened or LOADed This is because the default values from SIGNAL85 are stored in the data file along with other user entries and thus will be LOADed as real data thus over riding the SIGNAL2000 defaults The five command entries which are affected in this way are IDEALSATFLOWS UTILIZATIONS ARRIVALTYPES REQCLEARANCES and PEDLEVELS IDEALSATFLOWS now default to 1900 pcphgpl instead of 1800 UTILIZATIONS now default to 0 0 instead of 1 0 so that the HCM defaults are used ARRIVALTYPES now default to type 3 for all movements including left turns REQCLEARANCES now default to 4 0 seconds instead of 3 0 and PEDLEVELS default to 0 peds per hour instead of LOW which equals 50 per hour If the SIGNAL2000 defaults are desired for a SIGNAL85 analysis LOADed from a SIGNAL85 file they must be specifically set
190. c SEQUENCES 44 CC Important Differences Between SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 and Ver 2 Several differences between SIGNAL2000 Version 1 and Version 2 are important to note for prior users of Version 1 These differences also apply to older SIGNAL programs SIGNAL85 SIGNAL94 SIGNAL97 if a user has occasion to read these older data files into Version 2 Reading data from any of these older programs including Version 1 is easily accomplished due to the upwards compatibility of data files between the programs using the File OpenMerge Shared menu or the LOAD SHARE command but several points are worth making to help guide this process The following discusses these issues Managing Multiple Intersections with NODELIST and INTERSECTION Merging Multiple Version 1 Files Into a Single Version 2 File Processing Time for DESIGN Managing Multiple Intersections with NODELIST and INTERSECTION All prior versions of SIGNAL handled a single intersection in an analysis and File Save placed this single intersection in a single data file resulting in a large number of data files and independent analyses for projects with multiple intersections and or multiple scenario conditions This was dictated by the methods of the Highway Capacity Manual HCM and the historical way of managing data for HCM analyses SIGNAL2000 Version 2 has the same data structure as PRENETSIM PRETRANSYT and PREPASSR in that multiple intersections can be entered and stor
191. cally add each intersection number to the end of the NODELIST as new numbers are encountered When all intersections have been loaded use File SaveAs to save the single combined file into a new file name If OpenMerge Shared is not used the possibility of losing all data previously entered into Version 2 exists due to the way the older versions initialized the older programs if Version 1 files are being Opened this condition is detectable and a warning is issued to that effect Processing Time for DESIGN LEVELOFSERVICE has been enhanced significantly so that more precise delay targets can be specified and the incremental delays tested are user controlled for more precise balancing of the critical delays when the target cannot be met In addition if none of the delay targets are met a more precise incremental v c testing is also user controlled All of this enhanced precision in the optimization results in noticably superior optimization results but comes with a price tag in terms of computational time Further several important new calculations have been added to portions of the optimization iterations which generate better results but at the further expense of additional computational time SIGNAL2000 C 211 Reference On today s faster computers this additional time may not be significant or even noticable On older computers however depending on the number of SEQUENCES and CYCLES being tested as well as the degree of saturation of th
192. cally created to orient external legs of intersections around the periphery of the study network and internal dummy bend nodes are easily created for better network representation between analysis intersections Proper treatment of all dummy nodes externals and bends are fully integrated into all of the TEAPAC application programs as well as the eleven third party programs to which TEAPAC analyses can be exported Dummy nodes do not count against the maximum number of intersections allowed by each Usage Level Intersections and dummy nodes are easily moved within the network by simply dragging them across the grid or bitmap with the option to freeze the associated link distances or have them adjust automatically as they are moved The network view is easily adjusted with buttons for panning in eight directions zoom in zoom out zoom all to show the entire network and a rubber band selection to outline the desired zoom in area The display of either the bitmap or the network is easily toggled on or off as required and the current intersection for subsequent dialog data entry or analysis is made by simply clicking the intersection Intersections can also be selected by a right click which opens a popup menu with all the data entry and data analysis dialogs immediately available either in Normal View or Tabular View use F3 to toggle the view The popup menu also allows the renumbering or deletion of the selected node Dragging a rubber band sel
193. care that all files and directories used have correct read write privileges for the users TEAPAC G 304 Reference APPENDIX H Addenda Appendix H Topics Appendix H provides a location for recent release notes and addenda which may be published after the official release of this documentation This appendix can also be used to store printed copies of new release notes for updated versions of the software as produced by the Help RecentChanges menu or the MESSAGES command for off line reference Appendix H Topics Appendix H Introduction Version Notes Ver 2 81 Ver 2 80 Ver 2 71 Ver 2 70 Ver 2 61 Ver 2 60 Ver 2 02 Ver 2 01 Ver 2 00 Ver 1 11 Ver 1 10 Ver 1 01 Ver 1 00 SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 81 27MAY08 Build 11 27MAY08 gt HCS Export Enhancements SIGNAL2000 H 305 Reference It has been discovered that the intersection numbering defined in the HCS XML data file format will only accept an intersection numbered 1 so intersection 1 is now always exported regardless of the actual intersection number in the SIGNAL2000 network It has also been discovered that an ampersand amp in a text field must be handled a special way in the XML file so this method is now employed for any occurrence of an ampersand in the user s text strings gt Better Terminology in Permitted LT Output Report Inspection of the 1 lane and multi lane designations in the permitted left turn output report HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet
194. case the phase s serving movements 2 and 8 will receive all of the excess time above LOS D performance and the non priority critical movements will receive nominally 55 seconds of delay LOS D This strategy might be used for example in a case where additional time is desired for the main street for progression purposes but a specific limiting delay or level of service is to be established for the minor critical movements a unique feature of SIGNAL2000 in comparison to PASSER and TRANSYT This strategy might also be a standard option for signals being timed along a state highway route Oversaturation Considerations When conditions are oversaturated at an intersection the basic objective of balancing delay for the critical movements is frequently not appropriate or even desireable When this is the case or any time the maximum delay LOS of the LEVELOFSERVICE entry is exceeded SIGNAL2000 reverts to a different optimization policy The new policy is to balance the v c values of the critical movements rather than the delay values The oversaturated design policy is invoked any SIGNAL2000 C 201 Reference time the critical movement delay of the DESIGN becomes worse than the maximum delay allowed This is represented by LOS V or S in the DESIGN and SORT tables LOS V is when a v c target is achieved LOS S is primarily intended to indicate S aturation as the design policy when the maximum v c is exceeded It must be recognized however that t
195. ccess Data Stored In Files 47 Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data 45 Commands to Control Operation Of Program 46 Commands to Control Program Execution 47 Commands to Enter Approach Data 39 Commands to Enter Basic Data 36 Commands to Enter Intersection Data 39 Commands to Enter Movement Data 40 Commands to Enter Phasing Data 42 Commands to Enter System Data 38 Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data 44 Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data 44 Commands to Label Output 46 common problems E 278 Common TEAPAC Dialogs 45 compound growth 41 B 191 compound left turn phasing 43 B 155 COMPUTE B 166 CONDITIONS 45 A 64 B 86 F 294 CONTENTS v Conventions 4 Input Order 6 Lane Group WIDTH Designation E 278 Phasing SEQUENCE Designations E 279 coordinated offset 43 B 139 coordinates 39 B 81 B 136 Copyright iv CORSIM ii count interval 45 B 153 count intervals F 291 count period 45 B 153 COUNTTYPE 44 A 64 B 88 B 185 B 189 CRITICAL B 184 D 269 SIGNAL2000 CRITICALS 43 A 63 B 89 CROSS REFERENCE OF COMMANDS AND GROUPS A 62 cumulative count B 153 cumulative entries B 88 current intersection C 210 current parameter values 46 B 91 CYCLE B 75 B 99 B 107 B 158 B 172 cycle length scanning 38 43 B 90 CYCLES 22 30 35 38 43 A 63 B 90 B 94 B 95 B 101 B 140 C 209 D DATA 13 20 46 A 59 A 62 B 91 B 183 F 289 Data Entry 17 data entry commands 36
196. ce gt is set to YES the upstream distance for this link will be excluded from the calculation of the avergage network scale factor as well as any checks for consistency between the link s apparent scale factor based on its endpoint coordinates and the rest of the network A value of NO is recommended but if an upstream distance is intentionally inconsistent with the coordinate values and real network scale factor YES should be used to prevent that condition from improperly affecting the calculation of the average network scale factor and related contingency checks for network connections which are made SIGNAL2000 B 132 Reference NEWPAGE NEWPAGE NEWPAGE lt Page Advance Option gt Defaults YES Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to enter a flag indicating that the next output report should begin with title headings at the top of the next page lt Page Advance Option gt is a keyword identifying whether or not the next report should be forced onto the next page of output even if it will fit on the remaining portion of the current page and can be either of the keywords described below NO do not force a new page with the next report YES advance to a new page with the next report output default Notes If the page length is set to zero with IODEVICES titles will be printed at the current page location without a page advance continuous printing Use of NEWPAGE is primarily oriented towards the batch mo
197. ceding protected left phases Negative movement numbers should not be used if the only phase the movement is allowed is permitted opposed e The order of input of phases for PHASEMOVEMENTS is not important The number of phases in the final phasing is determined by the last phase which has a non zero number of movements in it Extra phases can be eliminated by entering a movement number 0 as the first movement in the phase This erases all following movement numbers for that phase and any phases which follow The DIAGRAMS command can and should be used to review the phasing designated by PHASEMOVEMENTS before further analysis SIGNAL2000 B 156 Reference PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT lt First Title Line gt Defaults 80 blanks Menus Groups TITLES The purpose of this command is to enter the first line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed lt First Title Line gt is the first of three lines of information generally used for the project name displayed at the top of every output report and can be up to 80 characters of alphabetic or numeric information Its default value is 80 blanks Notes If the first character of the PROJECT parameter is a plus sign the characters entered on this command will be overlaid over those of the previously entered PROJECT command This overlay will begin at the character position identified by the digits of the first two characters which follow the and will end after t
198. cessful sequences which is sorted in ascending order by target achieved and Required G C Y C This list also contains the range of cycle lengths which were successful at that target for each sequence Following the list of sorted sequences are the capacity analyses for the specified number of sequences at the top of the SORTed list performed automatically by the ANALYZE command SIGNAL2000 B 94 Reference DESIGN DESIGN If a negative number is entered for lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt the design procedure is completed in the same manner as with a zero see above however no output is generated Use this for a single intersection only although functional for a selection of All intersections INTERSECTION 0 it is of no value since the only meaningful commands which could follow are SORT or TIMINGS but neither is valid for All intersections Extra output normally displayed with the DESIGN report when OUTPUT is specified will not be displayed when the DESIGN parameter is non zero for example when DESIGN 1 or DESIGN 1 is entered e Commands which guide the DESIGN process include MINIMUMS REQCLEARANCES EXCESS LEVELOFSERVICE CYCLES SEQUENCE and OUTPUT SIGNAL2000 B 95 Reference DIAGRAMS DIAGRAMS DIAGRAMS lt Sequence Code gt Defaults 1 Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE The purpose of this command is to display a phase movement diagram for the specified sequence code for the current intersection lt
199. ch as 1N or 132E SIGNAL2000 H 309 Reference gt V7 00 28 Input Limit for VOLFACTORS Adjusted for Consistency with Save The largest VOLFACTOR which can be saved in a TEAPAC data file has always been 9 99 but it s been recently noticed that the input dialog error checking permitted factors as large as 20 0 without an error resulting in subsequent problems if an attempt was made to save such an entry The input error checking has been modified to match the save limitation to resolve this problem At the same time the discussion in the documentation has been modified to reflect the same precision of save accuracy to avoid any further confusion gt V7 00 28 Multiple Copies of a Program Can Be Open Simultaneously Again The source of a problem which has recently prevented multiple copies of any given program from being open at the same time such as when comparing alternatives side by side This problem has been resolved and the ability to have multiple copies open simultaneously has been re enabled gt V7 00 28 Minor Fixes to Drag and Drop Network Interface An occasional problem connecting T intersections properly when bend nodes were present in the network has been resolved Build 21 versions of the programs would notify the user of the problem immediately upon creation of a link under these circumstances If an earlier version was used to create the network the problem is easily detected if it exists with the Analyze function in the
200. ch lane of each lane group in vehicles per hour per lane Flow ratio The ratio of the lane flow to the lane satflow for each lane group v c ratio The ratio of the lane flow to the lane capacity for each lane group Effective green The effective green time in seconds for each lane group Green ratio The effective g C ratio for each lane group Upstream filter The upstream filtering factor for each lane group Green arrivals The proportion of vehicles arriving on green for each lane group Platoon ratio The platoon ratio for green arrivals in eahc lane group Progression factor The effects of the progression adjustment factor on queueing in each lane group Queue 1st term The first term of the queued vehicles computation SIGNAL2000 D 249 Reference Queue factor The second term adjustment factor Queue 2nd term The second term of the queued vehicles computation Avg queue The average number of queued vehicles in each lane group XX factor The percentile back of queue factor for the lane group at the percentile level shown XX queue The percentile back of queue for the lane group at the percentile level shown Avg spacing The average queue spacing between front bumpers of queued vehicles in feet Avail storage The available queue storage for queued vehicles in each lane group in feet Avg distance The average distance occupied by queued vehicles in each lane group in feet Avg ratio The average queue storage
201. check that all of the detailed phasing requirements for defining phasings with code 0 have been met S2K23 WARNING Input for XXXXXXXX exceeds limits allowed by HCS Check results carefully This warning indicates that an input to SIGNAL2000 which is being EXPORTed to HCS exceeds a limit imposed by HCS This is a limit that is more extreme than in SIGNAL2000 so the EXPORT process must limit the HCS input in order to avoid an error condition in HCS Asa result since the inputs to HCS differ from those made to SIGNAL2000 the results obtained from HCS may differ from the SIGNAL2000 result for that reason The input variable type is noted in the warning in the XXXXXXXX position of the message Action Check the input to HCS for the variable described in the message and recognize any differences in the results that this changed input may cause S2K24 ERROR Lost time for movement XX results in negative or zero effective green This error indicates that the combination of GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN for the listed movement has resulted in an effective green time less than or equal to zero and computations cannot continue Action Adjust any or all of the entries mentioned above for the movement listed such that the resulting effective green time as defined in the HCM is greater than zero S2K25 ERROR Host program defined by Options Setup not found Install or adjust setup A check is made before the Auto option of EXPORT
202. cing it This effectively allows the merging of separate data files to create a larger system Caution must be used when one file is already open in a program and another file is opened that was not created by the current program since this file will automatically be Open Shared and thus appended if it has a different NODELIST If an INTERSECTION entry is read from a Shared file and is not in the current NODELIST it is automatically appended to the end of the NODELIST As with NODELIST above this makes the Shared function effectively an automatic Merge function Duplicate nodes encountered in a NODELIST entry or an appended NODELIST are ignored The File OpenShared menu item has been changed to File OpenMerge Shared to better indicate the fuction which this type of Open normally performs When a LinkTo function prompts the user to save changed data before the LinkTo is performed and a new path file name is given this path file name is used by the LinkTo function If no file has been provided the LinkTo function performs properly with a linkage to the next rpogram but without any data transfer gt Pending New PRENOSTOP Program Added to LinkTo Menu A pending new TEAPAC program call PRENOSTOP which interfaces the NOSTOP program to the data of other TEAPAC programs such as this program and SIGNAL2000 has been added to the LinkTo menu SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 01 02FEB03 Build 54 05JUN03 gt Lost Times Re calculated After Design for Each D
203. ction SIGNAL2000 Error Messages SIGNAL2000 Trouble Spots SIGNAL2000 Error Messages The following messages are issued to indicate that the conditions of the program are not as expected The S2Kxx number that precedes the message in this document is the error number which is displayed at the top of the error message window The notes that follow the message here indicate where to look for conditions that may have caused the message and how to correct these conditions Messages designated as WARNINGS may not cause computations to stop while those designated as ERRORS will terminate all computations Errors and Warnings S2K01 WARNING S2K02 WARNING S2K03 WARNING S2K04 WARNING SIGNAL2000 E 271 Reference S2K06 WARNING S2K07 ERROR S2K08 ERROR S2K09 ERROR S2K10 ERROR S2K11 ERROR S2K13 ERROR S2K14 ERROR S2K15 ERROR S2K16 ERROR S2K17 ERROR S2K18 ERROR S2K19 ERROR S2K20 WARNING S2K21 WARNING S2K22 ERROR S2K23 WARNING S2K24 ERROR S2K25 ERROR S2K26 WARNING S2K27 WARNING S2K01 WARNING xx xx lane width exceeds upper limit of XX X feet and will be extrapolated This warning indicates that the calculated average lane width in the noted lane group is greater than or equal to the maximum limit displayed This is the stated upper limit of lane widths
204. ction the average delay is determined in seconds per vehicle This value estimates the average delay caused by the traffic signal which will be experienced by drivers at the intersection according to the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Total Delay The sum of the average delays described above for each vehicle which drives through the lane group during the analysis period is calculated as the total delay This cumulative total delay is converted to vehicle minutes and represents the total amount of wasted time which is spent at the intersection during the analysis period being studied Auto occupancies can be applied directly to this value to calculate person minutes of delay Number Stopped The number of vehicles which will be stopped by the signal during the analysis period is calculated These vehicles are stopped either due to a red indication or a green indication with a queue still dissipating The number of stopped vehicles can be compared directly to the demand volume during the analysis period to determine the percentage of vehicles which will be stopped also interpreted as the probability of a vehicle being stopped by the signal Fuel Consumption If the approach speed of lane groups is input with the NETWORK command an estimate of the total fuel consumption in gallons during the analysis period is calculated for the idling time and accel decel to and from the approach speed If link distance is also input the freeflow consumption on this
205. ction assumed by the user to be north is always up in the diagrams as indicated by the North arrow at the left Phases are numbered consecutively starting with one 1 for the first north south phase No attempt is made to identify subphases lead phases or overlap phases by the phase number The coded phase sequence number appears at the top of the phase diagram along with specified lead lag conditions if any otherwise is shown Timings The signal timings used for the capacity analysis are given in terms of the cycle length C in seconds the green time for each phase G in seconds and the yellow time plus all red for each phase Y R in seconds If a phase s green time is controlled by a minimum this is indicated by the letter M in the lower left corner of the phase The following is an example of the HCM Input Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 230 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Input Worksheet Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Area Location Type NONCBD Ke
206. ctuated Movement gt Defaults 12 NO Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the type of phase module present actuated or non actuated for each movement of the current intersection for use in the determination of the Delay Calibration Term k lt Actuated Movement gt is a keyword describing whether or not the movement is part of an actuated phase or the unit extension value sec of the actuated phase and can have the values described below NO the movement is not part of an actuated phase default YES the movement is part of an actuated phase unit extension is 3 sec 0 2 30 0 unit extension in seconds Notes ACTUATIONS are used in conjunction with v c to determine the Delay Calibration Term according to Exhibit 16 13 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual e Specifying YES or giving extensions for all non zero lane groups indicates a fully actuated signal Specifying NO for all non zero lane groups indicates a pretimed signal Specifying YES or giving extensions for some but not all non zero lane groups indicates a semiactuated signal An ARRIVALTYPE value other than 3 may be used for a movement with ACTUATIONS set to something other than NO but only where it is clear that the coordinated movement is truly actuated when it is also coordinated SIGNAL2000 B 73 Reference ADTFACTOR ADTFACTOR ADTFACTOR lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumes gt Defaul
207. d help button is now available in the main window The option to Save output to a text file now allows the user to name a file A more informative message is issued if a file to open is already in use Better message if attempt to Open a non TEAPAC file TEAPAC programs can now be installed in a folder with spaces in path name A new option exists to automatically close subsequent warnings and errors stays in effect until control returned to user for stacked files and control files Files can now be dragged to a desktop icon to launch the program uses the dragged file All keywords now display using title case instead of all caps All dialog boxes have been enhanced with a more modern look using depressed input fields Protect the Options Setup fields which should not be changed except by re installing Browse buttons have been added for the data and host path entries to simplify changes The current data file path from Options Setup is shown in the FILES dialog Reading data from a file during control file execution doesn t set flag so won t get prompted with message to save data from a control file Better closure of main window if control file halts program same function improved if control file dragged to main window halts prog Hourglass mouse cursor displays while printing SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 01 22FEBO1 gt New Constraints for Queue Model Calculations The HCM Capacity Committee has discovered that in the transcription of the underlying research which
208. d This displays the current values of the commands ASKed for in a dialog box display which provides on screen HELP and allows the user to move the cursor among the data fields and even change any values desired just like the Visual Mode Try the following from the Manual Mode both in the Normal and Tabular Views use F3 to toggle between views SIGNAL2000 20 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE ASK BASIC Review the data values listed using any of the methods described above Note that there is an error in the VOLUMES entered The left turn on the east approach should be 65 not 165 To correct this re enter the VOLUMES entry with the proper value using either of the entry modes Visual or Manual Basic gt VOLUMES 65 Note that in either mode only the value to be changed need be entered In the Visual Mode the cursor is moved to the field with the 165 value and the 65 is typed right over the 165 followed by TAB or ENTER In the Manual Mode the VOLUMES command is typed followed by 5 asterisks used as place holders to skip the first five entries It is frequently desirable to print the summary of input values both as a document to use in the input checking process as well as a physical record of the input data used in subsequent analyses Use of the printer is easy with SIGNAL2000 Simply use the File Print menu of the output window or Ctrl P to direct the output to the default printer Various available pri
209. d This line number is designated by using line 0 of the file For example if information from the second scenario above was LOADed starting at line 51 and the analysis determined that are error in the input existed it could be corrected and re SAVEd using line number 0 Since the previous file access command LOAD started at line 51 whether by default or actual input the following SAVE 0 command will start at line 51 again effectively re SAVing the information over the previous information with the corrections In this sense a TEAPAC G 301 Reference repeated series of LOAD and SAVE 0 commands will LOAD the next information from the file then re SAVE any changes made before LOADing the next information File Numbers The file numbers used in file access commands such as SAVE and LOAD refer to the position in which the file name desired exists on the current FILES command The FILES command can carry up to five files simultaneously and the file number assigned to each is the position of the file name in the FILES list For example if existing conditions for an analysis are stacked sequentially in a file called EXIST and optimized conditions are to be stored in a file called OPTIM each could be open at the same time by using the FILES EXIST OPTIM command Since EXIST is the first file in the file list it will then be referred to as file number 1 by subsequent file access commands OPTIM is the second file name in the list so subsequent fi
210. d the user will be prompted as to whether to allow the program to overwrite the contents of the data file anyway even though it was thought to be a new file In either case a user response of Y eliminates the potential error condition and the program continues with the selected action If N or any other response is made the program processes the condition as an error usually with an opportunity to re enter the bad file specification The O switch is used to designate an Otherwise or dOn t care condition If a data file exists for lt File Name gt the file will be used and possibly overwritten If the data file does not exist a new file will be created under this option This option can also be interpreted as the Output option since it is typically invoked only when the file is to be used for output rather than input This mode creates a file if it is needed or uses one that already exists File Access All file access commands in TEAPAC programs such as LOAD and SAVE use line numbers and file numbers to describe where the file access is to take place For example the syntax of the LOAD command is LOAD lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt In order to LOAD the proper information from the data file the proper lt Line Number gt and lt File Number gt must be specified The lt File Number gt describes which of the defined FILES are to be used while the lt Line Number gt describes where in the file to start the access E
211. d add up to half of the system cycle and the half cycle should be entered for the minor intersections OFFSETS should also be entered in seconds not sec sec SIGNAL2000 B 90 Reference DATA DATA DATA lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to display the current parameter values for the specified commands lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or groups names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program It default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes DATA will tabulate a list of the current parameter values of the listed commands To obtain a formatted list of all data values with column headings and labels etc use the SUMMARISE command e In the Manual Mode of menu versions of TEAPAC programs use of ASK for the same list of commands will display the current data values as well as allow any input editing which may be needed all in a single step SIGNAL2000 B 91 Reference DELAYFACTORS DELAYFACTORS DELAYFACTORS 12 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter factors for each movement of the current intersection used to adjust the delay calculations for example to match delays obtained from a network simulation model lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt is the factor t
212. d displayed properly in the dialog and a random glitch which garbled part of the main window Network display when the SIMULATION dialog opened has been fixed gt V7 00 21 Make Help File Useable When a Data File is Double clicked A problem locating the HLP file when a user data file was double clicked in Windows Explorer to open it has been fixed Build 14 20APR06 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS Build 07 11NOV05 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt New OUTPUT Option for 2 Page Capacity ANalysis Summary A new OUTPUT option called Input has been added to include the Input Worksheet only with the Capacity Analysis Summary output report resulting in a compact 2 page summary of both input and results for a capacity analysis gt Critical V C Added to Capacity Analysis Summary Critical v c has been added to the top of the Capacity Analysis Summary output report as an additional measure of intersection performance potential User s are cautioned in the documentation to recognize that critical v c is a measure of performance potential not actual performance since the value of the result assumes signal timings balance the critical v c ratios is independent of the actual signal timings gt V7 00 14 Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 release of Visual TEAPAC and
213. d protected the protected phase for the left turn is detailed in the section described above then each of the same variables are described in a second section for the permitted phases The totals for the combined phases appear in the Delay and LOS section which follows SIGNAL2000 D 242 Reference Sum of the Critical Flow Ratios The sum of the Flow Ratios v s for the Critical Lane Groups Total Lost Time Per Cycle The time in seconds during which the intersection is not used effectively by any movement Critical v c Ratio This is calculated according to the formula for Xc in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Delay and LOS Approach and Movement Labels The one or two character approach and movement name designations Adjusted Flow The adjusted flow rate in vehicles per hour for each lane group Lane Group Capacity The lane group capacity in vehicles per hour for each lane group Volume Capacity Ratio The volume capacity ratio for each lane group Green Ratio The g C ratio for each lane group The green ratio for both phases is displayed for protected permitted left turns Uniform Delay d The uniform delay term d in seconds per vehicle as calculated by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual methods Incremental Calibration Term The delay calibration term for the incremental delay calculation for an actuated condition as determined in Exhibit 16 13 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Incremental Delay d2 T
214. d will not be overwritten and the user should re specify a different file name as appropriate and re specify the save operation desired TPC22 WARNING This Save appears inconsistent with prior Advanced file usage Save anyway This message indicates that a save operation has been requested for a file using a normal Windows menu such as File Save where it appears that such a save might be inconsistent with prior advanced file usage techniques applied to this same file Primarily this is detected when the most recent file activity was to a different location in the file or to a different file In such a case a normal Windows save function such as File Save which will go to line 1 of file 1 is anticipated to be an inadvertant save which might not be desired by the user Action This condition is merely a warning to prevent a possible overwrite of data in an advanced use file The program is prompting the user whether the save should be performed or not at the user s discretion If the save is desired select Yes if not or there is any uncertainty select No to abort the save TPC31 WARNING This keywordis not recognizable Look at HELP for its allowed values This error message indicates that an invalid parameter value was detected Generally this indicates that an invalid character string was entered as a parameter value Action Re enter the appropriate parameter value or values to correct the invalid entry or press the ENTER key to
215. data file path G 299 Data Review 20 debugging B 97 Defacto Left Turn Lane E 273 default extension G 299 default next line 47 B 134 default printer G 302 default values 25 46 B 163 Defining Priority Movements for an Optimization C 200 Definition of Terms 4 Definitions Command 5 Command Level Prompt 5 Default Value 5 Dialog Box 5 File 5 Group Name 5 Input Line 5 Menu Line Item 5 Parameter Values 5 Program Control Menu 5 Delay Adjustment Factor B 77 Delay Calibration Term B 73 DELAYFACTORS 42 A 63 B 92 DESCRIPTION 46 A 62 B 93 B 102 B 169 description of the intersection 36 39 B 117 DESIGN 22 30 35 39 50 A 62 B 89 B 94 B 100 B 101 B 110 B 111 B 121 B 142 B 162 B 171 B 177 B 184 C 209 D 221 D 224 D 227 D 228 D 252 D 265 E 273 E 275 E 279 Design Mode C 209 Inputs 27 Procedures 30 development size 44 B 81 DIAGRAMS 36 A 62 B 89 B 96 B 156 D 269 E 279 Differences Between SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 and Ver 2 C 210 Differences Between SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL2000 C 207 direct linkage to HCS B 101 DISCLAIMER iv disk data file G 298 disk drive G 299 358 Index Disk File Output G 303 disutility index B 140 divide by zero G 298 double cycled B 90 B 110 B 139 B 195 Drive Path Designation G 299 dual optional lane usage B 119 B 193 dual optional turn lanes 19 dual optional E 278 dual optional lanes 41 B 111 Dual Optional Turn Lane Analysis 50
216. data review Either of these commands may be used to display the current parameter values for the SIGNAL2000 entries SUMMARISE provides a formatted summary report for all of the command parameter values while DATA displays only the parameter values for the list of commands requested To illustrate this operation in either the Visual or Manual Modes enter the following Note that again since this is an active command the Visual Mode requires that the Execute button be used to execute the command The View Summary menu can also be used Datafiles SUMMARISE The current values of all input commands are listed with the values just entered as well as any default values which were not entered Note that the MOVEMENT parameters such as VOLUMES WIDTHS and LANES have approach and movement labels and a report title is displayed The DATA command only displays the information without any special formatting Datafiles DATA VOLUMES WIDTHS The program displays the current parameter values for only the VOLUMES and WIDTHS commands Note that no other command s values are listed nor are there any headings Since DATA accepts other commands as parameter values DATA can be requested for only one several or all commands where SUMMARISE always gives all values This makes DATA quicker to use but less clear for others to review other than on the computer display The most efficient way to check input from the Manual Mode is to use the ASK comman
217. de using control files In the batch mode if a report is too large to fit on the remaining portion of the designated report length on the current page as designated on the IODEVICES command it will be placed on a new page regardless of the condition specified by the NEWPAGE command If the first command to reset on the RESET command is PARAMETERS a NEWPAGE YES command is automatically invoked Thus any report produced following a RESET command will be forced to the top of the next page This feature can be defeated by use of a NEWPAGE NO following the RESET command SIGNAL2000 B 133 Reference NEXTLINES NEXTLINES NEXTLINES 5 lt Next Line of File gt Defaults 5 next Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to enter the default next line to be accessed in each of the five files lt Next Line of File gt is the line number of the default next line to be accessed in the file and can be zero or any positive number less than or equal to the last line of the file and less than or equal to 32767 Its default value is the line number after the last line accessed for each file Notes The next line of a file is automatically set each time a RETURN command is encountered in a file In this case the next line of that file is set to the line number of the line which follows the RETURN command The next line of a file is automatically set to 1 each time a file is opened with the FILES command e T
218. der version of a given program that has been updated Build 10 04AUG05 gt Increased Precision for Default Lane Utlilization Factors The default lane utilization factors which are used when an entry of 0 00 is made have had their precision increased from two decimal places to three decimal places to match the precision found in Exhibit 10 23 This change will have very slight impacts on results of SIGNAL2000 capacity analyses but should be considered more faithful to the HCM 2000 Entered lane utilization factors must still be limited to two decimal places of entry gt Print Problem Resolved from Tabular View Difficulties experienced by some users attempting to print results when using the Tabular View have been resolved gt Improved Phasing Display in Dialog Boxes SIGNAL2000 H 319 Reference The currently selected signal phasing for an intersection which is displayed in some dialog boxes has been improved so that improperly coded permitted left turns display differently than expected to indicate the error in coding Build 00 23MAY05 gt New Message Warns User That Calculated and or Imported Values Have Not Been Saved A new message has been created which warns a user when calculated and or imported values will be lost when the program is closed or File New is used This provides a check against inadvertently losing data results which could otherwise be saved in a file for future use or use by another program The existence
219. described organized by the type of inputs they represent including the basic commands All the details about each command dialog can be found alphabetically in Appendix B Commands to Enter Basic Data Commands to Enter System Data Commands to Enter Intersection Data Commands to Enter Approach Data Commands to Enter Movement Data Commands to Enter Phasing Data Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data Commands to Enter Basic Data The following are the commands which are used to enter the basic data to describe the problem to be solved NODELIST 500 lt Node Number gt Enter the list of nodes to be studied as well as the order of the analysis INTERSECTION lt Node gt lt Description gt Select from the NODELIST the node number of the current intersection and optionally enter an intersection description METROAREA lt Location gt Enter the location of the current intersection within the metropolitan area SIGNAL2000 36 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS APPLABELS 4 lt Approach Label gt Enter labels for each approach of the current intersection PARKINGSIDES 4 lt Parking Location gt Enter parking conditions on each approach of the current intersection PARKVOLUMES 4 lt Parking Volume gt Enter the number of parking maneuvers per hour on each side of each approach of the current intersection MOVLABEL
220. ding at the top shows each two digit phasing code below which are the levels of service achieved for that phasing at each cycle length The order of the phasings across the top of the table are not significant except that they are listed in the order in which they are solved as taken from the SEQUENCES command If the SEQUENCES 11 ALL entry is used the table will be in numerical order from 11 to 88 The columns of results in this table are always listed in groups of eight for ease of reading A more detailed report can be selected with the OUTPUT DETAIL command This report also lists the target design value which was achieved for each combination of sequence and cycle and reverses the axes of the table to accomplish this for as many as 11 cycle columns in each table As many tables as needed are produced to accommodate the requested cycle range and increment Either report format is terminated with a list of the design criteria which were used in the DESIGN This includes the target delay seconds the maximum delay the delay increment the target v c percent the maximum v c and the v c increment Additional calculations may be shown in this report by using the OUTPUT EXTRA command These describe how the optimization is achieved with detailed timing requirements for each of the standard phase types This output is normally not generated The following is an example of the Optimized Phase Sequences text only report using the SIGNAL2
221. ditions are reported in abbreviated form at the end of a Summary of Parameter Values produced for all intersections SIGNAL2000 output reports which are significantly enhanced by the new color graphics results produced by Visual TEAPAC include all phasing displays clearly showing permitted movements and critical design movements either in HCM by phase style or ring based by movement style the Capacity Analysis Summary boxes for each approach and the intersection data summary diagram SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 61 23MAY05 Build 12 30SEP05 gt Field Width Error Detection Modified for More Useful Performance A new error check was recently introduced to warn a user that too many characters for an input field had been entered and that the entry would be truncated The aggressive response to this condition ignoring the entry entirely has been toned back now accepting the truncated input with a similar warning This reduces the potential for the need to re type an entry which may be perfectly fine in its truncated form or require only minor editing to correct instead of complete re entry The new error check has also been eliminated for any entries of the GROUPTYPES dialog most of whose possible entry values can typically exceed the actual allocated input field width SIGNAL2000 H 318 Reference Another effect of the overly aggressive error check was that certain drop down list values in a number of dialog boxes had pre programmed entries which
222. duration of green 43 B 109 E ECHO 46 A 62 B 97 echo condition flag 46 B 97 ellipsis 10 end of file F 285 F 286 ENDGAIN 42 A 63 B 98 B 178 E 276 error codes G 298 ERROR MESSAGES O S G 297 SIGNAL2000 E 271 TEAPAC F 281 error number F 281 ESCape key F 285 EVALUATE 35 38 39 42 43 A 62 B 89 B 90 B 99 B 132 B 138 B 139 B 142 B 156 B 159 B 162 B 168 C 202 C 209 D 228 D 232 D 236 D 238 D 240 D 242 D 246 D 247 D 249 D 256 D 269 E 279 Evaluation 23 Example Data Entries 10 Example Problem 15 EXCESS 39 A 62 B 94 B 95 B 100 B 121 C 201 excess time B 100 exclusive pedestrian phase 43 B 152 Execute button 9 Exiting the Program 24 EXPORT 31 35 38 43 A 62 B 90 B 101 B 117 B 171 E 277 E 279 extra entries F 287 F F3 key 9 F4 key 10 FACTORS 42 51 55 A 63 B 103 E 275 E 276 Field Calibration of Adjusted SATURATIONFLOWS with FACTORS 55 File Access G 300 File Extension G 299 File Name G 299 G 300 file name specification G 298 File Number B 104 F 284 F 285 G 302 file path specification F 286 file path name length limit G 299 File Specification G 298 SIGNAL2000 FILES 23 47 A 62 B 104 B 123 B 134 B 169 F 284 F 285 F 286 G 300 G 302 Final Queue B 116 FINDPATHS B 148 formatted summary 46 B 183 FORMULATIONS C 197 free flow lanes 41 B 111 fuel consumption B 132 full use lice
223. e File OpenMerge does not allow existing Network data to be overwritten by zeros File SaveAs to an existing file name with Scenario conditions doesn t hang File SaveAs shows file type of current file amp better file type descriptions SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 80 25APR07 Build 00 08JUNO7 gt HCS Export Implemented Now for Both Signalized and Unsignalized Locations SIGNAL2000 H 306 Reference The EXPORT function has been updated to use the native HCS data file format XML based and has been expanded to include exporting for both signalized and unsignalized intersections defined in the complete TEAPAC network of intersections This is now the default for the Export function but as before older versions of HCS can still be exported to by using the file extensions specific to those versions The mapping of descriptive intersection information to HCS has also been modified to take advantage of the new capabilities in HCS in this regard Details of these changes are in the Help topic for the EXPORT dialog gt Status Window for DESIGN Re enabled The status window which shows the progress of the DESIGN optimization has been re enabled so that it shows the current cycle length and sequence code which is being optimized thereby informing the user how much of the optimization has been completed and thus how much remains The dynamic nature of the status window was disabled in a previous release of the program gt Long File Names and Longer
224. e lt File Name gt parameter values may be entered in the Visual Mode or on an input line In the Manual Mode these follow a typed FILES command each separated by at least one blank The number preceding the asterisk five in this example indicates the number of parameter values that may be entered on an input line for the command In some cases all parameter values must be entered while in others only some are required If all values are not entered the ones not entered will remain unchanged SIGNAL2000 10 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION This same HELP line is provided at the bottom of each dialog box for immediate on screen HELP for the command line currently selected in the display The F1 key or the Help button can be used to bring up the associated part of the on screen manual The TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual gives extensive detail on how to enter parameter values in either the Visual or Manual Mode Review of TEAPAC Procedures Before beginning the example problem in Chapter 2 it is worthwhile to review the basic procedures of running TEAPAC programs There are four basic steps of an analysis using a TEAPAC program Data Entry Data Review Analysis and Evaluation This section briefly describes each step of this procedure which is used by all the TEAPAC programs Additional detail can be found in Chapter 3 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual Data Entry Data Review Analysis Evaluation Data Entry The first step i
225. e In the DESIGN process the only phasing which is allowed for a dual optional lane group is split phase sequence 7 or an un opposed single phase sequence 1 SIGNAL2000 B 111 Reference GROUPTYPES GROUPTYPES If an intersection includes lane groups controlled by signs as defined by GROUPTYPES SIGNAL2000 will process the information but will skip any analysis of the intersection with an advisory warning to this effect SIGNAL2000 B 112 Reference HEADING HEADING HEADING lt Number of Lines gt Defaults 3 Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to display the current title heading lines lt Number of Lines gt is the number of lines of the three line heading which are to be displayed and can be any number from 0 to 3 either positive or negative Its default value is 3 Notes The lines which will be displayed are identified by counting the number of lines requested starting at the last line of the heading i e an entry of 1 will display only the last line of the heading the NOTE In an appended output window or within a script control file use of HEADING 0 will force a page break at that point in the output stream HEADING 1 in a script control file will force the update of the output window so that progressive results can be observed before the control file completes SIGNAL2000 B 113 Reference HELP HELP HELP lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups INFO
226. e NONE RIGHT or LEFT Its default value is NONE lt Manual Distance gt is a flag which identifies if the upstream distance above has been entered manually and is intentionally inconsistent with the network scale and can be NO or YES Its default value is NO Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa SIGNAL2000 B 131 Reference NETWORK NETWORK e This command is included primarily for data file compatibility with other TEAPAC programs However if approach speeds are included EVALUATE will calculate approximate fuel consumption and CO emissions for acceleration deceleration and idle conditions Further if distances are included fuel and CO are calculated for link travel as well If no lt Movement gt is entered movement numbers are calculated when needed assuming a rectangular network relationship That is if no lt Movement gt is entered for the north approach the movement numbers of the upstream node which are assumed to feed the downstream node are 2 6 and 10 e lt Assignment Method gt and lt Curvature gt are not used by SIGNAL2000 Their presence provides direct compatibility with PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM If lt Manual Distan
227. e a phasing for analysis Lastly SIGNHAL2000 checks to make sure that protected permitted phasings have been entered properly when entered using the PHASEMOVEMENTS method gt GROUPTYPES Entry Re located Closer to WIDTHS and LANES SIGNAL2000 H 350 Reference The position of the GROUPTYPES entry has been re located in the Edit Movement menu so that it directly follows the entry of WIDTHS and LANES Now users will be able to input certain special lane use conditions like dual optional turn lanes and free flow lanes immediately after entering the basic lane group width information gt SUMMARIZE Includes New Input Variables The SUMMARIZE display also produced by the View Summary menu option has been updated to include the new user inputs such as INITIALQUEUE STORAGE QUEUEMODELS and BIKEVOLUMES gt Version Information Saved in Data Files The first line of a SAVEd data file now contains information regarding the name and version of the program producing the file SIGNAL2000 in this case as well as the date and time the Save was performed This information may be helpful to users sorting through data files at a later date It is also anticipated that future versions of TEAPAC programs may be able to make use of this data as well SIGNAL2000 H 351 Reference INDEX This index provides an alphabetical list of keywords commands and subjects covered in the SIGNAL2000 Tutorial Reference Manual This includes references made in both the
228. e any common coordinate system value as an integer from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 Its default value is 0 0 Notes The coordinate system used for BASE should match that used by each NODELOCATION command SIGNAL2000 B 81 Reference BIKEVOLUMES BIKEVOLUMES BIKEVOLUMES 4 lt Conflicting Bicycles gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter the volume of conflicting bicycles for right turns on each approach of the current intersection lt Conflicting Bicycles gt is the volume of conflicting bicycles in bikes per hour for right turns on the approach and can be any integer from 0 to 2000 Its default value is 0 Notes Entries for bicycle interference should be made for the approach from which the conflicting right turn is made For example bicycles crossing the east leg of the intersection interfere with right turns made from the south approach so the lt Conflicting Bicycles gt value for that right turn should be input for the south approach SIGNAL2000 B 82 Reference BUSVOLUMES BUSVOLUMES BUSVOLUMES 4 lt Stopping Bus Volume gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter the volumes of stopping buses which stop on each approach of the current intersection lt Stopping Bus Volume gt is the hourly volume of local buses which stop at the bus stop designated for the approach and can be any integer from 0 to 2
229. e are also listed if they have been determined The right side of this section identifies whether the sequence codes appear in their normal order LEAD or NONE or are reversed LAG as well as the system offset and exclusive pedestrian phase time scramble phase The offset indicates which phase has the given offset and the ped phase shows which phase the exclusive ped phase follows The following is an example of the Summary of Parameter Values text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report SIGNAL2000 D 217 Reference contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 218 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 System Parameters Queues Model 1 Percentile 9 0 Output Worksheets None Simulation Period of 15 minutes Use T7F PSR actuated model No Messages Yes Auto spacing 25 Design details None Summary of Parameter Values Truck spacing 40 300 Steps per TRANSYT Cycle Default link assignment method Full T7F PSR Optimization Type None w 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
230. e but no initial queue Thus it may be appropriate to investigate any time periods which follow over saturated periods and thus have initial queue values to see if the delay in these periods exceeds the over saturated time period s If an initial queue cannot be observed where it is known by observation or analysis that a given time period is over saturated it is possible to estimate the initial queue for a given period by assessing the unsatisfied demand of a previous time period This unsatisfied demand is displayed near the bottom of the Level of Service Worksheet as well as the Initial Queue Delay Worksheet and is labelled Final Queue If this method of estimating the initial queue value is used care should be exercised in recognition of the accumulated error which might exist each time an estimated Final Queue value is transferred to the next analysis period as an Initial Queue SIGNAL2000 B 116 Reference INTERSECTION INTERSECTION INTERSECTION lt Node Numbers _ lt Description gt Defaults 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to select from the NODELIST the node number of the current intersection and optionally enter an intersection description lt Node Numbers is a unique intersection number assigned to the intersection and can be any integer from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 for all intersections selected lt Description gt is the information describing the
231. e coordinate location of the mouse cursor as well as the distance of the cursor from the current intersection Using the Pan amp Zoom buttons allows the user to move around the network as necessary If a bitmap file bmp of appropriate resolution exists for the study area for example an aerial photograph or map that bitmap can first be identified and calibrated with the Setup button on the left side toolbar The file must be in the same folder that the data file will reside s in If the data file already exists and the bitmap has the same primary file name then entering as the bitmap file name will connect the two files automatically Like data files bitmap file names should not have more than 8 characters or have any spaces in the name When creating a network from scratch it is best to first calibrate the bitmap scale by entering a known distance and the number of pixels in the bitmap that represent that distance The Click button to the right of the bitmap distance entry can be a convenient way to establish the pixel distance For example if the distance between two intersections on the bitmap is known type that distance in the known distance field and use the mouse to click and drag a box with opposite corners located at those two intersections A base point for the coordinate system can also be established with the translational relationship entries found in the top portion of the dialog Once a network has been created its sh
232. e default objective that each critical movement will get the same best possible level of performance typically minimum delay Non critical movements will get at least this level or better The target level of performance is the first parameter of the LEVELOFSERVICE command See Appendix C for a complete discussion of the optimization scheme and options used in SIGNAL2000 such as designating priority movements with the EXCESS command e A design criteria based on v c only may be used by setting the Target Delay parameter of the LEVELOFSERVICE command to 0 This will effectively balance the v c values of the critical movements This strategy is used by DESIGN automatically when the highest allowed delay value cannot be achieved See Appendix C for a complete discussion of the optimization scheme and options used in SIGNAL2000 When a value of 0 is used for lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt DESIGN will produce a table with the critical level of service achieved for each combination of phase sequence and cycle length attempted Inappropriate sequences will be marked with a dash If the Detail option of the OUTPUT command is selected the actual target achieved will also be displayed for each combination in an expanded table of results If a positive value is entered for lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt the list of successful sequences as described above is omitted This list is replaced by the SORT command output a list of suc
233. e entered factor fy can be more generally interpreted as a periodic growth factor and the number of years N can be interpreted as the number of periods which the growth factor fy is compounded V V fy N where V factored average hourly volume for analysis vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour fy entered VOLFACTOR adjustment factor for each N periods N entered VOLFACTOR number of periods to compound the fy factor If a simple inflation or deflation factor is all that is required the number of years should be entered as N 1 in which case V V fy above A second volume adjustment entry can be made via the VOLADDITIONALS dialog This is an additive value above and beyond the adjustment described above for VOLFACTORS First a factor faqa is entered which applies to all additional volumes for the intersection then individual additional volumes Vaaa are given for each movement In its simplest form the factor entered is either 0 zero or 1 one to either exclude or include the additional volumes given repectively This makes it easy to leave the additional volume entries but remove and or re include them in the analysis with a single factor entry In its broadest application the entered factor faqa can be used to inflate or deflate the additional volume entries Vada by the factor entered V V Vaaa fada where V adjusted average hourly volume for analys
234. e gt Enter the special lane group type for each possible lane group of the current intersection such as dual optional lanes free flow lanes and sign controlled lanes UTILIZATIONS 12 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt Enter the lane utilization factor for each movement of the current intersection TRUCKPERCENTS 12 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt Enter the truck and through bus heavy vehicle traffic percentage for each movement of the current intersection PEAKHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt Enter the peak hour factor for each movement of the current intersection ARRIVALTYPES 12 lt Quality of Progression gt Enter the quality of progression for each movement of the current intersection ACTUATIONS 12 lt Actuated Movement gt Enter the type of phase module present actuated or non actuated for each movement of the current intersection for use in the determination of the Delay Calibration Term k REQCLEARANCES 12 lt Required Clearance gt Enter the clearance times required for each movement of the current intersection MINIMUMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time gt Enter the minimum green time requirements for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection SIGNAL2000 41 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS STARTUPLOST 12 lt Startup Lost Time gt Enter the length of the lost time at the beginning of a movement s green period for each of the twelve movements of the current
235. e gt is the length of time in seconds to be allocated to an exclusive pedestrian phase all red for vehicles and can be any number from 0 to 900 and less than the cycle length for the phasing Its default value is 0 0 lt Phase Numbers is the number of the phase which the exclusive pedestrian phase follows and can be any number from 0 to 6 and less than or equal to the number of phases in the sequence of operation Its default value is 0 for no exclusive ped phase or position in phasing is not important placed at end of phasing Notes If an exclusive pedestrian phase is defined with the PEDTIME entry PEDLEVELS should be set to zero since there should be no pedestrian interference with vehicular traffic during vehicle phases PEDTIME can also be used to hold aside time for any sort of interruption in the cycle not just a ped phase For example legs of the intersection not included in the four legs of the analysis or certain types of pre emption SIGNAL2000 B 152 Reference PERIODS PERIODS PERIODS lt Count Interval gt _5 lt lt Start Time gt lt Stop Time gt gt Defaults 15 5 lt gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the count interval and the beginning and ending times for each count period for which subsequent data will be entered at the current intersection lt Count Interval gt is the interval in minutes between each count entry and can be either 15 or
236. e intersection s critical movements certain calculations may take more time than expected or desired In these cases judicious selection of the target delay and delay optimization increment LEVELOFSERVICE the list of allowed phasings SEQUENCES and the cycle optimization increment CYCLES can have a noticable impact on the net optimization time If it appears an optimization will take longer than desired and flexibility exists for selecting new values for these variables an optimization can be aborted and re started after changing the appropriate inputs HCM Sample Problems Included on the distribution disk with SIGNAL2000 are data files for the operations method sample calculations from Chapter 16 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The file names are coded as SCx FOR where x is the sample calculation problem number 1 2 and 3 For example SC1 FOR is the data file for sample calculation 1 Each one of the data files can be LOADed and then run by issuing the ANALYZE command producing the worksheets and capacity analysis summary which match the results found in the 2000 HCM Another related data file is included with the sample data files called SCX FOR This is a small control file which can be used to LOAD and EXECUTE each of the sample calculations in succession It is executed by simply opening it or by naming it as FILE 1 and LOADing it SIGNAL2000 C 212 Reference APPENDIX D Report Descriptions and Examples Appendix D
237. e means that for all observations the given percentage of the observations would be equal to or less than the calculated value For example in 50 observations the 90th percentile is the 45th highest observed queue Some models which predict percentile queues have a fixed percentile value while others have a limited range of allowed percentiles and the SIGNAL97 enhanced model allows any percentile SIGNAL2000 C 203 Reference In some cases the queue value or distance occupied cannot be computed or cannot be displayed for one of several possible reasons In these cases asterisks are displayed For example for grossly oversaturated conditions the calculated length of a given queue in feet may exceed the integer arithmetic used which has a maximum of 32 767 feet over six miles Also in Models 7 amp 8 where the poisson distribution is used the factorial portion of the formula may exceed the computational limits of the computer when queues approach one mile in length 2000 HCM Queue Model ARRB Queue Model MBO Queue Model SIGNAL97 Queue Model 2000 HCM Queue Model Models 1 and 4 use the maximum back of queue MBQ model defined by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual each using different assumed conditions as follows Model 1 is the percentile queue for the worst lane in a lane group and Model 4 is the average queue for the worst lane in a lane group In both cases the worst lane is defined by the lane
238. e models have also appeared in the earlier versions of SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL The computations are made according to standard queuing theory commonly referred to as the red time formula since the basis of the model is the calculation of the number of arrivals during the red time of each cycle q r It is the percentile queue for the average lane in a lane group meaning that it is expected that that percentage of all of the observed queues will be the calculated value or less Models 9 and 10 use an adjustment factor of 2 0 as a means of estimating the 90th percentile queue and the queued distance for automobiles and trucks is assumed to be 25 and 40 feet respectively These are the strict models found in SIGNAL97 S97E and S97A Models 7 and 8 use the same models as 9 and 10 respectively but calculate the percentile queue for the percentile input by the user based on actual cumulative Poisson arrival probabilities not a 2 0 SIGNAL2000 C 205 Reference factor and the queue distances are estimated using the queued vehicle length inputs made by the user not 25 and 40 feet Thus Models 7 and 8 are called the Enhanced SIGNAL97 models S97E and S97A Model 10 is the queue model produced by the SIGNAL97 ANALYZE command and displayed in the Capacity Analysis Summary report of SIGNAL97 This formulation does not account for oversaturated conditions but merely the number of arrivals expected during the red time The f
239. e phase In this case PEDTIME is used to hold time for the legs of the intersection which cannot be included in the analysis To do this the four primary legs of the intersection should be identified which hopefully use a phasing which is similar to one of the standard phasings of SIGNAL2000 These legs should be entered into SIGNAL2000 as an intersection using the normal data entry methods The only difference is that a PEDTIME command should be used to define the period of time during the cycle when the other movements which are not included in the analysis receive a green indication This time will be completely removed from the cycle and the capacity analysis of the entered movements will be correct The remaining movements should then be entered into SIGNAL2000 as a separate intersection again using PEDTIME to define the period of the cycle used by the movements of the first analysis As before these movements should be entered such that a standard SIGNAL2000 phasing can be used In this entry process at least one movement must exist for a North South phase and one for an East West phase so a dummy movement with 1 vehicle per hour may need to be defined to meet this requirement or legs of the previous analysis can be re used Timing Optimization If the above analysis can be conducted using a standard phasing code then the DESIGN command can be used to optimize timings for the entire intersection using a small bit of iterative analysis If
240. e proper VOLUMES and WIDTHS be entered so that it can display an arrow in any phase where the movement exists and is allowed MAP displays the input values of the VOLUMES WIDTHS LANES SEQUENCE LEADLAGS PERMISSIVES and OVERLAPS commands and as such these inputs should be made prior to its use Input Limitations SIGNAL2000 is designed to analyze and optimize the operation of as many as 500 typical four legged intersections using the techniques described in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual as a basis for the analyses In accomplishing this objective certain limitations in the input and use of the program exist These are described in this section In some instances references to Chapter 5 are made where techniques are described to get around some of these limitations None of these limitations constrain the basic use of the program for most situations however and this section should not be viewed as diminishing the usability of the program but merely documenting the limitations which should be observed in its use Usage Level 4 of SIGNAL2000 allows the definition of up to 500 intersections Smaller problems can also be defined with this large version of SIGNAL2000 Usage Level 3 of SIGNAL2000 will allow the definition of up to 100 intersections for a single analysis and Usage Level 2 of SIGNAL2000 will allow the definition of up to 12 intersections for a single analysis As many as four approaches can be analyzed for each intersection as l
241. e stop line L Maximum queue length MQL the maximum number of vehicles in queue at the end of the red time Lane of concern Which lane of a lane group is the lane for which the queue values apply W The worst lane of the lane group due to the effect of unbalanced lane utilization as defined by the lane utilization factor A The average lane of the lane group without the effect of unbalanced lane utilization Percentile The percentile value which the queue value represents For example if 90 is shown this means that the queue value listed is likely to be exceeded only 10 of the time or that the value listed is likely to encompass 90 of the cycles which might be observed If a 50 value is shown this is meant to indicate that only the average value is computed and no percentile is determined Vehicle lengths The average queue spacing between front bumpers of queued vehicles used in the model first for autos then for heavy vehicles auto heavy in feet At the end of each section the results for the user preferred model Selected Model are re displayed for easy reference The selected model is the one which is displayed in other reports of SIGNAL2000 In the second section which shows queue distances the available storage distance in feet as input by the user is also displayed along with the ratio of the selected model s distances to this available storage the Queue Storage Ratio SIGNAL2000 D 263 Reference The
242. e than one analysis may be required to generate the desired results several RESULTS commands may be used at this step in the procedure Action commands can be executed by first selecting the Results Menu This contains all of the action commands which are specific to SIGNAL2000 If the parameter values need to be changed first they should be entered in the dialog then the Execute button is pressed to execute the selected function In the Manual Mode the action command need only be typed at the command prompt followed by any desired parameter values to control the action then the ENTER key or OK button Evaluation After executing an action function s the results contained in the report s must be evaluated for reasonableness and to determine if subsequent analyses are required Additional analyses may be necessary for a variety of reasons One of the most common reasons for further analyses is to test adjustments to the input conditions These could be in the form of simulated before and after studies or testing multiple scenarios Another type of evaluation might be a sensitivity analysis to refine initial results or identify how a specific parameter value impacts the overall results In any of these cases the methods described above for data entry review and analysis should be used SIGNAL2000 13 Tutorial CHAPTER 2 Initial Example Chapter 2 Topics In order to illustrate some of the basic commands and procedures essential to
243. e transferred to SITE as background traffic for traffic impact analysis studies In SITE e Projected added volumes VOLADDITIONALS can be transferred to SIGNAL2000 for HCM compliant capacity analysis HCM phasing timing optimization or intersection design e Projected added volumes VOLADDITIONALS can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD Traffic volumes are an important element either determined by or used by virtually all modules of TEAPAC thus a discussion here of how volume information flows among all the TEAPAC programs will be helpful Analysis volumes in any TEAPAC program are the additive combination of VOLUMES and VOLADDITIONALS entries Thus for any given movement the VOLUMES entry for that movement is added to the VOLADDITIONALS entry for that movement to arrive at the analysis volume for that movement For added flexibility VOLUMES entries can be factored up or down by corresponding VOLFACTORS entries with the additional possibility of compounded growth applied to those factors and VOLADDITONALS entries can be factored up or down by a separate factor Normally VOLUMES will be either entered by the user or set automatically by peak period analysis in TURNS or WARRANTS consistent with the then current VOLFACTORS entries Normally VOLADDITIONALS will be either entered by the user or set automatically by traffic generation computations in SITE consistent with the then current
244. each lane group with a designated approach width g C Used The portion of the cycle which has been allocated to the traffic stream by the specified phasing and timings in percent of cycle This number when compared to the g C required indicates whether or not enough cycle time has been allocated to the stream to allow it to work at the design level of service Service Volume The number of vehicles per hour which can be accommodated by the lane group at the noted level of service given the phasings and timings specified Performance Evaluation Parameters Performance Evaluation parameters are reported separately first by movement and intersection total then by approach and intersection total Service Level The service level documents the level of service at which each lane group is operating under the specified phasing and timings according to the delay calculations of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The levels of service described in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual have been further subdivided to provide a more accurate reflection of approach performance The delay range for each level of service is divided in half to produce two sublevels the better performing half receiving an additional plus notation next to the base level of service For example Level of Service D as defined in the Capacity Manual can take on two possible levels in this analysis D and D The D represents the better half of performance of the defined Level D ma
245. ected Left Turn Saturation Flow D 234 Protected v c Ratio D 246 Queue Ist term D 249 Queue 2nd term D 250 Queue at Beginning Green Arrow D 246 Queue at Beginning Unsaturated Green D 246 Queue Delay D 243 D 247 Queue factor D 250 Queue Model Number D 216 Queue Model X D 254 Queue X D 259 Queues in worst average lanes D 249 Red Time D 246 Relevant occupancy D 238 D 240 Required Clearances D 217 Required G C Y C D 224 Residual Queue D 246 Right Turn Factor D 233 Right Turn on Red D 216 Right Turn Overlap D 217 Saturation Flow D 242 D 259 Saturation Flow Rates D 267 Saturation Flows D 217 Secondary Satflow Rate D 246 Sequence Code D 221 D 224 D 227 Sequence of Operation D 265 D 267 Sequences D 217 Service Level D 257 Service Rate D 253 Service Volume D 257 Signal Phasing D 230 D 252 D 256 D 262 Simulation Period D 216 Startup Lost Time D 217 D 229 Storage Available for Queued Vehicles D 217 Storage Length of Queued Vehicles D 216 Successful Cycles D 224 Sum of the Critical Flow Ratios D 243 TH Equivalent for LT D 236 Timings D 230 D 253 D 256 D 262 Total Delay D 258 Total Lost Time Per Cycle D 243 Truck Percentages D 217 Turning Movement Volumes D 268 Uniform Delay D 243 D 246 D 247 Unsaturated Effective Green D 236 D 246 356 Index Unusable gq D 236 Upstream filter D 249 Upstream V C D 2
246. ection box around a set of intersections can be used to define or add to with Ctrl key a subsystem of intersections for subsequent analysis SIGNAL2000 H 316 Reference The on screen shortest path FindPath assignment function of the SITE program is now performed in color directly on the main window graphics network display including the bitmap background providing helpful visual cues while performing the assignment process The on screen Startup Help button provides immediate assistance for all of the functions described above Visit www StrongConcepts com for examples of the new graphical input front end now found in Visual TEAPAC gt Visual TEAPAC Enhanced Graphical Output Reporting All TEAPAC programs now feature enhanced graphical output reporting for all results produced Output reports now make full use of color and graphics drawing for arrows phasing diagrams permitted movements time space diagrams intersection diagrams cycle optimization graphs daily count variation graphs etc All reports are printable on any color or black amp white printer supported by Windows including PDF writers Any graphics output page can be copied to the clipboard as a bitmap so it can be pasted into other applications The prior version s text only results are still viewable alone or in parallel with the graphical results and selected text can be copied to the clipboard or saved to a text file for subsequent use as before In Visual TEAPAC
247. ed For example LOAD 10 followed later by LOAD 0 will re execute the LOAD 10 effectively a re LOAD LOAD 10 followed later by SAVE 0 will re SAVE the LOADed parameters see Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual A negative lt Line Number gt of n will start the LOAD at a point in the designated file n lines before the default next line of the file i e LOAD 5 will start the LOAD five lines prior to the current next line of the file The SHARE IGNORE option is only in effect during the LOAD where the option was used do not use embedded LOADs with the SHARE option Use of the SHARE option not only ignores commands which it does not recognize but also ignores any RESET commands encountered during the current LOAD It is used to share files created by other programs IGNORE ignores all commands in the file up to the next RETURN command SHARE is automatic when the program detects a data file from a different TEAPAC program or is unable to determine the source of the data file e The lt Blocks gt indicates how many successive LOADs should be done using the current SHARE or IGNORE option as a result of the single LOAD command that was issued This option does not apply to the PROCESS keyword SIGNAL2000 B 124 Reference MAP MAP MAP Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE The purpose of this command is to display a schematic map of the intersection identifying the twelve turning movement
248. ed the phasing and timings must have been previously set This can be accomplished through use of the SEQUENCES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CYCLE commands or the TIMINGS command SIGNAL2000 B 75 Reference APPLABELS APPLABELS APPLABELS 4 lt Approach Label gt Defaults NES W Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter labels for each approach of the current intersection lt Approach Label gt is a two character abbreviation for each of the four approaches at the intersection and can be any two characters Its default value is N E S amp W for each of the approaches respectively Notes Alternate labels could be for example SB WB NB amp EB respectively or A B C amp D e Use of APPLABELS does not change the order of entry this order is always clockwise starting with the north approach APPLABELS merely allows each approach to be labeled with the user s choice of characters SIGNAL2000 B 76 Reference ARRIVALTYPES ARRIVALTYPES ARRIVALTYPES _ 12 lt Quality of Progression gt Defaults 12 3 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT 94DEFAULTS The purpose of this command is to enter the quality of progression for each movement of the current intersection lt Quality of Progression gt specifies various types of parameters related to the quality of progression for use in the determination of the Delay Adjustment Factor and can take on values in the ra
249. ed by SCENARIO is automatic and seamless The SCENARIO program serves as a plugin to the other Visual TEAPAC programs so that SIGNAL2000 H 308 Reference they automatically support the SCENARIO structured files for both File Open and File Save A new File menu option labeled Get Scenario Case allows the user to select any of the Conditions for all of the Issues which have been created and any subsequent changes to data which are made are automatically saved in the correct Condition files which have been defined SCENARIO has also been added to all LinkTo menus so that SCENARIO is immediately available to modify the defined scenario structure as necessitated by changing project assumptions gt Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of additional generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 releases of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 01 Build 07 These are documented below Ver 7 01 Build 07 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses Data entry dialogs that don t apply to dummy nodes have been modified so that if they are inadvertently displayed while pointing to a dummy node they will not display unpredictable values or cause the program to crash The LinkTo menu has been adjusted so that if no data file path has been defined it will attempt to use the program s file path but will not crash if neither of these is defined The file menu options for Open SaveAs and In
250. ed in a single data file The list of intersections is managed with a NODELIST entry which lists all the available intersection numbers which have been used and the INTERSECTION entry which selects the current intersection from the NODELIST The current intersection is the one for which data entry will be accepted and for which analysis functions like DESIGN and ANALYZE will be made The current intersection can be selected by using the drop down list in the INTERSECTION dialog again or by walking through the NODELIST with the buttons found on the main toolbar and relevant entry dialogs The current intersection is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the main window New intersections can be added to the network by first adding it with the NODELIST dialog then selecting it from the INTERSECTION drop down list or typing it in the INTERSECTION combo box As a shortcut the new intersection number can be typed with a description in the SIGNAL2000 C 210 Reference INTERSECTION combo box in which case the user will be prompted with an option to add the intersection to the end of the NODELIST automatically INTERSECTION 0 is a selection which represents all intersections in the NODELIST When this is selected certain actions like ANALYZE and DESIGN 1 will be performed for all intersections Certain other actions like SORT TIMINGS and EXPORT are not valid when INTERSECTION 0 is selected as these actions can pertain to only a
251. een Unsaturated Effective Green Red Time Arrival Rate Primary Satflow Rate and Secondary Satflow Rate The calculations include Permitted v c Ratio Protected v c Ratio v c Case Number Queue at Beginning Green Arrow Queue at Beginning Unsaturated Green Residual Queue and Uniform Delay The following is an example of the HCM Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet Input Calculation N E S Adjusted LT volume v 139 222 v c ratio X 434 ETT Primary mov effect green g Do 95 95 Opp queue effect green gq 7 534 9 964 Unsaturated effect green gu 10 657 8 226 Red time r 36 3 36 3 Arrival rate qa 039 062 Primary satflow rate sp 491 491 Secondary satflow rate ss 246 251 Permitted v c ratio Xperm 268 542 Protected v c ratio Xprot 592 946 v c case number Case 1 1 Queue at beg green arrow Qa 1 400 2 236 Queue at beg unsat grn Qu 291 614 Residual queue Qr 000 000 Uniform delay dl 12 55 13 6 SIGNAL2000 D 246 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Initial Queue Delay Worksheet The HCM Initial Queue Delay Wo
252. efinition This message warns the user of this automatic conversion Action If the UTILIZATION values gt 1 0 are in fact from an old SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 file no action should be required In any case the user should simply make sure that this is the case and verify that the inverted results are appropriate TPC65 WARNING The SEQUENCE code for this INTERSECTION must be 1 thru 9 to use PHASEMOVS This warning indicates that the PHASEMOVEMENTS command was executed for an intersection whose SEQUENCES code was not in the range of 1 through 9 Action The SEQUENCE code for the intersection must first be set to a number in the range of 1 through 9 before the PHASEMOVS command can be executed TPC66 ERROR Entry of this command is not allowed for the demonstration program In a demonstration version of TURNS the intersection conditions for a warrant analysis take on preset values which cannot be changed by use of the CONDITIONS command This error indicates an attempt has been made to use the CONDITIONS command Action Purchase a full use license of TURNS to eliminate this artificial constraint This message will not be issued in a full use licensed version of TURNS TPC67 ERROR Path list must start end with valid external access node numbers Re enter When entering a PATHASSIGNMENT command for the current PATHDISTRIBUTION type of traffic the path list must either start or end with a valid external node number and convers
253. egies are considered with the best phasing being identified for each set of input data and operational constraints such as minimum greens and clearance requirements The user can easily scan the output and quickly determine which phasing will handle an adverse situation most efficiently Further this analysis quickly identifies capacity problems and points directly to the cause of the problem At this point solutions can be generated to solve the problem in terms of more sophisticated control strategies revised lane usage improved roadway geometrics or any combination of the above These solutions can be tested quickly under re optimized conditions The results of this analysis provide the user with valuable timing data related to local control for field implementation As part of the integrated TEAPAC package SIGNAL2000 does not stand by itself It can share input and output with TURNS for peak hour count analyses WARRANTS for signalized intersection warrant analysis SITE to analyze projected volumes for impact analyses PREPASSR amp PRETRANSYT for signal timing with PASSER 2 and TRANSYT 7F and PRENETSIM for simulation animation with NETSIM CORSIM As such SIGNAL2000 is the cornerstone program of TEAPAC SIGNAL2000 is a major update of the popular SIGNAL85 SIGNAL94 and SIGNAL97 programs which implemented the methods of the original 1985 Highway Capacity Manual SIGNAL2000_ ii Manual ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The SIGNAL2000 program was dev
254. el 4 SUBSYSTEM can be as many as 500 nodes in length e When in the Visual Mode or using the ASK command to enter the SUBSYSTEM the actual list can be enetered only once After this entry the list must be modified one intersection at a time with the edit buttons of the SUBSYSTEM dialog When entering the SUBSYSTEM this first time type no more than 80 characters per entry using ampersands amp to continue long entries to subsequent entry lines The order of entries on SUBSYSTEM has no effect on the order that the intersections are analyzed The NODELIST defines this order Route numbers can be referenced by use of a negative number on the SUBSYSTEM command to quickly identify a route for analysis For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a subsystem analysis SIGNAL2000 B 181 Reference SUBSYSTEM SUBSYSTEM for only this route can be created through the use of the SUBSYSTEM 1 command SIGNAL2000 B 182 Reference SUMMARISE SUMMARISE SUMMARISE Defaults Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to display a formatted summary of all PARAMETERS values It has no parameters Notes SUMMARISE is similar in function to DATA but provides better column organization and section headings where DATA only lists the current data values for each command DATA on the other hand allows selection of which command s data to view and can sometimes save time whereas SUMMARISE
255. eloped by Dennis W Strong of Strong Concepts The method of SIGNAL2000 was transferred directly from its predecessors SIGNAL SIGNAL85 SIGNAL94 and SIGNAL97 SIGNAL was originally written by the same author in 1974 to use the 1965 Highway Capacity Manual methods It was subsequently modified to create SIGNAL85 which implemented the 1985 Highway Capacity Manual methods then to create SIGNAL94 and SIGNAL97 which implemented the 1994 and 1997 Highway Capacity Manual method updates SIGNAL2000 is presently supported by and undergoing continued development and enhancement by Dennis W Strong of Strong Concepts The original SIGNAL Tutorial Reference Manual was written by Dennis W Strong and M Janet Reid It was subsequently modified by Dennis W Strong Robert H Eckols and Barry A Rosenberg The current version of the SIGNAL2000 Tutorial Reference Manual was developed by and is presently being enhanced and maintained by Dennis W Strong of Strong Concepts This document the SIGNAL2000 Tutorial Reference Manual is provided as a part of the license to use SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC References in this document are made to other documents which are not included with the SIGNAL2000 program and are available from various sources In particular references are made to the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual which is available from Strong Concepts This document applies generically to all TEAPAC programs and describes the details of and advanced usage procedures for t
256. ely must then end or start with a valid access node Action For inbound distribution types the first node of the path list must be the same as the external node number appearing on the current PATHDISTRIBUTION command and the last node must be one of the inbound access nodes on the inbound GENERATION command Conversely for outbound distribution types the first node of the path list must be one of the outbound access nodes on the outbound GENERATION command and the last node must be the same as the external node number appearing on the current PATHDISTRIBUTION command Check what condition is not being met and adjust as appropriate TPC68 WARNING A PATHDISTRIBUTION type must be given before this input can be made This message indicates that a PATHDISTRIBUTION type number has not been selected prior to the entry of a data value When an input value is entered that is intended to pertain to a specific distribution type that type must first be selected with the PATHDISTRIBUTION entry before the input value is entered If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which type to assign the entry value to Action If you know the distribution type you intend to be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the PATHDISTRIBUTION command will be issued for you for that type If you do not know the type you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the PATHDISTRIBUTION command to select a type and re enter the i
257. en D 236 Opposing queue g ratio D 238 Opposing Queue Ratio D 236 Opposing TH Equivalent D 236 Optimization Type D 216 Overlapping Right Turn D 229 Parking Conditions D 216 Parking Factor D 233 Parking Location D 229 Parking Maneuvers D 229 Peak Hour Factor D 229 D 232 Peak Hour Factors D 217 Ped flow rate D 238 D 240 Ped occupancy after queue D 238 Ped bike adjust factor D 238 D 240 Ped Bike Left Turn Factor D 233 Ped Bike Right Turn Factor D 233 Pedestrian Interference D 216 Pedestrian Volume D 229 Percentile D 263 Percentile Queue Desired D 216 Permissive D 268 Permissive Left Condition D 217 Permissive Left Turn D 228 Permitted Phases of Compound Left Turns D 242 Permitted v c Ratio D 246 Phase G C D 227 Phase Greentime D 227 Phase Sequence D 268 Phase Yellowtime D 227 Phasing Sequence D 228 Platoon ratio D 249 SIGNAL2000 Pretimed or Actuated D 229 Primary Movement Effective Green D 246 Primary Satflow Rate D 246 Priority Movements D 216 Progression Factor D 243 D 249 Prop LT in prot phase D 238 Prop RT in prot phase D 240 Proportion left turns D 238 Proportion of Left Turns D 232 Proportion of LT D 236 Proportion of LT in Lane Group D 236 Proportion of Opposing LT D 236 Proportion of Right Turns D 232 Proportion right turns D 240 Proportion TH in Opposing D 236 Protected Left Turn Factor D 234 Prot
258. en help The Tabular View can also be toggled using the F3 key The Main Menu can also be used to select the Manual Mode as another alternate input environment using the Options menu This mode allows quick entry of the same command lines of the Tabular View but without the rigid structure of the Tabular View dialog box The Manual Mode is indicated by the presence of the command prompt in the Manual Mode window as shown below When a command prompt is displayed the program is ready to accept command keyword input Input is the same as a line of the Tabular View display but must be preceded by the command SIGNAL2000 9 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION or abbreviation which is to be used for the input The Manual Mode can also be toggled using the F4 function key Example Data Entries When executing the hands on examples in this manual actual entries to be made by the user are shown here in BOLDFACE CAPITAL LETTERS The information which precedes these values indicates what command keyword should be used showing both the menu line group name and the command name In the Visual Mode the menu group name in square brackets xxx can be found in the Edit menu to change data entries or the command keyword can be found in the Results menu to execute actions In the Manual Mode only the command keyword and parameter values need to be entered after the command prompt followed by the OK button or ENTER key For example consider the e
259. en optimizing the signal timings of each signal in an arterial SIGNAL2000 will consider virtually every possible phasing combination for both the major street and the cross street and will completely consider the effects which right turns clearance intervals minimums and movement priorities have on the best timings These optimized conditions can be SAVEd with SIGNAL2000 and then PREPASSR PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM PRESYNCHRO PRETSPPD or PRENOSTOP can be run using all of these results without any re entry This virtually eliminates any input at all to these programs using all of the data already entered and optimized from SIGNAL2000 In order to accomplish this each individual intersection is described and SAVEd in detail with SIGNAL2000 prior to any preprocessor use This description will include the INTERSECTION NETWORK VOLUMES WIDTHS etc inputs which are subsequently needed by the preprocessors If optimized intersection results are to be used by the preprocessors these results should also be SAVEd after they are computed Also if SIGNAL2000 s SATURATIONFLOWS are to be used by the preprocessors they should be SAVEd with SIGNAL2000 after they are computed such as after using the ANALYZE or SERVICEVOLUMES commands These are typically SAVEd along with the optimized signal timings and phasings The SAVEd SIGNAL2000 file can be opened directly by the TEAPAC preprocessor and used accordingly The easiest way to accomplish this is by using the
260. enarios in addition to the factored growth scenarios allowed by VOLFACTORS above such as when evaluating site traffic development scenarios The VOLADDITIONALS factor can also be used to easily turn off the additional volume by using a factor of zero and turn back on the additional volumes VOLADDITIONALS are computed directly by SITE for site traffic impact scenarios and saved in data files for immediate analysis and optimization by SIGNAL2000 gt Minor Organizational and Usability Changes MINIMUMS and REQCLEARANCES have been added to the BASIC menu and group definition for quicker accessibility since these are common inputs required for realistic optimization The INTERSECTION dialog has also been removed from the APPROACH MOVEMENT and PHASING menu group definitions they were originally added to these menus groups for better awareness of the current intersection in the Tabular View but the current intersection is now listed in the caption of the Tabular View gt T2004v6 TEAPAC2004 Interface Enhancements Found In All Programs SIGNAL2000 H 322 Reference TEAPAC2004 Ver 6 includes a multitude of enhancements which are part of the generic user interface found in all TEAPAC programs some do not apply to NOSTOP TED or TUTOR for readily apparent reasons All of the generic enhancements are listed below with heading lines that begin with T2004v6 gt T2004v6 One Common Data File Supports All TEAPAC Programs The
261. enerated rather than needing to wait until they are all completed 5 In control files the HEADING 1 command can be used to force a display of results generated so far 6 The output window is sizable and moveable and the size and location is remembered throughout the remainder of the session Most of these changes apply to the Edit window as well gt Moveable Dialogs Location Remembered All dialog boxes and message boxes are now moveable to any location on the screen and the location is remembered for future dialogs throughout the remainder of the session This allows SIGNAL2000 H 338 Reference for custom organization of the user s desktop which matches the immediate needs of his her analysis This can be particularly helpful in highly multi tasked environments on ultra high resolution screens and on systems with dual monitors gt New Refresh Button for Normal and Tabular Views of Visual Mode A new Refresh button has been placed on virtually every dialog box for the purpose of refreshing the dialog with the current values in each entry cell in the event there is any confusion about whether a given entry has been accepted This is particularly helpful after certain errors have been encountered or in a Tabular View display where one entry may change another entries values without changing the display eg when a WIDTH entry changes a LANES entry in a different place of the dialog It can also be used to reset an action dialog s entri
262. enter the number of parking maneuvers per hour on each side of each approach of the current intersection lt Parking Volume gt is the number of parking maneuvers per hour and can be any integer from 0 to 180 Its default value is 20 Notes PARKVOLUMES must be used in conjunction with PARKINGSIDES to define the number of parking maneuvers each hour The number entered is for one side of the approach only If parking exists on both sides of a 1 way approach the average number of maneuvers on each side should be entered If one lane group is adjacent to both sides of parking the number entered will be doubled to calculate the parking adjustment factor e The default PARK VOLUMES is 20 but if PARKINGSIDES is NONE PARKVOLUMES is ignored SIGNAL2000 B 146 Reference PATHASSIGNMENT PATHASSIGNMENT PATHASSIGNMENT lt Path gt lt Path gt lt Path List gt Defaults 0 0 8 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter a path list of intersections which vehicles of the current distribution type follow when traveling to and from the development lt Path gt is the path number which determines which of the four possible paths is to be defined for the current distribution type and can be 1 5 a selected path number It has no default value it must be entered lt Path gt is the percentage of total trips generated for the current distribution type which is to be assigned to the following pat
263. er 1 INTRODUCTION TEAPAC programs enter intersection approach and movement data in a standard order starting from the north and moving clockwise around the intersection These conventions should be understood when entering intersection data as described below and as illustrated in Figure 1 1 Approach Data When approach information is required and four parameter values are to be entered one for each approach data will be entered starting with the north approach followed by the east south and west approaches approach numbers 1 2 3 and 4 When data is required for a specific approach the approach should be specified using the cardinal direction codes North East South and West meaning from the North from the East etc Turning Movement Data When movement information is required and twelve parameter values are to be entered one for each movement data will be entered starting with the right turn movement on the north approach followed by the through movement and left turn movements on the north approach then continuing with the right through and left on the east south and west approaches movement numbers 1 2 3 up to movement 12 When data is required for a specific movement the movement should be specified using numbers 1 through 12 SIGNAL2000 6 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Approach 1 from North Approach 2 from East Approach 4 from West Approach 3 from South Inter
264. er list can also be re typed starting at the position where the invalid entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TPC34 WARNING This integer number is not in the accepted range xxxxx to xxxxx Re enter it This input is not in the accepted range xxxxxxxxxx tO Xxxxxxxxxx Re enter When a parameter value is entered which lies outside the allowable range of values this error message is displayed If the input entry accepts decimal places TPC35 is displayed If input entries are rounded to the nearest integer value TPC34 is displayed The appropriate ranges of allowable values shown in the error message are usually constants however they may be controlled by other input parameters on other commands Further information on input limits can be found in Chapter 4 or Appendix B of the program documentation Most commands will re prompt for parameter entry after this error After the error is issued the invalid entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where invalid entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip
265. ersection of the NODELIST the data that follows applies to In the Tabular View INTERSECTION is an active command which needs to be executed with the Execute button in order to change the screen s values to the new intersection Basic gt INTERSECTION 1 Now we can enter the data which describes intersection 1 The first data entry could be the traffic volumes When entering the VOLUMES parameters in the Visual and Manual Modes SIGNAL2000 expects the data to be entered starting with the North approach right turns and proceeding clockwise around the intersection as shown below See Chapter 1 Conventions for more detail Basic gt VOLUMES 175 650 125 60525 165 65 370 200 215 450 220 As with VOLUMES the WIDTHS parameters also correspond to the twelve turning movements In this case note that if right or left turning movements do not have exclusive turn lanes the WIDTH entry is zero and the turning volumes are automatically assigned to shared through lanes If a turning movement has an exclusive lane in addition to a shared lane see the discussion in Chapter 4 or Appendix B for dual optional turn lanes as entered by the GROUPTYPE command Also note that the width given is for all lanes in each lane group The number of lanes is deduced from these values on the LANES command Basic gt WIDTHS 12 2412 02412 02412 122412 As an efficiency aid one can move to the next dialog box in sequence as shown in the Edit menu with the Next butto
266. ervice The level of service for each approach as determined from the Approach Delay and Exhibit 16 2 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual If the delay value is in the better half of the range of delay allowed for a given level of service the level of service listed will be accompanied by a plus sign to the right of the LOS letter Approach Flow The total adjusted flow rate in vehicles per hour for all lane groups on each approach Intersection Delay The weighted average of Approach Delay for all approaches at the intersection in seconds per vehicle Intersection Level of Service The level of service for the intersection as determined from the Intersection Delay and Exhibit 16 2 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual If the delay value is in the better half of the range of delay allowed for a given level of service the level of service listed will be accompanied by a plus sign to the right of the LOS letter The following is an example of the HCM Capacity and LOS Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 244 Reference
267. es or permitted only phases TRANSYT requires that the permitted movement link number be input as a negative number Since only five columns are allowed for the input the negative sign leaves four columns for the link number thus node numbers less than 100 are recommended 99 is the limit for TRANSYT Release 9 e In Uage Level and 2 versions of SIGNAL2000 the NODELIST can only be 12 nodes in length In Usage Level 3 versions the NODELIST can be as many as 100 nodes in length and in Usage Level 4 versions the NODELIST can be as many as 500 nodes in length When in the Visual Mode or using the ASK command to enter the NODELIST the actual list can be enetered only once After this entry the list must be modified one intersection at a time with the edit buttons of the NODELIST dialog When entering the NODELIST this first time type no more than 80 characters per entry using ampersands amp to continue long entries to subsequent entry lines SIGNAL2000 B 135 Reference NODELOCATION NODELOCATION NODELOCATION lt X Y Coordinates gt Defaults 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the X and Y coordinates of the current intersection lt X Y Coordinates gt is the X and Y coordinates of the intersection and can be any common coordinate system value as integers from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 Its default value is 0 0 Notes This is one of several entries including
268. es the inclusion of dummy nodes in the drop down list so dummy nodes can be selected from the dialog and nodes in the drop down list can be ordered in any of three arrangements the order they appear in the NODELIST numeric order by node number or alphabetic order by intersection description On a related note the network display is now updated any time a new current intersection is selected including when it is entered from the Manual Mode when it is entered from file input etc Also when a dummy node is selected as the current node it is always highlighted in the network display even when the zoom level is such that other dummy nodes are not displayed gt V7 00 14 Option Added to Delete All References to Deleted Node When a node is deleted or cut from the network either from the main window network display or from the NODELIST dialog a prompt to verify the deletion is now always issued and the prompt now includes a new option to include the deletion of all other references to the deleted node elsewhere in the network The option to delete all references is pre selected by default on each deletion but can be de selected in the prompt dialog box On a related note the manipulation of nodes in the NODELIST dialog has been extended to include dummy nodes as well as real nodes offering greater flexibility in managing the entire node list from this dialog A problem with the Copy and Paste functions to and from the clipboard has also
269. es to the defaults after first being changed by the user gt Warning of Possible Incompatible Advanced File Usage Advanced users of multiple files and or multiple data sets in a single file are warned if a normal simple Windows file command such as File Save is used that appears inconsistent with the prior advanced file usage for the currently opened files This is intended to prevent inadvertent saving of data on top of unintended places in advanced usage files gt Help Available for Errors and Warnings from Manual Mode The Help button has been enabled in error and warning boxes which are issued as a result of actions initiated from the Manual Mode Previously these helps were not available SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 11 02FEB02 Build 16 14JUL02 gt Additional Checks Made for Lost Time Consistency Data input is now scanned to make sure that the Green Yellow AllRed times entered are compatible with the StartupLostTime and EndGain times entered such that the resulting effective green times will be greater than zero If this is not the case an error message is issued and the analysis is cancelled to prevent erroneous results and possible division by zero crashes This is particularly important when the resulting lost time is greater than the Yellow AllRed time entered Comparable checks are also made when an overlap phase time is zero a condition which is permitted since by definition no movement sees the overlap time as the only phase
270. escription gt Select from the NODELIST the node number of the current intersection and optionally enter an intersection description NODELOCATION lt X Y Coordinates gt Enter the X and Y coordinates of the current intersection METROAREA lt Location gt Enter the location of the current intersection within the metropolitan area NETWORK lt Direction gt lt Distance gt lt Speed gt lt Node gt 4 lt Movement gt lt Assignment Method gt lt Curvature gt lt Manual Distance gt Enter the current intersection s relative location in the system network including spatial and speed parameters LEVELOFSERVICE lt Target Delay LOS gt lt Max Delay LOS gt lt Delay Incr gt lt Target v c gt lt Max v c gt lt v c Incr gt Enter the range of delay or level of service and v c which should be tested by a DESIGN optimization and GOVERCS for the current intersection EXCESS lt List of Priority Movement Numbers gt Enter the movements to which the TIMINGS command will assign available excess portions of the cycle length for the current intersection Commands to Enter Approach Data The following are commands which can be used to describe each approach of the current intersection Each of these commands has four parameters each applying to all traffic on each of the intersection s approaches The order of entry is clockwise starting at the north approach e g SIGNAL2000 39 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AN
271. ession of phasing treatment for left turns By learning these eight types a combination of 64 distinct phasings can be precisely represented with a single two digit number This phasing can also be communicated quickly and succinctly to other users Note also that the phasings specified by the sequence code can be altered slightly by the addition of permissive left turns as defined by the PERMISSIVES command by a change in phase order as defined by the LEADLAGS command and by the addition of overlapping right turns based on the existence of exclusive right turn lanes OVERLAPS Also if SEQUENCE code 1 through 9 is specified the phasing can be defined arbitrarily by proper use of the PHASEMOVEMENTS command In the case of these special SEQUENCE codes the defined phasing can only be analyzed with ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS but cannot be DESIGNed or EXPORTed to HCS SIGNAL2000 E 279 Reference APPENDIX F TEAPAC System Error Messages Appendix F Topics TEAPAC system messages are displayed by all TEAPAC programs whenever an identifiable fault condition is detected The message may be due to the command itself to one of its parameters or as a result of the action taken by the command When a condition is detected an error number and message is displayed identifying the type of condition encountered This appendix discusses the TEAPAC messages and their meanings followed by a discussion of potential causes and actions which may correc
272. ested Any number of sequential loops may be used i e un nested See the detailed discussion of the various possible uses of the REPEAT loops and control files in Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual SIGNAL2000 B 161 Reference REQCLEARANCES REQCLEARANCES REQCLEARANCES 12 lt Required Clearance gt Defaults 12 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT DESIGN 94DEFAULTS The purpose of this command is to enter the clearance times required for each movement of the current intersection lt Required Clearance gt is the clearance time required for each movement in seconds and can be any number from 0 to 99 9 Its default value is 4 0 Notes Required clearance times are used only by DESIGN to determine how much clearance time is needed to terminate each phase This clearance time includes both yellow and all red clearance ANALYZE and EVALUATE use the clearance times specified on the YELLOWTIMES command regardless of the values on REQCLEARANCES It is important to make sure that YELLOWTIMES and REQCLEARANCES entries are always kept consistent with each other especially when converting Timings by Phase to Timings by Movement and when exporting to third party ring based software SIGNAL2000 B 162 Reference RESET RESET RESET lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to reset the parameters of the specified commands to thei
273. et and can be any integer from 5 to 100 Its default value is 40 Notes The lt Model gt defines the preferred queue model which will be used to calculate queues represented in the ANALYZE and EVALUATE results as well as the bottom of the QUEUECALCS report See Appendix C for a complete description of each of the queue models which can be computed by SIGNAL2000 All models do not support the calculation of any specified percentile value For example only a limited set of percentile values can be selected for the HCM model the ARRB model always uses the 95th percentile and the original SIGNAL97 models always uses the 90th percentile see Appendix C SIGNAL2000 B 159 Reference QUEUEMODELS QUEUEMODELS e All models do not support the calculation of an entered length of autos and trucks For example the lengths of autos and trucks for the original SIGNAL97 models always use 25 and 40 feet respectively see Appendix C Average lane Models 2 amp 5 are no longer separately defined by the 2000 HCM SIGNAL2000 B 160 Reference REPEAT REPEAT REPEAT lt Variable Names lt First Val gt lt Last Val gt lt Increment gt Defaults 1 1 1 Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to initiate a loop in a control file so that the set of commands which follow will be repeated a finite number of times lt Variable Name gt is the name of the variable to be associated with the loop and can be any charac
274. evant part of HLP gt New Save and Linkage Features Provided When Exiting the Program Warning message for unsaved data has been reversed with option to Save message now consistent with most other Windows programs in the way the question is asked option to Save or not save or to Cancel the exit New ability to link to another program using the File Control Stop dialog name the next program to run as well as file to use if desired can be used from a control file to link programs or control files also link from Manual Mode The Quit menu which duplicated the File Exit menu has been removed gt Command History in Manual Mode Remembers last 10 manual mode commands used Use up and down arrows to see history of commands Re use previous command or adjust to create new command gt WinTEAPAC2000 Ver 5 Menu Program Enhanced A data file can be named in the display for the next selected program A Browse button has been added to assist in naming the data file to be used provides standard extensions for typical files of supported programs A data file from a TEAPAC2000 Version 5 program can be dragged to WinTEAPAC will launch the program that created the file and use the dragged file can drag the file to the WinTEAPAC window or desktop icon The FOR extension used by TEAPAC is registered when WinTEAPAC runs allows double clicking FOR files in Explorer and START command in BAT SIGNAL2000 H 344 Reference gt Other Changes A Getting Starte
275. express written permission of Strong Concepts other than for personal convenience DISCLAIMER Strong Concepts shall have no liability or responsibility to licensee or any other person or entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by TEAPAC programs or documentation including but not limited to any interruption of service loss of business or anticipatory profits or consequential damages resulting from the use or operation of such computer programs Strong Concepts makes no representations commitments or warranties with respect to the contents hereof TEAPAC programs are licensed on an as is basis THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED Further Strong Concepts reserves the right to revise programs and related publications and to make changes from time to time in the content thereof without obligation of Strong Concepts to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes SIGNAL2000 iv Manual CONTENTS SIGNAL2000 Signalized Intersection Analysis and Design Acknowledgments Proprietary Notice Disclaimer List of Tables List of Figures Tutorial Manual Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES Chapter 4 ACTIONS
276. f Commands gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all nonactive commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes The ASK command will prompt the user for entry of parameter values for each of the commands in the list An input dialog for each command Normal View or the entire list Tabular View will be initiated showing the current DATA values and a line of HELP at the bottom of the dialog e When a correctable error is detected in the parameter list of any command entered from the Manual Mode the ASK command is automatically performed for that command in order to allow re entry of the parameter s in error ASK may only be used from the Manual Mode Itis a powerful way to review current data values and to allow any necessary changes to be made simultaneously It can also be used to create custom input and action sequence displays SIGNAL2000 B 78 Reference ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT lt Type gt lt Intersection gt 12 lt lt Movement gt lt Assignment Factor gt gt Defaults 12 lt 0 0 gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the percentage of a distribution type to be assigned to the movements at an intersection This is only used to define special assignment situations and is not normally used for typical site traffic assignment situat
277. f all outbound types SIGNAL2000 B 176 Reference SORT SORT SORT lt Priority gt _ lt Output gt Defaults GOVERCS YES Menus Groups RESULTS DESIGN The purpose of this command is to display the DESIGNed sequence codes and performance levels in order from best to worst performance as previously DESIGNed for the currrent intersection lt Priority gt is a keyword describing the parameter with the highest priority and can be any of the following CYCLES minimum successful cycle GOVERCS minimum required G C default lt Output gt is a keyword describing whether or not output will be displayed and can be any of the following NO do not display output YES display output default Notes e A DESIGN must be completed before a SORT command can be implemented The SORT command will re order the SEQUENCES list according to the order of the sort thus the sequence code which is SORTed to the top of the list will be the first sequence code displayed in the SEQUENCES input dialog e A SORT command can be issued at any time following a DESIGN even if intervening commands like TIMINGS ANALYZE HELP DATA etc have been issued Since SORT displays more DESIGN information than the DESIGN progress report itself and is much faster than DESIGN since no new computations are performed issuing SORT several times at various points following DESIGN is more practical than re DESIGNing SIGNAL2000 B 177 Reference STARTUP
278. f the result of the calculation is to be saved as the value of a user variable A Z the single character variable name should precede the expression and be separated from the expression with an equal sign representing a normal algebraic equation The value assigned to the variable will be rounded to the nearest integer as described below All internal calculations for the expression are made using 32 bit decimal arithmetic The result is displayed in a format with four decimal places that can handle numbers less than 10 billion 1 x 10 10 and greater than 1 billion 1 x 10 9 Regardless of the number of digits shown in the result only 6 7 digits of accuracy exist any other digits that are shown may be random e When a result is assigned to a user variable the result is rounded to the nearest integer value Results assigned to user variables must be less than or equal to 32 767 and greater than or equal to 32 768 SIGNAL2000 B 84 Reference CALCULATE CALCULATE If a variable is used in a calculation before its value has been assigned by a CALCULATE or REPEAT command its value will be zero SIGNAL2000 B 85 Reference CONDITIONS CONDITIONS CONDITIONS lt Major Direction gt lt N S Lanes gt lt E W Lanes gt lt High Speed gt lt Low Population gt lt Progression Impact gt lt Remedial Actions Failed gt lt Accidents for Signal gt lt Stop Sign Delay gt lt Accidents for Stop gt lt Minor Street Delay gt
279. f this feature Entries on this command may be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes This option provides the capability to include leading blanks in the entry which is otherwise not possible This option can also be used to enter a single blank as the title line using a or entry thereby blanking out the entire prior contents of the title line The name of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in the title line by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry noted above SIGNAL2000 B 137 Reference NSTOPFACTORS NSTOPFACTORS NSTOPFACTORS 12 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter twelve factors for the current intersection used to adjust the number of stops calculations of the EVALUATE report for example to match the number of stops obtained from a network simulation model lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt is the factor to adjust number of stops calculated for each movement and can be any number from 0 01 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes If number of stops have been simulated with a network model such as TRANSYT 7F or NETSIM CORSIM which does a better job of modeling delay between coordinated signals than the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual allows NSTOPFACTORS may be used
280. f typical input values is allowed for every input accepted by the program Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC51 ERROR The GOTO variable does not match the current REPEAT command Access aborted If the lt Destination gt parameter on a GOTO command is not a lt Variable gt parameter of the most active REPEAT command this message will be displayed Command execution is terminated and a new command instruction is issued Action Verify that all REPEAT and GOTO variable references are correct and re issue the LOAD command to restart the REPEAT loop process TPC52 ERROR ERROR IN PROGRAM SPECIFICATION This error occurs when an invalid lt Program Name gt parameter is used with the STOP command The lt Program Name gt parameter must be specified following the rules for file specification outlined in Appendix G Action Re issue the STOP command using the correct file TEAPAC F 290 Reference specification or execute the STOP command without a lt Program Name gt and do a system directory to determine the proper name for the desired program TPC53 ERROR The REPEAT specification is not valid Check manual File access aborted This error occurs when any of the parameter values for the REPEAT command are not acceptable For example it could be that the lt Variable gt used is already in use or not an alphabetic character or that the range and increment variables are not valid numeric value
281. ference Manual for further explanation and examples of this feature Entries on this command may be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes This option provides the capability to include leading blanks in the entry which is otherwise not possible This option can also be used to enter a single blank as the title line using a or entry thereby blanking out the entire prior contents of the title line e The name of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in the title line by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry noted above SIGNAL2000 B 93 Reference DESIGN DESIGN DESIGN lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt Defaults 1 1 capacity analysis of best sequence amp cycle follows DESIGN Menus Groups RESULTS DESIGN The purpose of this command is to perform an operational design to optimize timings for each sequence of the SEQUENCES command and each cycle of the CYCLES command for the current intersection or all intersections This is a Usage Level 2 command lt Number of Sequences to Analyze gt is the number of sequences for which capacity analyses shall be performed based upon optimum timings resulting from the design and can be 0 1 64 or 1 Its default value is 1 1 capacity analysis of best sequence amp cycle follows DESIGN Notes DESIGN optimizes green times with th
282. ffect a complete DESIGN optimization particularly when saturated conditions and or permitted phasings are allowed This is due to the substantially more complex dependence of optimum phase times on the timing and phasing of other movements at the intersection involved in the 1994 1997 2000 HCM methodology and is unavoidable Optimization times will be very manageable on typical computers using current technology but can be much longer on less modern computers The following offers several options to speed things up in these cases Cycle length limits and increments should be selected judiciously since the amount of optimization time is directly proportional to the number of cycles attempted Arbitrarily small increments of CYCLES should be avoided unless specifically necessary For example 40 140 10 will deliver virtually the same information as 40 140 5 in one half the time If permitted only operation is specifically not acceptable in certain situations for safety and or policy reasons optimization time can be significantly improved by eliminating sequence codes 1 2 and 3 from the SEQUENCES list For example in a fully actuated signal where all left turn phases are expected to be actuated on the average selecting the following SEQUENCES list will SIGNAL2000 C 209 Reference speed up the DESIGN process while at the same time eliminating permitted only operation on any approach Basic gt SEQUENCES 44 45 46 5455 56 6465 66 or Basi
283. ffic from SITE etc need only be saved into the data file with File Save then the next program launched with the same file using the LinkTo menu A single click positions the user in the next program ready to do the analysis of that program Lastly all programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR now have the ability to store all of this data for up to 500 intersections in a single file gt T2004v6 LinkTo Menu In All TEAPAC Programs Includes All TEAPAC Programs All TEAPAC programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR now contain the LinkTo menu which now provides immediate access to all other TEAPAC programs with a single click which causes the current data file to be re opened in that program gt T2004v6 LinkTo Function Now Allows Direct Link to Host Programs A new function of the LinkTo menu has been added which allows direct linkage to the six host programs which are supported by the six TEAPAC preprocessors These are PRETRANSYT for TRANSYT PREPASSR for PASSER PRENETSIM for CORSIM PRESYNCHRO for SIGNAL2000 H 323 Reference Synchro SimTraffic PRETSPPD for TS PP Draft and now PRENOSTOP for NOSTOP Since all programs have access to the control directives for all the preprocessors this means for example that a TRANSYT run can be made directly from SIGNAL2000 with a LinkTo TRANSYT assuming a licensed copy of PRETRANSYT is installed on the system gt T2004v6 Global Input Option for Most Intersection Inputs A powerful new feature has been
284. following is an example of the Queuemodel Calculations text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Queuemodel Calculations Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Sq 44 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 a metal OK ws ok g kk kk gt lt gt lt lt eKKK l v 4 4 a KkKKK V North lt lt gt gt titt F FEFE v ae i v G C 0 092 G C 0 237 G C 0 204 G C 0 200 C 60 G Bion G 14 2 G 12 3 G 12 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 QUEUES F L Veh N Approach E Approach S Approach W Approach Veh Ln m n tl Len RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT 1 HCM BW 90 25 40 4 12 4 0 10 2 0 9 7 6 9 8 3 ARRB B W 95 25 40 4 9 4 0 9 2 0 7 8 6 8 8 4 HCM B W 50 25 40 2 7 2 0 6 L 0 3 4 3 5 5 6 MBQ BA 50 25 40 2 5 2 0 4 1 0 4 3 3 4 4 7 97E L A 90 25 40 2 5 2 0 5 1 0 4 3 4 5 5 8 97A L A 90 25 40 2 5 2 0 5 1 0 4 3 4 3 5 9 97E L A 90 25 40 3 8 3 0 7 2 0 6 4 5 7 6 10 97A L A 90 25 40 3 8 3 0 7 2 0 6 4 5 7 6 Selected Model 1 4 12 4 0 10 2 0 9 7 6 9 8 QUEUES F Veh N Approach E Approach S Approach W Approac
285. ft turns coming from the opposite approach than the right turns described in note 1 above For example pedestrians crossing the east leg of the intersection may also interfere with left turns made from the north approach The lt Pedestrian Interference gt value for this left turn should be input for the opposite south approach as in the case of the right turns in note 1 above Versions of the SIGNAL TEAPAC program prior to SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 etc permitted the use of certain keywords to represent typical ped volume conditions To permit upwards compatibility of data files from these earlier programs SIGNAL2000 will convert these keywords in the same manner as the earlier programs using the following relationships between the number of conflicting pedestrians and the keyword used LOW 50 MODERATE 200 and HIGH 400 These numeric values will be the values saved if this data is subsequently saved by SIGNAL2000 If an exclusive pedestrian phase is defined with the PEDTIME entry PEDLEVELS should be set to zero since there should be no pedestrian interference with vehicular traffic during vehicle phases SIGNAL2000 B 151 Reference PEDTIME PEDTIME PEDTIME lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt lt Phase Numbers Defaults 0 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETER PHASING The purpose of this command is to enter the time for an exclusive pedestrian scramble phase for the current intersection lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Tim
286. g INCLUDED VEHICLECOUNTS data includes truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS command default SEPARATE VEHICLECOUNT data does not include truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS command lt Count Description gt is a 40 character description of the count that was conducted to include such things as the date weather count station etc The default value is all blanks Notes If entered data is declared CUMULATIVE the data entered is the cumulation of traffic counted from the start of the survey starting at an arbitrary value sometimes 0 The actual volume will be the subtraction of successive cumulative entries For REDUCED counts the data entered is the actual volume counted for the count interval When truck counts are INCLUDED the truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS commands are also included in the VEHICLECOUNT data values and no adjustments are made by the program When truck counts are declared SEPARATE the truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS commands are not included in the VEHICLECOUNTS data values so must be added to VEHICLECOUNTS by the program to get total traffic numbers SIGNAL2000 B 88 Reference CRITICALS CRITICALS CRITICALS 6 lt Critical Movement Number gt Defaults 6 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS PHASING ANALYZE The purpose of this command is to enter the movement which is critical for each phase of the phase sequence of operation of the current intersection lt Critical
287. g the Edit menu as above and the network data can be edited further by additional mouse actions in the main window or with the Edit menu After the network is entered the data for each intersection can be entered by right clicking the intersection and using the same menus which appear in the Edit menu described above SIGNAL2000 11 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION A network is created with the mouse by first clicking anywhere in the main window to reveal a grid with 500 spacing then clicking the Create Link button in the Edit Mode section of the left side toolbar In the Create Link mode simply click down at the location of the beginning of the link street drag the mouse to the position of the end of the link and release the mouse A link terminated by two dummy nodes will be shown Any time a created link crosses an existing link a real analysis intersection is created and numbered in increasing order starting from 1 Dummy nodes are numbered in decreasing order starting from 999 In the Select Intersection mode the intersection which is clicked becomes the current intersection for which any subsequent entered data will belong or results may pertain The current intersection can also be selected with the Intersection dialog of the Edit menu or the Select Intersection toolbar button under the main menu or with the Home key combination When dragging the mouse the status bar at the bottom of the window shows th
288. gards to SIGNAL2000 this means that the SERVICEVOLUMES and GOVERCS commands are no longer independent of the phasing and timings as they were in SIGNAL85 and now require specific SEQUENCES GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES entries to be made before they can be run In this sense SERVICEVOLUMES and GOVERCS must be used in the Analyze Mode like ANALYZE and EVALUATE instead of the Design Mode like DESIGN Calculating and Saving Saturation Flow Rates In the same line of discussion as the previous paragraph saturation flow rates can no longer be calculated by the DESIGN process alone for the SATURATIONFLOWS command to be SAVEd in a file This is because DESIGN may not know a specific phasing or timings for which these satflows should be calculated since it is generally optimizing a wide range of phasings and cycle lengths Thus now an Analyze Mode command such as ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLUMES or GOVERCS must be issued before new SATURATIONFLOWS are calculated to be SAVEd Note that the SATURATIONFLOWS which are calculated for left turns reflect the type of phasing used for protected or protected permitted phasings the SATFLOWS reflect the protected phase satflows while a permitted only phasing calculates the permitted satflows This is consistent with the SATFLOWS values expected by PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM Processing Time for DESIGN Prior users of SIGNAL85 may note that SIGNAL2000 can take a considerably longer time to e
289. gh use of the QUEUEMODELS command so that its results are displayed in the results produced by the ANALYZE and EVALUATE commands The results of all of the queue models can be produced side by side by using the QUEUECALCS command in a manner that allows quick comparison of all of the models The purpose of this QUEUECALCS report is to first illustrate that the queue models which have been used over the years deliver widely varying results and thus cannot all be valid under all conditions This is intended to lead the user to the conclusion that a robust queue model is needed that can be relied upon under a wide range of conditions with the clear suggestion that the 2000 HCM model is that robust model In this regard the HCM queue model takes into account the effects that all of the following conditions have on queueing volume of demand actual green time cycle length saturation flow capacity v c maximum extent of queue on pavement coordinated operation actuated operation unbalanced lane utilization protected permitted operation over saturation upstream v c initial queues length of analysis period average storage length of queued vehicles and various percentile estimates Secondly the QUEUECALCS result allows quick comparison of the 2000 HCM model results to more familiar historical models so users can become comfortable with the HCM model in that light It is anticipated that over time the HCM model will become the model of choice and
290. group name as its sub set This is the BASIC group which consists of those important and necessary PARAMETERS commands needed as a minimum to describe the data for an analysis In the SIGNAL2000 program since the PARAMETERS group is quite large it is further sub divided into additional special groups as described below Special SIGNAL2000 Group Names The SIGNAL2000 program contains ten special group names eight of which are subsets of the PARAMETERS group The subset groups are SYSTEM INTERSECTION APPROACH MOVEMENT PHASING TURNS WARRANTS SITE and 94DEFAULTS The INTERSECTION commands are used to input those parameters which affect the entire intersection such as metropolitan area The APPROACH commands are used to enter those parameters specific to each of the four approaches The MOVEMENT SIGNAL2000 A 64 Reference commands are used to enter data specific to each of the twelve movements The PHASING commands describe the signal phasing and timing parameters The TURNS WARRANTS and SITE commands are used to enter those parameters which are needed only by TURNS WARRANTS and SITE these are present for seamless data file compatibility with these programs using the LinkTo menu The 94DEFAULTS commands are used to reset certain commands to their 1994 1997 2000 HCM default values after loading data from a SIGNAL85 data file The remaining special group names ANALYZE and DESIGN consist of the com
291. gs Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Sq 44 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 a metal 5 a ARK gt lt gt lt lt x x l v A a KkKKK V North lt lt gt gt l Fe ee v ka aa v G C 0 092 G C 0 237 G C 0 204 G C 0 200 C 60 G 30 G 14 2 G 12 3 G 12 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 SIGNAL2000 D 227 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Input Worksheet The 2000 Highway Capacity Manual describes nine worksheets for simplifying and organizing capacity analysis calculations Replicas of these worksheets may be produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands by first setting the first OUTPUT parameter to FULL A limited set of only the basic HCM worksheets can be produced by setting the first OUTPUT parameter to BASIC Worksheets may also be produced by DESIGN with the same OUTPUT setting if a capacity analysis has been requested following the design Each worksheet is discussed individually in the succeeding pages and an example of each is included The HCM Input Worksheet is the first HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected The worksheet is also produced when BASIC worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the input conditions used for the capacity analysis as described below Intersection Name The node number and name of the intersection Area Locati
292. gt VOLUMES 175 650 185 120 545 125 125 370 200 215 570 220 Results ANALYZE With the addition of the shopping center traffic the intersection delay went up to 20 4 seconds and the critical movements have delays as high as 50 and 89 seconds Since the ANALYZE command was used no changes were made to the GREENTIMES from the previous analysis On the other hand it is possible to use the DESIGN command to generate new timings and phasings which would improve the operation under the new traffic volumes This can be easily accomplished by using the DESIGN command again Results DESIGN The result is now sequence 44 with intersection delay of 41 2 seconds but the critical movements delay is now equalized at 48 to 49 seconds While the example problem is over simplified it does demonstrate that SIGNAL2000 s interactive analysis and design techniques allow many conditions to be tested quickly and efficiently In addition printed reports can be produced to document the analysis and analysis conditions can be saved at any time as illustrated below At this point of the analysis we may feel we have an adequate solution to the problem and wish to SAVE the data values which created the final results for future use The typical Save SaveAs options of the File menu are normally used but the DATAFILES commands of the File menu also offer these capabilities by first defining the disk FILE name to be used for storage then issuing the SA
293. h Ft Lan mn tl Len RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT 1 HCM B W 90 25 40 957 295 92 0 243 53 0 218 186 152 215 197 3 ARRB B W 95 25 40 101 233 95 O 218 56 O 183 199 162 198 206 4 HCM B W 50 25 40 52 184 50 O 146 28 0 130 108 87 128 116 6 MBQ BA 50 25 40 46 119 43 O 108 25 0 90 81 76 98 95 7 97E L A 90 25 40 51 127 51 0 127 25 O 101 76 101 127 127 8 97A L A 90 25 40 51 127 51 0 127 25 O 101 76 101 127 127 9 97E L A 90 25 40 81 197 71 O 182 48 O 155 113 129 169 164 10 97A L A 90 25 40 81 197 71 O 182 48 O 155 113 129 169 164 Selected Model 1 95 297 92 0 243 53 O 218 186 152 215 197 Available Storage 100 1000 250 0 1000 250 O 1000 250 100 1000 250 Queue Storage Ratio 0 95 0 30 0 37 0 00 0 24 0 21 0 00 0 22 0 74 1 52 0 22 0 79 SIGNAL2000 D 264 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Required g Cs and LT Clearance Cycles The Required g Cs report generated by the GOVERCS command identifies the green to cycle time ratios which are required by the adjusted demand volumes in each lane group to maintain each level of service of operation for the given phasing cycle length and timings Thus if a given movement were to receive exactly the g C shown for a level of service that movement would operate at exactly that level of service the service flow rate would equal the adjusted demand volume This is likely to be an iterative process since the timings assumed are not likely to be the same as the timings required which are thus calculated First the
294. h and can be 0 100 percent Its default value is 0 lt Path List gt is a list of intersection node numbers separated by spaces through which vehicles generated by the site for the current distribution type in the order they occur in the path and not to exceed 16 intersections in length Each entry can be any valid intersection number see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered Notes The first and last node numbers of the lt Path List gt must agree with the external node number of the current PATHDISTRIBUTION type and one of the access points of the GENERATION command If the distribution type is an inbound type the first node number must be the external node of the current distribution type and the last node number must be an inbound access node If the distribution type is outbound the reverse applies e Previously entered path lists on the PATHASSIGNMENT command can be deleted by entering a zero percentage for the list This completely removes the list of intersections which is readily apparent in the Visual Mode and also ignores any list which may be entered following the zero percentage This allows the removal of an unneeded list of intersections If a previously entered PATHASSIGNMENT list must be shortened the entry of node number 0 anywhere in the list will erase all nodes from that point to the end of the list If the entire path is to be discarded either replace it with a new path or use 0 percen
295. h phase sequence using the lt Design Evaluate gt option it is suggested that a minimal number of cycles be tested This is due to the fact that a considerable amount of output is generated for each cycle length tested The output generated from this selection is self evident and not documented anywhere and is not generally recommended SIGNAL2000 B 143 Reference OVERLAPS OVERLAPS OVERLAPS 4 lt Right Turn Overlap gt Defaults 4 YES Menus Groups PARAMETERS PHASING The purpose of this command is to enter how right turn overlaps are to be handled for each approach of the current intersection lt Right Turn Overlap gt is a keyword which describes whether right turns will be added to the standard phasings in overlap phases where exclusive right turn lanes exist and can be any of the following NO don t allow right turn overlap under any condition YES allow right turn overlap into adjacent phases if an exclusive right turn lane exists default Notes The default is YES for each right turn meaning that if an exclusive right turn lane exists and the phasing would allow a non conflicting overlap to be added as an extension of the normal right turn indication it will be added The extension will be to an adjacent phase only The other option NO will prevent the addition of a right turn in an overlap phase regardless of the turn lane or phasing conditions Note that some controllers may allow a right turn overlap to be
296. han that desired and vice versa Service Rate The service flow rates for the design level of service usually Level of Service C by default and for Level of Service E are tabulated in vehicles per hour These are the maximum volumes which can exist with the specified timings without exceeding the stated level of service The level of service for each column is listed in the header of the column Adjusted Volume The Adjusted Volumes are tabulated for each lane group They represent the sum of the volumes for all movements which are in the specified lane group as adjusted by the peak hour factors Volume Capacity Ratio This is the ratio of the adjusted flow rate to the capacity of the lane group HCM Delay The estimated control delay per vehicle in seconds as calculated using the methods of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual SIGNAL2000 D 253 Reference Level of Service The level of service LS at which each traffic stream is operating assuming the specified timings widths and other capacity parameters is specified for each traffic stream If an LS entry has an asterisk to its left this indicates that this movement was a critical design movement during optimization of the timings The levels of service described in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual have been further subdivided to provide a more accurate reflection of approach performance The delay range for each level of service is divided in half to produce two sublevels the
297. he last non blank character which is entered See Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for further explanation and examples of this feature Entries on this command may be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes This option provides the capability to include leading blanks in the entry which is otherwise not possible This option can also be used to enter a single blank as the title line using a or entry thereby blanking out the entire prior contents of the title line The name of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in the title line by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry noted above SIGNAL2000 B 157 Reference QUEUECALCS QUEUECALCS QUEUECALCS Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE DESIGN The purpose of this command is to display a wide variety of various published queue calculations for a specified phasing and timings for the current intersection or all intersections including the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual queue model It has no parameters Notes e The formulations for the various queue calculations are discussed in Appendix C Queue model parameters are entered using the QUEUEMODELS command Before this command can be properly executed the phasing and timings must have been previously set This can be accomplished through use of the SEQ
298. he periods If a time is given twelve counts for each of the movements at that time should follow Use of the movement number option is limited to the Manual Mode only e Usually for capacity analysis purposes vehicles with 6 or more tires or 3 or more axles should be considered trucks heavy vehicles All counted trucks entered by this command may either be included or not included in the counts on the VEHICLECOUNTS command This is determined by the second parameter of the COUNTTYPE command Truck counts may not exceed 9999 Input should always be no more than four digits If cumulative counts are made with five digit counters only enter the last four digits When cumulative counts are being reduced if the difference is negative the counter turned over the 9999 mark to 0000 TURNS automatically adds 10 000 to the negative result SIGNAL2000 B 185 Reference TRUCKPERCENTS TRUCKPERCENTS TRUCKPERCENTS 12 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt Defaults 12 2 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the truck and through bus heavy vehicle traffic percentage for each movement of the current intersection lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt is the percentage of trucks and through buses in each movement volume and can be any number from 0 to 99 9 Its default value is 2 0 Notes TRUCKPERCENTS includes any designated heavy vehicles as defined by the 2000 Highway Capacity Ma
299. he SEQUENCES command DESIGN will optimize every possible sequence code for the allowed range of cycles Additional shortcuts are allowed with SEQUENCES to specify typical lists of phasings which should be allowed Thus the DESIGN command can be used to optimize timings for a known phasing and cycle length as well as a complete range of phasings and cycles as controlled by the SEQUENCES and CYCLES commands Two other inputs also control the DESIGN process These are the LEVELOFSERVICE and EXCESS commands The LEVELOFSERVICE command describes the desired level of service delay or v c which DESIGN will attempt to achieve for the critical movements If this level of SIGNAL2000 27 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES performance is achieved the additional time which is available is defined as excess time and its allocation to the phases is defined by the EXCESS command The EXCESS command provides the movement numbers which are to receive any excess time which may be available If no movement numbers are given the default is to assign any excess time to all phases in proportion to the required time for each phase If the desired level of performance is not met the EXCESS command is ignored Other Commands Two other commands fall into a utility category being usable at almost any time during the course of an analysis These are DIAGRAM and MAP DIAGRAM produces a phasing diagram for the specified phasing code and only requires that th
300. he common interface used by all TEAPAC programs Comments on the usefulness and organization of the program and this document are welcome as continual updates and improvements are being made Please direct your comments to Strong Concepts Strong Concepts 15 Timber Lane Northbrook Illinois U S A 60062 3715 phone 847 564 0386 fax 847 474 4486 email support StrongConcepts com internet www StrongConcepts com SIGNAL2000 iii Manual PROPRIETARY NOTICE TEAPAC programs and tutorial reference manuals are protected under the Copyright Act of 1976 and all rights are reserved by Strong Concepts Only you as the original purchaser may use the TEAPAC programs and only on computer systems located in the one office of your agency for which the programs are licensed As an original purchaser of the TEAPAC programs you are hereby licensed only to read the programs from their medium into the memory of a computer solely for the purpose of executing the programs Use of the TEAPAC programs purchased hereby by any other entity or on computer systems other than the ones for which it is licensed is an unauthorized use Except for the limited purpose of system back up the copying duplicating selling or otherwise distributing of TEAPAC programs is a violation of the law The TEAPAC documentation may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without the
301. he exception that it calculates the percentile queue for the percentile input by the user based on actual cumulative Poisson arrival probabilities not a 2 0 factor and the queue distances are estimated using the queued vehicle SIGNAL2000 C 206 Reference length inputs made by the user not 25 and 40 feet and thus it is called the Enhanced SIGNAL97 ANALYZE model S97A Models 9 is the queue model produced by the SIGNAL97 EVALUATE command and displayed in the Evaluation of Intersection Performance report of SIGNAL97 When conditions are undersaturated the model is the same as Model 10 above However when conditions are over saturated X gt 1 0 the following formula is used for Q to account for number of over saturated arrivals in the analysis period Note that in SIGNAL97 the Q portion of the model is not on a per lane basis divided by N as it is in SIGNAL2000 The SIGNAL2000 model divides by N for a per lane value so it can be compared to the 2000 HCM models which are all on a per lane basis Q 2 00 q r T v X 1 X N where Q number of vehicles in queue per lane 2 0 90th percentile randomness factor poisson distribution estimate q arrival rate vehicles per second v 3600 v adjusted volume vehicles per hour time that is not effectively green seconds e g effective red time C 1 g C cycle length seconds effective green time seconds length of analysis period hours
302. he incremental delay term d2 in seconds per vehicle as calculated by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual methods Queue Delay d3 The initial queue delay term d3 in seconds per vehicle as calculated by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual methods Uniform Delay di The uniform delay term dj in seconds per vehicle as re calculated by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual methods for the d3 delay term Progression Factor The adjustment to be made to the uniform delay calculation for a non random arrival condition as determined in Exhibit 16 12 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Control Delay The control delay for each lane group as the sum of d adjusted by the Progression Factor plus dz plus d3 in seconds per vehicle SIGNAL2000 D 243 Reference Lane Group Level of Service The Level of Service for the lane group as determined from the lane group control delay and Exhibit 16 2 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual If the delay value is in the better half of the range of delay allowed for a given level of service the level of service listed will be accompanied by a plus sign to the right of the LOS letter Final queue The final initial queue unmet demand at the end of the analysis period in vehicles Approach Delay The weighted average of lane group Control Delay for all lane groups on an approach weighted by the volume in each lane group experiencing each different delay value in seconds per vehicle Approach Level of S
303. he warrant levels and conditions which must be met to satisfy the warrants lt N S Lanes gt and lt E W Lanes gt is the number of lanes for moving traffic on each of the North South and East West approaches respectively and normally does not include exclusive turn lanes It is the number of lanes on each approach not the total number of lanes on the street If the actual number of lanes exceeds the maximum allowed entry of 4 enter 4 the MUTCD only considers whether there is 1 lane or more than 1 lane SIGNAL2000 B 87 Reference COUNTTYPE COUNTTYPE COUNTTYPE lt Type of Data gt lt Type of Truck Counts gt lt Count Description gt Defaults REDUCED INCLUDED 40 blanks Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the type of count data which is to be supplied to the program at the current intersection and to provide a description of the count lt Type of Data gt is a keyword which defines the type of count data which will be entered on the VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands and can be any of the following CUMULATIVE The count data entered is the cumulation of traffic counted from the start of the survey REDUCED The data entered is the actual volume counted for the count interval default lt Type of Truck Counts gt is a keyword which defines the type of truck count data which will be entered on the VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands and can be any of the followin
304. hich make up this report are discussed individually below Signal Phasing and Timing Intersection Name If provided by the user the node number and name of the intersection appears at the top of the report Signal Phasing The signal phasing is specified with a box for each phase of the signal operation indicating the movements which are allowed during that phase Movement arrows formed with asterisks indicate the critical movements in the phasing North or the direction assumed to be north by the user is always up in the diagrams as shown by the North arrow Phases are numbered consecutively starting with one 1 for the first north south phase No attempt is made to identify subphases lead phases or overlap phases by the phase number The coded sequence number appears at the top of the diagram Timings The timings for each phase are given in terms of green time to cycle time ratio G C in seconds per second cycle length C in seconds green time G in seconds and yellow plus all red time Y R in seconds If a phase s green time is controlled by a minimum this is indicated by the letter M in the lower left corner of the phase Queue Calculations The first section of the queue calculations gives queue values in terms of the total number of vehicles queued in each lane of each lane group vehicles per lane The second section of the queue calculations gives queue values in terms of the total distance occupied by vehicles queued
305. hich was being used when the last LOAD command was encountered It has no parameters NEXTLINES 5 lt Next Line of File gt Enter the default next line to be accessed in each of the five files Commands to Control Program Execution The following commands are used to direct program control Typically these commands are used within control files to execute a series of program steps STOP lt Next Program gt Stop running the current program and optionally run a new program REPEAT lt Variable Name gt lt First Val gt lt Last Val gt lt Increment gt Initiate a loop in a control file so that the set of commands which follow will be repeated a finite number of times GOTO lt Destination gt SIGNAL2000 47 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Divert the input stream within a file by providing the next location to be LOADed from that file CALCULATE lt Algebraic Expression gt Perform a calculation for the given expression and optionally assign the integer result to a user variable SIGNAL2000 48 Tutorial CHAPTER 5 Advanced Procedures Chapter 5 Topics Chapters 1 through 4 covered the basic methods and commands required to use the SIGNAL2000 program to solve most problems which will be encountered The advanced procedures discussed in this chapter can greatly increase efficiency in solving problems with SIGNAL2000 as well as provide insights into how to use SIGNAL2000 to solve unusual problems Befo
306. hin the file The file name including any file extension or switch see below cannot exceed a maximum of 70 characters Upper lower case characters and spaces are allowed Since SCENARIO Condition files and certain file switch options can add as many as 6 characters to file names designated by users it is recommended that user file names not exceed a limit of 64 characters to avoid potential problems when these tools are used There are some special symbols which may not be used such as colons dots and slashes which are used as separators between the lt File Name gt elements In order to minimize potential problems in naming files it is recommended that only letters and digits be used in the disk file name File Extension eee As many as three characters may be used to describe the file extension Typically the file extension describes the format of a data file rather than the actual contents In TEAPAC programs if a file extension is not entered the program will automatically generate tpc as the default extension The older TEAPAC file format extension of for is also allowed Use of the default extension is recommended Switch s When using the FILES command the operating systems provide the capability to automatically create data files on disk This capability also allows the unintentional creation of a file or the TEAPAC G 299 Reference accidental overwriting of an existing file without warning In the case of
307. his command is particularly useful to initialize repeated execution of sets of commands which use the default value of lt Line Number gt for the LOAD command SIGNAL2000 B 134 Reference NODELIST NODELIST NODELIST 500 lt Node Number gt Defaults Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter the list of nodes to be studied as well as the order of the analysis lt Node Numbers is a unique number assigned to each intersection on the INTERSECTION command and can be any integer from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 and thus must be entered Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa e The order that the nodes are specified in the NODELIST is the order they are analyzed when INTERSECTION 0 is selected for all intersections e If SIGNAL2000 data will be used by PRETRANSYT node numbers cannot exceed the value of 327 since all node numbers will be multiplied by 100 when link numbers are created for TRANSYT and link numbers greater than 32767 cannot be created due to internal arithmetic limitations When using Release 6 or higher of TRANS YT7F and modeling permitted left turns either with exclusive permissive phas
308. his policy may not produce sensible results depending on the nature of the oversaturation For example if a single left turn at the intersection is substantially oversaturated say with 350 vehicles in a single left turn lane but all other movement volumes are well within reasonable limits for their geometrics all of the other movements will be made to suffer with limited greentime allocation in SIGNAL2000 s attempt to allocate enough greentime to the single offending left turn and to balance either the delay or the v c In this case it may make more logical sense to let the single left turn fail miserably while the remainder of the intersection performs reasonably This is a strategy which can only be handled by manual optimization by the user The bottom line here is that no single optimization strategy will make sense for all over saturated conditions and the user should review the results of over saturated optimization carefully to make sure the results are sensible and that all constraints such as minimum green times have been met Note also that the user can invoke the v c balancing optimization policy at any time simply by selecting 0 as the target delay on the LEVELOFSERVICE command Calculation of Queues SIGNAL2000 calculates queue lengths according to the methods dictated by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual HCM as well as several other queueing models as described in this section Any one of the models described can be selected throu
309. hould be displayed and can be any of the following NONE No HCM worksheet display default BASIC Display only basic HCM worksheets FULL Display all HCM worksheets same as YES lt Messages gt is a keyword which identifies whether or not messages such as excessive turning movement percentages in through lanes should be displayed and can be any of the following NO No warning message output YES Warning message output default lt Design Evaluate gt is a keyword which identifies whether or not additional output regarding the operational design of each sequence or evaluation should be displayed and can be any of the following NONE No additional DESIGN or EVALUATE output default DETAIL Detailed DESIGN output for each combination of cycle amp sequence EXTRA Additional DESIGN or EVALUATE output not recommended Notes e Capacity Analysis Worksheets which match those of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual can be produced any time the ANALYZE EVALUATE and QUEUECALCS commands are used This option is selected with the lt Worksheets gt parameter Certain warning messages can be suppressed with the NO option for the lt Messages gt flag For example each time turning movement percentages in through lanes are determined to exceed 50 of all volumes in that stream a message to that effect is displayed SIGNAL2000 B 142 Reference OUTPUT OUTPUT When requesting EXTRA output regarding the DESIGN of eac
310. hree logical categories RESULTS Dialogs action commands for SIGNAL2000 found in the Results menu which are specific to the act of solving the traffic problem addressed by the SIGNAL2000 program and used to control the type of analysis performed e PARAMETERS Dialogs entry commands for SIGNAL2000 found in the Edit menu which are specific to the process of entering data for the traffic problem to be solved by the SIGNAL2000 program Common TEAPAC Dialogs entry and action commands of the SIGNAL2000 program which are common to and used by all of the TEAPAC programs These are found primarily in the Datafiles and Control sub menus of the File menu Table 4 1 describes the detailed organization of how each of the SIGNAL2000 commands is presented in this chapter according to these categories SIGNAL2000 33 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Table 4 1 Organization of Command Discussions RESULTS Dialogs PARAMETERS Dialogs Commands to Enter Basic Data Commands to Enter System Data Commands to Enter Intersection Data Commands to Enter Approach Data Commands to Enter Movement Data Commands to Enter Phasing Data Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data Common TEAPAC Dialogs Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data Commands to Label Output Commands to Control Operation of Program Commands to Access Data Stored in Files Commands to Control Program Execution For each
311. ic impact study 53 traffic planning 53 TRANSYT 54 TRANSYT 7F ii B 92 B 138 trip generation rate B 105 Trouble Spots E 278 truck counts B 88 TRUCKCOUNTS 45 A 64 B 88 B 153 B 185 B 189 F 292 TRUCKPERCENTS 37 41 A 63 B 186 trucks 45 B 185 TS PP DRAFT 54 turning movement count summaries 53 TURNS ii 53 TURNS compatibility 44 Tutorial Manual 2 U un install options G 303 unsatisfied demand B 116 update messages B 127 upstream node B 131 UPSTREAMVC 40 A 63 B 187 Usage Level F 295 user variable 48 B 84 Using ACTUATIONS and MINIMUMS 55 Using SIGNAL2000 Data for PREPASSR PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM PRES YNCHRO PRETSPPD and PRENOSTOP 54 UTILIZATION E 276 F 293 UTILIZATIONS 41 A 63 B 188 C 208 V v c balancing C 202 VEHICLECOUNTS 45 A 64 B 88 B 153 B 185 B 189 F 292 verify input data 20 Version Number 9 virtual drive G 299 Visual Mode 18 VOLADDITIONALS 54 A 63 B 190 VOLFACTORS 41 A 63 B 175 B 191 VOLUMES 19 37 41 54 A 63 B 150 B 174 B 175 B 192 C 197 E 274 E 279 W WARNING F 281 Warrant Analysis 45 B 86 WARRANTS ii 53 B 87 WIDTHS 19 37 41 54 A 63 B 119 B 193 E 274 E 278 Windows G 297 worksheets 29 worst lane queue C 203 Y YELLOWTIMES 19 38 43 A 63 B 75 B 90 B 99 B 101 B 107 B 158 B 162 B 172 B 184 B 194 C 209 E 274 yield sign controlled lane group B 111 Z zero pha
312. icular command This only occurs when using the HELP ASK DATA SAVE or RESET commands which use commands as parameters Typically this error occurs when using Group Names as parameter values The total number of commands contained in the list cannot exceed the total number of commands in the program When this error occurs the program will prompt the user to re enter the command with a shorter list Action Re issue the command with the correct list of command parameters or re issue the command several times with partial lists to get the desired result TPC43 WARNING AMBIGUOUS ENTRY IGNORED This error is identical to TPC41 above where the command used as a parameter is ambiguous and the parameter is ignored Action Same as TPC41 above TPC44 ERROR This demonstration version does not permit use of the AUTO option of EXPORT For a demonstration program the AUTO option of EXPORT is disabled Normally this option allows the exported file to be launched directly into the host program without the need to name the file and manually run the host program and open the exported file Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TEAPAC F 289 Reference TPC45 ERROR This demonstration version permits use of only one file Others are ignored For a demonstration program the use of multiple files simultaneously is disabled Normally this option allows up to five data files to be open simultaneously f
313. ift and scaling can be modified by changing the same Setup dialog entries or equivalently with the Anchor and Stretch buttons in the Adjust Display left side toolbar Once a network has been created the Move Intersection Edit Mode button can be used to relocate any intersection or dummy node By default the link distance for all links connected to the moved node will be modified according to the move made If the move is simply to better match the underlying bitmap and the link distances have already been entered and verified the Adjust NETWORK checkbox in the Setup dialog should be unchecked to prevent the existing distances from being changed Each time the program is first run this option is set to the selected status The Insert Bend Node Edit Mode button can be used to create a dummy node on the link nearest to the click location so the network more precisely reflects curves in the network When creating legs to any intersection use care to meet the standard TEAPAC requirement that each intersection can have only 4 legs and understanding that these legs will be assigned to the four positions North East South and West regardless of their actual orientation If two skewed SIGNAL2000 12 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION legs might be interpreted by the program to have an approach angle which assigns them both to the same leg of the intersection initially create the legs with angles are such that they do not conflict then Mo
314. ignore the invalid entry and leave the previous parameter value TPC32 WARNING More parameters were found than were expected The extras have been ignored This message is displayed when more parameter values are entered for a particular command than the program will accept This usually indicates a miscount of input often a parameter value was entered twice Most commands will re prompt for a correct parameter list after this error After this error any extra entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where a duplicate or unwanted entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed as usual Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode where this error will most likely occur it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TEAPAC F 287 Reference TPC33 WARNING This parameter is not a valid numeric entry Re enter with a proper number This error message indicates that alphabetic or special characters were entered for a parameter which must be a numeric value Most commands will re prompt for parameter re entry after this error After this error is received the invalid entries will be ignored The paramet
315. in each lane of each lane group feet per lane In some cases the queue value or distance occupied cannot be computed or cannot be displayed for one of several possible reasons In these cases asterisks are displayed For example for grossly oversaturated conditions the calculated length of a given queue in feet may exceed the integer arithmetic used which has a maximum of 32 767 feet over six miles Also in Models 7 amp 8 where the poisson distribution is used the factorial portion of the formula may exceed the computational limits of the computer when queues approach one mile in length The six columns of information at the left of each section identifies the details of the queue models used with the following information SIGNAL2000 D 262 Reference Model number The assigned model number used to identify each of the queue models calculated in this report 1 10 Models 2 and 5 from the original HCM2000 no longer exist Model name The abbreviated model name for each model calculated as follows See Appendix C for more details on each of thses models HCM 2000 Highway Capacity Manual ARRB Australian Road Research Board SIDRA MBQ Maximum back of queue model S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate enhanced S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze enhanced S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze Model form The fundamental form of the model as follows B Maximum back of queue MBQ the maximum extent of the end of the queue from th
316. ing the Edit menu To use the Manual Mode for this tutorial select the Manual Mode from the Options menu or simply press F4 Once the program is ready to accept input it will display the command prompt arrow To enter the desired parameter values enter the command keyword and parameter values each separated by a space all followed by the ENTER key If the Visual Mode is desired at any point simply press the F4 function key If you wish you can use the drag and drop graphical network creation method to create your analysis network in the main window before entering detailed data To do this follow the instructions in the Data Entry section of Chapter 1 In this case for a single intersection simply draw two intersecting street segments After the network is created the additional detailed data described below can be entered by right clicking on the intersection including a check of the data already created by the drag and drop network creation The intersection can also be re numbered with a right click option The first step in using any TEAPAC program is to enter the data required to describe the problem to be solved This is accomplished using commands designated as PARAMETERS commands such as VOLUMES and WIDTHS The Commands option of the Help menu can be used to display help for all commands The Help Commands menu displays all commands along with information on how to use each Note the number of parameters for each command and
317. intersection and can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters Its default value is all blanks Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa e The node number entry made on the INTERSECTION command defines the current intersection for which subsequent intersection entry commands will apply to The INTERSECTION command must be issued prior to any of these entry commands The node number used must be a number already listed in the NODELIST e If INTERSECTION 0 is specified this selects all intersections in the NODELIST SUBSYSTEM for most subsequent actions of the program such as DESIGN and ANALYZE In addition if RESET is used the commands which are RESET will be reset for all intersections For example INTERSECTION 0 followed by RESET VOLUMES will reset the VOLUMES to zero for all intersections in the NODELIST In a Visual Mode dialog that includes INTERSECTION or intersection data the button button Page Up key and Page Down key can be used to in effect dynamically issue an INTERSECTION command for the next and previous intersection in the NODELIST If data values are changed on a screen display the Page keys should not be used before the data
318. iods If a time is given twelve counts for each of the movements at that time should follow Use of the movement number option is limited to the Manual Mode only If the truck COUNTTYPE is INCLUDED all counted vehicles should be included in these entries including any trucks specified by the TRUCKCOUNTS command If the truck COUNTTYPE is SEPARATE VEHICLECOUNTS should be all vehicles except trucks which will be entered only on the TRUCKCOUNTS command Vehicle counts may not exceed 9999 Input should always be no more than four digits If cumulative counts are made with five digit counters only enter the last four digits When cumulative counts are being reduced if the difference is negative the counter turned over the 9999 mark to 0000 TURNS automatically adds 10 000 to the negative result SIGNAL2000 B 189 Reference VOLADDITIONALS VOLADDITIONALS VOLADDITIONALS lt AddFactor gt 12 lt Additional Volume gt Defaults 1 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the factor and additional volume to be added for each movement at the current intersection lt AddFactor gt is the factor which is multiplied by each lt Additional Volume gt entered to get the total additional volume added to each movement and can be any number from 0 0 to 20 0 Its default value is 0 00 no additional volumes added lt Additional Volume gt is a volume of additional traffic to be added to the ente
319. ion D 258 Delay parameter D 247 Description D 216 Design Criteria D 221 DESIGN Output D 216 Duration D 247 Duration unmet D 247 Effective bike green time D 240 Effective Green D 242 D 249 SIGNAL2000 Effective ped green time D 238 D 240 Effective Permitted Green Time D 236 End Gain Time D 217 EVALUATE Output D 216 Excess Assignment D 217 Exclusive Pedestrian Phase D 217 Extension of Effective Green D 229 Final queue D 244 D 247 First LT Effective Green D 236 Flow Ratio D 242 D 249 Fuel Consumption D 258 Fuel Consumption Components D 259 g C Required D 257 g C Required and Used D 253 g C Requirement D 265 g C Used D 257 Grade D 230 Grade Factor D 233 Grade Percentage D 216 Green arrivals D 249 Green Ratio D 242 D 243 D 247 D 249 Green Times D 217 HCM Delay D 253 D 258 Heavy Vehicle Factor D 233 Heavy Vehicles D 229 Ideal Satflows D 217 Idling Delay D 259 Incremental Calibration Term D 243 Incremental Delay D 243 Initial Queue D 217 D 247 D 249 Intersection Delay D 244 Intersection Level of Service D 244 Intersection Number D 216 Intersection Number and Name D 228 D 252 D 256 D 262 Intersections in Network D 216 Intersections in Route D 216 Intersections in Subsystem D 216 Lane capacity D 249 Lane flow D 249 Lane Group D 242 D 247 D 249 Lane Group Capacity D 242 D
320. ions lt Type gt is the number of the distribution type being assigned and can be 1 150 see note below It has no default value it must be entered lt Intersection gt is the number of the intersection to which traffic is being assigned as defined on the INTERSECTION command and can be 1 999 see note below It has no default value it must be entered lt Movement gt is the movement number to which the traffic is being assigned and can be any integer from 0 to 12 as described below 1 12 one of the turning movements O designates that a list of assignments for all 12 movements will follow It has no default value it must be entered lt Assignment Factor gt is the percentage of the traffic of the distribution type being assigned that is assigned to the specified movement and can be 0 100 percent Its default value is 0 Notes The purpose of this command is to give the greatest degree of freedom in assigning traffic for a given distribution type to a given intersection When this technique is used SITE cannot check that the entered values are consistent with upstream and downstream assignments as is the case when using the PATHASSIGNMENT command As such ASSIGNMENT should only be used in those rare instances when the PATHASSIGNMENT command cannot achieve the desired special purpose assignment It can also be used when using old SITE data files which were created before the PATHASSIGNMENT command was available
321. iption and its location within the metropolitan area The level of service target entries identify the desirable operating levels of performance for critical movements delay in seconds and v c in percent and the worst levels to be tested as well as the optimization increments The priorities list the movements which get priority treatment if the level of performance target is met The network location lists in order the distance feet speed mph and upstream node number for each approach of the intersection The next four numbers of the network location identify which movement numbers of the upstream nodes supply traffic to the subject intersection The last three network entries describe the upstream link assignment method the link curvature and if the link distance has been manually entered The node location lists the X and Y coordinates respectively of the intersection s location in the system network Approach Parameters These are the parameters which apply uniquely to each of the four approaches They include individual approach labels percent of approach grade negative numbers are downhill approaches pedestrian interference levels for right turns on each approach in peds per hour bicycle volumes interfering with right turns on each approach in bikes per hour parking location and volume on each leg of the intersection bus stop frequency in buses per hour how many right turns are made on a red indication per hour and the
322. iption displays are now also included in the caption of the Tabular View window gt T2004v6 Check For Internet Update Function Provided A new function has been provided in the Help menu of every TEAPAC program that allows the user to have the program check the internet for any available downloadable updates This function can be set to automatically check for updates every time the program is launched If updates are found this fact is displayed along with the status of the update free or if a fee is involved and what that fee is as well as a link to a complete description of what functionality changes the update includes the ability to launch an email requesting a new key for a paid update or a quote for an upgrade Options to view a complete price list online to launch an email requesting technical support and to go to the Strong Concepts main web page are also provided This feature was partially implemented in the most recent downloads of several TEAPAC programs and accepted with great enthusiasm gt T2004v6 INTERSECTION Dialog Includes Option to Renumber a Node and All Refs The INTERSECTION dialog now contains a feature to renumber any intersection in the NODELIST to any value not currently in the NODELIST When selected all references to the old node number anywhere else in the network are also updated making renumbering a snap gt T2004v6 Save Remembers Selected Intersection Type for Subsequent Open When data files are sa
323. is important to either re SAVE starting at the same line number as previously used or to SAVE starting at the next available line number of the file When re SAVing information make sure the same information is SAVEd as previously used so that it takes up the same number of lines used previously If more lines are used they will overwrite the beginning of the next information if it exists and if less lines are used they will not erase the end of the previously SAVEd information After any file access is completed such as a LOAD or a SAVE the default line number for that file remains at the next line of the file until another file access command is executed or another file is opened For example after the first SAVE above taking 50 lines of the file the default line number for the next file access command will be line 51 If another scenario is to be SAVEd the default line number may be used without remembering what it is For File 1 this line number is displayed in the dialog box of the file access command Another use of the default line number is for access of SAVEd scenarios in the same order they were SAVEd For example the first scenario from above can be LOADed starting at line 1 and analyzed then the next scenario can be LOADed starting at the default line number of 51 again without remembering what it is Another line number that is remembered by the program is the last line that was used for the file by any file access comman
324. is vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour Vaa entered VOLADDITIONAL additional volume faaa entered VOLADDITIONAL adjustment factor SIGNAL2000 C 198 Reference Thus in the most general form the demand volumes used for an analysis are determined using the following formula y V fy EE N Vada fada PHF where v analysis flow rate during peak 15 minutes of the hour vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour fy entered VOLFACTOR adjustment factor for each N periods N entered VOLFACTOR number of periods to compound the fy factor V qa entered VOLADDITIONAL additional volume faaa entered VOLADDITIONAL adjustment factor PHF 15 minute peak hour factor ratio of average flow to peak 15 minute flow The TURNS and WARRANTS programs of TEAPAC can determine peak hour or peak 15 minute volumes from entered traffic count data using the ANALYZE function In these programs entered VOLUMES and VOLADDITIONALS are ignored by ANALYZE and the results of the peak analysis are placed in the VOLUMES entries automatically VWOLFACTORS are applied to the traffic count data as growth or seasonal adjustment factors thus the resulting automatic VOLUMES entries have these same VOLFACTORS removed so that the calculation of analysis volumes from the general formula above will result in the same peak volumes determined by the ANALYZE function Fo
325. is first entered with the TAB key Other commands EXPORT and programs assume certain conventions for describing intersections For example this should be the north south street name first separated from the east west street name by an ampersand amp SIGNAL2000 B 117 Reference IODEVICES IODEVICES IODEVICES lt Visual View gt lt Page gt lt Lines Pg gt lt Last Line gt Defaults NORMAL 0 66 63 Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to set the visual view style for dialogs as well as the page number and the size of the output medium i e paper lt Visual View gt is a keyword representing view of the Visual Mode which will be used and can be either keyword described below NORMAL the normal view of the Visual Mode default TABULAR the tabular view of the Visual Mode lt Page gt is the number of the next page to be printed and can be zero 1 or any positive integer up to 32767 Its default value is 0 do not display page number on output lt Lines Pg gt is the number of printable lines on each page of output and can be zero or any positive integer up to 32767 Its default value is 66 the typical size of printed output on 8 1 2 x 11 paper at 6 lines per inch lt Last Line gt is the number of lines counting from the top of the page which are to be used for printing and can be zero or any positive integer less than or equal to lt Lines Pg gt Its default value is 63 which
326. is is the order in which the sequences are sorted first by critical LOS achieved then by target delay achieved within this LOS then by required G C Y C If two sequences have the same required G C Y C at the same level they are further sorted by the best cycle length found and then the number of phases All of this information is documented for each sequence code which is feasible Infeasible sequences are listed in a matrix at the end of the report This means that the phasing is considered unsafe and or inappropriate for the specified input conditions When a phasing will not work at the maximum delay allowed v c balancing is attempted with the target v c range provided In this case a critical LOS of V is displayed along with the target v c If a solution is still not found the phasing is listed with a critical LOS of S indicating that a saturated design was performed This means that the design was forced based on the last v c tested Optimum timings can be obtained for these LOS S phasings but should be inspected carefully to make sure that an appropriate balance of time and delay has been provided The required G C Y C for LOS S conditions indicates the v c ratio of the critical movements which can be achieved by the design similar to the critical v c calculation of the HCM The minimum cycle length which accommodates the phasing and all minimums is listed The range of cycles which were found to be successful at the specified le
327. is not necessary if you will continue with the examples of Chapter 3 Additional Concerns The procedures and commands presented in this chapter are representative of the functions which can be performed using the SIGNAL2000 program A number of important aspects were not presented in the interest of simplifying the example problem Specifically default values were used for many of the possible parameter values of the program These parameter default values may not be appropriate for the conditions to be studied and thus may require modification For example one default parameter not addressed in detail by the example was the CYCLES command This command controls the range of cycle lengths tested in the DESIGN function The CYCLES command default values are such that only cycle lengths of 60 90 and 120 seconds are tested Multiple iterations varying the range of cycles and the increment are typically required to determine the optimal cycle length for an intersection These procedures as well as other important elements of the complete use of the SIGNAL2000 program are discussed in detail in Chapters 3 4 and 5 and should be addressed as soon as you are comfortable with the basic elements discussed in this initial example SIGNAL2000 24 Tutorial CHAPTER 3 Analysis Procedures Chapter 3 Topics Having stepped through the example problem in Chapter 2 it is now possible to discuss in greater detail the actual procedures and entries u
328. is performed to make sure the required host program HCS is present on the system This error indicates that the designated host program cannot be located and the Export is aborted Action The Options Setup menu dialog defines the system path where the host HCS program is installed Use this menu dialog to verify that the entry is correct Optionally use the Browse button to either verify the path folder named or to find and select the correct folder select the required executable file Press the Save button to save the new configuration The Save button updates the contents of the SIGNAL20 CFG file for the next time SIGNAL2000 is run If a change is made a corresponding change will likely be required in the TEAPAC CFG file if needed make the change using any available text editor such as NotePad If the host program has not been installed install it and verify the corresponding Options Setup entry If the program file to be executed is different than the name expected by SIGNAL2000 the executable file name to be used can be added at the end of the path entry S2K26 WARNING Intersection or Dummy with stop or yield control defined is being skipped This warning indicates that one of the intersection s movements has been defined with GROUPTYPES as being controlled by a sign either Stop or Yield or that the intersection is defined as a Dummy node in the INTERSECTION label In either case this condition cannot SIGNAL2000 E 277
329. is permits immediate use of the preprocessor functions with virtually no overhead of collecting the necessary SIGNAL2000 files for use by the preprocessor This is due primarily to the new multi intersection feature added to SIGNAL2000 and the presence in SIGNAL2000 of all of the system control information which the preprocessors require like OPTIMIZE SIMULATION etc The file opened in the preprocessor will be OpenShared automatically and should not be saved into by the preprocessor as such a save will lose much of the intersection detail SIGNAL2000 placed in the file and the preprocessor has ignored A warning message to this effect is issued by the preprocessor if a save is attempted gt Vastly Enhanced Optimization Features The biggest change in the optimization by SIGNAL2000 is via the new entries which are possible in the LEVELOFSERVICE command In prior versions the first entry of LEVELOFSERVICE was the target level of service desired for critical movements and the second entry was basically ignored by DESIGN Now the LEVELOFSERVICE entry contains two sets of three entries the first set for delay targets and the second set for v c targets as follows lt target delay gt the desired amount of delay for all critical movements lt max delay gt the max amount of delay for critical movm ts before switching to v c lt delay increment gt the increment of delay used to move from target to maximum lt target v c gt the target amount of v
330. ith a much higher level of detail Let s turn the worksheet output back off so we don t create too much output for the remainder of the examples System OUTPUT NONE An important function of the SIGNAL2000 program is the design or optimization of intersection control This is accomplished in the Usage Level 2 and higher versions of SIGNAL2000 by checking many combinations of signal phasing and cycle length producing optimum green times for each combination and checking the level of service of the critical movements The DESIGN command is used to optimize phasings and timings in the Usage Level 2 version of the program First setting the SEQUENCES command to ALL allows DESIGN to optimize and rank all possible phasings The CYCLES command should be used to scan a wide range of possible cycle lengths Note that the demo version of SIGNAL2000 will only allow 16 sequences rather than 64 and the cycles cannot be changed Basic gt SEQUENCES 11 ALL Basic gt CYCLES 60 120 30 Results DESIGN Two reports are generated by this DESIGN command an Optimum Phasings summary and a Capacity Analysis Summary The Optimum Phasing summary is a listing of the performance of 64 different phase operations ranked in the order of performance from best to worst The Capacity Analysis Summary contains the results of the analysis for the first or best SEQUENCE in the Optimum Phasings summary SEQUENCE 47 When reviewing the Capacity Analysis S
331. ith superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 259 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Evaluation of Intersection Performance Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Sq 44 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 k k k k Kp f i POX of kk KK FIN gt lt gt lt lt x x x l v A FEFE a KKKK V North lt lt 4 gt 4 4 gt l FERE Se ae FrEE v 4 v G C 0 092 G C 0 237 G C 0 204 G C 0 200 G 340 G 14 2 G 12 3 G 12 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 OFF 0 0 OFF 15 9 OFF 46 2 OFF 73 3 C 60 sec G 44 0 sec 73 3 Y 16 0 sec 26 7 Ped 0 0 sec 0 0 MVMT TOTALS N Approach E Approach S Approach W Approach Int Param Units RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT Total AdjVol vph 194 611 139 67 472 72 72 411 222 239 500 244 3243 Wid Ln ft 12 1 24 2 12 1 0 0 24 2 12 1 0 0 24 2 12 1 12 1 24 2 12 1 g C Rqd C 18 22 3 0 19 9 0 20 9 21 17 19 g C Used 51 24 9 0 20 20 0 24 9 36 20 20 SV QE vph 799 816 320 0 694 362 0 795 288 568 707 362 5711 Svc Lvl LOS A C B CF Ct C B C C CH Deg Sat v c 0 24 0 73 0 43 0 00 0 78 0 20 0 00 0 59 0 77 0 42 0 71 0 67 0 64 HCM Del s v 9 0 3028 16 7 020 312 1 22 0 0 0 26 4 31 5 16 8 28 3 31 7 26 8 Tot Del min 7 78 10 0 70 6 0 53 29 T7 59 32 361 Stops
332. ixed randomness factor of 2 0 approximates this queue length within a 90 percent level of confidence The formula used is listed below Note that in SIGNAL97 the Q portion of the model is not on a per lane basis divided by N as it is in SIGNAL2000 The SIGNAL2000 model divides by N for a per lane value so it can be compared to the 2000 HCM models which are all on a per lane basis Qn 2 0 q r N where Q number of vehicles in queue per lane 2 0 90th percentile randomness factor poisson distribution estimate q arrival rate vehicles per second v 3600 v adjusted volume vehicles per hour time that is not effectively green seconds e g effective red time C 1 g C C cycle length seconds g effective green time seconds N number of lanes in lane group When the subject movement is a protected permitted left turn the q r portion of the formula is obtained from the Supplemental Delay Worksheet using the largest such value from the worksheet Qi L Tr Qn where Q length of queue per lane feet L average queued spacing between car front bumpers feet 25 feet constant for Model 9 and 10 Qn number of vehicles in queue per lane from above Tr truck length factor 1 L L 1 HV 100 L average spacing between truck front bumpers feet 40 feet constant for Model 9 and 10 HV percent trucks heavy vehicles Model 8 is the same queue model as Model 10 above with t
333. ization to be performed by TRANSYT or PASSER lt Optimization Type gt defines the values that are to be optimized by TRANSYT or PASSER and can be any of the following keywords NONE No optimization only a simulation of input default OFFSETS Optimize offsets only SPLITS OFFSETS Optimizes splits and offsets CYCLE SPL OFF Optimizes cycle split and offset LIST Allows user to specify the step sizes used in the hillclimb optimizing process lt Step Size List gt defines up to 15 step sizes to be used by TRANSYT when the LIST option is selected above or defines the DI PI PROS DI optimization type and multi cycle options of card type 5x when LIST is not selected It can be any valid step sizes or option values for the TRANSYT model from 3 to 99 Its default value is O 0 0 2 0 which assumes the LIST option is not selected Notes If CYCLE optimization is selected for TRANSYT or PASSER the CYCLES command must also specify a cycle range with more than one cycle e If the LIST option of OPTIMIZE is not used then the first three step size values input are used to designate the 2nd 3rd and 4th fields of the 5X card These are respectively the definition of the disutility index DJ the definition of the performance index PI and the relative weight of PROS for the PROS DI performance index The default values of 0 for these fields perform the normal minimization of delay and stops but these entries can be used to conduct o
334. king it a performance closer to Level of Service C than Level D without the The Level of Service listed for each movement approach and the intersection is determined from the following table consistent with but more detailed than the manual suggests The level described for each approach and the intersection indicate the weighted average of all levels experienced by that group of movements It is important to note that this level of service is based on 2000 Highway Capacity Manual delay calculations not shown in this report and not on the average delay values shown in this report see Average Delay discussion below Control Delay Level of Per Vehicle Sec Service 0 0 lt d lt 10 0 10 0 lt d lt 15 0 15 0 lt d lt 20 0 20 0 lt d lt 27 5 Q ww SIGNAL2000 D 257 Reference 21s 5 lt td lt 35 lt 0 C 35 0 lt d lt 45 0 D 45 0 lt d lt 55 0 D 55 0 lt d lt 67 5 F 67 5 lt d lt 80 0 E 80 0 lt d F Degree of Saturation The degree of saturation represents a measure of the Volume Capacity v c ratio of each lane group as well as the weighted v c s for each approach and the intersection The degree of saturation is computed as the demand volume divided by the capacity both described in vehicles per hour Thus a degree of saturation for each leg and the intersection are weighted by the volumes of traffic using each lane group HCM Delay For each lane group each approach and the total interse
335. lation will not seriously disrupt progressive traffic flow It can be any of the following NO signal will disrupt progression default YES signal will not disrupt progression lt Remedial Actions Failed gt is a keyword which describes whether trials of less restrictive remedies have failed It can be any of the following NO other remedies have not failed default SIGNAL2000 B 86 Reference CONDITIONS CONDITIONS YES other remedies have failed lt Accidents for Signal gt is the number of reported accidents correctable by traffic signal control within a 12 month period It can be any integer number from 0 to 20 Its default value is 0 lt Stop Sign Delay gt is the number of vehicle hours of peak hour stop sign delay experienced by traffic on one minor approach of the intersection It can be any integer from 0 to 20 Its default value is 0 lt Accidents for Stop gt is the number of reported accidents correctable by multi way stop control within a 12 month period It can be any integer number from 0 to 20 Its default value is 0 lt Minor Street Delay gt is the average peak hour delay experienced by traffic on all minor approaches of the intersection in seconds vehicle It can be any integer from 0 to 300 Its default value is 0 Notes The data entered for the CONDITIONS command are used by the WARRANTS command in WARRANTS and Usage Level 2 of TURNS to describe intersection conditions which affect t
336. le access commands will use file number 2 for optimized conditions For example using this situation each scenario of existing conditions would be retrieved by using the command LOAD 1 and each set of optimized conditions would be SAVEd by using the command SAVE 2 If the optimized conditions are to be retrieved while the same FILES command is in effect the first scenario would be retrieved by a LOAD 1 2 command and subsequent scenarios would be retrieved by LOAD 2 commands The file number used only applies to the current FILES list in effect and need not be the same every time the files are used For example if the above optimized scenarios are to be retrieved on another day and the existing conditions are of no concern the FILES OPTIM command can be used to define OPTIM as file number 1 then the optimized scenarios can be retrieved with LOAD 1 commands Furthermore since file number 1 is the default file number when executed from the keyboard and the next line number is always the default line number the entire default LOAD command can be used making the LOADing as easy as possible Output Control Within a TEAPAC program it is possible to redirect output display on the screen to other output devices The most common use of this function is to direct output to the printer however it is also possible to direct output to disk files This section discusses the methods of redirecting output to these devices Printer Control
337. le queue The default queue model is 1 representing the recommended 2000 Highway Capacity Manual MBQ model for the 90th percentile queue in the worst lane using input vehicle lengths The following is an example of the Capacity Analysis Summary text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum Worksheets which may be produced when this command is executed with the OUTPUT FULL option appear earlier SIGNAL2000 D 254 Reference SIGNAL2000 T BAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Capacity Anal lysis Summary Intersection Averages for Int 1 Lincoln amp Main V C 0 635 Critical V C 0 761 Control Delay 26 7 Level of Service C Sq 44 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 a metal a Kp KK gt lt gt lt lt eRKK v 444 a KkKKK V North lt lt gt gt v X abe ch v G C 0 092 G C 0 237 G C 0 204 G C 0 200 G Soe G 14 2 G 12 3 G 12 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 OFF 0 0 OFF 15 9 OFF 46 2 OFF 73 3 C 60 sec G 44 0 sec 73 3 Y 16 0 sec 26 7 Ped 0 0 sec 0 0 Lane Width g C Service Rate Adj HCM L Queue Group L
338. lied with the sample data file SIGNAL20 FOR for display with the View Network menu option SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 00 30NOV02 Build 10 30NOV02 gt Analyze or Optimize up to 500 Intersections with a Single Click SIGNAL2000 now has the same data structure as PRENETSIM PRETRANSYT and PREPASSR in that multiple intersections can be entered and stored in a single data file The list of intersections is managed with anew NODELIST entry which lists all the available intersection numbers which have been used and the INTERSECTION entry which selects the current intersection from the NODELIST The current intersection is the one for which data entry will be accepted and for which analysis functions like DESIGN and ANALYZE will be made The current intersection can be selected by using the drop down list in the INTERSECTION dialog again or by walking through the NODELIST with the buttons found on the main toolbar and relevant entry dialogs The current intersection is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the main window Intersection numbers can now range from 1 to 999 New intersections can be added to the network by first adding it with the NODELIST dialog then selecting it from the INTERSECTION drop down list or typing it in the INTERSECTION combo box As a shortcut the new intersection number can be typed with a description in the INTERSECTION combo box in which case the user will be prompted with an option to add the intersectio
339. lines Commands to Control Operation of Program The following commands control various aspects of program operation ECHO lt Input Output Echo Condition gt Enter the echo condition flag indicating whether or not command information should be displayed after being input from or output to a file SIGNAL2000 46 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS IODEVICES lt Visual View gt lt Page gt lt Lines Pg gt lt Last Line gt Set the visual view style for dialogs as well as the page number and the size of the output medium i e paper NEWPAGE lt Page Advance Option gt Enter a flag indicating that the next output report should begin with title headings at the top of the next page Commands to Access Data Stored In Files The following commands are used when analysis data and or commands are to be stored in permanent data files for later use FILES 5 lt File Name gt Enter the names of the permanent storage file areas where information is to be LOADed and SAVE lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt lt List of Commands gt Save the current parameter values of the listed commands in permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command for future retrieval with the LOAD command LOAD lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt lt LOAD Type gt lt Blocks gt Input commands and parameters from permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command RETURN Return to the source of input w
340. ll PRE processors SITE TURNS and WARRANTS including calculations of HCM satflows optimized timings peak period turn counts and estimated site traffic New volume adjustment inputs to allow factoring volumes and adding additional volumes on a movement by movement basis New sensitivity controls for global testing of factored volumes additive volumes factored satflows minimums clearances etc Complete implementation of the enhanced TEAPAC2004 Ver 6 user interface as described below gt New Volume Adjustment Inputs Provide Sensitivity Analysis Flexibility A new input called VOLFACTORS has been added that allows a volume adjustment factor to be provided for each individual movement of each intersection Each volume entry is multiplied by this factor with the option of further providing a number of years the factor should first be compounded This feature provides the ability to easily test various traffic growth factor scenarios as well as sensitivity analysis for the base volume entry Another new input called VOLADDITIONALS has been added that allows a volume adjustment value to be provided for each individual movement of each intersection Each volume entry is adjusted by adding this additional volume with the option of further providing a single factor for each intersection which is first multiplied by the additional volume before the it is added to the base volume This feature provides the ability to test additive growth sc
341. ll not be overwritten and the user should re specify the correctly spelled or different file name TPC19 ERROR Failed attempt to read past end of file x at line xxxxx File access aborted This message indicates that an end of file marker was read in a data file during a read operation typically LOAD The program will abruptly halt the file access with this message at that point and return to the command input mode Normally this situation will not occur since the program should return from file access via the occurrence of a RETURN command in the data file Action Verify that the file access location is correct and that a RETURN command exists at the end of the file s information Then re issue the file access command if appropriate TPC20 ERROR Invalid path file Path exceeds 180 chars or name of file exceeds 70 chars This message indicates that an attempt was made to name or open a file whose file path or file name specification exceeded the TEAPAC limits of 180 characters for the file path or 70 characters for the file name The file path limit includes the drive letter and the file name limit includes the file extension and any switches used Action If the file path is too long re locate the file or sub folder being used to a location where this limit will not be exceeded Then re issue the file access command if appropriate As an alternate network drives can frequently be mapped to a new drive name thereby reducing the file p
342. lter I 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Grn arrivals P 51 24 40 220 20 24 40 36 20 20 Platn ratio Rp 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Prog factr PF2 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Queue 1st Q1 1 8 53r ale 4 5 1 0 4 1 3 2 30 AT 328 Queue factr kB 73 x48 39 43 42 48 36 58 43 42 Queue 2nd Q2 s2 29 3 1 3 wl 1 0 Tet 4 1 0 8 Avg queue Q 241 PES 250 5 68 Led 5al 403 3 4 5 1 4 6 90 factor fB 1 83 1 62 1 84 1 66 1 90 1 68 1 71 1 75 1 68 1 70 90 queue Qp 3 8 1127 3 6 96 5 2L 8 6 7 3 6 0 8 5 7 8 Avg spacing Lh 25 3 25 3 25 3 25 3 25 3 25 3 25 23 25 3 25 3 25 3 Avail storg La 100 1000 250 1000 250 1000 250 100 1000 250 Avg distance 52 184 50 146 28 130 108 87 128 116 Avg ratio RQ 252 i1l8 20 siS aLL 13 543 co lt lt 13 46 90 distance 95 297 92 243 53 218 186 152 215 197 90 ratio RQp 95 30 239 624 221 622 374 1 4520 22 2 79 SIGNAL2000 D 251 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Capacity Analysis Summary The Capacity Analysis Summary report generated primarily by the ANALYZE command provides a summary of the capacity analysis for the intersection and all approaches and lane groups of the intersection This report can also be produced optionally default by the DESIGN command The capacity analysis methodology used for each approach follows the procedures presented in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Worksheets presented in the 2000 Highway Capacity
343. lumes the SITE program can be used in exactly the same manner as TURNS creating a set of projected VOLADDITIONALS in the file allowing a duplicate analysis to be performed on projected volumes as well as existing volumes With the DESIGN feature of SIGNAL2000 this allows immediate optimization of projected conditions making SIGNAL2000 a perfect tool for applying the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual operations method to planning analyses without the need for the more approximate planning method of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual This optimization can also be used to quickly assess the value of various improvement alternatives for an impact study Note also that these VOLADDITIONALS can be easily factored by using the individual VOLADDITIONALS factor entry as well as the global entry of the factor when intersection 0 all intersections is selected Another use of the factor including its global entry is to disable the VOLADDITIONALS by using a factor of 0 Using SIGNAL2000 Data for PREPASSR PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM PRESYNCHRO PRETSPPD and PRENOSTOP SIGNAL2000 can provide a number of relevant analyses for typical arterial and network signal timing studies with PASSER TRANSYT NETSIM CORSIM SYNCHRO SIMTRAFFIC TS PP DRAFT and NOSTOP For existing conditions SIGNAL2000 can provide a complete and comprehensive capacity analysis including computation of saturation flow rates strictly according to the methods of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Wh
344. lysis summaries of each route including time space diagrams time location diagrams flow profiles platoon progression diagrams etc If ROUTE definition are to be used for TRANSYT they must follow the specific rules presented in the TRANSYT manual regarding routes For example a route may be 1 way or 2 way but may not be partially 1 way and partially 2 way Many of these checks are performed by PRETRANSYT to validate the route definition but not all possibilities are checked The user must retain final responsibility for the proper definitions of routes Route numbers can be referenced by use of negative numbers on the SUBSYSTEM command to quickly identify routes for analysis For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a subsystem analysis for only this route can be created through the use of the SUBSYSTEM 1 command this is only valid in Usage Level 3 versions SIGNAL2000 B 167 Reference SATURATIONFLOWS SATURATIONFLOWS SATURATIONFLOWS 12 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to store the results of saturation flow rate computations for the current intersection When computational commands of the Analysis Mode like ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS GOVERCS and SERVICEVOLUMES are executed the calculated saturation flows are dumped into this command lt Stream Saturation Flow gt is the stream saturation flow resulting from
345. m so it is this time that is expanded not the time required to meet the target However if the initial phase time used is for the target the expanded phase time may not meet the minimum This becomes a circular problem but one that has been solved by a clever bit of iterative optimization that makes sure the minimums are met but expands the time required for the target if possible The net result is that in many such cases the phase controlled by the minimum will remain controlled by the minimum instead of getting additional time from the EXCESS process thus making more time available for other priority critical movements and resulting in overall improvement in performance As a byproduct of this new method the phasing diagram in any optimized capacity analysis will display an M in the lower left corner of a phase which is still controlled by a minimum in the final optimized timings gt Option to Report Critical Delay and or v c Achieved by DESIGN for Every Cycle A new option in the OUTPUT dialog has been added that allows a more detailed report after a DESIGN which shows the critical movement delay or v c target which has been achieved for every cycle sequence combination optimized This permits a more detailed assessment on the effect that cycle length has on the critical target delay or v c than allowed by the normal DESIGN result since that table only has room to report the critical LOS for each combination gt Improved Modeling Iss
346. m the user need only save the changes in the file before opening the file in the next program The LinkTo menu provides a simple way to transfer control of the file to that next program after the save function by simply selecting the next program Examples of circumstances where this exchange of results might occur are illustrated below In SIGNAL2000 e Computed HCM compliant SATURATIONFLOWS can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD e HCM optimized SEQUENCES GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by NOSTOP PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD for various forms of coordinated operation assessment and or optimization In PREprocessors e Imported optimized OFFSETS and possibly GREENTIMES can be transferred to SIGNAL2000 or other TEAPAC PREprocessors for evaluation graphical rendition simulation animation or further optimization In TURNS WARRANTS e Peak 15 minute or 60 minute VOLUMES and possibly TRUCKPERCENTS and PEAKHOURFACTORS can be transferred to SIGNAL2000 for HCM compliant capacity analysis HCM phasing timing optimization or intersection design SIGNAL2000 52 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES e Peak 15 minute or 60 minute VOLUMES and possibly TRUCKPERCENTS and PEAKHOURFACTORS can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD e Peak 15 minute or 60 minute VOLUMES can b
347. mands which are used most frequently when performing iterative ANALYZE and DESIGN commands respectively The ANALYZE commands include parameters such as the green and yellow times while the DESIGN commands control the levels of service and cycle lengths to be tested These special group names are best used with the ASK command from the Manual Mode to generate helpful sequences of command dialogs for the activities described above SIGNAL2000 A 65 Reference All Commands Table A 3 All Commands Listed Alphabetically Command Parameter Values Defaults ACTUATIONS 12 lt Actuated Mov t NO YES or Extension sec gt 12 NO FACTOR lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumes gt 0 0 ELS 4 lt l character Approach Label gt N E S W TYPE 12 lt Arrival Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 PVG or RP gt L2 3 lt List of Commands gt PARAM lt Type gt lt Int gt 12 lt lt Mov gt lt Asgn Fctr gt gt 12 0 lt Dev Size gt lt LL X Y Coord gt lt UR X Y Coord gt 0 00 0 0 4 lt Conflicting Bicycles bikes hr gt 4 0 4 lt Stopping Bus Volume bus hr gt 4 0 lt Algebraic Expression gt TIONS lt MjDr gt lt LnNS gt lt LnEW gt lt SPD gt lt POP gt lt PRG gt lt REM gt 2 lt lt Acc gt lt Dly gt gt YPE lt Count Type CUM RED gt lt Truck Type INC SEP gt RED INC RITICALS 6 lt Critical Movement Number gt 6 0 ES lt Min Cycle s gt lt Max Cycle s gt lt Increment gt 60 120 30
348. mber xxxxx is currently in use All file access is aborted Each of the five files named on the FILES command can be accessed by several commands however if a file is currently being access by one command such as LOAD that file can not be accessed by another command such as another nested LOAD until the current access is completed This situation can occur when using a control file where one file s commands access another file s commands through use of nested LOADs Action Remove the multiple referencing to a single lt File Number gt or restructure the file access so that one access is completed before the next is begun TPC15 ERROR File access LOAD SAVE etc exceeds 6 levels of nesting All access aborted File access commands such as LOAD and SAVE can only be nested to a depth of six levels If more than six levels of file access are generated this error message will result This situation can inadvertently develop when a file process is aborted upon execution of the next file access command Action Re issue the file access command which was aborted this error will clear all file access or eliminate the situation which requires more than six levels of file access TPC16 WARNING This file name does not exist Create a file by this name No Yes This error message occurs when the requested lt File Name gt on the FILES command does not exist Typically this occurs when the File Switch for a new file was not used
349. minimums To consider a minimum pedestrian constraint usually setting the minimum green time for the adjacent through movement will properly constrain the optimum timings For example pedestrians crossing the east leg would typically use the same green time as the through movement on the south approach so the minimum of the south through movement should be set to consider these pedestrians e Yellow and all red clearance times should not be included in the lt Minimum Green Time gt entries SIGNAL2000 B 129 Reference MOVLABELS MOVLABELS MOVLABELS 12 lt Movement Label gt Defaults 4 RT TH LT Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter abbreviated labels for each movement of the current intersection lt Movement Label gt is a two character abbreviation used to identify each of the twelve movements at the intersection and can be any pair of printable characters Its default value is RT TH LT for the right turns throughs and left turns of each approach respectively Notes Use of MOVLABELS does not change the order of entry this order is always clockwise starting with the north approach MOVLABELS merely allows each movement to be labeled with the user s choice of characters SIGNAL2000 B 130 Reference NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK lt Direction gt lt Distance gt lt Speed gt lt Node gt 4 lt Movement gt lt Assignment Method gt lt Curvature gt lt Manual Dis
350. mmands desired with their appropriate parameter values The end of Chapter 3 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual describes how the ASK command can be used in the Manual Mode to further enhance the process of performing iterative tabulations and analyses especially when using the special group names described in Appendix A of this document If an intersection has been selected with the INTERSECTION entry the ANALYZE actions will be performed for that intersection only If all intersections have been selected by selecting INTERSECTION 0 then the actions will be performed for all intersections in the NODELIST or SUBSYSTEM as described earlier SIGNAL2000 29 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES DESIGN Procedures In performing a phasing and or timing optimization in a Usage Level 2 versions of SIGNAL2000 two basic methods of doing the design can be used In either case the parameters which describe the intersection conditions should be entered as described above for the ANALYZE mode and in the Input Requirements section above This input should then be followed by the DESIGN command using its single controlling parameter input The two design modes are defined by whether the DESIGN parameter is zero or not When the DESIGN parameter is greater than O usually 1 the default this instructs SIGNAL2000 to optimize all combinations of the CYCLES and SEQUENCES to pick out the best phasing s and to produce a capacity analysis of the best
351. ms gt Improved HCS Export In addition to the improved HCS export discussed above SIGNAL2000 also checks the ranges of data being exported to HCS since HCS has certain input limitations that are more limiting than SIGNAL2000 and HCS reacts poorly to exported data which exceeds these limits gt Phasing Inputs Checked for Validity Certain phasings which appear to be valid are in fact not allowed by the HCM methodology so SIGNAL2000 provides an additional cross check to confirm that these phasings have not been used when they are not appropriate Specifically if a left turn is made from a shared lane the HCM method does not support the calculation of delay for that left turn if the phasing does not allow the associated through movement to move during all phases where the left turn is allowed to move This means that SEQUENCE codes 4 5 6 are not allowed under these conditions although this may not be immediately apparent upon casual inspection of the HCM SIGNAL2000 verifies that this condition does not exist SIGNAL97 only checked that it was not allowed for the DESIGN function Also the HCM does not support the calculation of delay for movements which start and stop more than once during the cycle since this violates the basic premise of Webster s original delay formulation The most common occurence of this situation is with right turn arrows SIGNAL2000 now checks for this condition as well when the PHASEMOVEMENTS entry is used to defin
352. n Re install the program from the master program disk TPC92 ERROR TOO MANY CHARS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND STRINGS This error indicates there is a problem with the information in the XXXXX CMD file which supports the running of the TEAPAC program where XXXXX is the name of the program This information is not user serviceable Action Re install the program from the master program disk TEAPAC F 296 Reference APPENDIX G Operating System Messages and Installation Notes Appendix G Topics Certain aspects of program installation and execution will vary among different computer systems This is dependent upon the operating system of the computer rather than the software installed Run time error codes and file specification are two of the more prominent of these aspects In addition control of printed output interactive editing control and program installation are dependent on the operating system This appendix discusses these aspects of TEAPAC program implementation for any of the 32 bit Windows operating systems The details discussed herein should be appropriate for any standard implementation of the these operating systems Table G 1 summarizes the organization of this appendix Table G 1 Summary of Operating System Messages and Installation Notes Run Time Error Codes File Specification File Access Line Numbers File Numbers Output Control Printer Control Disk File Output Installing TEAPAC Programs Appendix G Topic
353. n addition this document is available as a downloadable PDF file which provides the ability to print a copy locally as well as search the entire document for user defined strings SIGNAL2000 H 327 Reference SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 02 22NOVO3 Build 16 16JUL04 gt More Flexibility Added for Lost Time Calculation in Protected Permitted LT SIGNAL2000 has been enhanced to provide the ability to have different lost time values calculated for the protected and permitted portions of compound left turns In prior versions a single lost time value was calculated for each movement of an intersection Now if Yellow AllRed clearance times are different for the protected and permitted phases of a protected permitted or permitted protected left turn the computed lost times for these two conditions will be different better reflecting the different behaviors these phases might experience gt Fix for gt 100 Nodes in NODELIST and SUBSYSTEM Dialogs of 500 Node Version A problem has been fixed which could cause difficulties displaying a node list with more than 100 nodes in the NODELIST and SUBSYSTEM dialogs of the 500 node version of the program gt Automatic Check for Updates Added When Connected to Internet A new feature has been added which allows an automatic check for updates via the internet any time the program is started when an internet connection is present The automatic check can be disabled from the Help menu using the CheckForUpdates opti
354. n 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds second e GREENTIMES can be generated by a TIMINGS command which was preceded by a DESIGN command These GREENTIMES are provided in seconds If entering GREENTIMES by phase they must be entered in the order of the phases as specified by the SEQUENCES code and the LEADLAGS command e To prevent division by zero errors all phases except overlap phases must have non zero GREENTIMES To analyze a phase with a greentime which is effectively zero use 0 01 seconds This will display as zero but prevent division by zero errors If a signal is to be double cycled GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and OFFSETS must be entered in seconds not sec sec which sum to 1 2 the system cycle SIGNAL2000 B 110 Reference GROUPTYPES GROUPTYPES GROUPTYPES 12 lt Lane Group Type gt Defaults 12 NORMAL Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the special lane group type for each possible lane group of the current intersection such as dual optional lanes free flow lanes and sign controlled lanes lt Lane Group Type gt is a keyword describing the type of lane group being used and can be any of the following NORMAL normal lane group default FREEFLOW free flow lane group not controlled by the signal DUALOPTIONAL dual optional lane group STOP stop sign controlled lane group not used by SIGNAL2000 YIELD yield sign controlled lane group not used by SIGNAL200
355. n active use by a REPEAT command In addition the GOTO command can only be encountered when its associated REPEAT command is the most active REPEAT command This means that REPEAT loops must not partially overlap one another i e one must be entirely contained within the other or they must be completely separate from each other A negative line number of n will divert input to a point in the current file n lines before the line which follows the GOTO command i e GOTO 5 sets up a loop which will continue to LOAD the four lines prior to the GOTO SIGNAL2000 B 106 Reference GOVERCS GOVERCS GOVERCS Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS DESIGN The purpose of this command is to compute g C s required to make each movement operate at specified levels of service for the current intersection or all intersections It has no parameters Notes The levels of service for which the g C s will be computed are specified by the LEVELOFSERVICE command e Before this command can be properly executed the phasing and timings must have been previously set This can be accomplished through use of the SEQUENCES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CYCLE commands or the TIMINGS command SIGNAL2000 B 107 Reference GRADES GRADES GRADES 4 lt Grade of Approach gt Defaults 4 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter the grade of each approach of the current intersection lt Grade of Approachs
356. n be used with DESIGN 0 as long as its result is the only DESIGN result desired If DESIGN 0 is to be followed by SORT and or TIMINGS the DESIGN 0 must be done for a single intersection since the DESIGN 0 function will only remember the last DESIGN which it has performed In summary when phasings and or timings are being DESIGNed two methods can be employed 1 When the determination of the best phasing is not crucial the quickest way to perform a DESIGN is by entering a DESIGN 1 or DESIGN 2 command thereby producing a capacity analysis of the best timings for the best 1 or 2 phasings with a single command In this case the only output is the sorted list of sequences and the capacity analysis with or without the worksheets as directed by the OUTPUT command When this method is used the sorted list should be reviewed to make sure the program s selection of the best phasing has merit INTERSECTION 0 may be used effectively under this method 2 When the selection of the best phasing is more important the same process can be executed in a step by step fashion using in sequence the DESIGN 0 SORT TIMINGS and ANALYZE commands In this case the selected phasing from the SORT list is used on the TIMINGS command After execution of the TIMINGS command the SEQUENCES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CRITICAL commands are updated automatically putting the user in a position to execute any of the other ANALYZE mode commands such as ANALYZE EVALUAT
357. n instead of using the menu each time Thus instead of pressing the OK button after the VOLUMES entry above and using the Edit menu to select WIDTHS simply press the Next button The phase sequence is entered with the single SEQUENCES code for two phase operation from Figure 1 2 Basic SEQUENCE 11 The GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are entered in seconds for each of the two signal phases with the north south phase time first In this analysis a 50 50 split has been assumed with four second yellow times The CYCLE length need not be entered since the timings are given in seconds SIGNAL2000 19 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Basic gt GREENTIMES 56 56 Basic gt YELLOWTIMES 4 4 The Tabular View is a particularly efficient data entry mode when lots of data is to be entered but lacks some of the dialog box cues that the Normal View provides Use the View menu or the F3 key and the Edit menu to explore this view and see the data values you have entered If you have entered a value improperly simply re enter the proper value The next section shows how you can verify all entries particularly if you are using the Manual Mode Data Review Once data has been entered it should be checked for accuracy and completeness In the Visual Mode this process is simply a matter of reviewing the data entered in each dialog since this reflects the actual current values In the Manual Mode DATA and SUMMARISE are used for this
358. n made which will deliver better results over a wider range of conditions These lane configurations are those which contain both exclusive turn lanes and shared lanes for a given turn maneuver and are called Dual Optional lanes in SIGNAL2000 Dual Optional lanes are implemented in SIGNAL2000 using the GROUPTYPES entry These changes include the following The dual optional model has been extended to include exclusive lane turn movements which also share lanes with other exclusive lane turn movements It has also been extended to include through lanes which share lanes with both adjacent exclusive lane turn movements Previously turns with exclusive lanes could only share lanes with the adjacent through movement not another turn movement and a given through movement could shared lanes with only one of the turns on the approach which also had exclusive turn lanes As before the computation of the lane assignment of optional turns in the shared lane is automatic but a new limit has been imposed on this calculation which prevents an inordinate number of vehicles to be re assigned to the shared lane group Effectively this limit allows the shared lane to only receive a maximum total flow as defined by the input value of the lane utilization factor for the shared lane group SIGNAL2000 H 346 Reference Assigning more than this amount would effectively move vehicles into a second shared lane which would be impossible In light of the above change
359. n to the end of the NODELIST automatically INTERSECTION 0 is a selection which represents all intersections in the NODELIST When this is selected certain actions like ANALYZE and DESIGN 1 will be performed for all intersections Certain other actions like SORT TIMINGS and EXPORT are not valid when INTERSECTION 0 is selected as these actions can pertain to only a single intersection Usage Level 1 of SIGNAL2000 will only perform a capacity analysis for a single intersection Usage Level 2 of SIGNAL2000 includes the optimization feature Usage Level 2 handles up to 12 intersections Usage Level 3 is up to 100 and Usage Level 4 is up to 500 gt Additional System Commands Help Manage Multiple Intersection Activities Several additional entries have been created in SIGNAL2000 as found in the TEAPAC preprocessors which assist in managing the activities which surround multi intersection analyses In Usage Level 3 and above the SUBSYSTEM entry can be used to select a group of intersections which is a subset of the NODELIST for subsequent analysis when INTERSECTION 0 is selected A ROUTE entry can also be used to define up to 8 predefined subsets usually but not limited to arterial routes which can then be used as shortcuts in the SUBSYSTEM entry by entering the negative route number SIGNAL2000 H 332 Reference gt Combine Prior SIGNAL2000 Files into a Single Data File Since prior versions of SIGNAL2000 and SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 etc only
360. n using any TEAPAC program is to enter the data required to describe the problem This is normally accomplished using the Edit Menu and its sub menus Data may also be loaded from a disk data file created earlier with the save options of the File menu by using the Open option of the File menu If a multi scenario structure has been created in the file by the SCENARIO program then a specific scenario case can be retrieved with the GetScenarioCase option of the File menu TEAPAC programs contain default values for many of the parameter values however there are some parameter values which must be entered for each analysis to adequately define the problem The dialog box display shows all of these default values Data entry may also be accomplished in the Manual Mode particularly when a known and small group of command keywords are to be used In this mode the HELP command is useful in identifying those commands which can be used to enter these necessary parameter values The commands can be entered directly with their parameters or the ASK command can be used to generate a custom input editing session with a specified sequence of dialog boxes Normal View or a specified list of input lines Tabular View Before entering the detailed data above the analysis network can be created on screen in the main window with the use of the mouse in most TEAPAC programs not in NOSTOP or TUTOR Creating the network in this manner replaces the need to do it usin
361. nce code is given on SEQUENCES Action The typical response is to change the SEQUENCES list to ALL then re issue the DESIGN command S2K07 ERROR SEQUENCE xx has not been successfully DESIGNed so no TIMINGS are available This error indicates that the sequence code requested by the TIMINGS command was not found in the list of successful sequences created by a previous DESIGN command Action The successful sequences from the DESIGN can be re listed with the SORT command or the DESIGN can be re generated Make sure that in either case the desired sequence code is successfully DESIGNed then re issue the TIMINGS command If the sequence code is not successful optimum timings will have to be generated manually The GOVERCS command may be useful in creating these optimum timings S2K08 ERROR No sequence codes have been DESIGNed so none can be SORTed This error indicates that a SORT command has been issued to list DESIGN results in sorted order but a DESIGN has not been conducted for the current intersection If a DESIGN was executed previously and this message appears it is likely that the INTERSECTION number has changed since the DESIGN preventing the SORT from being performed Action If the current SIGNAL2000 E 273 Reference intersection is the one desired issue a DESIGN command first then issue the SORT command If a previous DESIGN was for an intersection different than the current intersection use INTERSECTION to select the in
362. nd at the end of the count at 1700 e If counts for a location are made on separate days it is suggested that they be input and summarized as separate runs of the program even if their time periods do not overlap It is not possible to SUMMARISE TABULATE or ANALYZE overlapping time periods for different days two runs are necessary The PERIODS command values are used to set up the values of other commands such as VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS which will be accepted as input As such the PERIODS command is active and must be executed This SIGNAL2000 B 153 Reference PERIODS PERIODS sets up the new limits of the counts and opens up the required VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands in the full screen displays If lt Start Time gt and lt Stop Time gt values of zero are entered for a given time period all subsequent time periods in the list are deleted SIGNAL2000 B 154 Reference PERMISSIVES PERMISSIVES PERMISSIVES 4 lt Permissive Left gt Defaults 4 NO Menus Groups PARAMETERS PHASING The purpose of this command is to enter an option for each approach of the current intersection identifying the permissability of left turning traffic to turn on a through phase following or preceding an exclusive left turn phase e g a protected permitted left turn or a permitted protected left turn more recently referred to as compound left turn phasing lt Permissive Left gt is a keyword which identifies whether or no
363. nd can be 0 12 Its default value is 0 no priority movements Notes For DESIGN the lt Target Delay LOS gt entry of the LEVELOFSERVICE command sets the target delay or level of service which is to be achieved for all critical movements of the intersection If this target level is achieved with excess time still available at the intersection then the excess time is assigned to the phases according to the entries on the EXCESS command If no EXCESS entries have been made time is allocated proportionally to all phases However if EXCESS is used this provides a means to designate a worst case delay LOS performance level for all critical movements and to assign all additional time to the priority movements of the EXCESS command This is the preferred optimization scheme for the DESIGN function of SIGNAL2000 see Appendix C for more details The excess time will be allocated to the phases in which the specified movements occur Ifthe movements specified occur in more than one phase the excess time will be allocated to each in proportion to the g C required by each If a specified movement occurs in more than one phase its excess time phase will be designated as the single phase serving the movement i e if movement 2 is specified with sequence 21 the excess will go to the north south through phase SIGNAL2000 B 100 Reference EXPORT EXPORT EXPORT lt File name AUTO gt Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE DE
364. nges described below 0 lt Value lt 6 indicates the actual Arrival Type 7 lt Value lt 300 indicates the value entered is the percentage of platoon ratio RP 100 lt Value lt 1 indicates the value entered is the negative of the percentage of all vehicles in the movement arriving during the green phase PVG Its default value is 3 for all movements Notes ARRIVALTYPES is used for computing the Progression Adjustment Factor according to Exhibit 16 12 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual For RP values less than or equal to 6 use Arrival Type 1 If the value is entered as either PVG or RP the program will determine the arrival type based on the method outlined in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Values 1 through 6 are defined as in Exhibit 16 11 of the manual e An ARRIVALTYPE value other than 3 may be used for a movement with ACTUATIONS set to something other than NO but only where it is clear that the coordinated movement is truly actuated when it is also coordinated Note that although many intersections in a network may be entered into SIGNAL2000 the arrival type is a user entry and is not determined by the program based on flows from other intersections in the network SIGNAL2000 B 77 Reference ASK ASK ASK lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to produce a dialog box display for each of the listed commands lt List o
365. normally allows a half inch margin at the bottom of a 66 line page Notes Printers normally print 6 lines per inch thus an 11 inch page is 66 lines and an 8 1 2 inch page is 51 lines Normally lt Last Line gt is 3 less than lt Lines Pg gt to allow a 1 2 inch margin e Every time a lt Line Pg gt entry is made lt Last Line gt is re calculated as 3 lines less than lt Lines Pg gt This usually provides a 1 2 margin at the bottom of each page of output As a result unless a different bottom margin is desired lt Last Line gt need not be entered Use of lt Lines Pg gt and lt Last Line gt are primarily for the purposes of batch operations or any commands which generate multiple pages of output e If the lt Page gt entry is greater than zero this number will used to label the page number of the next printed page of output Every time this occurs the lt Page gt is incremented so that the next printed page will be automatically numbered with the page number If lt Page gt is zero no page number will be displayed on the printed output If lt Page gt is 1 the date and time will also be omitted from the the output SIGNAL2000 B 118 Reference LANES LANES LANES 12 lt Number of Lanes gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the number of lanes which are assigned for use by each of the twelve movements of the current intersection
366. not valid when all intersections are selected SIGNAL2000 Trouble Spots A number of common problems occur when people are first using SIGNAL2000 or as they begin to attempt more advanced applications This section provides a limited discussion of these types of problems that have been identified If other such problems occur jot them down in this part of the manual then contact Strong Concepts so that they may be updated in future issues of the manual and immediate solutions or workarounds can be developed for you This approach will also allow for future versions of the program to account for these trouble spots to the degree possible Lane Group WIDTH Designation Phasing SEQUENCE Designations Lane Group WIDTH Designation The WIDTHS command is a powerful command that designates both the width of a lane group as well as its lane usage As such it can be initially confusing but ultimately provides a powerful and easy to use means of identifying this information in a simple and concise manner The first thing to recognize is that if a non zero WIDTH appears in a through lane group position this WIDTH can be used by any vehicles on the approach The only limitation is that turning vehicles that have designated exclusive turn lane WIDTH will not use the through lane width unless a dual optional GROUPTYPES entry is made Exclusive turn lane WIDTH is designated by putting a non zero WIDTH in a turn lane group position SIGNAL2000
367. nput range limited for demo TPC49 ERROR default values cannot be changed for demo TEAPAC F 282 Reference Table F 1 continued Summary of TEAPAC System Error Messages Command Specific Errors TPC51 ERROR GOTO variable does not match current REPEAT TPC52 ERROR ERROR IN PROGRAM SPECIFICATION TPC53 ERROR REPEAT specification is not valid TPC54 ERROR PERIODS allows only 5 distinct time period ranges TPC55 ERROR PERIODS time period 2nd entry occurs before Ist TPC56 ERROR PERIODS time value entered is not a valid time entry TPC57 ERROR PERIODS time periods entered define too many entries TPC58 ERROR PERIODS time periods entered cannot overlap TPCS59 ERROR COUNTS VEHICLE or TRUCK too many entries TPC60 ERROR COUNTS VEHICLE or TRUCK invalid entry TPC61 WARNING INTERSECTION required before input can be made TPC62 WARNING INTERSECTION required before data can be listed TPC63 ERROR INTERSECTION not in NODELIST TPC64 WARNING old UTILIZATION entries must be inverted TPC65 WARNING negative SEQUENCE code needed to use PHASEMOVS TPC66 ERROR CONDITIONS values cannot be entered for demo TPC67 ERROR PATHASSIGNMENT list must start end with valid node TPC68 WARNING PATHDISTRIBUTION type required before input c
368. nput value TEAPAC F 294 Reference for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the PATHDISTRIBUTION command TPC69 WARNING A PATHDISTRIBUTION type must be given before this DATA can be listed This message indicates that a PATHDISTRIBUTION type number has not been selected prior to the request to list a DATA value When a data value is to be listed with DATA for a specific distribution type that type must first be selected with the PATHDISTRIBUTION entry before the value can be listed If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which type s data to list Action If you know the distribution type you intend to be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the PATHDISTRIBUTION command will be issued for you for that type If you do not know the type you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the PATHDISTRIBUTION command to select a type and re enter the DATA request for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the PATHDISTRIBUTION command TPC71 ERROR BUFFER SIZE EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED Programs which perform substantial built in sorting functions may encounter files whose contents require too much buffer space to be sorted Within a TEAPAC program it is difficult to correct this situation Action Attempt to reduce the amount of information being sorted or use a system program to sort the file extern
369. ns there is no turning movement VOLUME Action Review the WIDTHS and VOLUMES and correct the mis match S2K13 ERROR GREENS amp YELLOWS must add up to demo limit of 60 or 120 seconds Re enter In a demonstration version of SIGNAL2000 the cycle length as defined by the sum of the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES commands must add up only to 60 or 120 seconds Action Correct the timings so this is the case or purchase a full use license of SIGNAL2000 to eliminate this artificial constraint This message will not be issued in a full use licensed version of SIGNAL2000 S2K14 ERROR YELLOWTIMES are limited to values of only 3 0 seconds in demo Re enter In a demonstration version of SIGNAL2000 the YELLOWTIMES can only take on values of 3 0 seconds Action Correct the YELLOWTIMES so this is the case or purchase a full use license of SIGNAL2000 to eliminate this artificial constraint This message will not be issued in a full use licensed version of SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL2000 E 274 Reference S2K15 ERROR SEQUENCES list may not include code 0 or less when using DESIGN Re enter This error indicates that the SEQUENCES list contained a sequence code of 0 or less when the DESIGN command was issued The DESIGN command cannot optimize timings for an arbitrary phasing as defined by the PHASEMOVEMENTS when SEQUENCES is 0 The DESIGN is terminated Action The 0 must be removed from the SEQUENCES list If this is the only phasing code in the SEQ
370. nse F 294 fully actuated signal B 73 G g C s required 35 B 107 GENERATION A 64 B 147 F 294 generation rates 44 B 105 GetScenarioCase 11 GOTO 47 A 62 B 106 B 161 F 290 GOVERCS 31 35 38 39 42 43 50 51 A 62 B 90 B 107 B 121 B 168 C 209 D 265 E 273 GRADES 40 A 63 B 108 GREENTIMES 19 38 43 A 63 B 75 B 90 B 99 B 101 B 107 B 109 B 158 B 172 B 184 C 209 E 274 E 275 Group Name A 59 F 289 GROUP NAME STRUCTURE A 60 GROUPTYPE 19 GROUPTYPES 41 50 A 63 B 111 B 119 B 193 E 277 E 278 growth of traffic B 191 growth rate B 191 H HCM Sample Problems C 212 HCS capacity analysis 31 HCS compatible input data file 35 B 101 HEADING 46 A 62 B 113 heavy vehicle B 102 B 186 Help 11 46 A 59 A 62 B 114 B 179 F 289 on screen 9 Highway Capacity Manual ii C 197 host program executable name G 304 I IDEALSATFLOWS 42 A 63 B 115 C 208 IGNORE B 123 INITIALQUEUE 42 A 63 B 116 Input Data from TURNS WARRANTS and SITE 53 Input Limitations 28 Input Modes 9 Input Requirements 25 Installation G 303 INSTALLATION NOTES G 297 Installing TEAPAC Programs G 303 359 Index INTERSECTION 19 36 39 54 A 62 B 79 B 102 B 117 B 131 B 135 B 136 B 181 C 210 F 293 INTERSECTION 0 C 211 intersection conditions 45 B 86 Intersection Design Study 30 invalid command F 289 invalid entries F 288 invalid time entry
371. nters and printer options can be selected using the Setup options in the File menu and the last produced output can be printed from the File menu of the main window If your printer is connected perform the above sequence for the SUMMARISE command to get a printed summary of input then recheck all the data input for proper values before proceeding Analysis The third step in program execution is to perform an analysis of the current data Once satisfied with the accuracy of the input data use the ANALYZE command in the Results menu to execute a SIGNAL2000 analysis Results ANALYZE The Capacity Analysis Summary report summarizes the basic input parameters as well as the results of the analysis Note that the intersection delay listed at the top of the report is 26 4 seconds This represents a weighted average for the total intersection and individual approaches or movements operate with different delays Note that the South and West left turn movements have considerably higher delay in the range of 56 to 62 seconds If more detail is desired for this analysis the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual worksheets can be produced by the ANALYZE command if preceded by the OUTPUT command to select worksheet output These options can be found in the Edit and Results menus as before System OUTPUT FULL SIGNAL2000 21 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Results ANALYZE Note how the same results as before are produced but w
372. ntifiable parameters as described in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The parameters are discussed below by the groups in which they appear If all intersections are selected INTERSECTION 0 then the initial portion of the report lists all the system parameters followed by the parameters for each intersection in the system If a single intersection is selected only the parameters for that intersection are listed System Parameters This section lists parameters which apply to the entire system The Queuemodels entries list in order the selected queue model number the percentile queue desired the storage length of queued automobiles and the storage length of queued trucks The Output entries list in order the selected level of capacity analysis worksheet output whether certain warning messages will be displayed and the selected level of DESIGN and EVALUATE output The simulation period is the length of the analysis period used for each intersection It is followed by parameters maintained for PRETRANSYT and PREPASSR but of no consequence for SIGNAL2000 regarding simulation steps use of the actuated model the link assignment and optimization type This is followed by the list of intersections in the network the master node number and any intersections in a defined subsystem and any defined routes Intersection Parameters This section lists parameters which apply to the entire intersection including the intersection number and descr
373. ntry below which might be found in the manual Basic VOLUMES 225 665 165 In the Visual Mode Basic should be selected from the Edit menu then the VOLUMES item should be selected and the values entered each followed by TAB then the OK button In the Manual Mode following the command prompt simply enter the VOLUMES 225 665 165 information followed by a single ENTER key or the OK button The result is the same in either case VOLUMES values are set to the three values listed When an ellipsis appears in this document this indicates that the additional input fields which are displayed in the Visual Mode need not be entered thus using any current default values which are displayed In the Manual Mode the ellipsis is ignored and should not be typed thus retaining any current default values which may exist If an asterisk appears separated from other characters this means to skip over the input field for the asterisk to use retain that field s current default value Parameter Symbols When discussing the use of SIGNAL2000 entries in the documentation or in using HELP in the program descriptions of parameter values to be entered for each command will be shown enclosed by the angle bracket symbols lt and gt A typical command keyword and parameter value HELP line is shown below FILES 5 lt File Name gt In this example FILES is the command keyword or menu selection to be used The 5 indicates that up to fiv
374. ntry of the PERIODS command does not match the count interval entered it is designated as an invalid time entry by this error message For example if 15 minute counts are to be entered every time entry of the PERIODS command must end with 00 15 30 or 45 If 60 minute counts are to be entered each time entry of PERIODS must end with 00 Action Check the count interval used first parameter of PERIODS and make sure the times used on PERIODS match the constraints listed above or round entries to the nearest value that matches the above constraints TPCS57 ERROR The time periods entered have created more than the max of 97 entries For an entire day of counts 24 hours 96 distinct 15 minute time periods exist If cumulative counts are performed 97 count intervals will be needed for these counts This is the maximum number of 15 minute intervals TURNS allows This error is issued if it attempts to create more TEAPAC F 291 Reference than 97 count intervals based on the time period start and stop times entered Action Make sure that the start and stop times entered for the time periods do not overlap cover more than a single 24 hour period or in any other fashion attempt to generate more than 97 distinct count intervals Non overlapping count periods for a single day will always fit into this limit without error if defined properly on the PERIODS command Attempts to combine several days counts for a single intersection should be avoided
375. nts gt Improved Optimization of Cycle Length for All Cycles which Yield the Same LOS When several cycles produce the same critical LOS prior versions of SIGNAL simply picked the lowest cycle since in the eyes of the HCM the results were indistinguishable all the same LOS and the lowest cycle was likely to produce the shortest queues Now in this case the cycle which produces the least critical delay within the accuracy of the optimization delay increment will be SIGNAL2000 H 335 Reference selected This typically results in a capacity analysis which reflects slightly less critical delay than the cycle previously selected gt Improved Optimization for Priority and Critical Right Turns An improvement has been made to the way critical right turns are handled as well as when they appear in the EXCESS list of priority movements Now additional time is only allocated to the through phase for the right turn instead of all the RT phases gt Improved Optimization and Reporting when Minimums Control the Optimization When a phase time is controlled by a minimum a tricky situation exists in the optimization process when an initial assessment is made as to how much time each phase requires for a certain critical target and then excess time is allocated to phases for priority movements which include this phase or no priority movements have been defined The problem is that the initial phase time for the phase already includes the minimu
376. nts the highest 15 minute flow rate for each movement lumped together into a single hypothetical 15 minute period A better alternative to using the peak 15 minute flow rates would be to use the intersection PHF for each movement or at worst calculate a PHF for each approach and use this value for all movements on that approach Using ACTUATIONS and MINIMUMS An area that deserves special consideration is when optimizing timings for actuated signals It is important to recognize that the 2000 HCM analysis is a fixed time representation of the actuated controller so the optimization represents the average phase time which should occur over the course of the analysis period It is quite possible for low volume movements which are not actuated every cycle that the average phase length is considerably less than the normal MINIMUM which is desired for each cycle the movement is actuated Thus for design purposes the MINIMUMS entry for actuated movements could be a small number less than the normal MINIMUMS entry An entry value of 1 0 is recommended for most cases Field Calibration of Adjusted SATURATIONFLOWS with FACTORS The FACTORS command of SIGNAL2000 provides a simple way of performing field calibration on a sample of lane groups and then extrapolating this sample for all lane groups of an analysis The key to this process is recognizing that a survey of saturation flow rate in the field is a survey of adjusted satflows rather than ideal satflows
377. nual SIGNAL2000 B 186 Reference UPSTREAMVC UPSTREAMVC UPSTREAMVC 4 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt Defaults 4 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter the v c ratio of the upstream intersection for each approach of the current intersection lt Upstream v c Ratio gt is the v c ratio of the upstream intersection and can be any number from 0 0 to 3 0 Its default value is 0 Notes Note that although many intersections in a network may be entered into SIGNAL2000 the upstream v c is a user entry and is not determined by the program based conditions in other parts of the network SIGNAL2000 B 187 Reference UTILIZATIONS UTILIZATIONS UTILIZATIONS 12 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt Defaults 12 0 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT 94DEFAULTS The purpose of this command is to enter the lane utilization factor for each movement of the current intersection lt Lane Utilization Factor gt allows the specification of non uniform lane usage and can be any number from 0 00 to 1 00 Its default value is 0 00 see below Notes If an input value of 0 00 is made the default this indicates a desire by the user for the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual default values to be used e Specifying a value of 1 00 indicates the desire to evaluate the overall performance of the lane group not the heaviest traveled lane of the lane group Lane utilizations are used to determine the adj
378. nual HCM dictates that the normal analysis period is to be 15 minutes the PEAKHOURFACTORS entry PHF is then used to estimate the flow rate v during the peak 15 minutes of the hour for which the average hourly volume is entered v V PHF SIGNAL2000 C 197 Reference where v analysis flow rate during peak 15 minutes of the hour vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour PHF 15 minute peak hour factor ratio of average flow to peak 15 minute flow If the actual peak 15 minute flow rate vph is known and entered as the VOLUMES entry e g a 15 minute count multiplied by four then the PEAKHOURFACTORS entry should be set to 1 0 so that v V above and the entered VOLUME will become the analysis flow rate In order to facilitate sensitivity and alternative analyses the VOLUMES entry can be modified by two other related entries First the VOLFACTORS entry can be used to multiply each VOLUMES entry by a factor This is simply a multiplicative factor either to inflate or deflate the entered volume It is entered in such a way that it can also be interpreted as a growth factor if such an interpretation is appropriate First a number of years N is entered which applies to all VOLFACTORS for the intersection then individual factors fy are given for each movement The entry for number of years N is actually the number of times the individual factors fy will be compounded in which case th
379. number on an INTERSECTION command line or dialog is now allowed to be a negative number between 1 and N where N is the number of intersections in the NODELIST When this is the case the intersection selected is the i th node of the NODELIST when i is used The expected use of this feature is to allow REPEAT loops in control files to easily sequence through all the nodes of the NODELIST when the NODELIST is not in numerical order and or not a sequential list of nodes from 1 to N gt T2004v6 TEAPAC Menu Enhancements A new File menu in the TEAPAC Menu shows recent files which have been used by the program a new Options menu allows program folder setup for all of the third party programs supported by the Menu a new Help menu can list recently installed changes and check the internet for updates default support for VISSIM 4 and TRANSYT 7F Release 10 is provided TEAPAC files which are double clicked to be launched thru the TEAPAC Menu now open into the menu only without launching the program that created the file since any file can now be used by any program this old action is no longer appropriate gt T2004v6 Printable On screen Manuals Available as PDF Downloads The full documentation for each TEAPAC program has always been directly available as the on screen manual which also serves as the context sensitive Help document Options for obtaining printed bound copies of this document have also been available at an additional cost Now i
380. o a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 265 Reference SIGNAL2000 T BAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Required g Cs and LT Cl aranc Cycles Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main SEQ 44 N Approach E Approach S Approach W Approach CYC 60 RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT Volumes 194 611 139 67 472 72 72 411 222 239 500 244 Wid Lan 12 1 24 2 12 1 0 0 24 2 12 1 0 0 24 2 12 1 12 1 24 2 12 1 LOS C LS e2ZN 22 2 2 020 18 53 9 50 OO 195 BaT 2059 17 4 21952 LT Cmax 52 100 32 30 LOS D 14 6 19 3 0 8 O20 Ley G O20 16 4 628 Ciel ta 8 157 LT Cmax 52 100 32 30 OS E 12 8 18 3 0 0 Deo LET Gsl 00 1562 55 1553 1345 14 0 LT Cmax 52 100 32 30 LOS S 12 8 18 3 0 0 O08 AG Del Os 0 25 2 2ba5 T53 S35 140 LT Cmax 52 100 32 30 SIGNAL2000 D 266 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Satflow Rates and LT Clearance Cycles The Satflow Rates report generated by the SERVICEVOLUMES command calculates the saturation flow rates in each lane group for each specified cycle length The saturation flow rates are given in vehicles per hour of green First the assumed sequence of operation SEQ and assumed cycle length CYC are listed The adjusted volumes vehicles per hour and lane group width assignments feet used to calculate the saturation flow rates are then listed for each movement The number of lanes in each lane group follows the width separated with a slash The saturation flow rates
381. o adjust delay calculated for each movement and can be any number from 0 01 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes If delay values have been simulated with a network model such as TRANSYT 7F or NETSIM CORSIM which does a better job of modeling delay between coordinated signals than the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual allows DELAYFACTORS may be used to force the calculations of delay in SIGNAL2000 to the same values For example if SIGNAL2000 calculates delay of 20 seconds but TRANS YT7F estimates 16 seconds use a DELAYFACTOR of 0 80 SIGNAL2000 B 92 Reference DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION lt Second Title Line gt Defaults 80 blanks Menus Groups TITLES The purpose of this command is to enter the second line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed lt Second Title Line gt is the second of three lines of information displayed at the top of every output report and can be up to 80 characters of alphabetic or numeric information Its default value is 80 blanks Notes If the first character of the DESCRIPTION parameter is a plus sign the characters entered on this command will be overlaid over those of the previously entered DESCRIPTION command This overlay will begin at the character position identified by the digits of the first two characters which follow the and will end after the last non blank character which is entered See Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Re
382. ode SIGNAL2000 25 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES On the other hand there are several commands for which it is necessary to input data in order to produce legitimate results The most obvious of these are the VOLUMES and WIDTHS commands to describe the demand volumes and lane geometries Values for these commands are needed to do most any function of the SIGNAL2000 program As such examples of these inputs were illustrated in the initial example of Chapter 2 For a planning level analysis this may be adequate to describe the situation which is to be analyzed For a more detailed operations analysis the other commands which describe intersection conditions should be used although each has a preset default value which is frequently usable in an analysis Each of the input parameters for these commands should be reviewed to check the appropriateness of the default values The SIGNAL2000 program has two basic modes of operation one where a capacity analysis of a complete set of given conditions is desired the other where an optimum operation of the signalized intersection is desired These are commonly referred to as the ANALYZE and DESIGN modes following the names of the two basic commands which are used in these modes The DESIGN mode is only available in the Usage Level 2 versions of the program while the ANALYZE mode is available in all levels of SIGNAL2000 The input requirements for these two modes are noticeably different and
383. of the command names used for the input Analysis Procedures When using SIGNAL2000 it is important to understand the fundamentals of how the data entries and actions are used together in order to get results in an efficient and accurate manner In the example in Chapter 2 certain processes produced specific results In this section these steps are reviewed and discussed in detail to provide a more complete understanding of the program functions First the basic analysis procedures are outlined then more specialized procedures are described Chapter 5 describes unique ways that these basic and special procedures can be combined to solve unusual problems with SIGNAL2000 Basic Analysis Procedure Special Analysis Procedures Basic Analysis Procedure As described above SIGNAL2000 has two primary analysis modes ANALYZE and DESIGN Since these modes of use differ greatly each is discussed individually below ANALYZE Procedures In performing a capacity analysis the basic method of doing the analysis is to enter the parameters which describe the intersection conditions phasing and timings as described in the Input Requirements above then follow this with the ANALYZE command If HCM worksheets are desired the ANALYZE command should be preceded by the OUTPUT command These entries and actions are done with the Edit and Results menus respectively In the Manual Mode all the same steps can be performed by simply entering the co
384. off using the RESET function SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 10 25SEP01 gt TEAPAC2000 Interface Version 5 Implemented The WinTEAPAC2000 Version 5 interface has been implemented in SIGNAL2000 to provide the latest standardized TEAPAC interface found in all TEAPAC programs The following lists the many changes which this new interface provides gt New Tabular View Option Provides Dense Data Entry Displays Two views for Visual Mode normal and tabular More data inputs per dialog less helps and cues Toggle view between Normal and Tabular with View menu or F3 key Tooltip help and status line help for each entry field Context sensitive help button for access to complete help in HLP Execute button for action functions Next amp Prev buttons if input list takes more than one dialog PgUp amp PgDn Alt X accel to move through input keywords commands with keyboard Create custom Tabular View input dialog with ASK command from Manual Mode IODEV param 1 changed to toggle View Options Setup allows option to startup program in Tabular View gt New Recent File Dialog in File Menu Review list of last nine files and paths used Can select edit file names and re open selected files Option to include list of recent files and paths in File menu List of recent files can be cleared from the dialog gt New Features for Saving Files Files now contain name amp version of program which wrote the file also include the date amp time of the Save SI
385. om 0 0 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes If a number greater than one is entered for the lt Years gt the lt Adjustment Factor gt will be taken as an annual growth factor for entered traffic volumes or counts applied for each of the years entered For example if the growth rate is 2 percent per year over 3 years a VOLFACTORS 3 1 02 entry would be made to effect a 1 0612 adjustment to entered volumes or counts 1 02 x 1 02 x 1 02 The use of VOLFACTORS will adjust all volumes displayed in the output reports by the specified factors It will not change the volume or count values entered This is a convenient way to adjust traffic count data for seasonal variations in count data or to apply a projected growth factor e VOLFACTORS can also be used to project growth of traffic at the intersection for example if the count is several years old and must be used for a current study or to project a future volume condition e See the discussion in Appendix C Calculation of Volumes for a complete discussion of how VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS and PEAKHOURFACTORS are used to generate analysis volumes for various types of analyses within TEAPAC SIGNAL2000 B 191 Reference VOLUMES VOLUMES VOLUMES 12 lt Design Hour Volume gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the turning and through movement volumes for each of the movements of the c
386. omputations from SITE In the case of SITE this also means that ROUNDing of results can create small negative VOLADDITIONALS in locations that receive little or no new traffic and where final volumes are rounded down this is appropriate and to be expected gt LinkTo followed by Another LinkTo Performs Properly SIGNAL2000 H 320 Reference Multiple LinkTo operations can now be performed smoothly under all conditions without limitation Previously it was observed that under certain conditions one LinkTo followed by another LinkTo could cause certain problems successfully connecting to the next desired program gt Better Graphics for Phasing Display and Bitmap Buttons The arrows used to represent phasing in various dialogs have been improved in quality and appearance and if timings for phasings are defined by movement instead of by phase the by movement phasing diagrams are now shown in every relevant dialog In addition the pan and zoom button bitmaps within the View Network display have been improved for better clarity gt Option to Select Pages to Print Page 0 for Current Page An option has been added to the Print Setup dialog which allows the selection of specific pages to be printed instead of always printing all pages in the output window Selection of page 0 will print only the current output page the page which contains the insertion point cursor gt View Network Works Without Defined Network Distances Previously it
387. on The same menu selectiion can be used to manually check for updates to review details about any available updates to download updates to see update prices if they are not free to request a quote for updates and to order certain updates gt Accelerator Key Definitions Added to Tooltip Help for Dialog Buttons Tooltip help strings for certain dialog box buttons have been updated to include the accelerator keys which can be used in lieu of the buttons Build 14 29MAR04 gt Installation Setup Modified for Proper Creation of Shortcuts A change has been made to the configuration of the new MSI installation setup now used by most TEAPAC programs Now when shortcuts are created in the start menu or the desktop during installation they are configured properly with the installation folder set as the Start In folder Working Directory for the shortcut In recent TEAPAC releases which use the new MSI installation system this configuration option was not selected resulting in a possible problem when running the program in Exporting to HCS and locating the Help file on screen manual SIGNAL2000 H 328 Reference Help Contents menu Help buttons and F1 key and or the Recent Changes file Help RecentChanges menu Build 12 O3MAR04 gt Prot Perm LT Flags More Reliable for Analyze A more reliable means of determining some of the complex protected permitted relationships in the HCM was implemented in the initial release of SIGNAL
388. on details are in Appendix B This includes a summary of the basic TEAPAC actions and entries which appear in all TEAPAC programs More detail on these TEAPAC functions can be found in Appendix B and the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual Chapter 5 discusses advanced techniques for using the SIGNAL2000 program which will improve the efficiency of conducting analyses These techniques require a working familiarity with the basic principles of using both the TEAPAC package and the SIGNAL2000 program as described in Chapters 1 4 Attached to this tutorial are eight appendices A through H which form the SIGNAL2000 Reference Manual Each of these appendices is designed to provide quick answers to questions which may arise during the use of SIGNAL2000 These appendices provide detail on program actions entries methods and formulae used in calculating results program reports error messages operating system conventions and addenda Their contents are each ordered in a manner that is convenient for lookup purposes The introduction at the front of the appendices briefly describes each appendix and how to use it as a reference document An index at the end of the entire document is provided for the combined Tutorial Reference Manual Conventions Due to the interactive nature of the SIGNAL2000 program the tutorial contains sections which provide hands on program instructions When reading these sections it is recommended that each step be executed
389. on Type The location of the intersection within the metropolitan area either CBD or NONCBD Schematic Diagram Volumes widths and lanes are shown on a schematic diagram of the intersection along with certain phasing parameters as described below For each traffic movement the top or left most entry is the volume the middle entry is the lane group width and the bottom or right most entry is the number of lanes Volumes The actual demand volume of vehicles in vehicles per hour for each of the twelve movements of the intersection Widths The amount of roadway width in feet which has been allocated for each lane group at the intersection Lanes The number of lanes which have been striped for each of the specified lane group widths Movements which are part of dual optional lane groups are represented with a plus sign next to the turning lane and a minus sign next to the shared lanes Sequence The phasing sequence code for the phasing of the intersection using the standard TEAPAC phasing codes described in Chapter 1 of the manual Permissive The permissive flags NO or YES indicate if left turns are permitted on a green ball following or preceding an exclusive left turn phase permitted left condition for each of the four left turns SIGNAL2000 D 228 Reference Overlap The overlap flags NO or YES indicate whether right turns are allowed to overlap into adjacent protected left turn phases when exclusive right turn lanes e
390. on the selection of the design period for an analysis The INITIALQUEUE input has been enabled in support of these calculations gt HCM Delay Displayed in EVAULATE Results The delay reported in the results of the EVALUATE function now reports the same delay as calculated by the HCM methodology Previously an alternative delay formulation was used in contrast to the HCM method specifically to address the limitations of the HCM method for calculating over saturated delay but this differentiation is no longer needed since the HCM delay method is now completely robust in this regard SIGNAL2000 H 349 Reference gt More Flexibility in Worksheet Display The 2000 HCM contains a myriad of worksheets which detail the HCM calculation methodology In order to help sort through these worksheets for the essential results a new OUTPUT option has been added to produce only the BASIC worksheets these are the Input Worksheet the Volume and Satflow Worksheet and the Capacity and LOS Worksheet The OUTPUT options are now NONE BASIC FULL gt SIGNAL97 Build 16 Changes Several minor changes have been made to SIGNAL97 in its final release Build 16 which also appear in the new SIGNAL2000 program These include an improved method for determining the lost time for shared lane groups on the stem of a T intersection and improved exporting of actuated and pedestrian conditions to HCS See SIGNAL97 release notes SIGNAL97 MSG for more detail on these ite
391. ong as they generally follow the geometric layout of two crossing two way streets The primary concern here is that the designated left turns conflict with through movements on the opposite approach as in a normal four way intersection since these are what the pre coded sequences address Additional legs of a multi leg intersection can be handled through use of special techniques described in Chapter 5 Sixty four distinct phasings can be handled automatically through use of the standard TEAPAC phase sequence numbering scheme described in Chapter 1 When these phasing codes are used all facets of the program can be used without limitation Through use of negative sequence codes 1 thru 9 and the PHASEMOVEMENTS command completely arbitrary phasings can be handled by the ANALYZE and EVALUATE commands as long as the rules of describing the phasing are followed for the PHASEMOVEMENTS command The DESIGN and EXPORT commands will not function when negative SEQUENCE codes are used SIGNAL2000 28 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES In terms of input parameter limits those limits which are described in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual are specifically allowed for each parameter value In some cases greater input limits are allowed and the methods of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual are extrapolated as appropriate sometimes with advisory warning messages Specific input limitations for each command input are described in Appendix B under each
392. or easy access to data in all files using the advanced file handling techniques of TEAPAC Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC46 ERROR This demonstration version does not permit use of printer Request ignored For a demonstration program the ability to print results is disabled Normally this option allows the contents of any output window to be directed to any printer accessible from your computer Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC47 ERROR This demonstration version does not permit use of the AUTO option of EXPORT For a demonstration program writing information to a disk file is disabled Normally input data and results can be saved to disk files at locations accessible from your computer Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC48 ERROR This value is limited to the range allowed by this demonstration version For a demonstration program certain input ranges are limited so arbitrary input values cannot be entered Normally a full range of typical input values is allowed for every input accepted by the program Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC49 ERROR This command s values cannot be modified in this demonstration version For a demonstration program certain command entry values cannot be changed from their default values Normally a full range o
393. ordinate Range The initial Zoom All display for a network when a file is opened has been improved for all networks especially those with a wide range of coordinates such that the zoom level used is more appropriate for all combinations of networks and display resolutions gt V7 00 21 Improved Network Editing Features A number of enhancements have been made to network editing functions to improve the response to various user actions as follows If a new link connection will over write an existing leg of a node the user is warned and given the option to select another leg or abort If a new link creation is aborted for any reason any new dummy nodes created as part of that process are deleted including clicking on the network without dragging now deleting the single node which was previously created If a third leg is added to a bend node as part of a new link creation the bend node is converted to a real node and re numbered accordingly If deleting a node removes one leg of a bend node the bend is converted to an external node Default source movements for a new link which connects existing nodes with a diagonal are determined more reliably Left click can be used while in the Create New Link mode to select the current node gt V7 00 21 Fixes to SIMULATION Dialog SIGNAL2000 H 312 Reference The Use TRANSYT or PASSER Actuated Model option of the SIMULATION dialog is now both properly selectable without any error messages an
394. ormation in the appendices is ordered such that easy reference access is possible Each of the appendices is described briefly below Appendix A ABBREVIATED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix A lists all SIGNAL2000 commands by group name This appendix is designed for quick reference regarding group names and command hierarchy The single line descriptions are identical to the descriptions provided by the Help Commands menu and the HELP command The descriptions identify the names and number of parameter values along with any default values Appendix B DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix B provides complete detail regarding the SIGNAL2000 commands and their associated parameter values All SIGNAL2000 commands are listed in this section Five categories of information are provided for each command 1 Format 2 Function 3 Parameters 4 Group Names and 5 Notes This appendix provides specific details on how to use a SIGNAL2000 command and what if any limitations exist on the associated parameter values The Note category provides useful hints on the use of the command Appendix C ANALYSIS METHODS AND FORMULATIONS Appendix C discusses the methods and formulae used by the SIGNAL2000 program to calculate results Using the procedures discussed in this appendix it is possible to manually recreate the results calculated by SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL2000 57 Reference Appendix D REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND EXAMPLES A
395. ort using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 240 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet Input Calculation N E S W Effective ped green time gp 14 2 P2210 14 2 P20 Conflicting ped volume Vped 10 0 10 0 Conflicting bike volume Vbic 0 0 0 0 Ped flow rate Vpedg 42 282 000 42 282 000 Avg ped occupancy OCCpedg 2 027 000 s021 000 Effective bike green time g 14 2 12 0 14 2 12 20 Bike flow rate Vbicg 000 000 000 000 Avg bike occupancy OCCbicg 000 000 000 000 Relevant occupancy OCCr 021 000 021 000 receiving lanes Nrec 2 2 2 2 turning lanes Nturn 1 1 1 1 Adjustment factor ApbT 987 1 000 987 1 000 Proportion right turns PR 1 000 124 149 1 000 Prop RT in prot phase PRA 534 000 000 443 Ped bike adjust factor fRpb 994 1 000 998 1 000 SIGNAL2000 D 241 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Capacity and LOS Worksheet The HCM Capacity and LOS Worksheet is the sixth HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected The worksheet is also produced when BASIC worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet first lists the calcula
396. over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed as usual Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TPC35 WARNING This decimal number is not in the accepted range xxx xx to xxx xx Re enter When a parameter value is entered which lies outside the allowable range of values this error message is displayed If the input entry accepts decimal places TPC35 is displayed If input entries are rounded to the nearest integer value TPC34 is displayed The appropriate ranges of allowable values shown in the error message are usually constants however they may be controlled by other input parameters on other commands Further information on input limits can be found in Chapter 4 or Appendix B of the program documentation Most commands will re prompt for parameter entry after this error After the error is issued the invalid entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where invalid entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed as usual Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the paramete
397. p Flow D 232 Adjusted LT Flow Rate D 236 Adjusted LT Volume D 246 Adjusted Movement Flow Rate D 232 Adjusted Phase Times D 227 Adjusted Saturation Flow D 234 Adjusted Volume D 253 D 256 Adjustment factor D 238 D 240 Adjustment Factors D 217 Analysis Period D 216 Approach and Movement Labels D 232 D 236 D 242 D 243 D 246 D 247 Approach Delay D 244 Approach Flow D 244 Approach Labels D 216 Approach Level of Service D 244 Approach Width and Lanes D 257 Area Location Type D 228 Area Type Factor D 233 Arrival D 246 Arrival Type D 217 D 229 Avail storage D 250 Avg distance D 250 Avg queue D 250 Avg ratio D 250 Avg spacing D 250 Avg bike occupancy D 240 Avg ped occupancy D 238 D 240 Base Saturation Flow D 233 Best Cycle D 224 Bicycle Volume D 216 D 229 Bike flow rate D 240 Bus Blockage Factor D 233 Bus Stop Volume D 216 Bus Stops D 230 Case number D 247 CO Emissions D 258 CO Emissions Components D 259 Conflicting bike volume D 240 Conflicting ped volume D 238 D 240 Control Delay D 243 D 252 Coordinates D 216 Critical Lane Groups D 242 Critical Level of Service D 221 D 224 Critical Movement D 217 D 227 Critical Target D 224 Critical V C D 252 Critical v c Ratio D 243 Cycle D 247 Cycle Length D 221 D 227 D 236 D 265 D 267 Cycle Length and Range D 217 Degree of Saturat
398. pacity Manual Worksheets presented in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual may be produced optionally by specifying OUTPUT FULL as described previously Each lane group for which performance is calculated is designated by an approach width When an approach is not available for exclusive use by turning vehicles width of zero feet for the turning movement the turning vehicle volume is assumed to turn from the adjacent through lane group In addition to performance levels for each stream performance is estimated for each approach leg of the intersection as well as the overall intersection The specific elements which make up this report are discussed individually below Signal Phasing and Timing Intersection Name If provided by the user the node number and name of the intersection appears at the top of the report Signal Phasing The signal phasing is specified with a box for each phase of the signal operation indicating the movements which are allowed during that phase Movement arrows formed with asterisks indicate the critical movements in the phasing North or the direction assumed to be north by the user is always up in the diagrams as shown by the North arrow Phases are numbered consecutively starting with one 1 for the first north south phase No attempt is made to identify subphases lead phases or overlap phases by the phase number The coded sequence number appears at the top of the diagram Timings The timings for each phase a
399. peak 15 minute analysis period for each movement If 15 minute data is available directly e g from count data using this 15 minute data the 15 minute count times 4 with peak hour factors of 1 00 is preferred over making the approximation using a peak hour factor In particular if different peak hour factor data is entered for each individual movement the estimate will likely produce a ficticious set of analysis flow rates which may represent flow conditions which never occur since all the movements may not peak at the same time SIGNAL2000 B 150 Reference PEDLEVELS PEDLEVELS PEDLEVELS 4 lt Pedestrian Interference gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH 94DEFAULTS The purpose of this command is to enter the level of pedestrian interference for right turns on each approach of the current intersection lt Pedestrian Interference gt is the volume of conflicting pedestrians in peds per hour for right turns on the approach and can be any integer from 0 to 5000 Its default value is 0 Notes e Entries for pedestrian interference should be made for the approach from which the conflicting right turn is made For example pedestrians crossing the east leg of the intersection interfere with right turns made from the south approach so the lt Pedestrian Interference gt value for that right turn should be input for the south approach e Under certain phasing conditions pedestrian interference can also affect the le
400. pedestrian phases are shown in seconds and percent of cycle below the sequence block If a phase s green time is controlled by a minimum this is indicated by the letter M in the lower left corner of the phase Capacity Analysis Parameters Output for the remainder of the Capacity Analysis summary is organized by approach The top line of each approach s results lists the average delay and level of service for the approach as a whole The following information is provided for each lane group in that approach Lane Group The movements which make up each lane group are specified with a two letter code These codes identify the movements as right turns RT throughs TH and left turns LT or as defined by the user Widths Lanes The width of pavement which is used by the specified traffic stream is given in feet The number of lanes which are operated within this width follows separated from the width by a slash Movements which are part of dual optional lane groups are represented with a plus sign next to the turning lane and a minus sign next to the shared lanes g C Required and Used The g C s which are required to maintain the design level of service and those which are used by the specified timings are given in seconds per second The design level of service is shown in the first column of the Service Rate section described below If the Used g C is less than the Required g C the lane group will operate at a level of service less t
401. ppendix D describes the reports generated by the SIGNAL2000 program In addition sample output is provided for each type of report generated by the SIGNAL2000 program The elements of each report are described in detail Appendix E ERROR MESSAGES AND TROUBLE SPOTS Appendix E describes program specific error messages of the SIGNAL2000 program the potential cause of such errors and potential solutions SIGNAL2000 errors are identified by the letters S2K followed by a two digit number In addition potential trouble spots associated with using the SIGNAL2000 program are outlined This appendix is useful for identifying program specific causes for certain problems in the use of SIGNAL2000 as well as preventing future errors Appendix F TEAPAC SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES Appendix F describes error messages which are common to all TEAPAC programs TEAPAC error or warning messages are identified by the letters TPC followed by a two digit number This appendix discusses each TEAPAC error and potential causes and solutions Appendix F of each TEAPAC Manual is identical for quick reference purposes Appendix G OPERATING SYSTEM MESSAGES AND INSTALLATION NOTES Appendix G discusses the unique aspects of the installation of TEAPAC programs on a particular operating system Operating system dependent functions such as error messages file specification procedures and output control features are discussed Special function keys such as control characters
402. ppendix G of the 2000 HCM takes into account the effects that all of the following conditions have on queueing volume of demand actual green time cycle length saturation flow capacity v c maximum extent of queue on pavement coordinated operation actuated operation unbalanced lane utilization protected permitted operation over saturation upstream v c initial queues length of analysis period average storage length of queued vehicles and various percentile estimates thus it is the most comprehensive and legitimate queue model available for the widest possible range of conditions gt New QUEUECALCS amp QUEUEMODELS Functions SIGNAL2000 H 348 Reference A new QUEUECALLCS function has been provided which provides unprecedented flexibility in calculating and comparing queue values using the many different queue models which have been in use over the years as well as the new 2000 HCM queue model described above QUEUECALLCS allows the side by side comparison of the results of 10 different queue model calculations for a given capacity analysis condition with any one of these models being selectable as the model of choice in the capacity analysis output Four basic model structures are included the 2000 HCM model the ARRB model the MBQ model and the SIGNAL97 model Several variations of these models are computed bringing the number of models calculated to ten The basis of the variatiions revolve around whether the calculation is for the
403. problems These programs are known collectively as TEAPAC an acronym for Traffic Engineering Application PACkage More than a dozen integrated programs are included in TEAPAC all of which use the same basic user interface and procedures to direct the actions of the programs In addition these programs share the same characteristics with regard to data entry conventions and storage format for data files This allows convenient and efficient sharing of information between programs SIGNAL2000 is one of the programs within the TEAPAC program package SIGNAL2000 is designed to aid in the analysis and optimized design of individual intersection control based on factors such as approach geometry lane usage phasing and pedestrian constraints The methodology uses the capacity analysis procedures documented in the Transportation Research Board 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The program can be used to analyze existing conditions or to design for future conditions In order to illustrate these features an initial example for the SIGNAL2000 program has been created By following the step by step instructions contained in Chapter 2 of this manual you will become familiar with the basic SIGNAL2000 commands and procedures If unfamiliar with the TEAPAC package in general review of the tutorial section Chapters 1 4 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual will increase the speed and effectiveness of learning the SIGNAL2000 program Chapter 1 Topics Chapter
404. pter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS SEQUENCES lt Sequence Code gt lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt Enter the desired and allowed phasings of the traffic signal of the current intersection according to the codes defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 CYCLES lt Minimum Cycle gt lt Maximum Cycle gt lt Cycle Increment gt Enter the range and precision of cycle length scanning for the current intersection for DESIGN as well as the default cycle length for the ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLUMES GOVERCS and EXPORT commands GREENTIMES 6 lt Phase Green Time gt Enter the duration of green for each of the phases of a specified phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection YELLOWTIMES 6 lt Phase Yellow Time gt Enter the clearance interval at the end of each phase of a phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection Commands to Enter System Data The following are commands which can be used to describe the system which is being analyzed Each of these commands has parameters which apply to the entire system Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above NODELIST 500 lt Node Number gt Enter the list of nodes to be studied as well as the order of the analysis SUBSYSTEM 500 lt Node Number gt Enter the subset of the NODELIST for which subsequent actions should be taken ROUTE lt Route gt lt Lis
405. r default values lt List of Commandss gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes The File New menu does a RESET for ALL commands When a RESET PARAMETERS command is given the NEWPAGE YES condition is automatically set This can be subsequently disabled by the NEWPAGE NO command e RESET is not executed when it is encountered during a LOAD which uses the SHARE option SIGNAL2000 B 163 Reference RETURN RETURN RETURN Defaults Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to return to the source of input which was being used when the last LOAD command was encountered It has no parameters Notes The RETURN command will cause control the source of input to be changed from its current location a file to the source of the last LOAD command If the last LOAD was from a file control is given to the line which follows the LOAD command which caused a source change If the previous LOAD command was read from the keyboard control will return to the keyboard If an end of file is encountered control is returned to the keyboard in a similar fashion to a RETURN command Control is always returned to the keyboard in these cases however as this is considered an abnormal condition SIGNAL2000 B 164 Reference
406. r All Windows Platforms Display of recently used files in the File menu has presented problems under certain Windows platforms and thus an option has been provided to turn this display off so recent files are accessed only thru the File RecentFiles dialog This problem has been fixed so recent files can be displayed in the File menu on any Windows platform and thus the default condition for this feature has been changed from No to Yes SIGNAL2000 H 326 Reference gt T2004v6 Command Line Control File Enhancements When a user has set a TEAPAC program to start in the Tabular View ASK commands in command line control files could not be used This limitation has been eliminated so this feature can be used if desired The output window for output generated by a command line control file now appears in front of the main window so it is immediately visible without the need to click it to bring it to the front A new x option has been added at the end of a command line file name which instructs the program to open the command line file as File x the default is File 1 as before This allows the data file which a control file 2 5 opens to be designated as File 1 so that it is the file which will be open for subsequent File Save operations from the File menu Opening command line control files as 2 5 instead of 1 is now the recommended practice gt T2004v6 X Entry for INTERSECTION Number Allowed As Positional Input The intersection
407. r Unsignal can be created which handles the export file naming and running of HCS This option is selected by entering AUTO as the EXPORT file name AUTO may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the four letters A U T O When the AUTO option is selected the export file name used is TMPHCS XHS Signals or TMPHCS XHU Unsignal In order for the AUTO option of EXPORT to function properly the SIGNAL20 CFG file must be configured to properly represent the folders where the TEAPAC SIGNAL2000 data and HCS files are stored see Options Setup menu for on screen editing of the SIGNAL20 CFG file SIGNAL2000 B 101 Reference EXPORT EXPORT The street names for HCS come from the INTERSECTION command The north south street name is assumed to be anything preceding an amp and the east west name is anything after the amp The analysis time for HCS comes from the first 30 characters of the NOTE command the analysis year comes from the second 30 characters of the NOTE and the analysis date comes from the system clock The analysis by field for HCS comes from characters 61 80 of the NOTE command The project description comes from the first 60 characters of the PROJECT command The intersection name come from the first 30 characters of the DESCRIPTION command which will normally not be a description of the intersection and the jurisdiction comes from the second 30 characters of DESCRIPTION e Do not
408. r a zero value enter 0 01 seconds for the phase This will appear as a zero in all output but will not cause division by zero If the phase in question is an overlap phase make sure that the negative value of the green time entered is no larger than the positive value of the clearance time for that phase S2K17 ERROR Zero or negative FACTOR for xx xx movement is not allowed Check amp re enter This error indicates that an adjustment factor has been entered either as a zero or negative value All FACTORS entered for any movements must be positive numbers greater than zero otherwise invalid calculations will result Action Review the FACTORS and correct the invalid entry S2K18 ERROR No phasing has been defined for SEQUENCE 0 Use PHASEMOVEMENTS to define it This error indicates that the special SEQUENCES code 0 or less has been selected but no special phasing has been defined with the PHASEMOVEMENTS command Action Select a standard SEQUENCES code greater than 0 or use the PHASEMOVEMENTS command to define the movements which move during each phase of the special phasing SIGNAL2000 E 275 Reference S2K19 ERROR xx xx lane width exceeds lower limit of 8 0 feet and cannot be extrapolated This error indicates that the calculated average lane width in the noted lane group is less than 8 feet This is the stated lower limit of lane widths allowed by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual thus the error indicates that the calculation
409. r example if count data is analyzed with a VOLFACTORS growth factor of 10 fy 1 10 and N 1 and results in a peak volume of 110 vph the corresponding VOLUMES entry will be set to 100 vph so that the VOLFACTORS entry will inflate the VOLUME to 110 for analysis PEAKHOURFACTORS are also set according to the specification of the TURNS or WARRANTS OUTPUT dialog as are TRUCKPERCENTS VOLADDITIONALS entries are unaffected by the ANALYZE results The SITE program of TEAPAC can estimate future volumes due to the impact of certain specified development scenarios In this program the VOLUMES entries are used as the background traffic for the complete scenario assessment by the COMPUTE function including the effect VOLFACTORS has on these background VOLUMES VOLADDITIONALS however have no effect on the computations and the results of the scenario computations are placed in the VOLADDITIONALS entries automatically with the contribution of VOLUMES and VOLFACTORS removed so that the calculation of analysis volumes from the general formula above will result in the same volume scenario determined by the COMPUTE function For example if a counted movement VOLUME is 100 and the background traffic growth VOLFACTOR entry is 1 10 fy 1 10 and N 1 resulting in 110 vph projecterd background traffic and the computed total traffic for that movement under a given development scenario is 250 vph the VOLADDITIONAL entry will be 140 vph with faqa 1 0 so that
410. r the current intersection or all intersections including the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual queue model EXPORT lt File name AUTO gt Create an HCS compatible input data file from the current data values for the current intersection with an optional automatic link to HCS GOVERCS Compute g C s required to make each movement operate at specified levels of service for the current intersection or all intersections SIGNAL2000 35 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS SERVICEVOLUMES Compute the saturation flow rate previously called service volumes for each movement for the current intersection or all intersections DIAGRAMS lt Sequence Code gt Display a phase movement diagram for the specified sequence code for the current intersection MAP Display a schematic map of the intersection identifying the twelve turning movement volumes as well as widths and lanes for the current intersection or all intersections PARAMETERS Dialogs PARAMETERS commands are the data entry command dialogs used to enter the parameter values which are specific to the purpose of the SIGNAL2000 program Each is summarized in the following paragraphs First those PARAMETERS commands which are the most basic entry commands are described These commands are frequently the only ones needed to describe intersection conditions completely using the defaults for the remaining PARAMETERS commands These remaining commands are then
411. r values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TEAPAC F 288 Reference TPC36 WARNING Node xx used in xxxxxxXxxxxxxxxx entry is not in NODELIST When a node number is entered which is not included in the NODELIST certain functions are not likely to perform properly These include PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHASSIGNMENT GENRATION and ASSIGNMENT Other entries such as NETWORK and MASTERNODE permit the entry of node numbers not included in the current NODELIST SUBSYSTEM Action In the cases where the entered node number is expected to be included in the NODELIST either add the intersection to the NODELIST if appropriate or change the entry so it uses an intersection number already in the NODELIST TPC41 WARNING INVALID COMMAND IGNORED This error message indicates that an invalid command used as a parameter value was detected This most often occurs when an unrecognizable command string is entered for either the HELP ASK DATA SAVE or RESET commands These commands will ignore the entire command list when this occurs Action Re issue the command with the correct or properly abbreviated command parameters TPC42 WARNING There are too many commands listed as parameters for this command Re enter This message is displayed when too many commands are entered as parameter values for a part
412. r version of the same program SIGNAL2000 H 317 Reference license info displays in Help About including site license address leading W removed from all program file names for easy recognition LinkTo and Menu looks for new name first then old name with W for backward compatibility with older versions of other TEAPAC programs default node to renumber is the current node not 0 Startup Help button is located in main window and now in Help menu StartUp txt can be modified by user with virtually unlimited size View Network and Options Graphics menu options have been removed gt Program Specific Enhancements Included in Visual TEAPAC Upgrade Timings provided or optimized by movement are displayed with a new ring based display in the capacity analysis report New options TrapOk MultiOk amp Unrestricted for the Permissives dialog allow both the analysis and optimization of two special case permitted left turn conditions the left turn trap and multi turn lane permitted operations The message that displays each time an unsignalized intersection is skipped in an analysis can now be disabled Warning messages that display when high turn percentages are encountered are automatically omitted when the sum of the turn percentages is 98 or higher such as at T intersections or special conditions with dummy through movements Dummy nodes are skipped without any messages when all intersections are being analyzed and dummy node con
413. rage distances are entered the queue calculations will report the queues only in terms of vehicles per lane and feet per lane without storage ratios SIGNAL2000 B 180 Reference SUBSYSTEM SUBSYSTEM SUBSYSTEM 500 lt Node Number gt Defaults 500 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter the subset of the NODELIST for which subsequent actions should be taken lt Node Numbers is a unique number assigned to each intersection on INTERSECTION command and can be any integer from O to 999 or the negative value of any defined route number Its default value is 0 Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa e The SUBSYSTEM command allows a subset of the complete NODELIST to be defined for subsequent analysis in Usage Level 3 versions of SIGNAL2000 This means that the entire network up to 500 signals may be LOADed into SIGNAL2000 then only the pertinent signals are ANALY ZEd or DESIGNed Like NODELIST the entry of a 0 node in the SUBSYSTEM list will terminate the SUBSYSTEM list of nodes and zero out any subsequent nodes in the list e In Usage Level 3 SUBSYSTEM can be as many as 100 nodes in length In Usage Lev
414. re beginning this section it is necessary to have a good understanding of the material covered in the previous chapters as well as in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual If this is not the case please review this material prior to continuing Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual can also be used to discover advanced procedures which can be used by SIGNAL2000 as well as all TEAPAC programs Chapter 5 Topics Chapter 5 Introduction Multi Leg Intersections Dual Optional Turn Lane Analysis Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs Analysis Period and the Use of PEAKHOURFACTORS Using ACTUATIONS and MINIMUMS Field Calibration of Adjusted SATURATIONFLOWS with FACTORS Proper Use of RIGHTTURNONREDS Multi Leg Intersections SIGNAL2000 can be used quite effectively to perform capacity analyses of multi leg intersections that is intersections with more than four approach legs These are typically but not limited to five and six leg intersections SIGNAL2000 can also be used in an iterative fashion to optimize timings for multi leg intersections All of this is described below Capacity Analysis Timing Optimization SIGNAL2000 49 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Capacity Analysis The secret to using SIGNAL2000 for multi leg intersection analysis is use of the PEDTIME command which is normally used to define an all red time for a pedestrian scrambl
415. re given in terms of green time to cycle time ratio G C in seconds per second green time G in seconds and yellow plus all red time Y R in seconds The offset to the beginning of each phase OFF is shown in percent of the cycle The cycle length and total time allocated to green yellow and exclusive pedestrian phases are shown in seconds and percent of cycle below the sequence block If a phase s green time is controlled by a minimum this is indicated by the letter M in the lower left corner of the phase Capacity Analysis Parameters Capacity Analysis parameters are reported only by movement except for the demand volume which is also reported by approach and intersection total Adjusted Volume The adjusted volumes in vehicles per hour are listed for each movement for each approach and for the entire intersection SIGNAL2000 D 256 Reference Approach Width and Lanes The approach width documents the amount of roadway width which has been allocated for each lane group at the intersection This is followed by a slash and the number of lanes which have been striped for each of the specified approach widths Movements which are part of dual optional lane groups are represented with a plus sign next to the turning lane and a minus sign next to the shared lanes g C Required The green time to cycle time ratio required to pass the demand volume through the approach width at the noted level of service This value is computed only for
416. rea of the network connections and underlying bitmap with the mouse gt T2004v6 Output Edit Window Major Enhancements The Output and Edit Windows have been enhanced with menus and toolbar buttons which provide the ability to Find a user entered text string find the next output report and find the next page of results A button also allows moving backwards thru the output to the previous output page In the Edit Window an additional Find amp Replace function has also been provided Also the current line number of the cursor is displayed in the status line of the window and the A function now performs the standard SelectAll function instead of copying the entire window to the clipboard gt T2004v6 Toolbar Button Provided for Intersection Selection A toolbar button has been provided in the main window next to the buttons which provides direct access to the Intersection dialog to select the current intersection allowing quick access to this common function without the need to use the menus SIGNAL2000 H 324 Reference gt T2004v6 Intersection Type Description Listed in Dialog Caption If an intersection description has been provided for the current intersection via the Intersection dialog this description is displayed in the caption of any intersection data dialog in addition to the intersection number For traffic impact studies with SITE the same function is true for the current distribution type These number and descr
417. red the intersection during the analysis period in hours measured from the start of the analysis period the supplemental clearing time Final queue The final initial queue unmet demand at the end of the analysis period in vehicles SIGNAL2000 D 247 Reference The following is an example of the HCM Initial Queue Delay Worksheet text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Initial Queue Delay Worksheet Durat T 0 25 h N E S W Cycle C 60 s R H L RT H L RT H L R H L Lane group LG R H L RT TH LT RT TH L R H L Init queue Qb 0 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 Grn ratio g C 508 237 092 200 204 237 092 359 200 204 v c ratio X 24 73 43 78 20 2595 TT A2 TL 67 Adj capacity c 799 837 320 694 362 817 288 568 707 362 Durtn unmet t 00 04 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 Case number i 1 3 ji J ail 3 al 1 1 al Delay param u 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Queue delay d3 0 3 28 0 0 0 2 6 0 0 0 0 Unif delay dl 0 21 4 0 0 0 20 6 0 0 0 0 Last depart Tc 20 0 225 lt 0 0 00 00 s29 0 0 00 00 00 Final queue Qbi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
418. red volumes as adjusted by the lt AddFactor gt and can be any number from 9999 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes Normally lt AddFactor gt will have a value of 0 0 or 1 0 to disable or enable respectively any lt Additional Volumes gt which have been entered without the need to actually change the lt Additional Volume gt entries This feature makes it easy to add and remove additional volumes from an analysis lt AddFactor gt may also be used as a multiplier for the lt Additional Volumes gt for easy testing of incremental values of additional volumes See the discussion in Appendix C Calculation of Volumes for a complete discussion of how VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS and PEAKHOURFACTORS are used to generate analysis volumes for various types of analyses within TEAPAC SIGNAL2000 B 190 Reference VOLFACTORS VOLFACTORS VOLFACTORS lt Years gt _12 lt Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 1 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter number of times to compound and each multiplier used for each movement to adjust the volume or count data entered at the current intersection lt Years gt is the number of times years to compound each multiplier and can be any positive integer from to 99 Its default value is 1 no compounding lt Adjustment Factor gt is a multiplier used to adjust the movement volumes or counts input to the program and can be any number fr
419. ribe each movement of the current intersection Each of these commands has twelve parameters each applying only to traffic on each of the intersection s individual movements The order of entry is clockwise starting with the right turn on the north approach e g first RT from the North then TH from the North then LT from the North then RT from the East etc up to the LT from the West Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above MOVLABELS 12 lt Movement Label gt Enter abbreviated labels for each movement of the current intersection SIGNAL2000 40 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS VOLUMES 12 lt Design Hour Volume gt Enter the turning and through movement volumes for each of the movements of the current intersection VOLFACTORS lt Years gt 12 lt Adjustment Factor gt Enter number of times to compound and each multiplier used for each movement to adjust the volume or count data entered at the current intersection VOLADDITIONALS lt AddFactor gt 12 lt Additional Volume gt Enter the factor and additional volume to be added for each movement of the current intersection WIDTHS 12 lt Lane Group Width gt Enter the width of the lane group for each movement of the current intersection LANES 12 lt Number of Lanes gt Enter the number of lanes which are assigned for use by each of the twelve movements of the current intersection GROUPTYPES 12 lt Lane Group Typ
420. riod gt is the length of the analysis period in minutes and can be any integer from 999 to 9999 Its default value is 15 It may also be entered as a negative number whose positive value is the number of cycle lengths which define the analysis period lt Stop Penalty gt is the stop penalty to be used in calculating the performance index of the TRANSYT simulation and can be any value from 1 to 9999 Its default value is 1 to minimize fuel consumption It is used by PRETRANSYT only lt Link Numbering Methods is a keyword which describes which link numbering method will be used when creating links for TRANSYT and can be any of the three following keywords TEAPAC links will be numbered using TEAPAC s normal numbering scheme counting clockwise around the intersection starting with the right turn on the north approach default TRANSYT links will be numbered using the scheme described in the TRANSYT 7F user manual NEMA links will be numbered using the alternate NEMA scheme described in the TRANSYT 7E user manual lt Model Actuated gt is a keyword which describes whether the TRANSYT or PASSER actuated model should be used for actuated movements and can be NO or YES Its default is NO It is used by PRETRANSYT and PREPASSR only lt Assignment Method gt is the default method to be used to assign upstream volumes to downstream links if not specified on a NETWORK entry and can be FULL or LIMITED Its default value is FULL It is used by
421. rk paths starting with double back slashes or a combination of these designations The length of the drive path designation cannot exceed a maximum of 180 characters and upper lower case characters and spaces are allowed If no drive path designation is provided the default drive path comes from the third entry displayed in the dialog of the Options Setup menu This location comes from the program s CFG file on program startup a file whose contents can be altered with the Save button of the Options Setup dialog The Options Setup dialog changes dynamically as the user navigates through the File Open and File SaveAs dialogs A common feature of Windows can be used to direct TEAPAC data files to another drive path This is the Map Network Drive function This process substitutes a network drive location for a drive designation For example on a typical system with an A B and C drive a MAPped D drive can be created pointing to a network drive elsewhere on the network Then files on the network drive can be referenced in a TEAPAC program by simply using the D drive The Command Prompt SUBST command can also be used to map any folder or sub folder to a virtual drive not just map a drive as above This is a particularly convenient way to get around the 180 character limit imposed by TEAPAC on the drive path designation File Name nnnnn This element is the actual file name of the data file and should be descriptive of the information contained wit
422. rksheet is the eighth HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the factors and delay calculations made for lane groups which have an initial queue at the start of the analysis period This worksheet is produced only when at least one approach contains a non zero initial queue Duration The duration of the analysis period in hours Cycle The cycle length in seconds Approach and Movement Labels The one or two character approach and movement name designations Lane group The movements included in each lane group Initial queue The initial queue in each lane group at the start of the analysis period due to unmet demand from the previous analysis period Green ratio The effective g C ratio for each lane group v c ratio The volume capacity ratio for each lane group Adjusted capacity The capacity of each lane group in vehicles per hour Duration unmet The duration of unmet demand during the analysis period in hours for each lane group Case number The case number for the determination of d3 for each lane group Delay parameter The delay parameter u for the determination of d for each lane group Queue delay The initial queue delay d3 in seconds for each lane group Uniform delay The adjusted calculation of uniform delay d in seconds for each lane group Last departure The time of the last departure of vehicles which ente
423. rmat at the same time including YELLOWTIMES if the GREENTIMES dialog is displayed and vice versa When timings are Converted the conversion will also include reviewing the allowed SEQUENCES list and moving the appropriate sequence code to the top of the list according to the timings present Allowing timings By Movement makes it apparent that for certain overlap phases phase lengths which are apparently negative in the By Phase method are in fact perfectly valid timings for dual ring controllers as long as the negative value of the overlap phase greentime does not exceed the yellowtime of that same phase This permits a wider range of timings to be represented by the traditional By Phase HCM methodology and this extension is now also permitted by the optimization method of the DESIGN command By Movement timings are not allowed when special phasings represented by negative SEQUENCE codes are used gt Easy Entry of Multiple Phasing Possibilities for Optimization NEMA style dual ring controllers inherently support multiple phasings from the perspective of the traditional By Phase approach of representing signal operations This means a typical dual ring SEQUENCE list might look like for example 14 15 16 to indicate that the north south phasing is single phase 1 but that the dual ring controller can handle any protected left turn phasings 4 including overlaps 5 amp 6 Shorthand codes A B C and D have been created for
424. roach in pedestrians per hour For certain phasings this pedestrian volume may also conflict with left turns on the approach opposite to these right turns Bicycle Volume The volume of bicycles interfering with right turns on each approach in bikes per hour Parking Location The location of parking on each approach if it exists If parking exists the entry is either RIGHT LEFT or BOTH to indicate which side of the approach the parking is on If no parking exists the entry is NONE Parking Maneuvers The number of parking maneuvers per hour on one side of an approach If the value in the Parking Location row see above is NO the number of Parking Maneuvers is SIGNAL2000 D 229 Reference ignored and thus has no impact on any calculations This is commonly the case when the Parking Maneuvers entry uses the default of 20 maneuvers per hour but there is no parking as indicated by a NONE in the Parking Location column Bus Stops The hourly volume of local buses which stop at a bus stop on each approach in buses per hour Grade The percent grade of each approach with a negative number representing a down grade approach Phase Sequence Signal Phasing The signal phasing that is analyzed is specified with a box for each phase of the signal operation indicating the movements which are allowed during that phase Movement arrows formed with asterisks indicate the critical movements in the phasing if specified North or the dire
425. rogram The data used in the example outputs is summarized in the first output example Summary of Parameter Values Each report description that follows includes all of the commands which can be used to generate the report SIGNAL2000 D 213 Reference Table D 1 Report Descriptions and Examples Report Title Keyword Summary of Parameter Values SUMMARISE Optimized Phase Sequences DESIGN Optimum Phasings Ranked by Delay SORT Optimum Phase Timings TIMINGS 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE 1Y ZE Highway Capacity Manual Worksheets Input Worksheet Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet Capacity and LOS Worksheet Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet Initial Queue Delay Worksheet Back of Queue Worksheet Z Z Z Z Z Z Z prprrrrrrre A2AAAAAAAAAA PPP Pr rrr Yr SPS HARA eee ca B Ea PRERE RENE HERE RENE Z D Z D 1Y ZE J Capacity Analysis Summary Evaluation of Intersection Performance EVALUATE Queuemodel Calculations QUEUECAI Required g Cs and LT Clearance Cycl GOVERCS Satflow Rates and LT Clearance Cycl SERVICEVOLUME Display of Intersection Parameters MAP Diagram of Signal Phasing DIAGRAMS Appendix D Topics Appendix D Introduc
426. rom being fully achieved is when such optimal green times do not provide enough time to meet designated minimum green times Another is when the critical movements are over saturated An important observation is that this strategy is not intended to minimize the overall delay of the intersection and in many cases will not The reasoning for this is straightforward In a simple case where a major street intersects a minor street with a two phase signal the imbalance in street volumes will inherently favor the main street with regard to the overall intersection delay and to an extreme which is not appropriate and clearly not optimal For example if the main street has volume of 1 000 vph on it and the side street has 100 vph an optimization of intersection delay will force the delay value of the side street ten times higher than the main street since the main street volume is ten times higher than the side street and the intersection delay is the weighted average delay weighted by volume Thus if the main street experienced 20 35 seconds of delay LOS C then the optimum side street timing would cause 200 350 seconds of delay for side street vehicles Clearly this is not appropriate or optimal This argument holds true for other minor movements at the intersection such as left turn phases for either the main street or side street As such SIGNAL2000 provides a unique optimization strategy that balances the delay of the critical movements so tha
427. rs If any timings are present they will be converted to the other format at the same time including YELLOWTIMES if the GREENTIMES dialog is displayed and vice versa When timings are Converted the conversion will also include reviewing the allowed SEQUENCES list and moving the appropriate sequence code to the top of the list according to the timings present It is important to make sure that YELLOWTIMES and REQCLEARANCES entries are always kept consistent with each other especially when converting Timings by Phase to Timings by Movement and when exporting to third party ring based software e Allowing timings By Movement makes it apparent that for certain overlap phases phase lengths which are apparently negative in the By Phase method are in fact perfectly valid timings for dual ring controllers as long as the negative value of the overlap phase greentime does not exceed the yellowtime of that same phase This permits a wider range of timings to be represented by the traditional By Phase HCM methodology e By Movement timings are not allowed when special phasings represented by negative SEQUENCE codes are used SIGNAL2000 B 109 Reference GREENTIMES GREENTIMES If green times are entered in seconds second the first cycle length of the CYCLES command will be used to convert the phase times to seconds If all entries are greater than or equal to 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds if all entries are less tha
428. rst delay values for the intersection Level of Service The level of service of the intersection as a whole It is based on the average intersection delay described above according to Exhibit 16 2 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual If the delay value is in the better half of the range of delay allowed for a given level of service the level of service listed will be accompanied by a plus sign to the right of the level Signal Phasing and Timing Signal Phasing The signal phasing that is analyzed is specified with a box for each phase of the signal operation indicating the movements which are allowed during that phase Movement arrows formed with asterisks indicate the critical movements in the phasing North or the direction assumed by the user to be north is always up in the diagrams as shown by the North arrow Phases are numbered consecutively starting with one 1 for the first north south phase SIGNAL2000 D 252 Reference No attempt is made to identify subphases lead phases or overlap phases by the phase number The coded phase sequence number appears at the top of the phase diagram Timings The timings used for each phase are given in terms of green time to cycle time ratio G C in seconds per second green time G in seconds and yellow plus all red time Y R in seconds The offset to the beginning of each phase OFF is shown in percent of the cycle The cycle length and total time allocated to green yellow and exclusive
429. s Action Re issue the REPEAT command using proper parameter values TPC54 ERROR Only X distinct time period range s is are allowed More have been defined The PERIODS command allows only five distinct time periods of counts to be defined This requires five pairs of start and stop times to be entered If more than five time periods are entered this error will be generated Action If more than five periods were actually counted they will need to be separated into two distinct runs of TURNS or merged into fewer time periods with zeros entered for some of the count intervals which were not counted If this is not the case check for the proper entry of each of the start and stop times on the PERIODS command following the count interval TPCS55 ERROR The second time of the period cannot occur before the first time Re enter The PERIODS command allows the entry of pairs of start and stop times to define the range of time each count period encompasses The first number entered for each pair defines the start time entered in 24 hour time notation The second time of each pair defines the end time of the period and must not be less than the first time of the period If the second time is less than the first this error is displayed Action In this case correct the PERIODS entry so that each stop time is no earlier than its associated start time TPC56 ERROR The time that was entered is not a valid time entry Re enter If the time e
430. s Appendix G Introduction Run Time Error Codes File Specification TEAPAC G 297 Reference File Access Output Control Installing TEAPAC Programs Run Time Error Codes The list of standard run time error codes for the software development system used for TEAPAC is too extensive to be produced here The most common one is a divide by zero error indicating unexpected conditions usually where not enough information has been provided If this or any other un documented error is encountered and you are unable to identify and or correct the problem Strong Concepts may be able to assist you with the problem if enough information is available to reproduce the problem If the problem can be reproduced document the input conditions which existed prior to executing the command upon which the error occurs This can be done with SUMMARISE prior to issuing the last command which generates the error and copying this output to the printer Transmit the printed information to Strong Concepts so that the problem can be duplicated and resolved As a convenient alternate send the data file to Strong Concepts via email as an attachment with an appropriate description of the problem and where to look for the anomaly in the output if appropriate File Specification There are four descriptive elements used by a TEAPAC program to define and access a disk data file The elements are 1 the name of the disk drive and path to be used
431. s appropriate parameters Use the Help Commands menu or HELP ALL to see all possible commands alphabetically TPC02 ERROR This is an abbreviation for more than one command Use more letters This error is generated when the program has been unable to identify one and only one command from an abbreviated command in the Manual Mode An abbreviation could be a single character if it uniquely defines a command however if the character or string of characters can be interpreted as more than one command a TPC02 error message will be displayed Since the command could not be identified the program does not process any of the parameters entered and returns to the command level prompt This error only applies to the Manual Mode Action Re enter the correct command or a valid command abbreviation along with its appropriate parameters Use the Help Commands menu or HELP ALL to see all possible commands alphabetically TPC11 ERROR This file name cannot be located as specified Re enter a different name This error message has been superseded by TPC16 and TPC18 TPC12 ERROR File number xxxxx is not in the range of 0 to 5 All file access is aborted TEAPAC programs can access from one to five data files at a given time These five files are specified by the use of the FILES command Each file is numbered from one to five in the order they are entered with the FILES command Commands such as LOAD and SAVE direct the program to these files by
432. s can be entered until the SITESIZE of the study is defined The maximum size of the study depends on the licensed Usage Level of the program Usage Levels 1 and 2 allow up to 50 distribution types while Usage Level 3 allows up to 100 distribution types and Usage Level 4 allows up to 150 distribution types e In the Manual Mode lt Inbound Types gt does not need to be entered If it hasn t been entered its default value will be one half of the total number of distribution types set only after lt of Distribution Types gt is first entered Its value cannot exceed the entered lt of Distribution Types gt It is possible to declare 0 distribution types on the SITESIZE command so that all subsequent calculations only apply to defined non site VOLUMES and appropriate growth VOLFACTORS This is particularly useful when calculating non site volumes separately from a set of cumulated multi site volumes in order to separate the non site volume definitions completely from any of the site traffic e The SITESIZE command can specify that all of the declared distribution types are either all inbound or all outbound This effectively increases the number of inbound or outbound distribution types in a single calculation from a maximum of 15 to a maximum of 30 in the largest SITE distribution Usage Level All types SIGNAL2000 B 175 Reference SITESIZE SITESIZE in a given calculation can be inbound followed by a cumulated calculation o
433. s cannot continue Action Verify that the lane group width has been input according to the proper convention of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual It is unlikely that an analysis of a lane width of less than 8 feet would yield a valid result but this can be simulated by using a larger lane group width and adjusting the satflow downwards with an appropriate FACTORS entry S2K20 WARNING Verify STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN values Cannot convert old LOSTTIME input This warning indicates that a LOSTTIME entry has been encountered normally when a SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 data file has been loaded Due to the new technique used to calculate lost time values in the 1997 amp 2000 HCMs using STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN values LOSTTIME entries from older versions of the program cannot be converted reliably In this case it is the user s responsibility to make sure that appropriate STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN values are used Action If the default LOSTTIME value 3 seconds was used in SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 the default STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN values 2 seconds in SIGNAL2000 are probably appropriate and no action is required Alternatively STARTUP and ENDGAIN values can be entered after the old data is loaded which result in the desired lost time computation for each movement according to the techniques of the 2000 HCM S2K21 WARNING UTILIZATION entries gt 1 0 from old data file have been inverted for HCM 2000 This warning indicates that a UTILIZATION entr
434. se times E 275 SIGNAL2000 363 Index
435. section approach and turning movement data should be entered in the order shown in this figure Figure 1 1 Intersection Approach and Turning Movement Conventions Phasing Sequence Codes All TEAPAC programs which require phasing information for an intersection use the same basic phasing codes on the SEQUENCES entry to represent complex phasing schemes with simple two digit codes The first digit represents the type of phasing for the north south movements while the second digit represents the type of phasing for the east west movements The phase codes allowed for north south and east west are identical the east west codes simply being the north south code rotated clockwise 90 degrees This basic phasing code can be augmented by entries to change the order of the basic sequence code LEADLAGS by adding permitted left turns before or after exclusive left turn phases PERMISSIVES and by adding right turns which overlap into the other direction s phases OVERLAPS Figure 1 2 illustrates each of the eight SIGNAL2000 7 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION basic phase types with an example of how they are combined to create a SEQUENCE phase code Sequence 1 Sequence 4 Dual zk A x gt lt Sequence 5 Dual Lead North Overlap zk A x gt lt xk A It eee S iy 444 F444 x gt ROR OS lt V gt Lead South Overlap
436. sed to perform analyses using the SIGNAL2000 program This chapter discusses the minimum input requirements to conduct a reasonable analysis as well as practical limitations of the program Then appropriate analysis procedures are explained This chapter is designed to fully explain the operation of the SIGNAL2000 program and provide additional understanding of the example shown in Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Topics Chapter 3 Introduction Input Requirements Analysis Procedures Input Requirements This section discusses the basic input requirements for SIGNAL2000 It begins with a discussion of the minimum input requirements to produce various reports and then discusses the limitations to data input which exist This section is quite important in that it sets the minimum information for valid results as well as the limitations of the program Minimum Input Requirements Input Limitations Minimum Input Requirements Many of the input parameter values have defaults which eliminate the need to enter data for every parameter After the program is started or the File New menu or RESET PARAMETERS command is issued these default values can be viewed in any of the input dialogs of the Visual Mode or with the DATA or ASK commands in the Manual Mode The default values of each command are also listed in the right hand section of the HELP displays which are generated by the Help Commands menu or the HELP command in the Manual M
437. ser Discussion Forum which has been implemented for TEAPAC users and is available 24 7 for posting questions and searching through answers to previous questions can now be accessed directly from the Help menu of the program The Forum can also be accessed directly using any internet browser at www StrongConcepts com Forum SIGNAL2000 H 307 Reference SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 71 0O8SEP06 Build 07 25JAN07 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS Build 07 11NOV05 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt Default Value for DESIGN Optimization Changed The default value for the DESIGN optimization control parameter has been changed from 0 to 1 so that a default optimization will now always generate a capacity analysis of the top ranked phasing and cycle length combination without changing the default gt SCENARIO Program Makes its Debut SCENARIO is a new Visual TEAPAC program that can create multi scenario data files either from scratch or from data files of earlier versions of TEAPAC Users can 1 select from pre defined typical scenario structures like multiple volume conditions or multiple timing plans 2 create completely unique scenario conditions for their analyses or 3 customize a pre defined scenario structure to meet their specific needs The primary advantage of using SCENARIO is that all the scenario data is saved without dangers of duplicated data which often occur when scenarios are man
438. t Enter the range and precision of cycle length scanning for the current intersection for DESIGN as well as the default cycle length for the ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLUMES GOVERCS and EXPORT commands GREENTIMES 6 lt Phase Green Time gt Enter the duration of green for each of the phases of a specified phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection YELLOWTIMES 6 lt Phase Yellow Time gt Enter the clearance interval at the end of each phase of a phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection CRITICALS 6 lt Critical Movement Number gt Enter the movement which is critical for each phase of the phase sequence of operation of the current intersection PEDTIME lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt lt Phase Number gt Enter the time for an exclusive pedestrian scramble phase of the current intersection OFFSET lt Offset gt lt Phase Number gt Enter the coordinated offset for a phase of the phase sequence of the current intersection PHASEMOVEMENTS lt Phase Number gt lt List of Movements gt Enter the movements permitted during each phase for a non standard phasing of the current intersection SIGNAL2000 43 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data The following are commands which can be used to describe traffic generator data for each intersection being analyzed but whose d
439. t Enter a factor which will be used to estimate 24 hour volumes from partial day s counts at the current intersection VEHICLECOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Enter the count of vehicles for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection TRUCKCOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Enter the count of trucks for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection Common TEAPAC Dialogs There are 22 command dialogs common to all TEAPAC programs These commands control interactive functions output labeling program operation permanent data storage and program execution These common TEAPAC commands are summarized in this section All the detail about these commands is found alphabetically in Appendix B of this manual with the other commands of the program discussed previously as well as in Appendix B of all other TEAPAC program manuals Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data Commands to Label Output Commands to Control Operation Of Program Commands to Access Data Stored In Files Commands to Control Program Execution Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data The commands described below have functions related to the interactive use of the program These commands control on screen help functions as well as provide the means to review program data Many of these commands act on a set of commands as their parameter values SIGNAL2000
440. t Conflicting Bicycles gt 40 B 82 lt Count Description gt B 88 lt Critical Movement Number gt 43 B 89 SIGNAL2000 353 Index lt Curvature gt 39 B 131 lt Cycle Increment gt 38 43 B 90 lt Cycle Length gt B 172 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt 42 B 92 lt Delay Incr gt 39 B 121 lt Descr gt 44 B 148 lt Description gt 36 39 B 117 lt Design Hour Volume gt 37 41 B 192 lt Design Evaluate gt 39 B 142 lt Destination gt 47 B 106 lt Direction gt 39 B 131 lt Distance gt 39 B 131 lt End Gain Time gt 42 B 98 lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt 43 B 152 lt File Name AUTO gt 35 B 101 lt File Name gt 47 B 104 lt File Number gt 47 B 123 B 169 lt First Title Line gt 46 B 157 lt First Val gt 47 B 161 lt Grade of Approach gt 40 B 108 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt 42 B 115 lt Increment gt 47 B 161 lt Initial Queue Size gt 42 B 116 lt Input Output Echo Condition gt 46 B 97 lt Lane Group Type gt 41 B 111 lt Lane Group Width gt 37 41 B 193 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt 41 B 188 lt Last Line gt 47 B 118 lt Last Val gt 47 B 161 lt Lead Lag Phasing gt 43 B 120 lt Level of Messages gt 46 B 127 lt Line Number gt 47 B 123 B 169 lt Lines Pg gt 47 B 118 lt Link Numbering Method gt 38 B 173 lt List of Artery Nodes gt 38 B 167 lt List of Commands gt 46 47 B 78 B 91 B 114
441. t Phase Yellow Time gt 38 43 B 194 lt Precision of Totals gt 44 B 166 lt Priority gt 35 B 177 lt Prog gt 39 B 142 lt Quality of Progression gt 37 41 B 77 lt Required Clearance gt 37 41 B 162 lt Right Turn on Red Volume gt 40 B 165 lt Right Turn Overlap gt 43 B 144 lt Route gt 38 B 167 lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt 42 B 103 lt Second Title Line gt 46 B 93 lt Sequence Code gt 35 36 38 42 B 96 B 171 B 172 B 184 lt Speed gt 39 B 131 lt Startup Lost Time gt 42 B 178 lt Step Size List gt 39 B 140 lt Steps Cycle gt 38 B 173 lt Stop Penalty gt 38 B 173 lt Stopping Bus Volume gt 40 B 83 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt 42 B 138 lt Storage Distance gt 42 B 180 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt 42 B 168 lt Target Delay LOS gt 39 B 121 lt Target v c gt 39 B 121 lt Third Title Line gt 46 B 137 lt Truck gt 38 B 159 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt 37 41 B 186 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt 40 B 187 lt v c Incr gt 39 B 121 lt Variable Name gt 47 B 161 lt Worksheets gt 39 B 142 lt X Y Coord UR gt 44 B 81 lt X Y Coordinates gt 39 B 136 receiving lanes D 238 D 240 turning lanes D 238 D 240 Actual Green Time D 236 Actuations D 217 Adjusted D 236 Adjusted capacity D 247 Adjusted Demand Volumes D 265 D 267 354 Index Adjusted Flow D 242 D 243 Adjusted Lane Grou
442. t any time in the program s CFG file by pressing the Save button in the Options Setup dialog This will cause this saved location to be the default file location the next and subsequent times the program is run until a new location is saved See the detailed discussion of program installation and CFG files in Appendix G SIGNAL2000 B 104 Reference GENERATION GENERATION GENERATION lt Direction gt lt Generation Rate gt 10 lt Node Dir gt Defaults 0 000 10 lt 0 gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC GENERATOR The purpose of this command is to enter the traffic generation rates and access points and access directions for the development lt Direction gt is a keyword which describes whether the following information applies to inbound outbound or both directions of trip generation and can be any keyword as described below IN data applies to inbound trips only OUT data applies to outbound trips only BOTH data applies to inbound amp outbound trips Manual Mode only It has no default value it must be entered lt Generation Rate gt is the trip generation rate to be applied to the generation base and can be any number which when multiplied by the BASE development size yields the total vehicle trips generated from 9 99 to 99 99 Its default value is 0 000 lt Node Dir gt is the node number and leg direction providing the access to the development site For example a 1N entry means the north leg of node
443. t left turns are allowed to turn on through phases following or preceding exclusive left turn phases compound left turn phasing and can be any of the following NO compound left turn phasing not allowed default YES compound left turn phasing allowed but restricted to non trap and single lane turn lane conditions TRAPOK compound left turn phasing allowed even in so called left turn trap conditions which are otherwise considered unsafe but not for multi lane turn lane conditions MULTIOK compound left turn phasing allowed even when the left turn lane consists of more than one lane multi lane but not for left turn trap conditions Permitted left operations will also be allowed for multi lane turn lanes in a single phase when this is selected UNRESTRICTED compound left turn phasing allowed under any conditions including left turn trap and multi lane conditions Notes A left turn trap is a condition where the through movement opposing a left turn continues moving after the left turn s permitted phase ends possibly leaving a left turning vehicle stranded in the intersection facing a red indication or causing the potentially stranded left turner to think the opposing traffic phase is also ending and making the left turn directly into oncoming traffic Selecting TRAPOK or UNRESTRICTED allows the program to set the phasing so such a trap condition exists with the presumption that the analyst is satisfied that the
444. t of Artery Nodes gt Enter a list of node numbers which represent the intersections on the artery for the given route number MASTERNODE lt Master Node gt Enter the node number of the intersection which is the master node location for the system or subsystem QUEUEMODELS lt Model gt lt Percentile gt lt Auto gt lt Truck gt Enter parameters which control the queue model calculations used for all intersections under study SIMULATION lt Steps Cycle gt lt Analysis Period gt lt Stop Penalty gt lt Link Numbering Method gt lt Model Actuated gt lt Assignment Method gt SIGNAL2000 38 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter simulation control parameters including the length of the analysis period for all intersections under study OPTIMIZE lt Optimization Type gt lt Step Size List gt Enter the type of system optimization to be performed by TRANSYT or PASSER OUTPUT lt Prog gt lt Worksheets gt lt Messages gt lt Design Evaluate gt Enter flags regarding whether or not to display ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS worksheets warning messages and additional DESIGN EVALUATE information Commands to Enter Intersection Data The following are commands which can be used to describe the current intersection Each of these commands has parameters which apply to the entire intersection Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above INTERSECTION lt Node gt lt D
445. t so that the path is effectively ignored at this point an entire path cannot be eliminated from the PATHASSIGNMENT command Intersection node numbers in lt Path List gt must match intersections previously established with the NODELIST command SIGNAL2000 B 147 Reference PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHDISTRIBUTION lt Distr Type gt lt Distr gt lt Node gt lt Node Dir gt lt Descr gt Defaults z 0 0 30 blanks Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter and set the current distribution type number and enter its related distribution percentage external node and description lt Distr Type gt is the number of the distribution type for which the following distribution information applies and which will become the current distribution type It can be any integer from 0 150 see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered lt Distr gt is the percentage of total trips generated by the site which are distributed to this distribution type and can be 100 to 100 percent Its default value is 0 it must be entered lt Node gt is the external node number through which all traffic for this distribution type enters or exits the study network and can be 0 999 see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered lt Node Dir gt is the approach of the external intersection which connects the study network to the external road network and can be the key
446. t the conditions Table F 1 summarizes the error numbers which are discussed in this appendix The remainder of the appendix lists and discusses each of these messages in numerical order The messages in this appendix are specifically TEAPAC system messages which can be detected by any TEAPAC program These are identified by a prefix of TPC in the error code Appendix E lists those errors which are unique to a specific TEAPAC program These are identified by a different prefix XXX related to the program being run Appendix G lists those errors which are generated by the operating environment being used and as such are unique to that operating environment The form of these error messages is dependent upon the operating environment being used Messages are either WARNINGS or ERRORS A WARNING might be advisory only while ERRORS are usually fatal and terminate the current action Once an error message has been displayed and acknowledged the program will respond with either an opportunity to re enter a parameter value or in the Manual Mode the possible need to re enter an entire new command line in order to fix the error If a new parameter value is all that is needed to correct the problem the program will prompt for this using the appropriate dialog TEAPAC F 281 Reference Table F 1 Summary of TEAPAC System Error Messages Command Entry Errors TPCO1 ERROR command is not recognizable TPCO2 ERROR abbreviation for more than one comm
447. t this inappropriate allocation of greentime does not occur This is the default optimization strategy but others can be selected as described in a following section Defining Priority Movements for an Optimization Oversaturation Considerations Defining Priority Movements for an Optimization The optimization strategy described above is the default scheme which treats all critical movements with equal priority As a default this must be the case since it is beyond the scope of the program to identify priority movements on its own On the other hand quite often it is both desirable and appropriate to specify certain movements within an intersection which are to SIGNAL2000 C 200 Reference receive some degree of priority treatment while maintaining a certain minimum level of performance on all other critical movements which are not priority movements This process is described below The EXCESS command can be used to define movements which are to receive priority treatment during the optimization process These priority movements are defined simply by listing their movement numbers on the EXCESS command For example if the northbound through movement is the most important movement during the P M peak movement 8 can be entered as the EXCESS movement In this case if the target delay as defined by the first LEVELOFSERVICE command entry is met for all critical movements all remaining time will be allocated to the phase which ser
448. tance gt Defaults 0 0 0 4 0 Default None Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the current intersection s relative location in the system network including spatial and speed parameters lt Direction gt is the approach to the intersection for which the following data applies and can be NORTH EAST SOUTH or WEST There is no default value for this parameter it must be entered lt Distance gt is the distance in feet from the closest upstream node for the approach specified and can be any number from 0 to 32000 Its default value is 0 lt Speed gt is the travel speed in miles per hour approaching the node for the approach specified and can be any number from 0 to 65 Its default value is 0 lt Node gt is the upstream node number for the approach specified and can be any node number defined in the system and usually but not necessarily in the specified node list from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 lt Movement gt is the movement number at the specified upstream node which provides traffic flow to the subject intersection and can be O or 1 12 Its default value is 0 see discussion below lt Assignment Methods is the method to be used to assign upstream volumes to downstream links and can be DEFAULT FULL or LIMITED Its default value is DEFAULT lt Curvature gt is curvature of the link from the perspective of the driver approaching the intersection and can b
449. te information in that part of the file before trying to use it In the case where repeated TPC17 errors occur through an attempt to LOAD non existent information from a file normally past the end of the defined file s contents the ESCape key will abort the LOAD process and return to enter another command Frequently this error can be avoided by adding an end of file terminator to the end of the file TEAPAC F 285 Reference TPC18 WARNING This file name already exists Use it anyway No Yes This error message occurs when the requested lt File Name gt on the FILES command already exists but the File Switch for a new file was used see Appendix G File Specification For example if the N Switch is designated and the file currently exists then the warning message will be displayed to indicate that the file s contents if any will be overwritten if the file has been specified properly This condition normally occurs if the name of a new file is misspelled on the FILES command or the intended new file name has already been used In either case this message prevents the existing file from inadvertently being overwritten if this was not the intention Action The program is prompting the user whether the existent file should be used anyway as if the N switch had not been used By responding Y to this prompt the file will be used as specified and the error condition is erased If any other character is pressed then the file named wi
450. te system in something other than feet Although this is still possible it can be problematic with the new drag and drop Visual TEAPAC interface and is not recommended In combination with the new Manual Distance option described below and the functions of this new dialog old coordinate systems can be easily converted for more predictable use under the new Visual TEAPAC methods gt V7 00 21 New Manual Distance Option Added to NETWORK Dialog Entry A new option can be selected in the NETWORK dialog individually for any given link of the network that indicates that the distance entered for that link is intentionally inconsistent with the network coordinate system and apparent network scale Links which have this option selected are specifically excluded from the computation of the average coordinate system scale used and reported in the network Analysis function described above Although not recommended selecting this option allows a link s distance to be inconsistent with the coordinate system without adversely affecting the management and checking of the rest of the network In addition to this option the NETWORK dialog also shows the calculated link distance based on the coordinate system and the average coordinate system scale if not equal to 1 0 and if this calculated distance is outside of the allowed error specified in the Coordinate System Management dialog it is displayed in red The Manual Distance option status is also shown in SI
451. ter string beginning with a letter It has no default value a variable name must be provided lt First Val gt is the value which will be assigned to the loop variable the first time through the loop and can be any integer from 32767 to 32767 Its default value is 1 lt Last Val gt is the last value which the loop variable will be allowed to have in the loop and can be any integer from 32767 to 32767 Its default value is 1 lt Increment gt is the value which will be added to the loop variable for each pass of the loop in order to increment from lt First Val gt to lt Last Val gt and can be any non zero integer from 32767 to 32767 Its default value is 1 Notes The end of a REPEAT loop is defined by a GOTO command which has lt Variable Name gt as its lt Destination gt e Although any character string is allowed as a variable name only the first letter is used as the actual variable All following non blank characters are ignored If another loop is currently active its associated loop variable may not be used A REPEAT loop will terminate when the value of the loop variable exceeds the specified lt Last Val gt When a loop terminates the loop variable will have the same value as lt Last Val gt e A negative value for lt Increment gt is allowed in which case the loop variable will be decremented until it is less than lt Last Val gt e A limit of five REPEAT loops may be active at any one time i e n
452. terference ped hr gt 4 0 PEDTIME lt Exclusive Ped phase Time sec gt lt Phase gt 0 0 0 PERIODS Count Interval gt 5 lt lt Start Time gt lt Stop Time gt gt 15 ISSIVI lt Permissive Left NO YES gt 4 NO MOVEM Phase gt lt List of Movements gt 0 0 ECT i Title Line gt blanks CALCS EMODELS lt Model gt lt Percentile gt lt Auto ft gt lt Trk ft gt 1 90 25 40 AT lt Variable gt lt Start gt lt End gt lt Increment gt 1 1 1 EARANCE 12 lt Required Clearanc sec gt 12 4 0 lt List of Commands gt PARAM URN HTTURNONRI lt Right Turn on Red Volume vph gt 4 0 ROUND Precision of Totals Veh gt 1 ROUTE Route gt lt List of Node s gt 25 0 SATURATIONFLOWS 12 lt Lane Group Saturation Flow vphg gt 12 0 SAVE Line gt lt File gt lt List of Commands gt nxt nxt P SEQUENCES Phasing Code gt lt List of All possible Codes gt 11 ALL SERVICEVOLUME SIMULATION lt Stps Cyc gt lt Mins gt lt StpPn gt lt Links gt lt Act gt lt Asgn gt 300 15 1 TNF SITESIZE lt Distribution Types gt lt Inbound Types gt 0 0 SORT lt Priority CYCLES GOVERCS gt lt Output NO YES gt GCS YES
453. tersection of the previous DESIGN then re issue the SORT command S2K09 ERROR WIDTHS and LANES entries for xx xx movement do not agree Check and re enter This error indicates that for the specified lane group either a non zero WIDTH has been specified but the number of LANES is zero or a non zero number of LANES has been specified but the WIDTH is zero Action In either case review the WIDTHS and LANES command values and make sure that every non zero WIDTH has a corresponding non zero number of LANES and vice versa S2K10 ERROR No WIDTH entry exists for VOLUME on xx xx movement Check and re enter This error indicates that the specified movement VOLUME does not have a corresponding lane group WIDTH assigned to it For a through movement VOLUME this means no through movement WIDTH has been specified For a turn lane movement VOLUME this means neither an exclusive turn lane WIDTH nor an adjacent through movement WIDTH has been specified Action Review the VOLUMES and WIDTHS and correct the mis match S2K11 ERROR No VOLUME entry exists for WIDTH on xx xx movement Check and re enter This error indicates that the specified lane group WIDTH does not have any corresponding VOLUMES assigned to it For a through movement lane group WIDTH this means there is no through VOLUME nor is there any adjacent turning movement VOLUME that does not have an assigned exclusive turn lane WIDTH For an exclusive turn lane group WIDTH this mea
454. that 95 of all of the observed queues will be the calculated value or less The distance back from the stop bar is determined using the queued vehicle length inputs made by the user SIGNAL2000 C 204 Reference MBQ Queue Model Model 6 uses the maximum back of queue MBQ model from standard queueing theory It is the average queue for the average lane in a lane group meaning that it is expected that about half of all of the observed queues will be the calculated value or less The distance back from the stop bar is determined using the queued vehicle length inputs made by the user Qn q r 1 v s N where Q number of vehicles in queue per lane q arrival rate vehicles per second v 3600 v adjusted volume vehicles per hour Dn adjusted saturation flow rate vehicles per hour of green time that is not effectively green seconds e g effective red time C 1 g C C cycle length seconds g effective green time seconds N number of lanes in lane group Q Le E Tr Qn where Q length of queue per lane feet Le average queued spacing between car front bumpers feet n number of vehicles in queue per lane from above Tr truck length factor 1 L L 1 HV 100 L average spacing between truck front bumpers feet HV percent trucks heavy vehicles SIGNAL97 Queue Model Models 7 8 9 and 10 use the maximum queue length MQL model as defined in the SIGNAL97 TEAPAC program Thes
455. the execution of computational commands such as ANALYZE and SERVICEVOLUMES and can be any integer from 0 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes This command has no effect on any calculations Itis present only to receive values for output to a file in order to use these values in other TEAPAC programs particularly PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM SIGNAL2000 B 168 Reference SAVE SAVE SAVE lt Line Number gt lt File Numbers lt List of Commands gt Defaults next next PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to save the current parameter values of the listed commands in permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command for future retrieval with the LOAD command lt Line Numbers is the line number in the file where the first command in the list is to be saved and can be any valid line number of the file less than or equal to 32767 positive negative or zero Its default value is the next line of the file lt File Numbers is the order number of the desired file on the FILES command and can be any integer from 1 to 5 Its default value is the next file in the file list lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes The next line default is defined as the line number
456. the percentage of turning traffic in a dual optional through lane group is now re computed for all turns in the lane group after the shared lane volume has been determined to reflect the adjustment in the total volume in the lane group The percent trucks in the lane groups with dual optional turns included is also re computed to reflect the potential difference in truck percentages from each of the contributing movements in the shared lane Exporting of dual optional lanes to HCS2000 is now supported directly for all of the models described above without the need for any additional user adjustment as was previously required This includes the proper setting of the number of lanes the shared lane status and the percent turns using the shared lane input value Dual optional lane groups are now labelled in the SIGNAL2000 outputs in a more clear way by showing the movement labels for the movements which have been included in the shared lane groups The and signs used previously next to dual optional lane widths are still included to indicate the presence of additional or less capacity due to the dual optional status gt Better Input Error Detection for Special Phasing Definition Additional error detection has been added to user input of special phasings e g using PHASEMOVS with SEQUENCE 0 to improve the likelihood of detecting improper phasing definitions In particular the use of negative movement numbers to represent permitted left turn
457. the same in every TEAPAC program but the names and purposes of the commands in the groups are also identical among TEAPAC programs further enhancing the quick understanding of commands in each TEAPAC program Group names are useful when using a command which requires a list of commands as a parameter value These are the RESET ASK DATA HELP and SAVE commands Group names make it possible to list a complete set of commands using a single parameter value In order to use a group name as a parameter value it is necessary to enclose the group name in square brackets XXX as shown in this appendix SIGNAL2000 A 59 Reference Table A 1 Group Name Structure Std Std GROUP NAME Types of Commands Included in Group Name Group ALL All of the SIGNAL2000 commands alphabetically INFO help amp information about updates DATAFILI data and file management TITLI nter the headings for report output control program execution environment perform program specific actions enter program specific data enter essential data requirements nter network wide system data ECTION nter intersection data ROACH enter approach specific data MOVEMENT nter movement specific data PHASING enter phasing and timing data TURNS WARRANTS enter traffic count data SITE enter traffic generator data 94DEFAULTS reset new defaults for 94 HCM
458. ther optimizations with the PROS model being the one of greatest interest If the LIST option of OPTIMIZE is not used then the fourth step size value input is used to designate the 8th field of the 5X card the optimization algorithm 2 for Hillclimb 1 for Genetic non elitist and 0 for Genetic elitist e If the LIST option of OPTIMIZE is not used then the fifth step size value input is used to designate whether a single cycle 0 or multi cycle 1 simulation will be performed as defined by the X value of the 5X card If multi cycle is selected step wise simulation will be forced SIGNAL2000 B 140 Reference OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE If LIST is used then when a zero value is entered as a step size anywhere except the first field this will zero out the remainder of the step size list SIGNAL2000 B 141 Reference OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT lt Prog gt lt Worksheets gt lt Messages gt lt Design Evaluate gt Defaults SIGNAL2000 NONE YES NONE Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM ANALYZE DESIGN The purpose of this command is to enter flags regarding whether or not to display ANALYZE EV ALUATE QUEUECALCS worksheets warning messages and additional DESIGN EVALUATE information lt Prog gt is the TEAPAC program for which the OUTPUT values are to be provided and can be any valid TEAPAC program name Its default value is SIGNAL2000 lt Worksheets gt is a keyword which identifies which if any capacity analysis worksheets s
459. times and yellowtimes The EVALUATE command can be used in the same fashion as the ANALYZE command described above and requires exactly the same inputs as ANALYZE The only difference is in the type of results which are computed The EXPORT command also has the same input requirements as ANALYZE with the exception that if certain information is missing it will simply be omitted from the HCS file that is created and this information can be entered later in SIGNAL2000 26 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES HCS if needed VOLUMES and WIDTHS are still required in order that SIGNAL2000 can create a meaningful data file for HCS Three other commands can be used in the same fashion as ANALYZE when phasings and timings are known These are the QUEUECALCS SERVICEVOLS and GOVERCS commands QUEUECALCS computes queue lengths using a variety of published methods for the specified phasing and timing SERVICEVOLS computes the saturation flow rates in vehicles per hour of green e g for 100 green time for every defined lane group assuming the specified phasing and timing GOVERCS computes the greentime required by each lane group to satisfy each specified LEVELOFSERVICE This calculation is done internally for each DESIGN command and can be used to perform manual designs for complicated situations SIGNAL2000 cannot handle DESIGN Inputs The DESIGN mode of Usage Level 2 means that any of the phasing cycle length and phase timing parameters
460. timings for that phasing s The number of phasings for which capacity analyses will be produced is the number entered as the DESIGN parameter This is commonly referred to as the Intersection Design Study mode of DESIGN where the actual phasing which is selected is not as important as the capacity analysis of the best phasing This DESIGN mode will work for either a specific INTERSECTION or for all intersections INTERSECTION 0 If the DESIGN parameter value is zero no capacity analyses are performed In this case only the DESIGN is performed for every combination of CYCLES and SEQUENCES with a progress report of the DESIGN as the result This process should be followed up with a SORT command which will detail the DESIGN results also listing the sequences designed in order from best to worst From this list the preferred sequence can be selected with the TIMINGS command which automatically selects the preferred sequence by placing it first in the SEQUENCES list and then dumps the best GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and CRITICAL movements into the corresponding commands for subsequent use by the ANALYZE EVALUATE QUEUECALCS or EXPORT commands When the selection of the real best phasing is crucial this use of DESIGN is preferred since it gives the user control over the identification of the optimum phasing giving consideration to non quantifiable selection criteria SIGNAL2000 cannot consider The use of INTERSECTION 0 for all intersections ca
461. tion SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Summary of Parameter Values SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Optimized Phase Sequences SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Optimized Phasings Ranked by Crit Delay SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Optimum Phase Timings SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Input Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Supplemental LT Factor Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Capacity and LOS Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Supplemental Uniform Delay Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Initial Queue Delay Worksheet SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Back of Queue Worksheet SIGNAL2000 D 214 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Capacity Analysis Summary SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Evaluation of Intersection Performance SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Queuemodel Calculations SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Required g Cs and LT Clearance Cycles SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Satflow Rates and LT Clearance Cycles SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Display of Intersection Parameters SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Diagram of Signal Phasing SIGNAL2000 D 215 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Summary of Parameter Values The Summary of Parameter Values report generated by the SUMMARISE command is a compilation of data pertinent to analyzing intersection capacity by lane group recognizing all of the qua
462. tions of capacities and v c s made for the capacity analysis then lists the calculations of delay and level of service made for the capacity analysis as described below Capacity Analysis Approach and Movement Labels The one or two character approach and movement name designations Lane Group The movements included in each lane group Lane groups that include a through movement will always be displayed in the through movement column in the table Adjusted Flow The adjusted flow rate in vehicles per hour for each lane group Saturation Flow The adjusted saturation flow in vehicle per hour of green for each lane group Lost Time The lost time in seconds for each lane group Effective Green The effective green time in seconds for each lane group Green Ratio The g C ratios for each lane group Lane Group Capacity The lane group capacity in vehicles per hour for each lane group Volume Capacity Ratio The volume capacity ratio for each lane group Flow Ratio The ratio of the Adjusted Flow to the Saturation Flow for each lane group Critical Lane Groups The lane groups that are on the critical path as defined by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual are flagged in this row with an asterisk Permitted Phases of Compound Left Turns When a left turn is only protected or only permitted only a single line appears in the worksheet as described above When a compound left turn phasing exists protected permitted or permitte
463. to force the calculations of number of stops in EVALUATE to the same values For example if EVALUATE calculates 20 stops but TRANSYT 7F estimates 16 stops use an NSTOPFACTOR of 0 80 SIGNAL2000 B 138 Reference OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET lt Offset gt lt Phase Number gt Defaults 0 00 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS PHASING The purpose of this command is to enter the coordinated offset for a phase of the phase sequence of the current intersection lt Offset gt is the coordinated offset in seconds or seconds second and can be zero or any positive number less than or equal to 900 Its default value is 0 00 lt Phase Numbers is the phase for which the offset is specified and can be 1 6 Its default value is 1 Notes An offset greater than or equal to 1 0 is assumed to be in seconds less than 1 0 is assumed to be in seconds second If a signal is to be double cycled the OFFSET must be entered in seconds not sec sec The offset is included in the capacity analysis summary and performance evaluation reports of ANALYZE and EVALUATE respectively in order to provide a complete record of all timings at an intersection The offsets are calculated for all phases with the data provided by OFFSET SIGNAL2000 B 139 Reference OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE lt Optimization Type gt lt Step Size List gt Defaults NONE 15 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter the type of system optim
464. to their default values in some fashion to over ride the old defaults read from the SIGNAL85 file The easiest way to do this is to use the RESET command for the commands whose values are to be set to their 1994 1997 2000 HCM defaults For example if the IDEALSATFLOWS and UTILIZATIONS are to be set to 1994 1997 2000 HCM defaults after a SIGNALS85 file is LOADed issuing the following command will accomplish this DATAFILES gt RESET IDEALS UTILIZ If all of the five commands mentioned above are to be reset to the 1994 1997 2000 HCM defaults the following command makes this even easier DATAFILES RESET 94DEFAULTS 94DEFAULTS is a special group name designed for just this purpose which represents the list of the five commands mentioned above Note also that the group name in the RESET command can be abbreviated in most any way such as simply RESET 94 The user must take care that this is the correct action for the specific analysis being conducted SIGNAL2000 C 208 Reference Use of SERVICEVOLUMES and GOVERCS Commands Another significant change brought about by the new 1994 1997 2000 HCM methods is that saturation flow rates and g C requirements can no longer be specified independently of the specific phasing and timings which are being used at an intersection For example the satflow of a permitted left turn is now explicitly dependent both on the phasing of the opposing through movement and the timing of that phasing With re
465. toEdit have been adjusted similarly for the condition when no data path has been defined A bug has been fixed that could cause a crash when clicking within an output being displayed at a zoomed out scale on some low resolution monitors SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 70 O7NOVO5 Build 28 23AUG06 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS Build 07 11NOV05 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt V7 00 28 Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 releases of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 00 Build 28 These are documented below and use heading lines that begin with V7 00 28 In addition minor program specific changes have been made as summarized here and detailed in the program s own specific list of updates and changes Ver 7 00 Build 28 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses gt V7 00 28 Number of Access Drives Increased From 5 to 10 for SITE Computations The permitted number of driveways which provide access to a development area for SITE computations has been increased from 5 to 10 in all TEAPAC programs allowing greater flexibility in modeling all driveways which may exist or be proposed for a development Along with this change comes a quicker way of entering driveway locations by combining the intersection leg direction N E S W with the node number of the drive su
466. ts 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter a factor which will be used to estimate 24 hour volumes from partial day s counts at the current intersection lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumess is a factor which when multiplied by the entire counted traffic will produce a reasonable estimate of 24 hour traffic volumes or average daily traffic ADT It can be any decimal number from 0 0 to 100 0 Its default value is 0 0 Notes The single factor entered on the ADTFACTOR command is used in Usage Level 2 of WARRANTS to multiply the total counted volume of each movement to estimate the 24 hour volume of each movement This 24 Hour Volume Estimates report is produced at the end of the ANALYZE outputs when the default ANALYZE command is used Itis not produced if a specific time range is selected for the ANALYZE command The REPORTS command can also be used to produce the 24 Hour report using the ADT option in the list of reports When the ADTFACTOR is zero the default value the 24 Hour Volume Estimates report is omitted under all conditions SIGNAL2000 B 74 Reference ANALYZE ANALYZE ANALYZE Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE DESIGN The purpose of this command is to perform a capacity analysis of a specified phasing and timings for the current intersection or all intersections It has no parameters Notes Before this command can be properly execut
467. tual data lines being transferred can be obtained by first setting the ECHO parameter to YES This is a convenient way to visualize what is happening during LOADs and SAVEs As such it is also a powerful tool for debugging complicated batch control file sequences ECHO can also be used to view some other file data transfer functions such as outputting volumes to files from TURNS and SITE for use by SIGNAL2000 etc SIGNAL2000 B 97 Reference ENDGAIN ENDGAIN ENDGAIN 12 lt End Gain Time gt Defaults 12 2 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the length of time that vehicles effectively extend the green period into the yellow and all red period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt End Gain Time gt is the number of seconds during the yellow and all red period which is effectively used as green time and can be any number from 0 0 to 30 0 Its default value is 2 0 Notes STARTUPLOST time is used in conjunction with ENDGAIN time to calculate the lost time that an individual movement experiences during its green phase s The formula used from the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual is tt l l2 where l is the startup lost time l2 is the ending lost time and l2 Y e where e is the endgain time If the default values of STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN both are 2 seconds are used for a particular movement the lost time formula simplifies to tt Y Since Y values yellow
468. turn phases Use OVERLAPS OVERLAPS to designate right turn overlaps e Special abbreviation characters A D can be used in place of codes 1 8 as shortcuts to represent common lists of phasing possibilities as noted below A represents codes 1 8 B represents codes 1 6 C represents codes 4 6 D represents codes 7 8 Thus a list of 14 15 16 could be entered as a single code 1C and a list of 11 21 31 41 51 61 could be entered as simply B1 Use DIAGRAMS to view all the SEQUENCES listed for a given abbreviation made here The use of SEQUENCES 1 through 9 requires use of PHASEMOVEMENTS to identify the movements for each phase in which case DESIGN and EXPORT cannot be used e SORT and TIMINGS re arrange the lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt so that the best or selected sequence code respectively is first thus appearing as the lt Sequence Code gt entry After TIMINGS this makes the selected sequence code which goes with the phase timings available for a subsequent ANALY ZE type functions as well as for programs such as PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM which require a single phasing and set of timings SIGNAL2000 B 171 Reference SERVICEVOLUMES SERVICEVOLUMES SERVICEVOLUMES Defaults Menus Groups RESULTS ANALYZE The purpose of this command is to compute the saturation flow rate previously called service volumes for each movement for the current intersection or all intersections It has no parameters
469. uced with each of the 13 TEAPAC2004 Version 6 programs Visual TEAPAC provides an unmatched experience of fully integrated visual traffic engineering and traffic planning software Read on for the details gt Visual TEAPAC Graphical Input and Display of Analysis Network All TEAPAC programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR now provide a drag and drop user interface as a way to create and or display the study network in the main window of the program The network can be drawn schematically or to precise scale with the aid of an underlying grid or a bitmap can be displayed under the network to make drawing easy and or display of the network more meaningful The bitmap file can be an aerial photograph a street map as built drawings or any other such display which would be helpful and this bitmap is exported to third party program such as CORSIM and TRANSYT as permitted Streets can be drawn by clicking on the grid or scaled bitmap and dragging across the extent of the street section creating analysis intersections where the new street segment crosses existing street segments The Setup button can be used to identify the bitmap scale the bitmap and establish an axis origin either before the network is drawn or afterwards for pre existing data files Special display adjustment modes allow quick re orientation to new bitmaps such as when using higher resolution bitmaps for a zoomed in study area versus a regional area bitmap Dummy nodes are automati
470. ucture and Organization Conventions Review of TEAPAC Procedures Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Description of Example Problem Data Entry Data Review Analysis Evaluation Exiting the Program Additional Concerns Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES Input Requirements Analysis Procedures Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS RESULTS Dialogs PARAMETERS Dialogs Common TEAPAC Dialogs Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Multi Leg Intersections Dual Optional Turn Lane Analysis Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs Analysis Period and the Use of PEAKHOURFACTORS Using ACTUATIONS and MINIMUMS Field Calibration of Adjusted SATURATIONFLOWS with FACTORS Proper Use of RIGHTTURNONREDS In order to illustrate the features and basic procedures of SIGNAL2000 Chapter 2 presents a hands on example problem with detailed step by step instructions on how to execute a simple analysis using the SIGNAL2000 program This chapter provides an opportunity to use the SIGNAL2000 program and observe the results Chapter 3 discusses the analysis techniques and procedures which should be used with the SIGNAL2000 program as illustrated by the example presented in the previous chapter After reading this section it should be possible to perform simple analyses using the SIGNAL2000 program SIGNAL2000 3 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Chapter 4 provides a summary of each of the action and entry dialogs used by the SIGNAL2000 program organized by functi
471. ues for Optimization A change in the iterative DESIGN optimization now makes the definition of Protected Permitted adjacency during optimization more consistent with the proper definition which is used when performing a capacity analysis This results in a more consistent comparison between the DESIGN result and a capacity analysis when this situation controls the DESIGN This was particularly apparent in situation where an optimum overlap time was zero which now makes the phases adjacent during optimization where it wasn t considered adjacent before gt View Network Menu Added to Display Connected Intersection Network SIGNAL2000 H 336 Reference This new menu selection permits viewing the interconnections between intersections which have been defined by the multi intersection inputs to the program particularly in relation to entries which have been made in the NETWORK dialogs The graphical display shows all of the relationships between intersections which have been established in a proportional diagram layout that can be scrolled across the entire network area If desired a bitmap of an aerial photograph or map of the study area can be defined as a background for this display to show the study network in relation to the information reflected by that background The bitmap should be stored in the same folder as the associated data file and should have the same name as the data file but with a BMP extension gt Optimized Phasing is
472. ummary note that the intersection delay is 40 4 seconds higher than before but the critical movements operate with a balanced amount of delay which is about 45 to 47 seconds a better solution than previously This illustrates the importance of keeping our focus on critical movement delay not intersection delay It may be of interest to know how well the intersection will operate if timed best with the existing phasing This is easily done by selecting the optimum TIMINGS already DESIGNed for the existing phasing and producing a capacity analysis This is done with the following commands Results TIMINGS 11 Results ANALYZE Review the Capacity Analysis Summary Note that the intersection delay has gone down to 17 5 seconds since the two phase signal has less lost time but that the critical movements delay is up SIGNAL2000 22 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE to about 50 seconds This is clearly better than the original timings but the critical movements are not as good as when controlled under the best possible phasing Evaluation One powerful aspect of TEAPAC software is the capability to quickly test multiple scenarios or conditions in an interactive environment To test the impact on the intersection due to the increase in traffic generated by the new shopping center use the new optimum timings which are currently in the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES commands for the existing phasing with the new volumes Basic
473. urrent intersection lt Design Hour Volume gt is the demand volume for the analysis period in vehicles per hour for the movement and can be any integer from 0 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes A volume of 0 indicates the movement is prohibited at the intersection allowed movements with no measured activity should show at least 1 vehicle per hour Entered demand VOLUMES will be adjusted by the entered PEAKHOURFACTORS as a means of estimating the peak flow rate during the analysis period When the analysis period is the default of 15 minutes 0 25 hours this means that an entered volume divided by the peak hour factor will estimate the flow rate during the peak 15 minute analysis period for each movement If 15 minute data is available directly e g from count data using this 15 minute data the 15 minute count times 4 with peak hour factors of 1 00 is preferred over making the approximation using a peak hour factor In particular if different peak hour factor data is entered for each individual movement the estimate will likely produce a ficticious set of analysis flow rates which may represent flow conditions which never occur since all the movements may not peak at the same time e See the discussion in Appendix C Calculation of Volumes for a complete discussion of how VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS and PEAKHOURFACTORS are used to generate analysis volumes for various types of analyses within TEAPAC SIGNAL2
474. using the SIGNAL2000 program as well as to provide some experience using them and observing the program s responses an example problem has been developed which can be analyzed with the SIGNAL2000 program Consider the following basic traffic problem Chapter 2 Topics Chapter 2 Introduction Description of Example Problem Data Entry Data Review Analysis Evaluation Exiting the Program Additional Concerns Description of Example Problem A small shopping center is to be constructed near an existing intersection You are to analyze the existing P M peak hour conditions and determine the existing intersection and critical movement delay as well as the best possible delay which could be achieved by adjusting the timings and or the phasing Then analyze the intersection to determine the impact on intersection and critical movement delay of the additional traffic generated by the shopping center Assume an existing fifty fifty split of a 120 second cycle two phase operation with 4 second yellow times Existing turning movement counts have been taken for the P M peak hour conditions at the intersection The existing volumes and available lane widths are shown in Table 2 1 The volumes added by the shopping center are indicated by the values appearing after the plus signs in Table 2 1 Figure 2 1 shows the intersection lane configuration with existing movement volumes Assume each lane is 12 feet wide SIGNAL2000
475. usted saturation flow rate for use in the v c and delay calculations as well as queues As such caution should be used in applying lane utilization factors substantially less than 1 00 since in these cases the analysis is only valid for the heaviest traveled lane not the entire lane group and this aspect of the analysis may be overlooked by those looking at the analysis summary SIGNAL2000 B 188 Reference VEHICLECOUNTS VEHICLECOUNTS VEHICLECOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Defaults none zeros Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the count of vehicles for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection lt Movement or Time gt is the movement number or the beginning time of the time interval for the counts to be entered and can be any of the following 1 12 Movement number or 0 2400 Beginning time This parameter has no default value and must be entered each time the VEHICLECOUNTS command is used lt List of Counts gt is the list of counted vehicles for the specified movement number or time interval and can be any number from 999 to 9999 Its default value is 0 e g it must be entered Notes Movement numbers begin with the north leg right turn and proceed clockwise around the intersection If a movement number is given as the first parameter the counts should be for that movement only one for each interval in each of the per
476. v c of the upstream intersection SIGNAL2000 D 216 Reference Movement Parameters These are the parameters which are applied individually to each of the 12 movements They include movement labels traffic demand volumes vehicles per hour lane group width feet number of lanes in each lane group and factors indicating the lane utilization for each movement Widths and lanes given for turning movements indicate exclusive turning lanes widths for through directions are used by straight vehicles as well as turning vehicles without exclusive tuning lanes Each movement s group type indicates any special lane group type such as dual optional turn lanes and free flow lanes Utilization values of 0 0 indicate that the HCM default values will be used Also listed are truck percentages peak hour factors arrival types and actuated condition of each possible movement Arrival types are usually the types 1 6 but may also represent the HCM defined PVG or RP values Required clearance intervals and minimum timings for green indications are listed as well as startup lost times and end gain times all in seconds The length of storage available for queued vehicles is listed in feet and the initial number of queued vehicles at the start of the analysis period is listed The ideal saturation flows are listed by movement as are the adjustment factors used for calibrating the satflow delay and stops calculations The calculated saturation flow rate in vphg is
477. ve the upstream external or bend node to correctly orient the leg visually Data Review Once data has been entered it should be checked for accuracy and correctness In the Visual Mode or when using the ASK command for input this process is direct and immediate since all of the current values of the entered commands are continuously displayed The View Summary menu is also a quick way to see all current data entries In the Manual Mode the TEAPAC commands DATA and SUMMARISE are used for data review These commands display the current parameter values contained in the program If no data has been entered for a command its current values will be the default RESET values If incorrect data is detected it may be corrected using either of the data entry techniques described above In the Manual Mode the ASK command is frequently a good way to check data integrity since it displays all values and also allows immediate re entry in the dialog box display if an error is found Analysis The third step in program execution is to perform an analysis using the current parameter values When satisfied with the accuracy of the program data it is possible to use one or more of the commands in the Results Menu RESULTS commands to perform an analysis All TEAPAC programs have one or more RESULTS commands which cause the program to act on the current data These commands typically produce a report which displays the results of the analysis Since mor
478. ved a directive is placed at the end of the file which remembers the current intersection and current distribution type so that these positions can be reset when the file is subsequently re opened by either the same program or any other TEAPAC program gt T2004v6 Error Message Help Leaves Dialogs Open so Errant Entries Can Be Seen When Help for an error or warning message is displayed the dialog entry which caused the error or warning is now left open so the entered values can be inspected in relation to the help advise given Also a note is provided in the message to use the Refresh button to see the dialog with the actual current values which are likely to not reflect the entry attempted which caused the error or warning gt T2004v6 Errors Contain Cancel Button to Abort File Open or Control File SIGNAL2000 H 325 Reference When errors or warnings are issued as a result of reading a data file a Cancel button is now provided which allows the user to abort continued attempts to read the file This is now a convenient way to halt attempted processing of a file which is clearly not what was intended or for power users a way to kill a control file which has gone off the deep end gt T2004v6 OUTPUT Dialog Contains Entries for All Programs The OUTPUT dialog is a common dialog name which has had different content for most TEAPAC programs This conflict and impediment for combining all the TEAPAC data into a single file for TEAPAC
479. veh 27 141 25 0 128 15 0 107 48 45 116 56 708 Fuel gal Teg 43 08 O20 93 8 OSS OO Sats bese An 34 did 2065 CO Em kg 0 8 4 20 O27 020 B80 O24 OL 0 324d Lledo 123 353 fed 20 85 Queue l veh 4 12 4 0 10 2 0 9 7 6 9 8 12 Queue 1 ft 95 297 92 0 243 33 O 218 186 152 215 197 297 SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Evaluation of Intersection Performance APPR TOTALS Int Param Units N Approach E Approach S Approach W Approach Total AdjVol vph 944 611 705 983 3243 Svc Lvl LOS C C Cc e C Deg Sat v c 0 59 0 71 0 65 0 63 0 64 HCM Del s v 24 3 29 9 28 0 26 3 26 8 Tot Del min 95 76 82 108 361 Stops veh 193 143 155 217 708 Fuel gal 6 1 4 3 4 7 6 5 21 6L CO Em kg Deal 4 2 4 6 6 3 20 8L SIGNAL2000 D 260 Reference Queue 1 veh 12 10 9 9 T2 Queue 1 ft 297 243 218 215 297 SIGNAL2000 D 261 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Queuemodel Calculations The Queuemodel Calculations generated by the QUEUECALCS command is a report designed to compute and provide side by side comparison of eight different queue models for each lane group including the queue model documented in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The intent of this report is to allow users to compare the new HCM2000 queue model to other queue models which have been used historically in order to gain confidence in its use Worksheets presented in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual may be produced optionally by specifying OUTPUT FULL as described previously The specific elements w
480. vel of service is documented as the last item in the report The column heading for this information shows the range and increment of cycles tested The report is terminated with a list of the design criteria which were used in the DESIGN This includes the target delay seconds the maximum delay the delay increment the target v c percent the maximum v c and the v c increment The following is an example of the Optimized Phasings Ranked by Crit Delay text only report using the SIGNAL2000 program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 D 224 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Optimized Phasings Ranked by Crit Delay Intersection 1 Lincoln amp Main Seq Crit Crit Req d Best No of Min Succ Cycles RENER LOS Targ G C Y C Cycle Phases Cycle 60 120 30 61 35 0 900 60 4 27 60 120 41 C 35 0 904 60 3 27 60 120 51 35 0 904 60 4 27 60 120 31 C 35 0 923 60 3 27 60 90 81 C 35 0 924 60 4 27 60 60 11 C 35 0 947 60 2 18 60 90 66 C 35 0 954 60 6 36 60 60 68 C 35 0 954 60 6 36 60 60 44 C 35 0 955 60 4 36 60 60 47 C 35 0 955 60 4 36 60 60 43 C 35 0 955 60 4 36 60 60 45 C 35 0 955 60 5 36 60 60 54 C 35 02955 60 z 36 60 60 63 C 33 0 955 60 5 36 60 60 57 C 35 02955 60 5 36 60
481. version of the report SIGNAL2000 D 238 Reference contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 HCM Ped Bike LT Effects Worksheet Input Calculation N E S W Effective ped green time gp 14 2 12 20 14 2 T20 Conflicting ped volume Vped 10 0 10 0 Ped flow rate Vpedg 42 282 000 42 282 000 Avg ped occupancy OCCpedg 021 000 021 000 Opposing queue clear time gq 7 534 000 9 964 000 Opposing queue g ratio gq gp s931 000 702 000 Ped occ after queue OCCpedu 016 000 014 000 Opposing flow rate Vo 483 0 611 0 Relevant occupancy OCCr 008 000 006 000 receiving lanes Nrec 2 2 2 2 turning lanes Nturn 1 1 1 1 Adjustment factor ApbT 995 1 000 z996 1 000 Proportion left turns PLT 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 Prop LT in prot phase PLTA eos 1 000 821 1 000 Ped bike adjust factor fLpb 999 1 000 999 1 000 SIGNAL2000 D 239 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet The HCM Ped Bike RT Effects Worksheet is the fifth HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECALCS commands when FULL worksheet OUTPUT is selected This worksheet lists the factors and calculations made for the effect of pedestrians and bicycles on saturation flows involving right turns as described below
482. ves movement 8 the northbound through movement If the default LEVELOFSERVICE entry of 35 seconds of delay LOS C is used this means that if all of the critical movements can be operated at LOS C then the optimum timings will be set such that each critical movement except movement 8 will experience 35 seconds of delay and all remaining time will be allocated to the phase that serves movement 8 This will be reflected in a subsequent capacity analysis showing the intended imbalance in delays among the critical movements all being nominally 35 seconds except the priority movement 8 having less delay The significance here is that the delay of the non priority critical movements can be specifically targeted with all extra time beyond that target going to the priority movements Note that if the target delay is not met then the EXCESS movement s are ignored and all critical movements are allocated time intended to balance the delays of the critical movements at a value worse than the target level of service The effect of defining priority movements can be exaggerated by raising the target delay on the LEVELOFSERVICE command For example even if LOS C can be achieved for the critical movements but the north and south through movements must be further prioritized a higher target can be selected with a LEVEL D entry and the movements can be prioritized with a EXCESS 2 8 entry all followed by DESIGN SORT TIMINGS ANALYZE or just DESIGN 1 In this
483. vice of these two lane groups and or the initial G C estimates are not the same as assumed when using the G C values from the GOVERCS command new FACTORS should be calculated using the new expected level of service G C values and the process should be iterated until all the results are in agreement with the initial assumptions This normally requires at least one additional set of computations Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs A major element in the design of TEAPAC programs is the ability to share both input and output data amongst any TEAPAC programs which can make valid use of the data All TEAPAC application programs except NOSTOP use the same single data file which contains all data entries used by all programs This includes intersection traffic and geometric data network data traffic count data and traffic generator data whether or not this data is specifically germaine to the purpose of the specific program being used at the time This means that all of this data can be shared amongst all TEAPAC programs by simply opening the one data file into the program desired and saving the data as appropriate before moving to another program The easiest way to accomplish this is by using the LinkTo menu which automatically closes the current program and opens the selected program with the same data file In the case where data changes within one program as a result of an analysis and these changes are needed for use in another progra
484. was not possible to perform the View Network function unless all NETWORK distances had been entered This was due to the function s attempt to establish a scale factor between the network distances entered and the potentially arbitrary coordinate system used Now if distances are not entered View Network simply assumes the scale factor is 1 gt Warnings Issued If Too Many Characters Entered or Number Too Large in an Input Field If a user enters more characters in a dialog s input field than the dialog expects or can process a warning is now issued and the entire entry is ignored rather than just ignoring the extra characters This allows for better understanding by the user that the entry may not have been processed correctly The F5 Refresh button should be used in all cases to see the current dialog values after the warning On a similar note if an entry has a numeric value too large for the intended internal variable this condition is also noted with a message rather than allowing the possibility of a more catastrophic reaction by the program at a later point SIGNAL2000 Ver 2 60 O8SEP04 Build 06 22SEP04 gt Summary of TEAPAC2004 Release of SIGNAL2000 After 2 years in development the TEAPAC2004 version of SIGNAL2000 has been released as Ver 2 60 The highlights of the changes since its prior release include the following SIGNAL2000 H 321 Reference Completely seamless one click one file exchange of all input and results with a
485. which have been implemented since your documentation was prepared These addenda should be printed and inserted in Appendix H in the back of the manual for future off line reference The version number of the TEAPAC Interface used in the program is also displayed with the Help About menu Input Modes The Main Menu of the Visual Mode is the first display This is where all program actions can be initiated including data entry and computations Each line of a menu uses a command keyword to describe what that menu line selection will allow the user to accomplish For sub menus a group name is used to label the primary menu line Menu selections can be made with the mouse or with the underlined Alt keys and the Enter key if required When this is done a dialog box is displayed which allows entry or editing of current data values or execution of action dialogs with the Execute button Dialog boxes can be terminated with the OK button the Close button or the ESCape key The Main Menu can be used to select the Tabular View as an alternate input environment using the View menu In Tabular View displays each line of the display is preceded by a command keyword which describes the contents of the command line The bottom line of the dialog provides HELP on how to use this command If this command is an action command it requires use of the Execute button to perform the action The Help button can be used to access context sensitive on scre
486. word NORTH EAST SOUTH or WEST It has no default value it must be entered lt Descr gt is a set of words which describe what type of traffic is defined by this distribution type usually including whether it is inbound or outbound traffic and which point of the compass or primary travel route the external point of the trips are destined and can be any 30 alphabetic or numeric characters Its default value is 30 blanks Notes The PATHDISTRIBUTION command must first be used to define the current distribution type before the PATHASSIGNMENT command can be used to describe travel paths for the current distribution type All PATHDISTRIBUTIONS must be defined before the FINDPATHS command can be used to assist in the definition of PATHASSIGNMENTS lt Distribution Type gt must not exceed the limit previously established by the SITESIZE command and lt Node gt must be an intersection included in the current NODELIST command e In a Visual Mode dialog that includes PATHDISTRIBUTION or distribution type data the button button Page Up key and Page Down key can be used to in effect dynamically issue a PATHDISTRIBUTION command for the next SIGNAL2000 B 148 Reference PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHDISTRIBUTION and previous type numbers If data values are changed on a screen display the Page keys should not be used before the data is first entered with the TAB key SIGNAL2000 B 149 Reference PEAKHOURFACTOR
487. xist for each of the four right turns Leadlag The leadlag entries identifies whether the phasing for the sequence code appears in its normal order LEAD or NONE or is reversed LAG Tabulated Parameters Additional parameters for the analysis are displayed in tabular format with each column of the table representing the twelve movements of the intersection upper portion of table and the four approaches of the intersection lower portion of table Heavy Vehicles The percentage of trucks and through buses for each movement Peak Hour Factor The peak hour factor for each movement of the intersection Pretimed or Actuated A P or A indicating whether a movement is Pretimed or part of an Actuated phase module If all entries are P every movement is analyzed as a fixed time lane group If entries for all non zero lane groups are A every movement is analyzed as a full actuated lane group Otherwise a semi actuated analysis is done Startup Lost Time The amount of time at the start of a phase which is effectively lost due to startup delays for each movement Extension of Effective Green The amount of time at the end of a phase by which vehicles effectively extend the green into the clearance time for each movement Arrival Type A value from 1 to 6 quantifying the quality of progression of each movement 6 indicating nearly perfect progression Pedestrian Volume The volume of pedestrians interfering with right turns on each app
488. y VOLUMES gt P17 55071 1254 K WIDTHS 12 0 24 0 12 0 v LANES Ls 2 1 Il 60 0 0 20 ZIN Ze 425 24 0 2 220 12 0 1 65 12 0 1 North 450 24 0 2 215 120 oy N l l l I 200 370 65 Phasing SEQUENCE 44 12 0 24 0 0 0 PERMSV Y N Y N 1 2 0 OVERLP Y Y Y Y i LEADLAG LD LD N E S W RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT Heavy veh HV 20 20 20 20 207 2500 20 20 20 2 0 2 0 2 0 Pk hr fact PHF 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Pretimed or Act P P P E P P E P iP E P E Strtup lost 11 2 30 20 20 2 20 2 30 2 0 2 30 2 0 20 2 203 lt 2 30 2 0 Ext eff grn e 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 Arrival typ AT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Ped vol vped 10 0 10 0 Bike vol vbic 0 0 0 0 Parking locatns NO NO NO NO Park mnvrs Nm 0 0 0 0 Bus stops NB 0 0 0 0 Grade G 0 0 0 0 Sq 44 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 KK ats a 4 4 KKK ZIN gt lt gt lt CARE v s a KKKK vV North lt lt gt gt A ok v C 60 G Se 14 2 G 12 3 G 12 0 G 0 0 G 0 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 4 0 Y R 0 0 Y R 0 0 SIGNAL2000 D 231 Reference SIGNAL2000 TEAPAC HCM Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet The HCM Volume Adjust amp Satflow Worksheet is the second HCM worksheet produced by the ANALYZE EVALUATE or QUEUECA
489. y and ease with which coordinate values can be derived and used gt New Features for Export Auto Host Definition and Launching The Options Setup dialog now allows the name of the Host executable file to be added at the end of the Host path in the event that this executable name is different than used by default The dialog also displays the 64 char limit for path file names which must be observed When the AUTO option of Export is executed the program will now first look for the designated Host program either the default or specified name and issue a message if it is not found cancelling the Export gt TEAPAC2000 Version 5 02 Generic Interface Fine Tuning In the first release of the TEAPAC2000 Ver 5 Interface users may have experienced difficulty using the Advanced Datafiles LOAD and SAVE functions from the Tabular View These functions have been updated to work properly from the Tabular View Error messages generated from the Manual Mode data files or control files will list the specific line of input which generated the error with the offending item highlighted in red If the information came from a file the file number and line number of the error is also listed The File New function has been updated to make sure that previous NETWORK entries are set back to default values not just hidden This assures that the old values do not unexpectedly appear later when an incomplete NETWORK entry is made SIGNAL2000 H 340 Reference
490. y has been encountered with a value greater than 1 0 normally when a SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 data file has been loaded Due to the new technique used to define unbalanced lane utilization in the 1997 amp 2000 HCMs these values have been automatically inverted 1 x to reflect the new definition This message warns the user of this automatic conversion Action If the UTILIZATION values gt 1 0 are in fact from an old SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 file no action should be required In any case the user should simply make sure that this is the case and verify that the inverted results are appropriate S2K22 ERROR Phasing not appropriate for geometry according to HCM requirements This error indicates that a SEQUENCE code has been selected which is not allowed by the methods of the 2000 HCM This is typically when a type 4 5 or 6 phasing has been selected but an exclusive left turn lane does not exist for both left turns served by the protected phasing If SEQUENCE code 0 has been selected other requirements may also not be met For example movements may not start up more than once during the cycle length negative movement numbers for permitted left turn operation may not be used unless a protected phase has also been defined and negative movement numbers may only be used for left turns Action Check that an exclusive left turn lane exists for every approach served by a SEQUENCE type 4 5 or 6 For SIGNAL2000 E 276 Reference SEQUENCE code 0

SIGNAL2000 Tutorial/Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents